SPC42xx/43xx/52xx/53xx/63xx - Installation

SPC42xx/43xx/52xx/53xx/63xx
Installation & Configuration
Manual
3.6
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Vanderbilt
Copyright
Copyright
Technical specifications and availability subject to change without notice.
© Copyright Vanderbilt
We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject thereof. By acceptance of
the document the recipient acknowledges these rights and undertakes not to
publish the document nor the subject thereof in full or in part, nor to make them
available to any third party without our prior express written authorization, nor to
use it for any purpose other than for which it was delivered to him.
Edition: 01.10.2015
Document ID: A6V10276959
2
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Table of contents
1
Meaning of symbols ......................................................................................... 11
2
Security ............................................................................................................. 12
2.1
Target group ....................................................................................................... 12
2.2
General safety instructions ................................................................................. 12
2.2.1
General information ............................................................................ 12
2.2.2
Transport ............................................................................................. 12
2.2.3
Setup ................................................................................................... 13
2.2.4
Operation ............................................................................................ 13
2.2.5
Service and maintenance ................................................................... 13
2.3
Meaning of written warning notices .................................................................... 14
2.4
Meaning of hazard symbols ............................................................................... 14
3
Directives and standards ................................................................................. 15
3.1
EU directives ...................................................................................................... 15
3.1.1
Overview of Conformity to EN50131 Standard ................................... 15
3.1.2
Compliance with EN50131 Approvals ................................................ 18
3.1.3
Compliance with EN 50136-1:2012 and EN 50136-2:2014 ................ 21
3.1.4
Compliance with INCERT Approvals .................................................. 21
3.1.5
PD 6662:2010 Conformance Guidelines ............................................ 23
3.1.5.1
Product scope ..................................................................................... 23
3.1.5.2
Standards overview ............................................................................ 23
3.1.5.3
Methods for the completion of setting and unsetting .......................... 24
3.1.5.4
Configuration requirements for PD 6662:2010 conformance ............. 26
3.1.5.5
Additional commissioning requirements for PD 6662:2010
conformance ....................................................................................... 28
3.1.5.6
Additional information ......................................................................... 28
3.1.6
Compliance with VDS Approvals ........................................................ 28
3.1.7
Compliance with NF Approvals ........................................................... 29
4
Technical Data .................................................................................................. 31
4.1
SPC4000 ............................................................................................................ 31
4.2
SPC5000 ............................................................................................................ 32
4.3
SPC6000 ............................................................................................................ 35
5
Introduction....................................................................................................... 38
6
Mounting system equipment........................................................................... 39
6.1
Mounting a G2 housing ...................................................................................... 39
6.2
Mounting a G3 housing ...................................................................................... 40
6.3
6.2.1
Mounting a Back Tamper Kit .............................................................. 42
6.2.2
Battery installation for EN50131 compliance ...................................... 46
Mounting a G5 housing ...................................................................................... 47
6.3.1
Tamper protection ............................................................................... 49
6.3.2
Mounting the housing with tamper protection ..................................... 49
6.3.2.1
Tamper operation ................................................................................ 50
6.3.3
Installing the batteries ......................................................................... 52
3
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
6.4
Mounting a keypad ............................................................................................. 53
6.5
Mounting an expander ........................................................................................ 53
7
Smart PSU ......................................................................................................... 54
7.1
SPCP355 Smart PSU ......................................................................................... 54
7.1.1
Supervised Outputs............................................................................. 56
7.1.2
Batteries .............................................................................................. 57
7.1.2.1
Installing Batteries ............................................................................... 57
7.1.2.2
Testing Battery Voltage ....................................................................... 59
7.1.2.3
Deep Discharge Protection ................................................................. 59
7.1.2.4
Battery Stand-By Times ...................................................................... 59
7.1.3
Wiring the X-BUS Interface ................................................................. 59
7.1.3.1
Wiring the Inputs ................................................................................. 60
7.1.3.2
Wiring the Outputs .............................................................................. 61
7.1.4
PSU LED Status .................................................................................. 62
7.1.5
System Recovery ................................................................................ 62
8
Controller hardware ......................................................................................... 64
8.1
Controller Hardware 42xx\43xx\53xx\63xx ......................................................... 64
8.2
Controller Hardware SPC5350 and 6350 ........................................................... 66
9
Door Expander .................................................................................................. 69
10
Wiring the system ............................................................................................. 70
10.1
Wiring the X-BUS interface ................................................................................ 70
10.1.1
Loop configuration............................................................................... 71
10.1.2
Spur configuration ............................................................................... 72
10.1.3
Star and multi-drop configuration ........................................................ 73
10.1.3.1 Examples of correct wiring .................................................................. 76
10.1.3.2 Examples of incorrect wiring ............................................................... 77
10.1.4
Shielding ............................................................................................. 78
10.1.5
Cable Map ........................................................................................... 79
10.2
Wiring of branch expander ................................................................................. 79
10.3
Wiring the system ground ................................................................................... 80
10.4
Wiring the relay output........................................................................................ 80
10.5
Wiring the zone inputs ........................................................................................ 81
10.6
Wiring an external SAB bell ................................................................................ 84
10.7
Wiring an internal sounder ................................................................................. 85
10.8
Wiring Glassbreak .............................................................................................. 85
10.9
Installing plug-in modules ................................................................................... 85
11
Powering up the SPC controller ..................................................................... 87
11.1
Powering from battery only ................................................................................. 87
12
Keypad user interface ...................................................................................... 88
12.1
SPCK420/421 ..................................................................................................... 88
12.2
12.1.1
Introduction ......................................................................................... 88
12.1.2
Using the LCD keypad interface ......................................................... 90
12.1.3
Data entry on the LCD keypad ............................................................ 92
SPCK620/623 ..................................................................................................... 93
12.2.1
Introduction ......................................................................................... 93
4
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
12.2.2
LED description ................................................................................... 96
12.2.3
Viewing mode description ................................................................... 97
12.2.4
Function keys in idle state................................................................... 97
13
Software support tools .................................................................................... 99
14
Starting the system ........................................................................................ 100
14.1
Engineer modes ............................................................................................... 100
14.1.1
14.2
Engineer PINs ................................................................................... 100
Programming tools ........................................................................................... 101
14.2.1
Fast Programmer .............................................................................. 101
14.3
Configuring start-up settings ............................................................................ 101
14.4
Creating system users...................................................................................... 103
14.5
Programming the portable ACE ....................................................................... 103
14.6
Configuring wireless fob devices ...................................................................... 104
14.6.1
Clearing alerts using the fob ............................................................. 105
15
Soft Engineer programming via the keypad ................................................ 107
16
Engineer programming via the keypad ........................................................ 108
16.1
System Status .................................................................................................. 108
16.2
Options ............................................................................................................. 109
16.3
Timers............................................................................................................... 112
16.4
Areas ................................................................................................................ 114
16.5
Area Groups ..................................................................................................... 115
16.6
X-BUS............................................................................................................... 116
16.6.1
X-BUS Addressing ............................................................................ 116
16.6.2
XBUS Refresh ................................................................................... 116
16.6.3
Reconfigure ....................................................................................... 117
16.6.4
Keypads/Expanders/Door Controllers .............................................. 118
16.6.4.1 Locate ............................................................................................... 118
16.6.4.2 Monitor .............................................................................................. 118
16.6.4.3 Edit Keypads ..................................................................................... 119
16.6.4.4 Edit Expanders .................................................................................. 121
16.6.4.5 Edit Door Controllers ......................................................................... 125
16.7
16.6.5
Addressing Mode .............................................................................. 126
16.6.6
XBUS Type ....................................................................................... 127
16.6.7
Bus Retries ....................................................................................... 127
16.6.8
Comms Timer ................................................................................... 127
Wireless ............................................................................................................ 128
16.7.1
Add Sensors ..................................................................................... 128
16.7.2
Edit Sensors (Zone Assignment) ...................................................... 129
16.7.3
Add WPA........................................................................................... 129
16.7.4
Edit WPA ........................................................................................... 130
16.8
Zones ................................................................................................................ 130
16.9
Doors ................................................................................................................ 131
16.9.1
16.10
Doors................................................................................................. 131
Outputs ............................................................................................................. 134
16.10.1 Outputs types and output ports ......................................................... 135
5
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16.11
Communication ................................................................................................. 138
16.11.1 Serial Ports ........................................................................................ 138
16.11.2 Ethernet Ports ................................................................................... 138
16.11.3 Modems ............................................................................................ 139
16.11.3.1 Monitoring the transmission network interface ................................. 139
16.11.3.2 Configuring Modems ......................................................................... 140
16.11.4 Central Station .................................................................................. 141
16.11.4.1 Add .................................................................................................... 141
16.11.4.2 Edit .................................................................................................... 141
16.11.4.3 Delete ................................................................................................ 142
16.11.4.4 Make Test Call .................................................................................. 142
16.11.5 Remote Maintenance ........................................................................ 142
16.12
Test ................................................................................................................... 143
16.12.1 Bell Test ............................................................................................ 143
16.12.2 Walk Test .......................................................................................... 143
16.12.3 Zone Monitor ..................................................................................... 143
16.12.4 Output Test ....................................................................................... 144
16.12.5 Soak Test .......................................................................................... 145
16.12.6 Audible Options ................................................................................. 145
16.12.7 Visual Indicators ................................................................................ 145
16.12.8 WPA Test .......................................................................................... 146
16.12.9 Seismic Test...................................................................................... 146
16.13
Utilities .............................................................................................................. 146
16.14
Isolate ............................................................................................................... 147
16.15
Event Log ......................................................................................................... 147
16.16
Access Log ....................................................................................................... 148
16.17
Alarm Log ......................................................................................................... 148
16.18
Change Engineer Pin ....................................................................................... 148
16.19
Users ................................................................................................................ 148
16.19.1 Add .................................................................................................... 149
16.19.2 Edit .................................................................................................... 149
16.19.2.1 Access Control .................................................................................. 149
16.19.3 Delete ................................................................................................ 151
16.20
User Profiles ..................................................................................................... 152
16.20.1 Add .................................................................................................... 152
16.20.2 Edit .................................................................................................... 152
16.20.3 Delete ................................................................................................ 152
16.21
SMS .................................................................................................................. 153
16.21.1 Add .................................................................................................... 153
16.21.2 Edit .................................................................................................... 154
16.21.3 Delete ................................................................................................ 154
16.22
X-10 .................................................................................................................. 154
16.23
Set Date/Time................................................................................................... 155
16.24
Installer Text ..................................................................................................... 155
16.25
Door Control ..................................................................................................... 155
16.26
SPC Connect .................................................................................................... 156
6
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser ...................................................... 157
17.1
System Information .......................................................................................... 157
17.2
Ethernet interface ............................................................................................. 157
17.3
Connecting to the panel via USB ..................................................................... 159
17.4
Logging into the browser .................................................................................. 161
17.5
SPC Home........................................................................................................ 162
17.6
17.5.1
System Summary.............................................................................. 162
17.5.2
Alarms Overview ............................................................................... 163
17.5.3
Viewing Video ................................................................................... 163
Panel status ...................................................................................................... 165
17.6.1
Status ................................................................................................ 165
17.6.2
X-Bus Status ..................................................................................... 165
17.6.2.1 Expander Status ............................................................................... 166
17.6.2.2 PSU status ........................................................................................ 168
17.6.2.3 Keypad Status ................................................................................... 170
17.6.2.4 Door Controller Status ...................................................................... 171
17.6.3
Wireless ............................................................................................ 173
17.6.3.1 Log - Wireless sensor X .................................................................... 174
17.7
17.8
17.6.4
Zones ................................................................................................ 174
17.6.5
Doors................................................................................................. 176
17.6.6
FlexC Status ..................................................................................... 177
17.6.7
System alerts .................................................................................... 178
Logs .................................................................................................................. 179
17.7.1
System Log ....................................................................................... 179
17.7.2
Access Log ....................................................................................... 179
17.7.3
WPA Log ........................................................................................... 180
17.7.4
ALARM LOG ..................................................................................... 180
Users ................................................................................................................ 181
17.8.1
Adding / Editing a User ..................................................................... 181
17.8.1.1 Unknown Devices ............................................................................. 183
17.8.2
Adding / Editing User Profiles ........................................................... 184
17.8.3
Configuring SMS ............................................................................... 188
17.8.4
SMS Commands ............................................................................... 189
17.8.5
Deleting Web Passwords .................................................................. 191
17.8.6
Configuring Engineer Settings .......................................................... 191
17.8.6.1 Changing Engineer PIN and web password ..................................... 192
17.9
Configuration .................................................................................................... 194
17.9.1
Configuring controller inputs & outputs ............................................. 194
17.9.1.1 Editing an input ................................................................................. 194
17.9.1.2 Editing an output ............................................................................... 195
17.9.1.3 Configuring system latch and auto set outputs ................................. 200
17.9.1.4 X10 Config - Settings ........................................................................ 201
17.9.2
X-BUS ............................................................................................... 202
17.9.2.1 Expanders ......................................................................................... 202
17.9.2.2 Keypads ............................................................................................ 207
17.9.2.3 Door Controllers ................................................................................ 212
7
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17.9.2.4 Cable Map ......................................................................................... 213
17.9.2.5 Settings ............................................................................................. 214
17.9.3
Wireless ............................................................................................ 215
17.9.3.1 Log - Wireless sensor X .................................................................... 216
17.9.3.2 Configuring a WPA............................................................................ 216
17.9.3.3 Changing wireless settings ............................................................... 219
17.9.4
Changing system settings ................................................................. 220
17.9.4.1 Options .............................................................................................. 220
17.9.4.2 Timers ............................................................................................... 228
17.9.4.3 Identification ...................................................................................... 231
17.9.4.4 Standards .......................................................................................... 232
17.9.4.5 Clock ................................................................................................. 233
17.9.4.6 Language .......................................................................................... 234
17.9.5
Configuring zones, doors and areas ................................................. 235
17.9.5.1 Editing a zone ................................................................................... 235
17.9.5.2 Adding / Editing an area .................................................................... 236
17.9.5.3 Editing a door .................................................................................... 244
17.9.5.4 Adding an area group ....................................................................... 249
17.9.6
Calendars .......................................................................................... 249
17.9.6.1 Adding / Editing a calendar ............................................................... 250
17.9.6.2 Automatic setting/unsetting of areas ................................................. 252
17.9.6.3 Automatic setting/unsetting of other panel operations ...................... 252
17.9.7
Change own PIN ............................................................................... 253
17.9.8
Configuring advanced settings .......................................................... 253
17.9.8.1 Triggers ............................................................................................. 253
17.9.8.2 Mapping Gates .................................................................................. 254
17.9.8.3 Audio/Video Verification .................................................................... 255
17.9.8.4 Updating SPC Licenses .................................................................... 259
17.10
Configuring Communications ........................................................................... 259
17.10.1 Communications Settings ................................................................. 259
17.10.1.1 Configuring the networking services of the panel ............................. 259
17.10.1.2 Ethernet ............................................................................................. 260
17.10.1.3 Modems ............................................................................................ 261
17.10.1.4 Serial ports ........................................................................................ 270
®
17.10.2 FlexC ............................................................................................... 271
17.10.2.1 Operation Mode ................................................................................ 272
17.10.2.2 Quick Start ATP Configuration for EN50136 ATS ............................ 272
17.10.2.3 Configuring an EN50136-1 ATS or Custom ATS.............................. 274
17.10.2.4 Configuring an SPC Connect ATS .................................................... 283
17.10.2.5 Exporting and Importing an ATS ....................................................... 283
17.10.2.6 Configuring Event Profiles ................................................................ 284
17.10.2.7 Configuring Command Profiles ......................................................... 288
17.10.3 Reporting ........................................................................................... 290
17.10.3.1 Alarm Reporting Centres (ARCs) ...................................................... 290
17.10.3.2 EDP Setup ........................................................................................ 293
17.10.4 PC Tools ........................................................................................... 300
8
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17.10.4.1 SPC Pro / SPC Safe ......................................................................... 300
17.10.4.2 SPC Manager ................................................................................... 301
17.10.4.3 Remote Maintenance ........................................................................ 302
17.11
File Operations ................................................................................................. 302
17.11.1 File Upgrade Operations ................................................................... 303
17.11.1.1 Upgrading Firmware ......................................................................... 303
17.11.1.2 Upgrading Languages....................................................................... 306
17.11.2 File Manager Operations .................................................................. 308
17.12
Using the Fast Programmer ............................................................................. 309
17.12.1 Connecting the Fast Programmer to the Controller .......................... 310
17.12.2 Installing the Fast Programmer on a PC ........................................... 310
17.12.3 Fast Programmer File Operations .................................................... 311
17.12.3.1 Accessing the Fast Programmer using the Keypad ......................... 311
17.12.3.2 Accessing the Fast Programmer using the Browser ........................ 311
18
Accessing web server remotely ................................................................... 313
18.1
PSTN connection ............................................................................................. 313
18.2
GSM connection ............................................................................................... 315
19
Intruder alarm functionality ........................................................................... 318
19.1
Financial mode operation ................................................................................. 318
19.2
Commercial mode operation ............................................................................ 318
19.3
Domestic mode operation ................................................................................ 319
19.4
Full and local alarms ........................................................................................ 319
20
System examples and scenarios .................................................................. 320
20.1
When to use a common area ........................................................................... 320
21
Seismic Sensors ............................................................................................. 322
21.1
Seismic Sensor Testing .................................................................................... 323
21.1.1
Manual and Automatic Test Process ................................................ 323
21.1.2
Automatically Testing Sensors ......................................................... 324
21.1.3
Manually Testing Sensors................................................................. 325
22
Blocking Lock Operation ............................................................................... 326
22.1
Blocking Lock ................................................................................................... 326
22.2
Authorized Setting of the Blocking Lock ........................................................... 327
22.3
Locking Element ............................................................................................... 328
23
Appendix ......................................................................................................... 330
23.1
Network cable connections .............................................................................. 330
23.2
Controller status LEDs ..................................................................................... 330
23.3
Powering expanders from the auxiliary power terminals ................................. 331
23.4
Calculating the battery power requirements..................................................... 332
23.5
Domestic, Commercial and Financial mode default settings ........................... 334
23.6
Wiring of the X10 interface ............................................................................... 335
23.7
SIA Codes ........................................................................................................ 335
23.8
CID Codes ........................................................................................................ 340
23.9
Overview of keypad types ................................................................................ 341
23.10
User PIN combinations ..................................................................................... 342
23.11
Duress PINs ..................................................................................................... 343
9
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23.12
Automatic inhibits ............................................................................................. 343
23.12.1 Zones ................................................................................................ 343
23.12.2 Access PINs ...................................................................................... 343
23.12.3 Engineer Access ............................................................................... 343
23.12.4 Keypad User Logoff .......................................................................... 343
23.13
Wiring of mains cable to the controller ............................................................. 344
23.14
Maintenance controller ..................................................................................... 344
23.15
Maintenance Smart PSU .................................................................................. 345
23.16
Zone types ........................................................................................................ 345
23.17
Zone attributes .................................................................................................. 348
23.18
Applicable attributes to zone types ................................................................... 350
23.19
ATS levels and attenuation specifications ........................................................ 352
23.20
Supported card readers and card formats........................................................ 352
23.21
SPC Support for E-Bus Devices ....................................................................... 354
23.21.1 Configuring and Addressing E-Bus Devices ..................................... 354
23.21.1.1 Addressing Transponders for SAP 8, SAP 14, and SAP 20 ............. 356
23.21.1.2 Addressing Transponders for PSU SAP 25 ...................................... 356
23.22
FlexC Glossary ................................................................................................. 357
23.23
FlexC Commands ............................................................................................. 358
23.24
ATS Category Timings ..................................................................................... 360
23.25
ATP Category Timings ..................................................................................... 361
10
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Meaning of symbols
1
1 Meaning of symbols
There are several symbols in the document:
Symbol
SPC4xxx
IP
Description
Not available for SPC42xx, SPC43xx.
Only available for SPC controller with IP interface
(SPC43xx/SPC53xx/SPC63xx).
Not available for installation type Domestic.
!
!
Only available in unrestricted mode.
Find further information about Security Grade, Region or Mode in text.
See Appendix for further information.
11
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
2
Security
Target group
2 Security
2.1
Target group
The instructions in this documentation are directed at the following target group:
Target readers
2.2
Qualification
Activity
Condition of the
equipment
Installation personnel Technical training for Assembles and
building or electrical installs the hardware
installations.
components on site.
Individual
components that
need to be
assembled and
installed.
Operational startup
personnel
New, readily
assembled and
installed device or
modified device.
Has appropriate
technical training with
regard to the tasks
and the products,
devices or systems
to be put in service.
Puts the device or
system which is
readily assembled
and installed on site
into service.
General safety instructions
WARNING
Before starting to install and work with this device, please read the Safety
Instructions. This device shall only be connected to power supplies compliant to
EN60950-1, chapter 2.5 ("limited power source").
2.2.1
General information



Keep this document for later reference.
Always pass this document on together with the product.
Please also take into account any additional country-specific, local safety
standards or regulations concerning project planning, operation and disposal of
the product.
Liability claim



2.2.2
Do not connect the device to the 230 V supply network if it is damaged or any
parts are missing.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the device unless they are
expressly mentioned in this manual and have been approved by the
manufacturer.
Use only spare parts and accessories that have been approved by the
manufacturer.
Transport
Unit damage during transport


Keep the packaging material for future transportation.
Do not expose the device to mechanical vibrations or shocks.
12
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Security
General safety instructions
2.2.3
2
Setup
Radio interference with other devices in the environment / EMS

When handling modules that are susceptible to electrostatic discharge, please
observe the ESD guidelines.
Damage due to unsuitable mounting location


The environmental conditions recommended by the manufacturer must be
observed.
See Technical Data.
Do not operate the device close to sources of powerful electromagnetic
radiation.
Danger of electrical shock due to incorrect connection







Connect the device only to power sources with the specified voltage. Voltage
supply requirements can be found on the rating label of the device.
Ensure that the device is permanently connected to the electricity supply; a
readily accessible disconnect device must be provided.
Ensure that the circuit that the device is connected to is protected with a 16 A
(max.) fuse. Do not connect any devices from other systems to this fuse.
This device is designed to work with TN power systems. Do not connect the
device to any other power systems.
Electrical grounding must meet the customary local safety standards and
regulations.
Primary supply cables and secondary cables should be routed such that they
do not run in parallel or cross over or touch one anther inside the housing.
Telephone cables should be fed into the unit separately from other cables.
Risk of cable damage due to stress

2.2.4
Ensure that all outgoing cables and wires are sufficiently strain-relieved.
Operation
Dangerous situation due to false alarm


2.2.5
Make sure to notify all relevant parties and authorities providing assistance
before testing the system.
To avoid panic, always inform all those present before testing any alarm
devices.
Service and maintenance
Danger of electrical shock during maintenance


Maintenance work must only be carried out by trained specialists.
Always disconnect the power cable and other cables from the main power
supply before performing maintenance.
Danger of electrical shock while cleaning the device

Do not use liquid cleaners or sprays that contain alcohol, spirit or ammonia.
13
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
2
Security
Meaning of written warning notices
2.3
2.4
Meaning of written warning notices
Signal Word
Type of Risk
DANGER
Danger of death or severe bodily harm.
WARNING
Possible danger of death or severe bodily
harm.
CAUTION
Danger of minor bodily injury or property
damage
IMPORTANT
Danger of malfunctions
Meaning of hazard symbols
WARNING
Warning of hazard area
WARNING
Warning of dangerous electrical voltage
14
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Directives and standards
EU directives
3
3 Directives and standards
3.1
EU directives
This product complies with the requirements of the European Directives
2004/108/EC “Directive of Electromagnetic Compatibility”, 2006/95/EC “Low
Voltage Directive”, and1999/5/EC on Radio and Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment (R&TTE). The EU declaration of conformity is available to the
responsible agencies at http://pcd.vanderbiltindustries.com/doc/SPC
European Directive 2004/108/EC „Electromagnetic Compatibility”
Compliance with the European Directive 2004/108/EC has been proven by testing
according to the following standards:
emc emission
EN 55022 Class B
emc immunity
EN 50130-4
European Directive 2006/95/EC „Low-Voltage Directive”
Compliance with the European Directive 2006/95/EC has been proven by testing
according to the following standard:
Safety
3.1.1
EN 60950-1
Overview of Conformity to EN50131 Standard
This section gives an overview of the SPC compliance to the EN50131 standard.
Address of Certifying Body
VDS (VDS A / C / EN / SES Approval)
AG Köln HRB 28788
Sitz der Gesellschaft:
Amsterdamer Str. 174, 50735 Köln
Geschäftsführer:
Robert Reinermann
JörgWilms-Vahrenhorst (Stv.)
SPC products listed have been tested according to EN50131-3:2009, and all
relevant RTC specifications.
Product Type










SPC6330.320
SPC5330.320
SPCP333.300
SPCE652.100
SPCK420.100
SPCK421.100
SPCE452.100
SPCE110.100
SPCE120.100
SPCA210.100
Standard
EN50131 Grade 3
15
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
3
Directives and standards
EU directives




SPCK620.100
SPCK623.100
SPCN110.000
SPCN310.000



SPC5320.320
SPC4320.320
SPCP332.300
EN50131 Grade 2
Specific information in relation to EN50131 requirements can be found in the
following sections in this document.
EN50131 Requirement
SPC Installation & Configuration Manual
Operating temperature and humidity range
Technical data SPC4000 [➙ 31]
Technical data SPC5000 [➙ 32]
Technical data SPC6000 [➙ 35]
Weights and dimensions
Technical data SPC4000 [➙ 31]
Technical data SPC5000 [➙ 32]
Technical data SPC6000 [➙ 35]
Fixing details
Mounting system equipment [➙ 39]
Installation, commissioning and
maintenance instructions, including terminal
identifications
Mounting system equipment [➙ 39]
Controller hardware [➙ 64]
Type of interconnections (refer to 8.8);
Technical data SPC4000 [➙ 31]
Technical data SPC5000 [➙ 32]
Technical data SPC6000 [➙ 35]
Wiring the X-Bus Interface [➙ 70]
Details of methods of setting and unsetting
User programming via the keypad
possible (see 11.7.1 to 11.7.3 and Tables 23 Areas – Setting/Unsetting [➙ 241]
to 26);
Configuring a keyswitch expander [➙ 205]
Configuring a wireless fob [➙ 104]
Triggers [➙ 253]
Serviceable parts
Technical data SPC4000 [➙ 31]
Technical data SPC5000 [➙ 32]
Technical data SPC6000 [➙ 35]
Power supply requirement if no integrated
PS
See installation instructions for SPCP33x
and SPCP43x Expander PSUs.
Where PS is integrated, the information
required by EN 50131-6:2008, Clause 6
Technical data SPC4000 [➙ 31]
Technical data SPC5000 [➙ 32]
Technical data SPC6000 [➙ 35]
Maximum number of each type of ACE and
expansion device.
Wiring the X-Bus Interface [➙ 70]
Technical data SPC4000 [➙ 31]
Technical data SPC5000 [➙ 32]
Technical data SPC6000 [➙ 35]
Current consumption of the CIE and each
See relevant installation instructions.
type of ACE and expansion device, with and
without an alarm condition.
Maximum current rating of each electrical
output
Technical data SPC4000 [➙ 31]
Technical data SPC5000 [➙ 32]
Technical data SPC6000 [➙ 35]
16
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Directives and standards
EU directives
3
EN50131 Requirement
SPC Installation & Configuration Manual
Programmable functions provided
Engineer programming via the keypad
[➙ 108]
Engineer programming via the browser
[➙ 157]
How indications are made inaccessible to
level 1 users when level 2, 3 or 4 user is no
longer accessing the information (see 8.5.1)
Keypad user interface [➙ 88]
Standard keypad settings [➙ 119]
Comfort keypad settings [➙ 120]
Configuring an Indicator Expander [➙ 204]
Masking/reduction of range
System Options [➙ 220]
signals/messages processed as “fault” or
Wiring the zone inputs [➙ 81]
“masking” events (see 8.4.1, 8.5.1 and Table
SIA Codes [➙ 335]
11);
PIR masking is always reported as a zone
masked event (SIA - ZM). Additionally, antimask can cause an alarm, tamper, trouble
or no additional action depending on
configuration
Current defaults of PIR addition effect:
Ireland
Unset - None
Set - Alarm
UK, Europe, Sweden, Swiss, Belgium
Unset - Tamper
Set - Alarm
Prioritization of signal and message
processing and indications (see 8.4.1.2,
8.5.3);
Standard keypad display [➙ 90]
Comfort keypad display [➙ 93]
Minimum number of variations of PIN codes, User PIN combinations [➙ 342]
logical keys, biometric keys and/or
mechanical keys for each user (see 8.3);
Method of time-limiting internal WD for level
3 access without level 2 authorization (see
8.3.1);
Not supported - Engineer cannot access
system without permission.
Number and details of disallowed PIN codes Automatic inhibits [➙ 343]
(see 8.3.2.2.1);
Details of any biometric authorization
methods used (see 8.3.2.2.3);
Not applicable
Method used to determine the number of
combinations of PIN codes, logical keys,
biometric keys and/or mechanical keys (see
11.6);
User PIN combinations [➙ 342]
Number of invalid code entries before user
interface is disabled (see 8.3.2.4);
Access PINs [➙ 343]
Details of means for temporary authorization User Menus – Grant Access
for user access (see 8.3.2);
if automatic setting at pre-determined times Areas – Setting/Unsetting [➙ 241]
provided, details of pre-setting indication and
any automatic over-ride of prevention of set
(see 8.3.3, 8.3.3.1);
Details of conditions provided for the set
state (see 8.3.3.4);
Setting and unsetting the system
Standard keypad configuration [➙ 119]
Comfort keypad configuration [➙ 120]
Outputs [➙ 196]
Zone types [➙ 345]
Notification of output signals or messages
Outputs [➙ 196]
17
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
3
Directives and standards
EU directives
3.1.2
EN50131 Requirement
SPC Installation & Configuration Manual
provided (see 8.6);
Areas – setting/unsetting [➙ 241]
User rights [➙ 185]
Other output configurations to interface with
I&HAS components (see 8.2);
Outputs [➙ 196]
Zone types [➙ 345]
Test [➙ 143]
Keypad user interface [➙ 88]
Criteria for automatic removal of “soak test”
attribute (see 8.3.9);
Timers [➙ 228]
Number of events resulting in automatic
inhibit
Automatic Inhibits [➙ 343]
If ACE is Type A or Type B (see 8.7) and
whether portable or moveable (see 11.14);
All devices are hardwired and powered by
system PSUs. Refer to relevant technical
data on PSUs.
Component data for non-volatile memory
components (see Table 30, step 6);
See user documentation for SPCK420/421
and SPCK620/623 keypads.
Life of memory support battery (see 8.10.1);
N/A. Stored in non-volatile memory.
Optional functions provided (see 4.1);
Engineer programming via the keypad
Engineer programming via the browser
[➙ 157]
Additional functions provided (see 4.2,
8.1.8);
Grade - Unrestricted
Policies – System options [➙ 220]
Access levels required to access such
additional functions provided;
User configuration (keypad) [➙ 149]
User configuration (browser) [➙ 181]
Details of any programmable facility that
would render an I&HAS non-compliant with
EN 50131-1:2006, 8.3.13 or compliant at a
lower security grade, with instruction on
consequent removal of compliance labeling
(see 4.2 and 8.3.10).
Grade - Unrestricted
Policies – System options [➙ 220]
EN50131 Compliance [➙ 18]
Compliance with EN50131 Approvals
Software Requirements
It is not possible to change the Region or Grade in SPC Pro. It is only possible to
change these settings in the browser or keypad.
18
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Directives and standards
EU directives





3
In the Standards settings page, select Europe under Region to implement
EN50131 requirements.
Select Grade 2 or Grade 3 to implement the grade of EN50131 compliance.
The Wireless settings Prevent Setting Time and Device Lost Time must be set
to a value other than 0.
Select Synchronization Time with Mains under Clock settings to use mains as
clock master.
DO NOT select the attribute Setting State in the Keypad configuration settings
for Visual indications.
19
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
3
Directives and standards
EU directives
Hardware Requirements







The back tamper kit (SPCY130) must be installed for panels and power
supplies for compliance with EN50131 Grade 3.
EN50131 Grade 3 compliant components must be installed for EN50131 Grade
3 compliant systems.
Either EN50131Grade 2 or 3 compliant components must be installed for
EN50131 Grade 2 compliant systems.
It is not possible to enrol a wireless device with a signal strength lower than 3.
The recommended ratio of wireless receivers to transmistters is no more than
20 transmitters for every one receiver.
Glassbreak must be used with an EN-compliant glassbreak interface.
To comply with EN50131-3:2009, do not set or unset the system using the
SPCE120 (Indicator Expander) or the SPCE110 (Keyswitch Expander).
20
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Directives and standards
EU directives
3
NOTICE
The SPCN110 PSTN module and SPCN130 GSM/GPRS module are tested with
EN50131 approved Grade 2 and Grade 3 panels and can be used with these
approved panels.
3.1.3
Compliance with EN 50136-1:2012 and EN 50136-2:2014
SPC products listed have been tested according to EN 50136-1:2012 and EN
50136-2:2014.
3.1.4
Compliance with INCERT Approvals
Software Requirements
Selecting Belgium (*) under Region implements local or national requirements
which supercede EN50131 requirements.
21
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
3
Directives and standards
EU directives
Selecting Grade 2 or Grade 3 selects EN50131 compliance plus any additional
INCERT requirements:
 Only an engineer can restore a tamper. For INCERT, this applies across all
grades.
This is normally only a requirement for Grade III En50131.
 A tamper on an Inhibited / Isolated zone must be sent to an ARC and displayed
to the user.
For INCERT, tampers are processed for isolated zones. On all other standard
variations, tampers are ignored on isolated zones.
 User PIN codes must be defined with more than 4 digits.
Hardware Requirements
 The minimum battery capacity for SPC42xx/43xx/52xx/53xx/63xx is 10 Ah / 12
V. If a 10 Ah battery is used, then the battery is biased to the left of the cabinet
and the bottom flap is bent to meet the battery.
22
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Directives and standards
EU directives


3
Fit jumper (J12) on the battery selector for 17/10 Ah battery use and remove for
7 Ah battery.
The amount of current from Aux output using a 10 Ah battery for
SPC42xx/SPC52xx is:
COMMS
NONE
PSTN
GSM
PSTN+GSM
12 h
568 mA
543 mA
438 mA
413 mA
24h
214 mA
189 mA
84 mA
59 mA
30 h
143 mA
118 mA
13 mA
N/A
60h
2mA
N/A
N/A
N/A
Standby time

The amount of current from Aux output using a 10 Ah battery for
SPC43xx/SPC53xx/ SPC63xx is:
COMMS
NONE
PSTN
GSM
PSTN+GSM
12 h
538 mA
513 mA
408 mA
383 mA
24 h
184 mA
159 mA
54 mA
29 mA
30 h
113 mA
88mA
N/A
N/A
60 h
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Standby time
3.1.5
PD 6662:2010 Conformance Guidelines
This appendix contains all the criteria for the installation, and commissioning and
maintenance of the SPC System to enable it to conform to the PD 6662:2010
Standard.
3.1.5.1
Product scope
The scope of this document is aimed at the following components of the SPC
System:
SPC4320.320-L1 Grade 2 Controller
SPC5320.320-L1 Grade 2 Controller
SPC5330.320-L1 Grade 3 Controller
SPC6330.320-L1 Grade 3 Controller
SPCK420/421.100 LCD Keypad
SPCE452.100 Expander, 8 Relay Outputs
3.1.5.2
SPCE652.100 Expander, 8 Inputs / 2
Outputs,
SPCP332.300 Smart PSU with I/O
Expander
SPCP333.300 Smart PSU with I/O
Expander
SPCN110.000 PSTN Module
SPCN310.000 GSM Module
Standards overview
Guidelines are provided for the implementation of PD 6662:2010 conformance for
an SPC system to the following relevant standards:
PD 6662:2010
BS 4737-3.1:1977
BS 8243:2010
BS 8473:2006+A1:2008
BS EN 50136-1-5:2008
BS EN 50136-2-1:1998 +A1:1998
BS EN 50136-2-2:1998
BS EN 50136-2-3:1998
23
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
3
Directives and standards
EU directives
BS EN 50131-1:2006+A1:2009
BS EN 50136-1-1:1998+A2:2008
BS EN 50136-1-2:1998
BS EN 50136-1-3:1998
3.1.5.3
3.1.4.3.1
BS EN 50131-3:2009
BS EN 50131-6:2008
DD 263:2010
DD CLC/TS 50131-7:2008
Methods for the completion of setting and unsetting
Methods of completion of setting (BS 8243:2010 - Clause
6.3)
Completion/Termination of the full setting procedure is achieved by any of the
following methods:
a) Shunt lock fitted to the final exit door
A shunt lock must be installed by the installer as follows:
Lock - NC, open when locked
Tamper
4K7
4K7
Zone – EXIT TERMINATOR zone type
An EXIT TERMINATOR zone type must be configured for SPC.
Refer to the following section in this manual:
Zone types [➙ 345]
b) Push button switch mounted outside the supervised premises
Connect the push button into an SPC zone input as follows:
An EXIT TERMINATOR zone type must be configured for SPC.
Refer to the following section in this manual:
Zone types [➙ 345]
c) Protective switch (i.e. door contact) fitted to the final exit door of the alarmed
premises or area
Connect the switch to the SPC System as follows:
The contact is fitted to the final exit door and is connected to an ENTRY/EXIT zone
with a ‘Final Exit‘ attribute.
Refer to the following section in this manual:
Zone types [➙ 345]
Zone attributes [➙ 348]
24
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Directives and standards
EU directives
3
A misoperation signal is possible using the alarm abort feature. This is enabled by
default.
Refer to the following section in this manual:
OPTIONS [➙ 109] (Kypad)
Options [➙ 220] (Browser)
d) Digital key
Not supported by SPC.
e) In conjunction with an ARC
This method of setting is supported by using SPC COM XT or other third party
ARC software using EDP commands.
3.1.4.3.2
Methods of completion of unsetting (BS 8243:2010 Clause 6.4)
Unsetting methods are complied with as follows:
6.4.1 For all the unsetting methods in the SPC system there is an audible
indication to the user that the system has been unset successfully. This is in the
form of a beep sequence from the CIE.
6.4.2 Prevention of entry to the supervised premises before the intruder alarm
system (IAS) is unset:
a) Unlocking the initial entry door causes the IAS to be unset;
Compliance by SPC if KEYARM zone type is used with the UNSET attribute only.
This zone type must not be used for setting.
b) Unsetting the IAS by the user before entering the supervised premises causes
or permits the initial entry door to be unlocked.
Compliance by SPC by unsetting using an access card reader on an entry reader
with the UNSET option, or an input from a third party access system to a KEYARM
zone with an UNSET attribute.
6.4.3 Prevention of entry to the supervised premises before all means of intruder
alarm confirmation have been disabled:
a) Unlocking the initial entry door causes all means of confirmation to be disabled
Operation not permitted by SPC.
b) Disabling all means of confirmation by the user before entering the supervised
premises causes or permits the initial entry door to be unlocked
Operation not permitted by SPC.
6.4.4 Opening the initial entry door disables all means of intruder alarm
confirmation
Operation not permitted by SPC.
6.4.5 Completion of unsetting using a digital key
a) Operation of a digital key before entering the supervised premises (for example,
via radio)
SPC satisfies this clause when the installer installs a PACE reader (e.g. SPCK421)
outside the premises.
b) Operation of a digital key after entering the supervised premises from a location
as near as practicable to the initial entry door.
25
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
3
Directives and standards
EU directives
This functionality is provided by use of a PACE reader (e.g. SPCK421) near the
entry door of a premises.
Refer to the following sections in this manual:
 Zone types [➙ 345]
 Zone attributes [➙ 348]
WARNING
Your attention is drawn to the fact that by allowing this method of unsetting, if an
intruder succeeds in forcing the initial entry door, the police will not be called,
regardless of the intruder’s further progress through the premises.
This method of unsetting the intruder alarm system might be unacceptable to your
insurers.
6.4.6 Unsetting in conjunction with an alarm receiving centre (ARC)
Compliance by SPC using third party ARC software. Indication external to the
building must be provided by means of a timed buzzer/strobe, etc. that will operate
on a system unset for a timed period e.g. 30 seconds.
Refer to the following sections in this manual:
Timers [➙ 112]
3.1.5.4
Configuration requirements for PD 6662:2010
conformance
Recommendations for the recording of remotely notified alarm
conditions (BS 8243:2010 - Annex G.1 and G.2
Alarm conditions can be categorised for analysis in accordance with Annex G if the
SPC system is configured so that the entry timer is less than 30 seconds, and the
dialer delay is set to 30 seconds.
Refer to the following sections in this manual:
AREAS [➙ 114]
Adding / Editing an area [➙ 236]
Timers [➙ 112]
Requirements for systems using dedicated alarm paths (BS EN
50136-1-2, 1998
The SPC system should be configured to do an automated test call to the ARC.
The SPC system should be configured with a 'Fail to Communicate‘ output.
Refer to the following section in this manual:
Adding/Editing an ARC [➙ 290]
Requirements for equipment used in systems with digital
communicators using PSTN (BS EN 50136-2-2, 1998)
Fault Output
The SPC system should be configured with a 'Fail to Communicate‘ output.
Refer to the following sections in this manual:
26
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Directives and standards
EU directives
3
OUPUTS [➙ 134] (Keypad)
Configuring controller inputs & outputs [➙ 194] (Browser)
Adding/Editing an ARC [➙ 290]
Retransmission Attempts
Retransmission attempts (Dial Attempts) are configured in this manual:
Adding/Editing an ARC [➙ 290]
Editing EDP settings [➙ 299]
A minimum of 1 and a maximum of 12 retransmissions are allowed.
Intrusion and hold-up - System design (DD CLC TS 50131-7, 2008
Setting and unsetting
SPC system is configurable in such a way that the setting is completed by 'Final
Exit'.
It is possible to configure the SPC so that a WD (Warning Device) is activated
momentarily on setting.
Refer to the following sections in this manual:
Timers [➙ 112]
Zone attributes [➙ 348]
OUTPUTS [➙ 134] (Keypad)
Editing an output [➙ 195] (Browser)
Intrusion and confirmed hold-up alarm (BS8243:2010 Designation of
hold-up alarm (HUA) signals for sequential confirmation)
SPC system is configurable in such a way that the following scenarios, when
triggered more than two minutes apart from any hold-up zone or hold-up device
(HD), will report a confirmed hold-up alarm event (HV for SIA and 129 for CID) to
the CIE:
 two hold-up zone activations
 a hold-up zone and a panic zone activation
If a hold-up zone and a tamper zone or a panic zone and a tamper zone activation
occurs within the two minute period, this will also send a confirmed hold-up alarm
event.
A confirmed hold-up will not require an engineer restore even if engineer restore is
enabled. A confirmed hold-up event is logged in the system log.
Security of communications for remote support and remote system
checks (DD 263:2010)
Please ensure that SPC Pro is used within the guidelines specified in DD
263:2010.
27
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
3
Directives and standards
EU directives
3.1.5.5
Additional commissioning requirements for PD 6662:2010
conformance
Information to be included in the system design proposal and asfitted document (BS 8243:2010 - Annex F)







During the installation, configuration and commissioning of an SPC system, the
installer must adhere to the following guidelines as required in the above
annex:
It is recommended that dual paths are used for signalling which are supported
in the SPC system using GSM, PSTN and Ethernet options.
The SPC system must be installed and configured to provide an effective
confirmation facility. Any exceptions to this should be outlined in the ‘As Fitted’
document.
Combinations and sequences which contribute to a confirmed alarm should be
clearly notified to the end user.
The intrusion confirmation time should be clearly notified to the end user.
Methods of completion of setting and unsetting methods should be clearly
described to the end user as detailed in this document.
Ensure written arrangements are supplied to the end user in the event of a lock
failure.
It is recommended that the enclosed PD 6662:2010 label is affixed in an
appropriate position on the inside of the SPC housing beside the product type
label.
3.1.5.6
Additional information
Transmission Network Requirements – Performance, Availability and
Security Levels (BS EN 50136-1-2, 1998 and BS EN 50136-1-5,
2008)
The SPC System has been tested and approved to EN50136-1-1.
SPC levels are classified as follows:
3.1.6
Transmission time
D2 as max.
Transmission time, max.
values
M0 - M4
Reporting time
T3 as max.
Availability
Refer to the following section in this manual:
ATS levels and attenuation specifications [➙ 352]
Signalling security level
Tested to EN50136-1-1 and classified as ‘S0’.
Compliance with VDS Approvals
This section describes the compliance of this system with VDS approvals.
28
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Directives and standards
EU directives
3
Software
To set the system for VDS compliance, do the following:
1. Log on to the panel with the browser.
2. Click Full Engineer.
3. Click Settings on the menu.
4. Click Standards.
5. Select the German region from the Region list.
6. Select the VDS grade required by your installation type.
 Remote Isolations — It is not possible to deisolate isolated faults using the
browser or SPCPro. Deisolation can only be performed on the keypads.
 Remote Connections — it is not possible to use the browser or SPCPro to
connect to an armed system.
 Confirmed alarms — an internally set system cannot create a confirmed alarm.
 Hardware Fault reporting — in Options, you must select the Enabled +
Reporting (10s) option from the Watchdog Output Mode drop-down list.
Note: Hardware faults are not reported if the Engineer is logged in to the
system.
Hardware
VDS compliance requires the following:
 A G5 housing with Front tamper implemented as a minimum requirement.
 Keypads do not show status information if the system is armed.
 The number of supported zones is as follows:
– 512 zones in ring configuration
– 128 zones per X-Bus in multi-drop (spur) configuration
 The following end of line resistance combinations do not comply with VdS
standards:
– 1k, 470 ohm
– 1k, 1k, 6k6 ohm
3.1.7
Compliance with NF Approvals
Address of Certifying Body
CNPP Cert
Pôle Européen de Sécurité - Vernon
Route de la Chapelle Réanville
CD 64 - CS 22265
F-27950 SAINT MARCEL
www.cnpp.com
AFNOR Certification
11 rue François de Pressensé
93571 Saint Denis La Plaine Cedex
www.marque-nf.com
SPC products listed have been tested according to NF324 - H58, with reference to
current EN certifications, see Compliance with EN50131 Approvals [➙ 18], and all
relevant RTC specifications.
Product Type
Configuration
Standard
SPC6330.320 +
SPCP333.300
(Cert. 1232200003)
60h, unmonitored
NF Type 3,
SPC5330.320 +
SPCP333.300
60h, unmonitored
Logo
Class 1
29
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
3
Directives and standards
EU directives
(Cert. 1232200003)
SPC6330.320
(Cert. 1232200003)
30h, monitored
SPC5330.320
(Cert. 1232200003)
30h, monitored
SPC5320.320
36h, unmonitored
(Cert. 1222200003)
SPC4320.320
NF Type 2,
Class 1
36h, unmonitored
(Cert. 1222200003)
SPCN110.000
NF Type 2 and 3,
SPCN310.000
SPCK420.100
SPCK620.100
SPCK623.100
SPCE652.100
SPCE452.100
SPCE110.100
SPCE120.100
Class 1
30
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Technical Data
SPC4000
4
4 Technical Data
4.1
SPC4000
Programmable areas
4
Max. number of user PINs
100
Remote controls
Up to 32
Wireless Panic Alarm
Up to 128
Event memory
1000 intrusion events, 1000 access events
Number of on-board zones
8
Max. number of hardwired zones
32
Max. number of wireless zones
32 (take away wired zones)
Max. number of Intrunet wireless detectors 20
per wireless receiver (recommended)
EOL resistor
Dual 4k7 (default), other resistor combinations
configurable
Number of on-board relays
1 strobe (30 VDC / 1 A resistive switching current)
Number of on-board open coll.
2 internal / external bell, 3 freely programmable (each
max. 400 mA resistive switching current, supplied via
auxiliary output)
Firmware
V3.x
Door capacity
Max. 4 entry doors or 2 entry/exit doors
Number of card reader
Max. 4
Radio module



SPC4221: integrated SiWay RF receiver (868 MHz)
SPC4320.220: Optional (SPCW111),
SPC4320.320: Optional (SPCW110)
Verification
4 verification zones with max. 4 IP-cameras and 4 audio
devices.
Video
Up to 16 pre / 16 post event images (by JPEG resolution
320 x 240, max. 1 frame / sec.)
Audio
Up to 60 sec. pre / 60 sec. post audio recording
Field bus 1)
X-BUS on RS-485 (307 kb/s)
Number of field devices 2)
Max. 11 (4 keypads, 2 door-expanders, 5 input/output
expanders)
Connectable field devices



Keypads: SPCK42x, SPCK62x





1 X-BUS (1 spur)
Interfaces
Door expanders: SPCA210, SPCP43x
Expanders with I/O: SPCE65x, SPCE45x,
SPCP33x, SPCE110, SPCE120, SPCV32x
1 RS232
USB (PC connection)
1 SPC Fast Programmer
SPC43xx: Additionally 1 Ethernet (RJ45)
Tamper contact
Front spring tamper, 2 auxiliary tamper contact inputs
Power supply
Type A (per EN50131-1)
Mains voltage
230 VAC, + 10%/ -15%, 50 Hz
Mains fuse
250 mA T (replaceable part on mains terminal block)
Power consumption
SPC42xx: Max. 160 mA at 230 VAC
SPC43xx: Max. 200 mA at 230 VAC
Operating current
SPC42xx Controller: Max. 160 mA at 12 VDC
31
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
4
Technical Data
SPC5000
SPC43xx Controller: Max. 200 mA at 12 VDC
Quiescent current
SPC42xx Controller:
Max. 140 mA at 12 VDC (165 mA with PSTN, 270 mA
with GSM, 295 mA with PSTN & GSM)
SPC43xx Controller:
Max. 170 mA at 12 VDC (195 mA with PSTN, 300 mA
with GSM, 325 mA with PSTN & GSM)
Output voltage
13-14 VDC in normal conditions (mains powered and
fully charged battery), min. 10.5 VDC when powered by
secondary device (before system shut down to battery
deep discharge protection)
Low voltage trigger
7.5 VDC
Overvoltage protection
15.7 VDC
Peak to Peak ripple
Max. 5 % of output voltage
Auxiliary power (nominal)
Max. 750 mA at 12 VDC
Battery type
SPC422x/4320: YUASA NP7-12FR (7 Ah), Battery not
supplied
Battery charger
SPC422x/4320: Max. 72h to 80% of battery capacity
Battery protection
Current limited to 1 A (fuse protected), deep discharge
protection at 10.5 VDC +/- 3 %
Software update
Local and remote upgrade for controller, peripherals and
GSM/PTSN modems.
Calibration
No calibration checks required (calibrated at
manufacturing)
Serviceable parts
No serviceable parts
Operating temperature
-10 ~ +50 °C
Relative humidity
Max. 90 % (non condensing)
Colour
RAL 9003 (signal white)
Weight
SPC422x/4320: 4.500 kg
Dimensions (W x H x D)
SPC422x/4320: 264 x 357 x 81 mm
Housing
SPC4320.320: Small metal housing (1.2 mm mild steel)
SPC422x.220: Small housing with metal base (1.2 mm
mild steel) and plastic lid
Housing can contain up to
SPC422x/4320: 1 additional expander (size 150 mm x 82
mm)
IP rating
30
ATS
2
ATP
4
Event Profiles
5
Event Exceptions
10
Command Profiles
5
1) Max. 400 m between devices / cable types IYSTY 2 x 2 x Ø 0.6 mm (min.), UTP
cat5 (solid core) or Belden 9829.
2) More I/O expanders can be addressed instead of a keypad or door expander,
but number of programmable inputs / outputs cannot exceed specified system
limits.
4.2
SPC5000
Programmable areas
16
Max. number of user PINs
500
32
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Technical Data
SPC5000
Remote controls
Up to 100
Wireless Panic Alarm
Up to 128
Event memory
10,000 intrusion events, 10,000 access events
Number of on-board zones


Max. number of hardwired
zones
128
4
SPC5320\5330 — 8
SPC5350 — 16
Max. number of wireless zones 120 (take away wired zones)
Max. number of Intrunet
20
wireless detectors per wireless
receiver (recommended)
EOL resistor
Dual 4k7 (default), other resistor combinations
configurable
Relay Outputs


Electronic Outputs


SPC5320\5330 — 1 strobe (30 VDC/1A resistive
switching current)
SPC5350 — 4 (single-pole changeover, 30VDC/
maximum 1A resistive switching current)
SPC5320\5330 — 5 outputs:
– 2 internal/external bells
– 3 programmable. Maximum 400 mA resistive
switching current per output, supplied by auxiliary
output.
SPC5350 — 8 outputs. Maximum 400mA resistive
switching current per output
– 5 standard power outputs
– 3 supervised outputs
Firmware
V3.x
Door capacity
Max. 16 entry doors or 8 entry/exit doors
Number of card reader
Max. 16
Radio module
Optional (SPCW110)
Verification
16 verification zones with max. 4 IP-cameras and 16
audio devices.
Video
Up to 16 pre / 16 post event images (by JPEG resolution
320 x 240, max. 1 frame / sec.)
Audio
Up to 60 sec. pre / 60 sec. post audio recording
Field bus 1)
X-BUS on RS-485 (307 kb/s)
Number of field devices 2)
Max. 48 (16 keypads, 16 door-expanders, 16 input/output
expanders)
Connectable field devices



Keypads: SPCK42x, SPCK62x
Door expanders: SPCA210, SPCP43x
Expanders with I/O: SPCE65x, SPCE45x, SPCP33x,
SPCP35x, SPCE110, SPCE120, SPCV32x
Interfaces





2 X-BUS (2 spurs or 1 loop),
2 RS232
1 USB (PC connection),
1 SPC Fast Programmer,
SPC53xx: Additionally 1 Ethernet (RJ45)
Tamper contact

SPC5320/5330: Front spring tamper, 2 auxiliary
tamper contact inputs
SPC5350: Front/back tamper switch

33
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
4
Technical Data
SPC5000
Power supply
Type A (per EN50131-1)
Mains voltage
230 VAC, + 10%/ -15%, 50 Hz
Mains fuse


SPC5320/5330: 250 mA T (replaceable part on mains
terminal block)
SPC5350 : 800mA T (replaceable part on mains
terminal block)
Power consumption


SPC5320/5330: Max. 200 mA at 230 VAC
SPC5350: Max. 500mA at 230 V AC
Operating current


SPC5320/5330: Controller: Max. 200 mA at 12 VDC
SPC5350: Max. 210 mA at 12 VDC
Quiescent current
SPC53xx Controller: Max. 170 mA at 12 VDC (195 mA
with PSTN, 300 mA with GSM, 325 mA with PSTN &
GSM)
Output voltage
13-14 VDC in normal conditions (mains powered and fully
charged battery), min. 10.5 VDC when powered by
secondary device (before system shut down to battery
deep discharge protection)
Low voltage trigger
11 VDC
Overvoltage protection


Peak to Peak ripple
Max. 5 % of output voltage
Auxiliary power (nominal)


Battery type



Battery charger


SPC5320: Max. 72h,
SPC5330/5350: Max. 24h to 80% of battery capacity
Battery protection

SPC5320/5330: Current limited to 1 A (fuse
protected), deep discharge protection at 10.5 VDC +/3%
SPC5350: Current limited to 2 A (protected by PTC
resettable fuse), deep discharge protection at 10.5
VDC
SPC5320/5330: 15.7 VDC
SPC5350: 15 VDC nominal
SPC5320/5330: Max. 750 mA at 12 VDC
SPC5350: Max. 2200 mA at 12 VDC (8 separately
fused outputs, 300 mA per output)
SPC5320: YUASA NP7-12FR (7 Ah),
SPC5330: YUASA NP17-12FR (17 Ah)
SPC5350: YUASA NP24-12 (12 V 24 Ah), Alarmcom
AB1227-O (12 V 27 Ah)
Battery not supplied

Software update
Local and remote upgrade for controller, peripherals and
GSM/PTSN modems.
Calibration
No calibration checks required (calibrated at
manufacturing)
Serviceable parts


Operating temperature
-10 ~ +50 °C
Relative humidity
Max. 90 % (non condensing)
Colour
RAL 9003 (signal white)
Weight



SPC5320: 4.500 kg
SPC5330: 6.400 kg
SPC5350: 18.600 kg
Dimensions (W x H x D)

SPC5320: 264 x 357 x 81 mm
SPC5320/5330: No serviceable parts
SPC5350: 8 glass fuses (400mA AT) for 12 VDC
outputs
34
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Technical Data
SPC6000
4


SPC5330: 326 x 415 x 114 mm
SPC5350: 498 x 664 x 157 mm
Housing



SPC5320: Small metal housing, (1.2 mm mild steel)
SPC5330: Hinged metal housing, (1.2 mm mild steel)
SPC5350: Metal housing (1.5 mm mild steel)
Housing can contain up to


SPC5320: 1 additional expander,
SPC5330: 4 additional expanders (size 150 mm x 82
mm)
SPC5350: 4 additional expanders (150 x 82 mm)

IP Rating
30
ATS
5
ATP
15
Event Profiles
10
Event Exceptions
50
Command Profiles
8
1) Max. 400 m between devices / cable types IYSTY 2 x 2 x Ø 0.6 mm (min.), UTP
cat5 (solid core) or Belden 9829.
2) More I/O expanders can be addressed instead of a keypad or door expander,
but number of programmable inputs / outputs cannot exceed specified system
limits.
4.3
SPC6000
Programmable areas
60
Max. number of user PINs
2500
Remote controls
Up to 100
Wireless Panic Alarm
Up to 128
Event memory
10,000 intrusion events, 10,000 access events
Number of on-board zones


Max. number of hardwired
zones
512
Max. number of wireless
zones
120 (take away wired zones)
Max. number of Intrunet
wireless detectors per
wireless receiver
(recommended)
20
EOL resistor
Dual 4k7 (default), other resistor combinations configurable
Relay Outputs


Electronic Outputs

SPC6320\6330 — 8
SPC6350 — 16
SPC6320\6330 — 1 strobe (30 VDC/1A resistive
switching current)
SPC6350 — 4 (single-pole changeover, 30VDC/
maximum 1A resistive switching current)
SP6320\6330 — 5 outputs:
– 2 internal/external bells
– 3 programmable. Maximum 400 mA resistive
switching current per output, supplied by auxiliary
output.
35
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
4
Technical Data
SPC6000

SPC6350 — 8 outputs. Maximum 400mA resistive
switching current per output
– 5 standard power outputs
– 3 supervised outputs
Firmware
V3.x
Door capacity
Max. 64 entry doors or 32 entry/exit doors
Number of card reader
Max. 64
Radio module
Optional (SPCW110)
Verification
32 verification zones with max. 4 IP-cameras and 32 audio
devices.
Video
Up to 16 pre / 16 post event images (by JPEG resolution
320 x 240, max. 1 frame / sec.)
Audio
Up to 60 sec. pre / 60 sec. post audio recording
Field bus 1)
X-BUS on RS-485 (307 kb/s)
Number of field devices 2)
Max. 128 (32 keypads, 32 door-expanders, 64 input/output
expanders)
Connectable field devices



Keypads: SPCK42x, SPCK62x
Door expanders: SPCA210, SPCP43x
Expanders with I/O: SPCE65x, SPCE45x, SPCP33x,
SPCP35x, SPCE110, SPCE120, SPCV32x
Interfaces





2 X-BUS (2 spurs or 1 loop),
2 RS232
1 USB (PC connection),
1 SPC Fast Programmer,
SPC63xx: Additionally 1 Ethernet (RJ45)
Tamper contact

SPC6330: Front spring tamper, 2 auxiliary tamper
contact inputs
SPC6350: Front/back tamper switch

Power supply
Type A (per EN50131-1)
Mains voltage
230 V AC, + 10%/ -15%, 50 Hz
Mains fuse


SPC6330 : 250 mA T (replaceable part on mains
terminal block)
SPC6350 : 800mA T (replaceable part on mains
terminal block)
Power consumption


SPC6330: Max. 200 mA at 230 V AC
SPC6350: Max. 500mA at 230 V AC
Operating current


SPC6330: Max. 200 mA at 12 V DC
SPC6350: Max. 210 mA at 12 V DC
Quiescent current
SPC63xx Controller: Max. 170 mA at 12 V DC (195 mA with
PSTN, 300 mA with GSM, 325 mA with PSTN & GSM)
Output voltage


SPC6330: 13-14 V DC in normal conditions (mains
powered and fully charged battery), min. 10.5 V DC
when powered by secondary device (before system
shut down to battery deep discharge protection)
SPC6350: 13-14 V DC in normal conditions (mains
powered and fully charged battery), min. 10.5 V DC
when powered by secondary device (before system
shut down to battery deep discharge protection)
Low voltage trigger
11 V DC
Overvoltage protection


SPC6330: 15.7 V DC
SPC6350: 15 V DC nominal
36
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Technical Data
SPC6000
Peak to Peak ripple
Max. 5 % of output voltage
Auxiliary power (nominal)


Battery type
 SPC6330: YUASA NP17-12FR (17 Ah)
 SPC6350: YUASA NP24-12 (12 V 24 Ah),
 Alarmcom AB1227-O (12 V 27 Ah)
Battery not supplied
Battery charger
SPC63xx: Max. 24h to 80% of battery capacity
Battery protection


4
SPC6330: Max. 750 mA at 12 V DC
SPC6350: Max. 2200 mA at 12V DC (8 separately
fused outputs, 300 mA per output)
SPC6330: Current limited to 1 A (fuse protected), deep
discharge protection at 10.5 V DC +/- 3 %
SPC6350: Current limited to 2 A (protected by PTC
resettable fuse), deep discharge protection at 10.5 V
DC, low voltage indicator at 11 V DC
Software update
Local and remote upgrade for controller, peripherals and
GSM/PTSN modems.
Calibration
No calibration checks required (calibrated at manufacturing)
Serviceable parts


Operating temperature
-10 ~ +50 °C
Relative humidity
Max. 90 % (non condensing)
Colour
RAL 9003 (signal white)
Weight


SPC6330: 6.400 kg
SPC6350: 18.600 kg
Dimensions (W x H x D)


SPC6330: 326 x 415 x 114 mm
SPC6350: 498 x 664 x 157 mm
Housing


SPC6330: Hinged metal housing (1.2 mm mild steel)
SPC6350: Metal housing (1.5 mm mild steel)
Housing can contain up to

SPC6330: 4 additional expanders (size 150 mm x 82
mm)
SPC6350: 6 additional expanders (150 x 82 mm) or 1
additional controller + 4 expanders

IP Rating
30
ATS
10
ATP
30
Event Profiles
20
Event Exceptions
100
Command Profiles
10
SPC6330: No serviceable parts
SPC6350: 8 glass fuses (400mA AT) for 12 V DC
outputs
1) Max. 400 m between devices / cable types IYSTY 2 x 2 x Ø 0.6 mm (min.), UTP
cat5 (solid core) or Belden 9829.
2) More I/O expanders can be addressed instead of a keypad or door expander,
but number of programmable inputs / outputs cannot exceed specified system
limits.
37
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Introduction
5
5 Introduction
The SPC series controller is a true hybrid controller with 8 on-board wired zones
that communicate with intruder devices.
The flexible design of the controller allows the functional components
(PSTN/GSM/RF) to be mixed and matched, improving the capability of the system.
Using this approach, an installer can ensure that an efficient installation with
minimal wiring is achieved.
5
6
7
4
8
9
20
16
17
1
2
22
19
3
10
11
21
18
13
12
23
24
14
15
Overview
1 PSTN
13
Wireless expander
2 GSM
14
PSU
3 Ethernet
15
Loop configuration
4 Wireless Receiver
16
PSTN network
5 AC mains
17
GSM network
6 Battery 12 V
18
Broadband router
7 RF
19
Network
8 Wired outputs (6)
20
Central
9 Wired inputs (8)
21
LAN/WLAN
10 Keypads
22
Service desk
11 IO expander
23
Remote user
12 Output Expander
24
Mobile interfaces
38
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G2 housing
6
6 Mounting system equipment
6.1
Mounting a G2 housing
The SPC G2 housing is supplied with a metallic or plastic cover. The cover is
attached to the base of the housing by 2 securing screws located on the top and
bottom of the front cover.
To open the housing, remove both screws with the appropriate screwdriver and lift
the cover directly from the base.
The G2 housing contains the controller PCB (Printed Circuit Board) mounted on 4
support pillars. An optional input/output module can be mounted directly beneath
the controller PCB. A battery with capacity of 7 Ah max. can be accommodated
below the controller.
An optional external antenna must be fitted to housings with metallic lid if the
wireless functionality is required. If an antenna is fitted to the unit, it must be
enabled in the firmware.
The SPC G2 housing provides 3 screw holes for wall mounting the unit.
To wall mount the housing, remove the cover and locate the initial fixing screw hole
at the top of the cabinet. Mark the position of this screw hole on the desired
location on the wall and drill the initial screw hole. Screw the unit to the wall and
mark the position of the bottom 2 screw hole positions with the unit vertically
aligned.
Screws with a 4-5 mm shank, a minimum head diameter of 8 mm and a minimum
length of 40 mm are recommended for mounting the housing. Additional expansion
plugs or fixings may be required depending on the construction of the wall.
39
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
6
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G3 housing
1
3
2
3
3
Standard housing
1 Wireless antenna
2 SPC controller
3 Wall mounting screw holes
6.2
Mounting a G3 housing
The SPC G3 housing is supplied with a metallic front cover. The cover is attached
to the base of the housing by hinges and secured with one screw on the right hand
side of the front cover.
To open the housing, remove the screws with the appropriate screwdriver and
open the front cover.
The G3 housing contains the controller PCB (Printed Circuit Board) mounted on a
hinged mounting bracket. Expanders and PSUs can be mounted on the underside
of the hinged mounting bracket and also on the back wall of the housing
underneath the mounting bracket.
40
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G3 housing
1
Expanders/PSU
2
Controller
3
Expanders/PSU
4
Battery
6
An optional external antenna must be fitted to housings with metallic lid if the
wireless functionality is required. If an antenna is fitted to the unit, it must be
enabled in the firmware.
The SPC G3 housing provides 3 screw holes for wall mounting the unit (see item 1
below).
Screws with a 4-5 mm shank, a minimum head diameter of 8 mm and a minimum
length of 40 mm are recommended for mounting the housing. Additional expansion
plugs or fixings may be required depending on the construction of the wall.
41
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
6
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G3 housing
1
2
To wall mount the housing:
1. Open the cover and locate the initial fixing screw hole at the top of the cabinet.
2. Mark the position of this screw hole on the desired location on the wall and drill
the initial screw hole.
3. Screw the unit to the wall and mark the position of the bottom 2 screw hole
positions with the unit vertically aligned.
Back Tamper Requirements
A back tamper switch may be required by your local approval.
The back tamper switch is delivered with SPC panels in G3 housings or is available
as an optional extra with a mounting kit (SPCY130). EN50131 G3 panels
(SPCxx3x.x20) are supplied with a back tamper kit as standard.
6.2.1
Mounting a Back Tamper Kit
The SPC back tamper kit provides SPC control panels and power supplies with the
option of having back tamper as well as front tamper.
The back tamper kit comprises the following parts:
 Tamper switch
 Leads for connecting the back tamper switch to the controller
 Wall fixing plate
Mounting the Wall Fixing Plate
1. Mount the SPC in the appropriate position on the wall using all three fixings
(see item 1 below).
42
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G3 housing
6
+ –
2. Draw a line around the inside of the back tamper cut out (See item 2 above) to
provide a guide for the wall plate on the fixing wall. Remove the enclosure from
the wall.
3. Place the wall plate (See item 1 below) on the wall centering it precisely around
the rectangle previously drawn (See item 2 below).
B
A
A
B
1
2
4. Ensure all four flanges on the wall plate are flush with the wall.
5. Mark the four fixings on the wall plate.
6. Drill and use suitable screws (max. 4 mm) for the wall substrate.
7. Fit the wall plate to the wall.
Fitting the Back Tamper Switch
1. Insert the tamper switch (See item 2 below) into the back of the enclosure so
that the plunger faces outwards (See item 1 below).
43
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
6
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G3 housing
1
2
2. Fit the enclosure back onto the wall using the three fixings previously removed
(See item 2 below). Visually check to ensure there is a flush finish between the
wall plate and the enclosure metalwork.
44
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G3 housing
1 Enclosure
3 Wall Fixing Plate
2 Wall
4 Tamper Switch
6
WARNING
If the wall fixing plate is not accurately aligned then the enclosure will not sit
properly on its fixings.
Wiring the Back Tamper Switch to the Control Panel
All control panels have spare inputs configured as tamper inputs that are designed
for wiring the tamper switch and do not require any programming.
This tamper switch will be referred to as ‘Aux Tamper 1’ by the system.
45
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
6
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G3 housing
+–
1. Connect NO on the tamper switch to T1 on the controller.
2. Connect COM on the tamper switch to C on the controller. Ensure the T2
jumper is not removed.
3. When the tamper switch is wired, the controller can be commissioned in the
normal manner.
6.2.2
Battery installation for EN50131 compliance
For EN50131 compliance the battery needs to be retained within the housing to
stop movement. This is achieved by bending out the flaps in the rear of the Hinged
Enclosure so that the battery is retained.
If a 7 Ah battery is used then the battery is biased to the left of the cabinet and
bottom flap is bent to meet the battery.
If a 17 Ah battery is used then the battery is biased to the right of the cabinet and
middle flap is bent to meet the battery.
46
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G5 housing
6
The battery flaps should be bent carefully as not to damage the battery. If any
signs of a damaged battery exist or any leakage of the electrolyte then the battery
should be discarded as per the current regulations and a new battery fitted.
6.3
Mounting a G5 housing
The SPC G5 housing comprises of a metallic base and front cover. The cover is
attached to the base of the housing by 4 securing screws located on the top and
bottom of the front cover.
To open the housing, remove all the screws with the appropriate screwdriver and
lift the cover directly from the base.
The G5 housing contains the controller PCB (Printed Circuit Board) and the
SPCP355 Smart PSU, both mounted on 4 support pillars. An 8 In/2 Output
Expander is mounted on top of the PSU. Four extra pillars are included to give you
the option to mount the 8 In/2 Output Expander below the PSU board in the G5
cabinet. Additional expanders can be installed in the housing as shown.
47
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
6
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G5 housing
Number
Description
Number
Description
1 Battery
6 Battery temperature leads
2 Battery strap
7 PSU
3 Fixing tabs
8 Optional expander positions
4 Strap holes
9 Controller
5 Battery leads
10 Antenna
Two batteries, with a maximum capacity of 27 Ah, can be accommodated in the
battery compartment at the bottom of the housing.
An optional external antenna must be fitted to a metallic housing if wireless
functionality is required. Knockout holes are available in three positions on the top
of the housing where the antenna can be installed. If an antenna is fitted to the
unit, it must be enabled in the firmware.
The SPC G5 housing provides 4 screw holes for wall mounting the unit.
48
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G5 housing
6.3.1
Number
Description
1
Corner fixings
2
Tamper cutout
3
Shelf separating battery compartment
4
Telecom socket cutout
6
Tamper protection
The tamper switch and back tamper bracket are fitted to the housing. The switch is
used on its own for front tamper purposes only or used with the back tamper
bracket for both front and back tamper protection. Either back or front tamper
protection is required depending on local approval.
The tamper bracket is held firmly in place with a securing screw. Remember to
remove this screw if commissioning the system for back tamper protection. Do not
remove this screw if using front tamper only.
6.3.2
Mounting the housing with tamper protection
To mount the housing:
1. Using the supplied mounting template, mark the 4 drill positions for fixing the
housing to the wall.
2. Drill and install suitable screws (see enclosed template) into the wall. Leave the
screws protruding 1.5cm from the wall.
3. The G5 housing is pre-configured for front tamper only. To configure the
housing for both front and back tamper, remove the front tamper securing
screw (item 1).
 The tamper bracket swings to the far right of the orientation slot (item 6).
49
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
6
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G5 housing
4. Mount the G5 housing in the appropriate position on the wall and tighten the 4
mounting screws. Ensure that the housing is flush with the wall surface.
5. Move the tamper bracket to the far left of the orientation slot and tighten the
back tamper screw (item 5) to the wall. The tamper bracket should be
perpendicular to the back wall of the housing.
6. Install the lid on the housing to test the tamper switch connection. Lift the lid by
approximately 1 mm to activate the tamper switch.
Number
Description
Number Description
1
Front tamper securing screw
5
Back tamper screw
2
Tamper bracket
6
Orientation slot
3
Tamper switch
7
Shelf separating battery compartment
4
Back tamper cutout
WARNING
If the back tamper screw is not secure against the wall, then tamper protection is
compromised. If the housing is removed from the wall or displaced, the back
tamper contact needs to be tested again for proper functionality and re-adjusted if
required.
6.3.2.1
Tamper operation
Tamper switch - normal
50
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G5 housing
4
6
3
5
2
1
1 Wall
4 Housing lid
2 Back tamper screw
5 Tamper switch contact closed
3 Back wall of housing
Tamper switch – displaced
4
3
5
2
1
1 Wall
4 Housing lid
2 Back tamper screw
5 Tamper switch contact open
3 Back wall of housing
If the housing is removed from the wall or displaced, the tamper bracket screw is
no longer secure against the wall, causing the bracket to pivot. This in turn causes
the tamper switch to swivel away from the lid and opens the switch contact.
WARNING
If the tamper bracket screw is not secure against the wall, then tamper protection
is compromised.
51
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
6
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a G5 housing
6.3.3
Installing the batteries
NOTICE
If using two batteries in the G5 housing, it is recommended that both batteries
should be the same Ah rating.
1
Battery
6
Battery temperature lead
2
Fixing strap
7
PSU
3
Battery fixing tabs
8
Optional expander positions
4
Strap holes
9
Controller
5
Battery leads
10
Antenna
To install the batteries:
1. Place the batteries into the battery compartment.
2. Press the metal tabs at the top and either side of the batteries in towards the
batteries.
3. Secure each battery to the housing using a battery strap. Ensure that the strap
is thread through the battery strap holes at the back of the battery compartment
and around the battery, with the two ends of the strap at the front of the battery.
4. Fasten the two ends of the strap firmly using the Velcro strip. Ensure that the
strap is tight around the battery.
52
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Mounting system equipment
Mounting a keypad
6
5. Connect one end of the battery leads to the battery + and - terminals and the
other ends to the corresponding + and - inputs of the PSU.
CAUTION
When installing the battery, always connect the positive (+) lead to the battery first
before connecting the negative (-) lead. When removing the battery, always
remove the negative (-) lead first before removing the positive (+)
6. Connect the loose ends of the attached temperature monitoring leads to the
battery temperature monitoring inputs on the PSU.
6.4
Mounting a keypad
Please refer to corresponding installation instruction.
6.5
Mounting an expander
Please refer to corresponding installation instruction.
53
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
7
Smart PSU
SPCP355 Smart PSU
7 Smart PSU
This section describes the components and wiring of the Smart PSU.
7.1
SPCP355 Smart PSU
The SPCP355 Smart PSU is a power supply combined with an 8-input/2-output
expander, contained in a G5 housing. The PSU is backed up by either 2x24Ah, or
2x27Ah batteries, and provides eight power and four logical outputs
The expander monitors the PSU for overcurrent, fuse failures, AC voltage,
communications, and battery output. The expander is powered by, and receives
data from, the PSU via a connector cable. It also interfaces with the SPC controller
over the SPX X-BUS.
Number
Description
SPCP355 Smart PSU
1
Mains input and fuse block
2
Input transformer
3
AC IN — AC power input
4
MAINS — Mains power LED
5
BATT1 — Battery 1 charge state LED
6
BATT2 — Battery 2 charge state LED
7
FUSE — Fuse fail LED
8
LIMIT — Current limit LED
9
STATUS — Status LED
10
A2 — 14.5V power output.
 Not backed up by battery
 Protected by PTC resettable fuse, rated at 300mA (Item 23 in image
above)
54
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Smart PSU
SPCP355 Smart PSU
7
Number
Description
11
A1 — Connects to the power input (+/-) on the SPC5350/6350.
12
COMM1 — Expander 4-pin interface. Connects to item 32, power and data
connection, in image above, with a straight-through cable.
13
Clock Reference — Connects to Clock Reference on SPC5350/6350.
14
T1, T2 — Tamper switch inputs. Connect these to the Front/Back tamper
switch.
See Mounting the housing with tamper protection [➙ 49].
15
Front back tamper switch. See Mounting the housing with tamper protection
[➙ 49].
16
NO/NC — Configurable NO/NC logical relay output. See Wiring the Outputs
[➙ 61] for more information.
17
Glass fuses — 400 mA T fuses for outputs 1-8.
18
OP 6 – 8 and SW 6 – 8 — Combined power outputs (OP) and logical outputs
(SW).
Standard 12V DC power outputs combined with configurable, open-drain,
logical outputs (4K7 EoL supervised/unsupervised).
19
OP 1 – 5 — Standard 12V DC power outputs.
See Warning note below table for more information.
20
BTE2 — Battery 2 temperature monitoring input.
21
BATT1 and BATT2 — Battery 1 and 2 connectors.
22
BTE1 — Battery 1 temperature monitoring input.
23
PTC fuses — Fuses rated at 300mA. Protecting the A1 and A2 outputs.
For more information see System Recovery [➙ 62].
24
PTC fuse — Fuse rated at 5A. Protects the AC power input (item 3 in image
above).
For more information see System Recovery [➙ 62].
25
PSU Kickstart Switch — For more information see System Recovery [➙ 62].
Expander
26
NO/NC — Logical relay outputs. The expander provides two configurable
NO/NC logical relay outputs.
For more information, see Wiring the Inputs [➙ 60]
27
I 1 – 8 — Inputs. The expander has 8 on-board inputs which can be configured
as intruder alarm zones on the SPC system.
For more information, see Wiring the Inputs [➙ 60]
28
Auxiliary power supply 12V — Do not use.
Expander is powered through COMM1 on the SPCP355 Smart PSU.
29
X-BUS Input power — Do not use.
Expander is powered through COMM1 on the SPCP355 Smart PSU.
30
X-BUS Interface — The communications bus connects expanders on the SPC
system.
31
Termination Jumper — This jumper is always fitted, by default.
For more information, see Wiring the X-BUS Interface [➙ 59].
32
PSU 4-pin interface — Connects to COMM1 on the SPCP355 Smart PSU
(item 12 in image above), power and data connector, with a straight-through
cable.
33
Front tamper switch — Not used. The Front/Back tamper connected to T1 and
T2 of the SPCP355 Smart PSU is the only tamper required by this installation.
34
JP1 — Front tamper bypass must be fitted.
55
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
7
Smart PSU
SPCP355 Smart PSU
Number
Description
35
Buzzer — Activated to locate the expander. See the X-BUS menu LOCATE
[➙ 118] for more information.
36
JP6 — Back tamper bypass. Must be fitted.
37
Manual addressing switches — Enable manual setting of the ID of the
expander.
38
X-BUS Status LED — Indicates the X-BUS status, when the system is in Full
Engineer mode, as follows:
 Slow flash (every 1.5 seconds) — X-BUS communications status is OK.
 Quick flash (every 0.2 seconds) — Indicates one of the following:
– Indicates the last-in-line expander for spur configurations.
– Indicates a communications problem between two expanders. If two
adjacent expanders are flashing quickly, the problem exists between
those two expanders.
39
LED — Not used.
40
PSU Status LED.
WARNING
The combined maximum load current drawn from all 12V DC outputs (OP 1 - 8)
plus COMM1, should not exceed 2.4A. Each individual output, and output A2,
should not exceed 300mA. If the device current requires more than 300mA, it is
recommended to parallel the outputs.
Adding extra expanders
If adding extra expanders to the G5 enclosure, you must ensure the front and back
tampers are deactivated by fitting the appropriate jumpers. In a G5 enclosure, the
front and back tamper is handled by the enclosure itself and the SPCP355 Smart
PSU.
7.1.1
Supervised Outputs
The SPCP355 Smart PSU supports three, open-drain, logical outputs, which can
be supervised for tamper detection. Output tamper detection is enabled by
configuration. Output tamper detection is enabled by connecting a 4K7 EoL resistor
in parallel with the load device, such as an external bell. A power diode (1N4001
for example, or similar) is also required, if not already present in the external
device.
56
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Smart PSU
SPCP355 Smart PSU
7
SW 6 – SW 8
0V
OV
PIR
OP 6 – OP 8
1
12V
0V
SW 6 – SW 8
OV
Ext. Bell
4K7
OP 6 – OP 8
2
12V
7.1.2
7.1.2.1
Number
Description
1
Standard 12V Power output
2
Configurable, supervised, 12V DC logical switched output.
Batteries
Installing Batteries
This section describes the battery installation for the SPCP355 Smart PSU and G5
Enclosure.
57
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
7
Smart PSU
SPCP355 Smart PSU
Number Description
1
Battery
2
Battery strap
3
Fixing holes
4
Strap holes
5
Battery leads
6
Battery temperature leads
7
PSU\Expander
8
Mounting positions for additional expanders.
It is recommended that two batteries are used. These batteries must be of the
same type and capacity.
1. Install the batteries in the battery compartment.
58
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Smart PSU
SPCP355 Smart PSU
7
2. Secure each battery using the battery straps provided, ensuring the strap is
threaded through the battery strap holes at the back of the battery and around
the battery.
3. Secure the two ends of the battery strap at the front of the battery, ensuring the
battery strap is firmly tightened.
4. Connect the leads from the SPCP355 Smart PSU to the batteries in the
following order:
-
Connect the positive (red) wire first.
-
Connect the negative (black) wire second.
DANGER
When removing the battery leads, always disconnect the negative (black) lead
before disconnecting the positive (red) lead.
7.1.2.2
Testing Battery Voltage
The SPCP355 Smart PSU performs a load test on each battery by placing a load
resistor across the battery terminals and measuring the resultant voltage. This
battery test is performed every five seconds.
7.1.2.3
Deep Discharge Protection
If mains power to the SPCP355 Smart PSU fails for a prolonged period, each
battery supplies power to the PSU 12V DC power outputs for a finite time. The
batteries eventually discharge. To prevent a battery discharging beyond recovery,
the SPCP355 Smart PSU disconnects the battery if the measured voltage drops
below 10.5V DC. The battery can then be recharged after the mains power is
restored.
7.1.2.4
Battery Stand-By Times
See Calculating the battery power requirements [➙ 332] for the battery stand-by
information.
7.1.3
Wiring the X-BUS Interface
The X-BUS interface connects expanders and keypads to the SPC controller. The
X-BUS can be wired in a number of different configurations, depending on the
installation requirements.
The following table lists the cable types and distances recommended:
Maximum cable length = (number of expanders and keypads in the system) x
(maximum cable distance for each cable type)
59
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
7
Smart PSU
SPCP355 Smart PSU
Cable Type
Distance
CQR Standard Alarm Cable
200m
UTP Cat-5 Solid core
400m
Belden 9829
400m
IYSTY 2x2x0.6(min)
400m
The following diagram shows an example of wiring the X-BUS:
7.1.3.1
Number
Description
1
SPCP355 Smart PSU outputs
2
SPC Controller
3
SPCP355 Input/Output expander
4
Next expander
5
Next expander
Wiring the Inputs
The expander has 8 on-board zone inputs which can be configured as one of the
following:
 No End of Line
 Single End of Line
 Dual End of Line
 Anti-Masking PIR
Default Configuration
The following diagram shows the default configuration, Double EOL 4K7:
60
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Smart PSU
SPCP355 Smart PSU
3
4
7
5
1
6
2
Number
Description
1
Input 1
2
COM
3
Tamper
4
Alarm
5
4K7
6
EOL 4K7
Anti-Masking PIR
The following diagram shows the Anti-Masking PIR configuration:
3
4 5
6 7
1
8
2
7.1.3.2
Number
Description
1
Input 2
2
COM
3
Tamper
4
Alarm
5
4K7
6
Detector Fault
7
2K2
8
EOL 4K7
Wiring the Outputs
The expander and PSU relay logical outputs can be assigned to any of the SPC
system outputs. The relay outputs can switch a rated voltage of 30V DC at 1A
(non-inductive load).
When the relay is activated, the Common terminal connection (COM) is switched
from the Normally Closed (NC) to the Normally open (NO) terminal.
The following diagram shows the wiring of an active, high output:
61
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
7
Smart PSU
SPCP355 Smart PSU
7.1.4
Number
Description
1
Normally Open terminal
2
Common terminal connection (COM)
3
Normally Closed terminal (NC)
PSU LED Status
The following table lists the Smart PSU LED status information:
LED
MAINS
BATT 1 & 2
FUSE
LIMIT
STATUS
COLOUR
Green
Green
Red
Red
Green
On
On
Off
Off
On
Condition
Normal
Mains OK, battery charging On
Flash
On
Mains Fail, Battery OK
Off
On
On
Mains OK, battery faulty or
not present
On
Off
On
Mains OK, battery faulty,
not present, or in deep
discharge protection mode
All LEDs Off.
Fuse Fail
On
Total Load Current
exceeded
PSU switcher failure
7.1.5
On
On
Off
On
Flash
System Recovery
Mains and Battery Failure
In the event of both mains and battery power failure, the PSU kickstart switch (item
25 in SPCP355 Smart PSU [➙ 54]) enables the system to be restarted if only
battery power is reinstated. To kickstart the system, do the following:
 Mains power has failed
62
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Smart PSU
SPCP355 Smart PSU
7
 Battery power has failed
 New batteries are available
1. Attach the battery leads.
2. Press and hold the PSU Kickstart button.
 All LEDs flash.
3. Hold the PSU Kickstart button until the LEDs stop flashing.
4. Release the PSU Kickstart button.
PTC Fuse Reset
In the event of one of the PTC fuses resetting, you must manually disconnect then
reconnect the mains and battery connections.
63
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
8
Controller hardware
Controller Hardware 42xx\43xx\53xx\63xx
8 Controller hardware
This section describes the controller hardware.
See also
 Powering expanders from the auxiliary power terminals
[➙ 331]
 Wiring the X-BUS interface [➙ 70]
 Wiring an internal sounder [➙ 85]
 Wiring the zone inputs [➙ 81]
 Controller status LEDs [➙ 330]
 Controller status LEDs [➙ 330]
 Powering expanders from the auxiliary power terminals
[➙ 331]
 Wiring the X-BUS interface [➙ 70]
 Wiring an internal sounder [➙ 85]
 Wiring the zone inputs [➙ 81]
8.1
Controller Hardware 42xx\43xx\53xx\63xx
This section describes the controller for the SPC42xx, 43xx, 53 xx and 63xx
models. The SPC5350 and 6350 are described in Controller Hardware SPC5350
and 6350 [➙ 66].
The SPC controller provides 8 on-board wired zones and optional wireless zones.
1
2
3
22
20
19
7
8
9
TX
RX
GND
T1
C
T2
I1
C
I2
I3
C
I4
I5
C
I6
I7
C
I8
19
5
6
0V
12 V
SH
2B
2A
1B
1A
12 V
OP6
OP5
OP4
NC
COM
NO
BHO
TR
IN –
IN +
EXP –
EXP+
+–
21
4
18
17
16
15 14
13
12
10
11
1 Optional wireless
module
The controller PCB can be factory fitted with a wireless module for use
with wireless (868 MHz) sensors.
2 SPC status LEDs
These 7 LEDs display the status of various system parameters as
64
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Controller hardware
Controller Hardware 42xx\43xx\53xx\63xx
8
described on page [➙ 330].
3 AC power input
A/C Mains Input:
The mains AC input voltage is applied to this 2-pin connection via a
transformer contained in the SPC enclosure. The earth lead from the
mains supply is wired to a connection point on the metal cabinet.
Clock Reference*:
A clock reference signal can also be applied to this 2-pin connector to
maintain accurate system time.
4 Reset button

To reset the controller:
–

Press this switch once.
To reset the programming settings to default and reboot the
controller:
–
Hold down the button until you are asked if a factory reset is
desired.
–
Select YES to reset to factory defaults.
Warning: Defaulting the controller to factory settings deletes all
configuration files, including backups, stored on the controller. All isolates
and inhibits are also deleted. It is recommended you backup your
configuration to a PC before defaulting the controller.
Note: This feature is not available if engineer lockout is enabled.
5 Earth connection
terminal
This terminal is not required and should not be connected.
6 Auxiliary 12 V output
The SPC controller provides an auxiliary 12 V DC output that can be
used to supply power to expanders and devices such as latches, bells,
etc. See page [➙ 331]. The maximum deliverable current is 750 mA.
Please Note: The amount of current drawn is subject to the amount of
time to be held up under battery conditions.
7 X-BUS interface
This is the SPC communications bus used to network expanders
together on the system. See page [➙ 70]. SPC4000 only has 1 X-BUS
interface.
8 On-board outputs
Outputs OP4, OP5, and OP6 are 12 V open collector resistive outputs
that share a 400 mA current rating with the auxiliary 12 V output. If the
outputs are not connected to the 12 V of the controller and are powered
from an external power source the 0 V of the power source needs to be
connected to the controller 0 V and the external power source cannot
exceed 12 V.
9 Relay output
The SPC controller provides a 1 A, single-pole, changeover relay that
can be used to drive the strobe output on the external bell.
10 Internal bell / external Internal and external bell outputs (INT+, INT-, EXT+, EXT-) are resistive
bell
outputs with a 400 mA current rating. The BHO (Bell Hold Off), TR
(Tamper Return), and EXT outputs are used to connect an external bell
to the controller. The INT+ and INT- terminals are used to connect to
internal devices such as an internal sounder. See page [➙ 85].
11 Zone inputs
The controller provides 8 on-board zone inputs that can be monitored
using a variety of supervision configurations. These configurations can
be programmed from system programming. The default configuration is
Dual End of Line (DEOL) using resistor values of 4K7. See page [➙ 81].
12 Tamper terminals
The controller provides 2 additional tamper input terminals that can be
connected to auxiliary tamper devices to provide increased tamper
protection. These terminals should be shorted when not in use.
13 Serial port 2 terminal
block
Serial port 2 terminal block (TX, RX, GND) may be used to interface to
an external modem or PC terminal program. Serial port 2 shares a
communications channel with the back-up modem. If a back-up modem
is installed, ensure that no devices are connected to this serial port.
4000
14
IP
Ethernet connectivity
LEDs
15
IP
Ethernet interface
The 2 Ethernet LEDs indicate the status of the Ethernet connection. The
left LED indicates data activity on the Ethernet port; the right LED
indicates the Ethernet link is active.
The Ethernet interface provides for the connection of a PC to the
controller for the purposes of programming the system.
65
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
8
Controller hardware
Controller Hardware SPC5350 and 6350
16 USB interface
This USB interface is used to access browser programming or a terminal
program.
17 Serial port 2
This RS232 serial port may be used to interface to an external modem or
PC terminal program. Serial port 2 shares a communications channel
with the back-up modem. If a back-up modem is installed, ensure no
devices are connected to this serial port.
4000
18 Serial port 1
This RS232 serial port may be used to interface to an X10 protocol
device.
19 Optional plug-in
modules
A primary (left slot) and back-up (right slot) module can be connected to
the controller. These modules can be GSM or PSTN modems offering
increased communication functionality. The back-up modem should not
be connected if serial port 2 interface is connected to an external modem
or other device.
20 Front tamper
This on-board front tamper (switch & switch) provides the cabinet tamper
protection.
Note: The front tamper is not used in the G5 housing.
21 Battery selector
J12: Fit jumper for 17 Ah battery use and remove for 7 Ah battery.
Please Note: This selector is only available on 2.3 revision controller
PCB.
(Not applicable for SPC5350 and SPC5360 panels)
22 Auxiliary power input
12 v input from battery or PSU**.
* Default setup for SPC5350 and SPC5360 panels
** PSU only applies to SPC5350 and SPC6350 panels.
8.2
Controller Hardware SPC5350 and 6350
This section describes the SPC5350 and SPC6350.
66
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Controller hardware
Controller Hardware SPC5350 and 6350
8
1 Optional wireless
module
The controller PCB can be factory fitted with a wireless module for use
with wireless (868 MHz) sensors.
2 SPC status LEDs
These 7 LEDs display the status of various system parameters as
described on page [➙ 330].
3 Clock Reference
A clock reference signal can also be applied to this 2-pin connector to
maintain accurate system time.
Connect to Clock Reference CN17 on SPCP355 Smart PSU.
4 Reset button

To reset the controller:
–

Press this switch once.
To reset the programming settings to default and reboot the
controller:
–
Hold down the button until you are asked if a factory reset is
desired.
–
Select YES to reset to factory defaults.
Warning: Defaulting the controller to factory settings deletes all
configuration files, including backups, stored on the controller. All isolates
and inhibits are also deleted. It is recommended you backup your
configuration to a PC before defaulting the controller.
Note: This feature is not available if engineer lockout is enabled.
5 Earth connection
terminal
This terminal is not required and should not be connected.
6 X-BUS interface
This is the SPC communications bus used to network expanders
together on the system. See page [➙ 70].
Terminals 1B and 1A must be connected to SPCP355 I/O Expander
terminals 2B and 2A, respectively
Terminals 2A and 2B must be connected to terminals 2A and 2B,
respectively, of the next expander on the X-BUS.
7 On-board outputs
Outputs OP4, OP5, and OP6 are 12 V open collector resistive outputs
with a 300 mA current rating.
The OP4 load must be connected to the SPCP355 Smart PSU.
8 Relay output
The SPC controller provides a 1 A, single-pole, changeover relay that
can be used to drive the strobe output on the external bell.
9 Bell Hold-Off (BHO)
and Tamper Return
(TR)
The BHO (Bell Hold Off) and TR (Tamper Return) (and EXT output) are
used to connect an external bell to the controller. See page [➙ 85].
10 Internal Bell
(negative)
The INT- terminal is used to connect to internal devices such as an
internal sounder. The power for the internal sounder must be connected
to the SPCP355 Smart PSU.
11 External Bell
(negative)
The Ext- terminal is used to connect to external devices such as an
external bell. The power for the external sounder must be connected to
the SPCP355 Smart PSU.
12 Do not use.
Do not use.
13 Zone inputs
The controller provides 8 on-board zone inputs that can be monitored
using a variety of supervision configurations. These configurations can
be programmed from system programming. The default configuration is
Dual End of Line (DEOL) using resistor values of 4K7. See page [➙ 81].
14 Tamper terminals
The controller provides 2 additional tamper input terminals that can be
connected to auxiliary tamper devices to provide increased tamper
protection. These terminals should be shorted when not in use.
15 Serial port 2 terminal
block
Serial port 2 terminal block (TX, RX, GND) may be used to interface to
an external modem or PC terminal program. Serial port 2 shares a
communications channel with the back-up modem. If a back-up modem
is installed, ensure that no devices are connected to this serial port.
16 Ethernet connectivity
LEDs
The 2 Ethernet LEDs indicate the status of the Ethernet connection. The
left LED indicates data activity on the Ethernet port; the right LED
67
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
8
Controller hardware
Controller Hardware SPC5350 and 6350
indicates the Ethernet link is active.
17 Ethernet interface
The Ethernet interface provides for the connection of a PC to the
controller for the purposes of programming the system.
18 USB interface
This USB interface is used to access browser programming or a terminal
program.
19 Serial port 2
This RS232 serial port may be used to interface to an external modem or
PC terminal program. Serial port 2 shares a communications channel
with the back-up modem. If a back-up modem is installed, ensure no
devices are connected to this serial port.
20 Serial port 1
This RS232 serial port may be used to interface to an X10 protocol
device.
21 Optional plug-in
modules
A primary (left slot) and back-up (right slot) module can be connected to
the controller. These modules can be GSM or PSTN modems offering
increased communication functionality. The back-up modem should not
be connected if serial port 2 interface is connected to an external modem
or other device.
22 Real-time clock
battery
Battery for real-time clock (RTC).
23 Auxiliary power input
12 v input from A1 on SPCP355 Smart PSU.
See also
 Powering expanders from the auxiliary power terminals
[➙ 331]
68
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Door Expander
9
9 Door Expander
The two door expander can handle up to two doors and two card readers.
Configuration of the operation mode is done via the two door I/Os. Each of the two
door I/Os is responsible for the functionality of two inputs and one output of the
door controller. A specific door number can be assigned to a door I/O, which gives
the inputs and output predefined functionality. If no door number is assigned to
neither of the door I/Os (option “Zones” is selected), the inputs and outputs of the
door controller can be used like inputs and outputs on the control panel. Thus, no
access functionality is available on this two door controller.
If a door number is assigned only to the first door I/O of the two door controller, the
first reader is used as entry reader for this door. If a second reader is available, it is
used as exit reader for the configured door. Two inputs and one output have
predefined functionality and two inputs and one output can be configured by the
user. Additionally, the door position sensor input of the first door can be used as
intrusion zone but only with limited functionality.
If a door number is assigned to each of the two door I/Os, the two doors are
handled independently. The first card reader is used as entry reader for the first
door and the second card reader is used as entry reader for the second door. All
inputs and outputs have predefined functionality. The door position sensor inputs of
the two doors can additionally be used as intrusion zones but only with limited
functionality.
Refer to the Appendix [➙ 352] for details of currently supported card readers and
card formats.
Each free zone number can be assigned to the zones. But the assignment is not
fixed. If number 9 was assigned to a zone, the zone and an input expander with
the address 1 is connected to the X-Bus (which is using the zone numbers 916).The assigned zone from the two door controller will be moved to the next free
zone number. Configuration will be adapted accordingly.
69
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
10
Wiring the system
Wiring the X-BUS interface
10 Wiring the system
10.1
Wiring the X-BUS interface
The X-BUS interface provides for the connection of expanders to the controller.
The X-BUS can be wired in a number of different configurations depending on the
installation requirements. The X-BUS interface baud rate is 307 kb.
NOTICE
The X-BUS is an RS-485 bus with a baud rate of 307 kb. The full performance is
only supported in loop [➙ 71] and spur [➙ 72] wiring configuration (best signal
quality due to daisy chain of isolated sections with 1 transmitter / 1 receiver and
balanced terminating resistors on each end).
The performance in star [➙ 73] or multi-drop [➙ 73] configuration wiring is limited
due to non-optimal conditions of the RS-485 bus specification (reduced signal
quality due to multiple receivers / transmitters in parallel with unbalanced
terminating resistors).
NOTICE
It’s strongly recommended to use loop [➙ 71] or spur [➙ 72] configuration.
The table below shows the maximum distances between controller / expander or
expander / expander for all cable types in loop and spur configuration.
Cable Type
Distance
CQR standard alarm cable
200 m
UTP Category: 5 (solid core)
400 m
Belden 9829
400 m
IYSTY 2 x 2 x 0.6 (min)
400 m
Each device has 4 terminals (1A, 1B, 2A, 2B) for connection to expanders via the
X-BUS cable. The controller initiates a detection procedure on power up to
determine the number of expanders connected on the system and the topology in
which they are connected.
70
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Wiring the system
Wiring the X-BUS interface
2A 2B
10
1A 1B
1
2A
2B
1A
2
1B
3
1A 1B
2A 2B
Wiring expander
1 Previous expander
2 Next expander
3 SPC controller
Most expanders are equipped with additional terminals 3A/3B and 4A/4B for
branch expander wiring. See page [➙ 79] for instructions on branch expander
wiring.
10.1.1
Loop configuration
NOTICE
4000
The SPC42xx/43xx doesn’t support loop configuration (only 1 X-BUS
port).
NOTICE
All expanders/keypads are fitted with a termination jumper by default. In loop
configuration it’s imperative to have these jumpers fitted.
The loop (or ring) cabling method offers the highest security by providing fault
tolerant communications on the X-BUS. All keypads and expanders are supervised
and in case of a X-BUS fault or break, the system continues to operate and all
71
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
10
Wiring the system
Wiring the X-BUS interface
detectors are monitored. This is achieved by connecting 1A, 1B on the controller to
2A, 2B on the first keypad or expander. The wiring continues with connection 1A,
1B to 2A, 2B on the next expander and so on to the last keypad or expander. The
last connection is 1A, 1B of the last expander to 2A, 2B of the controller. See wiring
configuration in the figure below.
1 Controller
2-4 Expanders
10.1.2
Spur configuration
NOTICE
SPC52xx/53xx/63xx supports 2 spurs (2 X-BUS ports).
SPC42xx/43xx supports 1 spur (1 X-BUS port).
NOTICE
All expanders/keypads are fitted with a termination jumper by default. In spur
configuration it is imperative to have these jumpers fitted.
The spur (or open loop) cabling method offers a high level of fault tolerance and
may be more convenient on certain installations. In the case of a X-BUS fault or
break, all expanders and detectors up to the fault continue to be supervised.
In this configuration, the SPC controller uses a single the X-BUS port (1A/1B or
2A/2B) to support a group of expanders. See wiring configuration in the figure
below. The last expander in an open loop configuration is not wired back to the
controller and can be identified by the fast LED flashing light (one flash every 0.2
seconds approx) when in Full Engineer programming.
In automatic mode, the expander numbering commences at the expander nearest
to the controller and ends with the expander connected farthest from the controller.
E.g. if 6 expanders are connected in an open loop configuration, then the nearest
expander on the X-BUS connection is expander 1, the second nearest expander is
2, etc. ending with the expander wired farthest from the controller, which is
expander 6.
72
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Wiring the system
Wiring the X-BUS interface
10
All expanders/keypads are fitted with termination jumpers, as default, allowing
termination on all the devices. This is imperative for the spur (chain) configuration,
as the jumper acts as a resisting terminator cancelling echoes on the line.
Within the loop wiring configuration all expanders/keypads are fitted with a jumper,
as default, allowing termination on the device.
Spur configuration
1 Controller
2-4 Expanders
10.1.3
Star and multi-drop configuration
NOTICE
Please read the section for wiring examples [➙ 77] and the section Shielding
[➙ 78] before starting the installation.
The star and multi-drop cabling methods enables takeover of existing wirings with
four-core cables in small buildings (typically homes) with low electrical noise
environment. These wiring methods are limited to the specifications below:
SPC42xx/SPC43xx
SPC52xx/SPC53xx/SPC63xx
Max. expanders/keypads
8
16 (8 per X-BUS port)
Total cable length
200 m
200 m
NOTICE
The performance in star or multi-drop configuration wiring is limited due to nonoptimal conditions of the RS-485 bus specification (reduced signal quality due to
multiple receivers/transmitters in parallel with unbalanced terminating resistors).
73
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
10
Wiring the system
Wiring the X-BUS interface
Star configuration
NOTICE
All expanders/keypads are fitted with a termination jumper by default. In star
configuration it’s imperative to remove these jumpers.
A star configuration is established when multiple expanders are wired back to the
same X-BUS port on the SPC controller. Depending on controller type 2 ports may
exist (1A/1B, 2A/2B), however only one port (1A/1B) is to be used on each keypad
or expander.
In the case of a X-BUS break the single will be disconnected, all other expanders
and detectors continue to be supervised. A short in the cable renders all expanders
disabled.
Star configuration
74
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Wiring the system
Wiring the X-BUS interface
10
Star configuration 2
1 SPC Controller
2-4 Expanders
Multi-drop configuration
NOTICE
All expanders/keypads are fitted with a termination jumper by default. In multidrop configuration it’s imperative to remove these jumpers with exception of last
keypad or expander.
The multi-drop configuration varies in that each expander uses the same
communication channel as it wires onto the next expander, with all expanders
using the same input channel. See multi-drop configuration in the second figure.
In the case of a X-BUS break, all expanders and detectors up to the fault continues
to be supervised. A short in the cable renders all expanders disabled.
Multi-drop configuration
75
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
10
Wiring the system
Wiring the X-BUS interface
Multi-drop configuration 2
1 SPC controller
2-4 Expanders
10.1.3.1
Examples of correct wiring
Star wiring
76
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Wiring the system
Wiring the X-BUS interface
10
Multi-drop wiring
Mixed wiring
10.1.3.2
Examples of incorrect wiring
NOTICE
A mix of star and multi-drop configuration is only allowed if the star point is at the
controller X-BUS port. In this case, all expanders/keypads must be wired in multidrop configuration without any other star points in the wiring.
77
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
10
Wiring the system
Wiring the X-BUS interface
Not allowed wiring with a second star point
NOTICE
If the mix of star and multi-drop configuration is not properly wired the reduced
signal quality may lead to slow reaction time of connected devices (e.g. keypad
operation) or even loss of communication to devices. If such behavior is observed
a wiring in loop OR star configuration is strongly recommended.
10.1.4
Shielding
The shielding terminals (SHLD) should only be used for cables types with
shielding (e.g. Belden 9829). If shielding is required (i.e. sites with high electric
field interference): connect the cable shield to the SHLD terminals on the
controller and all networked expanders. If the shield needs to be connected to
earth then a cable needs to be connected from the SHLD terminal on the
controller to the chassis earth stud. Do NOT earth the SHLD terminal on any of
the expanders.
NOTICE
For star and multi-drop wiring
It’s not recommended to use shielded cables due to disadvantageous electrical
characteristics (higher capacitance) in star and multi-drop wiring configuration.
However, if shielding is required (i.e. sites with high electric field interference) a
new wiring in proper spur or loop configuration with appropriate installation cable
configuration has to be done.
78
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Wiring the system
Wiring of branch expander
10.1.5
10
Cable Map
Identification and numbering order for expanders and keypads differ depending on
automatic or manual addressing of the expanders. For information on manual and
automatic configuration, see page [➙ 116].
For a system with manual addressing, expanders and keypads have a separate
numbering sequence and are defined by the engineer manually. I.e., expanders
are numbered 01, 02, 03, and so on as desired. Using same numbers, keypads
may be numbered as desired.
In the manual configuration, the system automatically allocates zones to each
expander. For this reason, devices with no zones, such as 8 output expanders
should be addressed last.
For a system with automatic addressing, expanders and keypads belong to the
same numbering group and are assigned by the controller. I.e., expanders and
keypads are together numbered 01, 02, 03, in the order that they are detected
relative to the location of the controller.
10.2
Wiring of branch expander
The wiring of the X-BUS interface with 8 terminals 1A/1B to 4A/4B provides for the
connection of an additional branch expander.
If the branch is not used then the terminals 1A/1B are used to connect to the next
expander/keypad. Terminals 3A/3B and 4A/4B are then not used.
The following modules have branch expander wiring capability (additional terminals
3A/B and 4A/B):
 8 Input / 2 Output Expander
 8 Output Expander
 PSU Expander
 Wireless Expander
 2-door Expander
79
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
10
Wiring the system
Wiring the system ground
1A 1B
1
2A
2
2B
2A
1A
2B
1B
SHLD
1A
4A
1B
4B
3A
3B
3
1A 1B
2A 2B
4
Wiring of a branch expander
1 Previous expander
2 Expander connected to branch
3 Next expander
4 Expander with branch
10.3
Wiring the system ground
0V of Smart PSU's, Keypads and Expanders must be connected to the SPC
controller 0V (System GND).
10.4
Wiring the relay output
The SPC controller has one on-board 1 A single pole changeover relay that can be
assigned to any of the SPC system outputs. This relay output can switch a rated
voltage of 30 V DC (non-inductive load).
When the relay is activated the common terminal connection (COM) is switched
from the Normally Closed terminal (NC) to the Normally Open terminal (NO).
80
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Wiring the system
Wiring the zone inputs
10
Standard wiring
NO Normally open terminal
COM Common terminal connection
NC Normally closed terminal
10.5
Wiring the zone inputs
The SPC controller has 8 on-board zone inputs. By default these inputs are
monitored using end of line supervision. The installer can choose from any of the
following configurations when wiring the inputs:
 No End of Line (NEOL)
 Single End of Line (SEOL)
 Dual End of Line (DEOL)
 Anti-masking PIR
81
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
10
Wiring the system
Wiring the zone inputs
Default configuration (DEOL 4K7)
1 Tamper
2 Alarm
3 EOL 4K7
4 EOL 4K7
1
2
3
4
5
SPC
I1
6
COM
Anti-Masking PIR configuration
1 Tamper
2 Alarm
3 EOL 4K7
4 Fault
5 EOL 2K2
6 EOL 4K7
The following table shows the resistance ranges associated with each
configuration.
Single EOLs
EOL Type
Quiescent
Alarm
Min
Nom
Max
Min
Nom
Max
NONE
0Ω
(-100%)
150Ω
300Ω
(+100%)
300Ω
(+100%)
N/A
Infinite
SINGLE_1K
700Ω
1kΩ
1.3kΩ
23kΩ
N/A
Infinite
82
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Wiring the system
Wiring the zone inputs
(-30%)
10
(+30%)
SINGLE_1K5
1.1kΩ
(-27%)
1.5kΩ
2.1kΩ
(+40%)
23kΩ
N/A
Infinite
SINGLE_2K2
1.6kΩ
(-28%)
2.2kΩ
2.9kΩ
(+32%)
23kΩ
N/A
Infinite
SINGLE_4K7
3.1kΩ
(-22%)
4.7kΩ
6.3kΩ
(+24%)
23kΩ
N/A
Infinite
SINGLE_10K
7kΩ
(-30%)
10kΩ
13kΩ
(+30%)
23kΩ
N/A
Infinite
SINGLE_12K
8.5kΩ
(-30%)
12kΩ
15.5kΩ
(+30%)
23kΩ
N/A
Infinite
Dual EOLs with PIR Masking and Fault
EOL Type
Quiescent
Alarm
Min
Nom
Max
Min
Nom
Max
Mask_1K_1K_6K8
(1K / 1K / 6K8)
700Ω
(-30%)
1kΩ
1.3kΩ
(+30%)
1.5kΩ
(-25%)
2kΩ
2.5kΩ
(+25%)
Mask_1K_1K_2K2
(1K / 1K / 2K2)
700Ω
(-30%)
1kΩ
1.3kΩ
(+30%)
1.5kΩ
(-25%)
2kΩ
2.6kΩ
(+30%)
4.7kΩ
5.6kΩ
(+20%)
8.4kΩ
(-11%)
9.4kΩ
10.3kΩ
(+10%)
Mask_4K7_4K7_2K2 3.9kΩ
(4K7 / 4K7 / 2K2)
(-18%)
EOL Type
Fault
Masking
Min
Nom
Max
Min
Nom
Max
Mask_1K_1K_6K8
2700Ω
(-69%)
8.8kΩ
12.6kΩ
(+20%)
-
-
-
Mask_1K_1K_2K2
2.8k
(-13%)
3.2k
3.6k
(+13%)
3.8k
(-10%)
4.2k
4.8k
(+15)
Mask_4K7_4K7_2K2
6k
(-14%)
6.9k
7.8k
(+14%)
10.8k
(-7%)
11.6k
12.6k
(+9%)
Dual EOLs
EOL Type
Quiescent
Alarm
Min
Nom
Max
Min
Nom
Max
DUAL_1K0_470
400Ω
(-20%)
470Ω
700kΩ
(+40%)
1.1kΩ
(-27%)
1.5kΩ
2kΩ
(+34%)
DUAL_1K0_1K0
700Ω
(-30%)
1kΩ
1.3kΩ
(+30%)
1.5kΩ
(-25%)
2kΩ
2.6kΩ
(+30%)
DUAL_1k0_2k2
1.6kΩ
(-28%)
2.2kΩ
2.9kΩ
(+32%)
2.3kΩ
(-29%)
3.2kΩ
4.2kΩ
(+32%)
DUAL_1k5_2k2
1.6kΩ
(-28%)
2.2kΩ
2.9kΩ
(+32%)
2.7kΩ
(-28%)
3.7kΩ
4.8kΩ
(+30%)
DUAL_2K2_2K2
1.6kΩ
(-28%)
2.2kΩ
2.9kΩ
(+32%)
3.4kΩ
(-23%)
4.4kΩ
5.6kΩ
(+28%)
DUAL_2k2_4k7
4.1kΩ
(-13%)
4.7kΩ
5.4kΩ
(+15%)
6kΩ
(-14%)
6.9kΩ
7.9kΩ
(+15%)
DUAL_2K7_8K2
7.2 kΩ
(-13%)
8.2kΩ
9.2kΩ
(+13%)
9.9kΩ
(-10%)
10.9kΩ
11.9kΩ
(+10%)
DUAL_3K0_3K0
2.1kΩ
3.0kΩ
3.9kΩ
4.5kΩ
6kΩ
7.5kΩ
83
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
10
Wiring the system
Wiring an external SAB bell
(-30%)
(+30%)
(-25%)
(+25%)
DUAL_3K3_3K3
2.3kΩ
(-26%)
3.3kΩ
4.3kΩ
(+31%)
4.9kΩ
(-26%)
6.6kΩ
8.3kΩ
(+26%)
DUAL_3K9_8K2
7.0 kΩ
(-15%)
8.2kΩ
9.5kΩ
(+16%)
10.5kΩ
(-14%)
12.1kΩ
13.8kΩ
(+15%)
DUAL_4K7_2K2
1.6kΩ
(-28%)
2.2KΩ
2.9kΩ
(+32%)
5kΩ
(-28%)
6.9kΩ
8.8kΩ
(+28%)
DUAL_4K7_4K7
3.3kΩ
(-30%)
4.7kΩ
6.1kΩ
(+30%)
7kΩ
(-26%)
9.4kΩ
11.9kΩ
(+27%)
DUAL_5K6_5K6
4.0kΩ
(-26%)
5.6kΩ
7.2kΩ
(+29%)
8.3kΩ
(-26%)
11.2kΩ
14.1kΩ
(+26%)
DUAL_6K8_4K7
3.3kΩ
(-30%)
4.7kΩ
6.1kΩ
(+30%)
8.1kΩ
(-30%)
11.5kΩ
14.9kΩ
(+30%)
DUAL_2k2_10K
9.2kΩ
(-8%)
10kΩ
10.8kΩ
(+8%)
11.3 kΩ
(-8%)
12.2kΩ
13.2kΩ
(+9%)
DUAL_10k_10k
7.5kΩ
(-25%)
10kΩ
12.5kΩ
(+25%)
17kΩ
(-15%)
20kΩ
23kΩ
(+15%)
For all EOL types, a resistance below 300Ω is considered a short. If the
resistance is not within the thresholds stated, this is treated as a disconnection.
10.6
Wiring an external SAB bell
On an external bell to the SPC controller board the relay output is wired to the
strobe input with Bell Hold Off (BHO) and Tamper Return (TR) connected to their
respective inputs on the external bell interface.
A resistor (2K2) is pre-fitted on the controller board between the BHO and TR
terminals. When wiring an external bell, connect this resistor in series from the TR
terminal on the controller to the TR terminal on the external bell interface.
External bell wiring
A Strobe +
B Strobe –
C Hold off
D Tamper return
E Bell F Bell +
84
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Wiring the system
Wiring an internal sounder
10.7
10
Wiring an internal sounder
To wire an internal sounder to the SPC controller connect the IN+ and IN–
terminals directly to the 12 V sounder input.
1
2
Internal sounder wiring (12 V)
IN– IN– (SPC controller)
IN+ IN+ (SPC controller)
10.8
Wiring Glassbreak
SPC supports the RI S 10 D-RS-LED glassbreak interface in combination with
GB2001 glassbreak detectors.
The following diagram shows how the glassbreak interface is wired to the SPC
controller for power, or to an 8-in/2-out expander:
For information on wiring the glassbreak interface to a zone, see the productspecific documentation.
For information on wiring the glassbreak sensors to the glassbreak interface, see
the product-specific documentation.
10.9
Installing plug-in modules
2 modems (PSTN or GSM) may be installed on the controller board to increase
functionality. The picture below shows the 2 slots available for each modem, the
primary (left) slot and the back-up (right) slot.
If both modem slots are available, always install the plug-in module in the primary
slot; the system always attempts to make PSTN or GSM calls on a modem
installed on the primary slot before attempting to use the back-up slot.
85
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
10
Wiring the system
Installing plug-in modules
WARNING
Modems are not plug and play. You must log on to the panel as Full Engineer,
then power the controller board down before installing, removing or moving
modems from one position to the other. After completing the modem task,
reconnect the system to the power supply and log on to the controller as Full
Engineer again. Configure and save the configuration. Failure to follow this
process results in a CRC error.
Plug-in modules
1 Wireless receiver slot
2 Primary modem slot
3 Back-up modem slot
For installation please refer to the corresponding Installation Instruction.
86
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Powering up the SPC controller
Powering from battery only
11
11 Powering up the SPC controller
The SPC controller has two power sources, the mains supply and the integral
standby battery. A qualified electrician should undertake connection to the mains
and the mains supply should be connected from a spur that can be isolated. See
Page [➙ 344] for full details of conductor sizes / fuse ratings etc.
The SPC should be powered from the mains first and then the internal standby
battery. For compliance to EN only one battery should be fitted of the appropriate
capacity.
11.1
Powering from battery only
It is recommended that when powering a system from battery only, the battery
should be in a fully charged state (>13.0 V). The system will not power up when
using a battery with less than 12 V and no mains is applied.
NOTICE
The battery will continue to power the system until deep discharge level (10.5 V to
10.8 V) has been detected. The time duration that the system will hold up on
battery will depend on the external loading and Ah rating of the battery.
87
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
12
Keypad user interface
SPCK420/421
12 Keypad user interface
The following keypad models are available:
 SPCK420/421 — referred to throughout this document as the LCD Keypad
 SPCK620/623 — referred to throughout this document as the Comfort Keypad
12.1
12.1.1
SPCK420/421
Introduction
The LCD keypad is a wall-mounted interface that allows:
 Engineers to program the system through the Engineer Programming menus
(password protected) and to set/unset the system; a user can control the
system on a day-to-day basis.
 Users to enter User Programming menus (password protected), and to perform
operational procedures (set/unset) on the system. (Please refer to the
SPCK420/421 User Manual for more details of user programming.)
The LCD keypad unit includes an integral front tamper switch and has a 2 line x 16
character display. It features an easy-to-use navigation key to assist in locating
required programming options, and has 2 context sensitive soft keys (left and right)
for selecting the required menu or program setting. 3 LEDs on the keypad provide
an indication of AC power, system alerts, and communications status.
The LCD keypad may be factory fitted with a Portable ACE (PACE) proximity
device reader (see page [➙ 341]).
88
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Keypad user interface
12
SPCK420/421
2
1
1
5
4
ghi
6
7
pqrs
ok
7
2
abc
5
jkl
8
3
def
6
mno
9
tuv
wxyz
0
#
8
3
4
3
LCD keypad
1
LCD display
The keypad display (2 lines x 16 characters) shows all alert and warning
messages and provides a visual interface for programming the system
(engineer programming only). The display can be adjusted for contrast and
under which conditions the backlight comes on.
2
Alphanumeric
keys
Alphanumeric keypad allow for both text and numeric data entry during
programming. Alphabetic characters are selected by applying the appropriate
number of key presses. To switch between upper and lower case characters,
press the hash (#) key. To enter a numeric digit, hold down the appropriate
key for 2 seconds.
3
Leverage access
tabs
The leverage access tabs provide access to the keypad back assembly clips.
Users can unhinge these clips from the front assembly by inserting a 5mm
screwdriver into the recesses and pushing gently.
4
Back assembly
securing screw
This screw secures the front and back assemblies on the keypad. This screw
must be removed to open the keypad.
5
LED status
indicators
The LED status indicators provide information on the current status of the
system as detailed in the table below.
6
Soft function keys The left and right soft function keys are context sensitive keys to navigate
through menus/programming.
7
Proximity device
receiver area
If the keypad has been fitted with a proximity device receiver (see page
[➙ 341]), users should present the Portable ACE Fob to within 1 cm of this
area to SET/UNSET the system.
8
Multi-functional
navigation Key
The multi-functional navigation key in combination with the keypad display
provides an interface for programming the system.
LED
Status
89
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
12
Keypad user interface
SPCK420/421
AC mains
(Green)
Indicates the presence or failure of the mains supply
FLASHING: AC mains fault detected
STEADY: AC mains OK
System alert
Indicates a system alert
(Yellow)
FLASHING: System alert detected; display indicates the location and nature
of alert. If the system is SET, then NO indication is given of system alerts
OFF: No alert detected; If a keypad is assigned to more than one area, LED
does not indicate an alert condition if any of those areas is SET
X-BUS Status
Indicates the status of the X-BUS communications when in FULL ENGINEER
programming
Flashes regularly: (once every 1.5 seconds approx) indicates
communications status is OK
Flashes quickly: (once every 0.25 seconds approx) indicates the keypad is
the last expander on the X-BUS
If the keypad is being installed for the first time and power is supplied to it
before a connection to the controller X-BUS interface is made, the LED
remains in the ON state
(Red)
12.1.2
Using the LCD keypad interface
9
8
7
1
6
2
ok
5
3
4
Keypad display
1 RIGHT SOFT
KEY
This key is used to select the option presented on the right side of the bottom
line display.
Possible values are:
→ SELECT to select the option displayed on the top line
→ ENTER to enter the data displayed on the top line
→ NEXT to view the next alert after the one displayed on the top line
→ CLEAR to clear the alert displayed on the top line
→ SAVE to save a setting
2 OK
The OK button acts as a SELECT key for the menu option displayed on the top
line and also as an ENTER/SAVE key for data displayed on the top line.
3
In Programming mode, the right arrow key advances the user through the
menus in the same way as pressing the SELECT option (right soft key).
In data entry mode, press this key to move the cursor one position to the right.
4
In Programming mode, the down arrow key moves the user to the next
programming option in the same menu level. Continually press this key to
scroll through all programming options available on the current menu level.
In alphanumeric mode, press this key over an upper case character to change
the character to lower case.
90
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Keypad user interface
SPCK420/421
12
When alerts are displayed, the down arrow key moves the user to the next
alert message in the order of priority. (See section on Prioritization of Display
Messages)
5
In Programming mode, the left arrow key returns the user to the previous menu
level. Pressing this key when in the top menu level exits the user from
programming.
In data entry mode, press this key to move the cursor one position to the left.
6
In Programming mode, the up arrow key moves the user to a previous
programming option in the same menu level. Continually press this key to
scroll through all programming options available on the current menu level.
In Alphanumeric mode, press this key over a lower case character to change
the character to upper case.
7 LEFT SOFT
KEY
This key is used to select the option presented on the left side of the bottom
line display.
Possible values are:
→ EXIT to exit programming
→ BACK to return to previous menu
8 BOTTOM LINE
OF DISPLAY
In the IDLE state, this line is blank.
9 TOP LINE OF
DISPLAY
In the IDLE state, displays the current date and time. In Programming mode,
this line displays one of the following:
→ The programming feature to be selected
→ The current setting of the selected feature
→ The nature of the current alert during an alert condition. (See Prioritization of
Display Messages below)
In Programming mode, this line displays options available to the user. These
options align over the left and right soft keys for selection as required.
Prioritization of display messages
Trouble messages and alerts are displayed on the keypad in the following order:
 Zone
– Alarms
– Tamper
– Trouble
 Area Alerts
– Fail to set
– Entry time out
– Code tamper
 System Alerts
– Mains
– Battery
– PSU fault
– Aux fault
– External bell fuse
– Internal bell fuse
– Bell tamper
– Cabinet tamper
– Aux tamper 1
– Aux tamper 2
– Wireless jamming
– Modem 1 fault
– Modem 1 line
– Modem 2 fault
– Modem 2 line
91
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
12
Keypad user interface
SPCK420/421

12.1.3
– Fail to communicate
– User panic
– XBUS cable fault
– XBUS communications fault
– XBUS mains fault
– XBUS battery fault
– XBUS power supply fault
– XBUS fuse fault
– XBUS tamper fault
– XBUS antenna fault
– XBUS wireless jamming
– XBUS panic
– XBUS fire
– XBUS medical
– XBUS Power supply link
– XBUS output tamper
– XBUS Low voltage
– Engineer restore Required
– Autoarm
System information
– Soaked zones
– Open zones
– Area state
– Low battery (sensor)
– Sensor lost
– WPA low battery
– WPA lost
– WPA test overdue
– Camera offline
– Fob low battery
– Xbus over current
– Installer name
– Installer phone
– Engineer enable
– Manufacture enable
– Reboot
– Hardware fault
– Aux over current
– Battery low
– Ethernet link
– System name
Data entry on the LCD keypad
Entering data and navigating the menus on the LCD keypad is facilitated through
the use of the programming interface. The use of the interface for each type of
operation is detailed below.
Entering numeric values
In Numeric Entry mode, only the numeric digits (0 - 9) can be entered.
92
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Keypad user interface
SPCK620/623



12
To move the position of the cursor one character to the left and right
respectively, press the left and right arrow keys.
To exit from the feature without saving, press the BACK menu key.
To save the programmed setting press ENTER or OK.
Entering text
In Text Entry mode, both alphabetic characters (A-Z) and numeric digits (0 – 9) can
be entered.
 To enter an alphabetic character, press the relevant key the required number of
times.
 To enter a language specific special character (ä, ü, ö…) press button 1 to
cycle through the special characters.
 To enter a space + special characters (+, -./[ ]…) press button 0.
 To enter a digit, hold the relevant key down for 2 seconds and release.
 To move the position of the cursor one character to the left and right
respectively, press the left and right arrow keys.
 To exit from the feature without saving, press BACK.
 To save the programmed setting press ENTER or OK.
 To change the case of an alphabetic character, press the up/down arrow keys
when the character is highlighted by the cursor.
 To toggle between upper and lower case for all subsequent characters, press
the hash (#) key.
 To delete character to the left of the cursor, press the star key(*).
Selecting a programming option
In navigation mode, the Engineer/User selects one of a number of pre-defined
programming options from a list.
 To scroll through the list of options available for selection, press the up and
down arrow keys.
 To exit from the feature without saving, press BACK.
 To save the selected option, press SAVE or OK.
12.2
12.2.1
SPCK620/623
Introduction
The Comfort keypad is a wall-mounted interface that allows:
 Engineers to program the system through the Engineer Programming menus
(password protected) and to set/unset the system; a user can control the
system on a day-to-day basis.
 Users to enter User Programming menus (password protected), and to perform
operational procedures (set/unset) on the system. (Please refer to the
SPC620/623 User Manual for more details of user programming)
The SPCK620 is equipped with soft keys and large graphical LCD for easy
operation. The functionality can be enhanced with key switch expander SPCE110
or indication expander SPCE120.
The SPCK623 is equipped with a proximity card reader (125 kHz EM 4102) for
easy user access, soft keys, large graphical LCD and voice annunciation support.
The functionality can be enhanced with key switch expander SPCE110 or
indication expander SPCE120.
93
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
12
Keypad user interface
SPCK620/623
1
LED status indicators
The LED status indicators provide information on
the current status of the system as detailed in the
table below.
2
LCD display
The keypad display shows all alert and warning
messages and provides a visual interface for
programming the system (engineer programming
only). (See section on Display Message
Prioritization) The display can be configured under
which conditions the backlight comes on.
3
Soft function keys
Context sensitive keys to navigate through
menus/programming.
4
Enter key
Confirm display or input.
5
Back menu key
 Go back in the menu
Reset buzzers, siren and alarms in the memory.
6
Proximity device receiver area
Only SPCK 623: If the keypad has been fitted with
a proximity device receiver, users should present
the Portable ACE Fob to within 1 cm of this area.
7
Alphanumeric keys
Alphanumeric keypad allow for both text and
numeric data entry during programming. Alphabetic
characters are selected by applying the appropriate
number of key presses. To switch between upper
and lower case characters, press the hash (#) key.
To enter a numeric digit, hold down the appropriate
key for 2 seconds.
8
Multi-functional navigation key
Navigation through menus and to scroll through
alert messages. (See Display Message
94
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Keypad user interface
SPCK620/623
12
Prioritization below)
9
Information key
Displays information.
Prioritization of display messages
Trouble messages and alerts are displayed on the keypad in the following order:
 Zone
– Alarms
– Tamper
– Trouble
 Area Alerts
– Fail to set
– Entry time out
– Code tamper
 System Alerts
– Mains
– Battery
– PSU fault
– Aux fault
– External bell fuse
– Internal bell fuse
– Bell tamper
– Cabinet tamper
– Aux tamper 1
– Aux tamper 2
– Wireless jamming
– Modem 1 fault
– Modem 1 line
– Modem 2 fault
– Modem 2 line
– Fail to communicate
– User panic
– XBUS cable fault
– XBUS communications fault
– XBUS mains fault
– XBUS battery fault
– XBUS power supply fault
– XBUS fuse fault
– XBUS tamper fault
– XBUS antenna fault
– XBUS wireless jamming
– XBUS panic
– XBUS fire
– XBUS medical
– XBUS Power supply link
– XBUS output tamper
– XBUS Low voltage
– Engineer restore Required
95
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
12
Keypad user interface
SPCK620/623

12.2.2
– Autoarm
System information
– Soaked zones
– Open zones
– Area state
– Low battery (sensor)
– Sensor lost
– WPA low battery
– WPA lost
– WPA test overdue
– Camera offline
– Fob low battery
– Xbus over current
– Installer name
– Installer phone
– Engineer enable
– Manufacture enable
– Reboot
– Hardware fault
– Aux over current
– Battery low
– Ethernet link
– System name
LED description
Description
Symbol
Information
Color
Operation
Blue
On
Flashing
Off
User
Amber
Flashing
Green
On
Flashing
Alarm
Red
Mains
!
Amber
The system or area cannot be set or
forced set (faults or open zones cannot
be inhibited).
The system or area can be set.
Engineer is on site.
Assigned area is unset.
Assigned area is Partset A / B
Assigned area is fullset
On
Alarm
-
Off
No alarm
On
-
Flashing
Green
The system or area cannot be set.
Forced setting is possible (faults or open
zones can be inhibited).
Off
Flashing
Alert
Description
Trouble
Off
No trouble
On
System ok
Flashing
Mains fault
96
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Keypad user interface
SPCK620/623
Off
12
No bus connection
NOTICE
The LED indications for information, area status, alarm and fault is deactivated in
idle state of the keypad. A valid user PIN has to be entered. It is configurable if
the power indication can be seen in idle state.
12.2.3
Viewing mode description
There are 2 viewing modes (automatic):
 Multi area view: User has access to several areas. Displaying the areas is done
via area groups. If no area group is configured, only the general group “All my
areas” is displayed.
 Single area view: The user has only rights for 1 area. In the single area view,
only one area is displayed in large fonts and can be controlled directly.
NOTICE
The rights of a user can be restricted by the user settings or the settings of the
keypad the user is logging in to. Only if the user and the keypad that is being
used for logging in have the right for an area, the area is displayed. If the user has
the right for several areas but the keypad has only the right for one area, the user
will also see the single area view.
12.2.4
Function keys in idle state
Emergency Keys
Depending on configuration, emergency keys are displayed. A simultaneous
pressing of the keys activates an emergency call.
Panic Alarm
Fire alarm
97
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
12
Keypad user interface
SPCK620/623
Medical Alarm
The activated process depends on the system configuration. Please ask the
installer for details.
Direct Settings
Depending on configuration, the direct set option is displayed. A forced set / part
set without PIN is possible of the area the keypad is assigned to.
98
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Software support tools
13
13 Software support tools
The following PC based software tools are available to remotely manage an SPC
panel:
 SPC Manager
Enables the remote creation, control and modification of access based
functionality within the SPC system.
 SPC Safe
Provides automated remote site administration of an SPC system.
 SPC Remote Maintenance
Provides automated remote monitoring and servicing of an SPC system.
99
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
14
Starting the system
Engineer modes
14 Starting the system
CAUTION
The SPC system must be installed by an authorised installation engineer.
1. Wire the keypad to the X-BUS interface on the controller.
2. Enter Engineer Programming by entering the default Engineer PIN (1111). For
more details, see Engineering PINs [➙ 100].
14.1
Engineer modes
The SPC system works under 2 programming modes for authorised installation
engineers: Full and Soft. In the browser, log off is only permitted in Soft Engineer
mode.
Full Engineer Mode
All alerts, faults and tampers must first be isolated or cleared before exit from the
Full Engineer mode is allowed.
Full Engineer mode provides extensive programming functionality. However,
programming in Full Engineer mode disables all alarm settings, reports and output
programming for the system. For full review of Full Engineer menu options, refer to
page [➙ 108].
[Soft] Engineer mode
Soft Engineer mode provides fewer programming functions and does not affect any
outputs programmed in the system. For full review of [Soft] Engineer menu options,
refer to page [➙ 107].
14.1.1
Engineer PINs
The start up Engineer default programming PIN is ‘1111’.
If an installation is changed from Grade 2 to Grade 3 at any time after start-up, all
PINs are prefixed with a 0. Therefore, the default Engineer PIN will be ‘01111’.
Increasing the number of digits for the PIN (see System Options [➙ 220]) will add
the relevant number of zeros to the front of an existing PIN (for example, 001111
for a 6 digit PIN).
NOTICE
If the default PIN 1111 is enabled, for example, a new SPC installation, you must
change the engineer PIN at the panel. If you do not change your PIN, you will get
an information message forcing you to change your default PIN before logging out
of full engineer mode.
100
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Starting the system
Programming tools
14.2
14
Programming tools
Keypad
The keypad provides quick onsite access to system menus and programming. The
authorised installation engineer must set initial default configurations using the
keypad. Programming of proximity card/device reader and assignment to users
also must be done using the keypad.
SPC Pro
SPC Pro is a software application enabling you to configure SPC systems either
online or offline. The SPC Pro programming tool provides additional advanced
communication and X10 functionality not found on the keypad. Firmware upgrades
can also be performed using SPC Pro.
SPC Pro supports USB, Serial, Ethernet and PSTN/GSM modem connectivity to an
SPC controller.
14.2.1
Fast Programmer
The SPC Fast Programmer is a portable storage device that provides the engineer
with the ability to upload and download configuration files in a quick and convenient
manner. Fast Programmer can be used in conjunction with all of the above
programming tools. For more details, see page [➙ 309].
Fast Programmer may perform firmware upgrades.
14.3
Configuring start-up settings
The following start-up settings can be changed at a later time when programming
the system functionality.
If powering up the panel the version number of the SPC system will be displayed
on the keypad.
Prerequisite:
 To initialize the start-up configuration press the reset button on the PCB for at
least 6 seconds.
1. Press a key on the keypad.
-
Press NEXT after each setting to move to the next setting.
2. Choose the LANGUAGE in which the configuration wizard will be displayed.
3. Choose the appropriate REGION.
-
EUROPE, SWEDEN SWITZERLAND, BELGIUM SPAIN UK IRELAND
ITALY, , , , CANADA, USA
4. Choose a TYPE of installation:
-
DOMESTIC: is appropriate for home use (houses and apartments).
-
COMMERCIAL: provides additional zone types and commercial zone
default descriptions for the first 8 zones.
-
FINANCIAL: is specific for banks and other financial institutions and
includes features such as auto-setting, time locks, interlock groups and a
seismic zone type.
101
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
14
Starting the system
Configuring start-up settings
For more details of default zone descriptions see Domestic, Commercial and
Financial mode default settings [➙ 334].
5. Choose the Security Grade of your installation.
6. LANGUAGE View the default languages available on the system. The following
shows the default languages available for each region:
-
IRELAND/UK -English, French, German
-
EUROPE/SWITZERLAND/SPAIN/FRANCE/GERMANY – English, French,
German, Italian, Spanish
-
BELGIUM – English, Dutch, Flemish, French, German
-
SWEDEN – English, Swedish, Danish, French, German
NOTICE
If the system is defaulted, and the REGION is changed on start up, only the
languages that are currently on the system for the previous REGION will be
available for the new REGION.
7. Select the languages you require for your installation. Selected languages are
prefixed with an asterisk (*). To remove, or select, a language, press hash (#)
on the keypad.
 The unselected languages are deleted from the system and will be
unavailable if you default the system.
 To add other languages, refer to the sections on ‘Upgrading Languages’ for
the keypad, browser and SPC pro.
8. Enter the DATE and TIME.
 The system scans the X-BUS for modems.
9. Enable SPC CONNECT to allow a panel to communicate with
https://www.spcconnect.com once the panel IP address is configured.
10. Enable DHCP to automatically assign an available network IP address to the
panel. If you've enabled SPC CONNECT and DHCP, an SPC CONNECT ATS
is now added to the panel to complete the connection to
https://www.spcconnect.com
11. For DHCP enabled panels, the automatically assigned IP address displays in
the IP ADDRESS menu. If DHCP is not enabled, the default IP address
displays. Choose SELECT to continue. In Engineer Programming mode, under
COMMUNICATIONS, you must manually enter the static IP address for the
panel.
12. Choose the X-BUS addressing mode:
-
MANUAL: is recommended for most installation types, especially when
doing a preconfiguration.
-
AUTO: is recommended only for very small installations.
13. Choose the installation topology: LOOP (Ring) or SPUR (Chain).
 The system scans for the quantity of keypads, expanders, door controllers
and available zone inputs.
14. Press NEXT to scan all X-BUS devices.
102
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Starting the system
Creating system users
14
 PROGRAMMING MODE will be displayed.
 The Start-up setting is complete.
15. Check the alerts in the menu SYSTEM STATUS > ALERTS. Otherwise you will
not be allowed to exit the Engineer Mode.
16. Configure the system by keypad, SPC Pro or web browser.
See also
 Domestic, Commercial and Financial mode default settings
[➙ 334]
14.4
Creating system users
By default the SPC system only allows engineer access on the system. The
engineer must create Users to allow on-site personnel to set, unset, and perform
basic operations on the system as required. Users are restricted to a set of panel
operations by assigning them to specific User Profiles.
The system allows all user PINs within the allowed PIN range i.e. if a 4 digit PIN is
used then all user PINs between 0000 and 9999 would be permissible.
Refer to the section on Adding Users:
The ability to grant manufacturer access to the system (i.e. allow a firmware
upgrade of the panel) is configured as a user right for a user profile. If a user is
going to be enabling firmware upgrades, ensure that the user has the correct
profile for this purpose.
See also
 Engineer PINs [➙ 100]
14.5
Programming the portable ACE
The SPC keypad can be configured with a proximity card/device reader. Users
whose profiles are configured as such may remotely set or unset the system, as
well as conduct programming, depending on the level of profile. When a proximity
device has been programmed on the keypad, the user has the ability to set or
unset the system or enter the user programming by presenting the device within 1
cm of the receiver area on the keypad.
103
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
14
Starting the system
Configuring wireless fob devices
1
2
3
abc
4
ghi
7
pqrs
ok
def
5
6
jkl
mno
8
9
tuv
wxyz
0
#
Receiver area on the keypad
To program a portable ACE on the keypad:
1. Enter the Engineer Programming PIN. (Default PIN is 1111. See Engineer PINs
[➙ 100])
2. Scroll to USERS.
3. Press SELECT.
4. Select EDIT and select USER1 from the list.
5. Scroll to PACE and press SELECT.
6. Toggle for ENABLE and DISABLE of the PACE functionality.
 The keypad flashes PRESENT PACE on the top line display.
7. Position the PACE fob within 1 cm of the receiver area on the keypad.
 The keypad indicates that the device has been registered by displaying PACE
CONFIGURED.
To disable a portable ACE on the system:
1. Enter the Engineer Programming PIN. (Default PIN is 1111. See Engineering
PINs [➙ 100])
2. Scroll to USERS.
3. Press SELECT.
4. Select EDIT and select USER1 from the list.
5. Scroll to PACE and press SELECT.
6. Toggle to DISABLED.
 The keypad indicates UPDATED.
14.6
Configuring wireless fob devices
If an 868 MHz wireless receiver module is installed on the keypad or controller, a
wireless fob device can be programmed via the keypad.
104
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Starting the system
Configuring wireless fob devices
14
To program a wireless fob device on the system:
1. Enter the Engineer Programming PIN (Default PIN is 1111. See Engineering
PINs [➙ 100]).
2. Using the up/down arrow keys, scroll to the USERS option.
3. Press SELECT.
4. Select the EDIT option and press SELECT.
5. Scroll to the preferred user and press SELECT.
6. Scroll to the RF FOB option and press SELECT.
7. Toggle the setting to ENABLED and press SELECT.
 The message PRESS KEY ON FOB flashes on the top line.
8. Position the fob to within 8 meters of the keypad and press one of the keys.
 The message FOB CONFIGURED displays to indicate that the device has
been registered.
To disable the wireless fob device on the system:
1. Enter the Engineer Programming PIN (Default PIN is 1111. See Engineering
PINs [➙ 100]).
2. Using the up/down arrow keys, scroll to the USERS option.
3. Select the EDIT option and press SELECT.
4. Scroll to the preferred user and press SELECT.
5. Scroll to the RF FOB option and press SELECT.
6. Toggle to DISABLED and press SAVE.
If no 868MHz wireless receiver is detected on the system, the RF FOB option is
not displayed in the keypad menu.
Number of RF fobs per user: Only one fob device can be programmed for each
user. To change fob devices among users, repeat the programming procedure for
any new devices. Old fob devices become available for use by different users.
14.6.1
Clearing alerts using the fob
Alerts on the SPC system are normally cleared using the keypad RESTORE
option. Clearing alerts can also be performed by using the wireless fob device.
If an active alert is displayed on the keypad when the system is UNSET, the alert
can be cleared or restored by pressing the UNSET key on the wireless fob five
seconds after the system has been unset.
To enable this functionality, the KEYFOB RESTORE option must be enabled in
System Options:
1. Login to the keypad with an Engineer PIN.
2. Scroll to FULL ENGINEER > OPTIONS.
3. Press SELECT.
4. Scroll to KEYFOB RESTORE and press SELECT.
105
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
14
Starting the system
Configuring wireless fob devices
5. Toggle the setting to ENABLED and press SAVE.
106
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Soft Engineer programming via the keypad
15
15 Soft Engineer programming via the keypad
This section provides [Soft] Engineer programming options using the LCD keypad.
For each menu option, the keypad must be in Engineer programming:
1. Enter a valid Engineer PIN (Default Engineer PIN is 1111. For more details,
see Engineering PINs [➙ 100]).
2. Using the up/down arrow keys, scroll to the desired programming option.
3. It is also possible to select a programming option using the keypad digits, enter
the Engineer programming PIN plus the digit as shown in the table below.
 If you change one of the programming options, the keypad displays UPDATED
momentarily.
1
SETTING
Performs an Unset, Fullset or Partset on the system. See page
2
INHIBIT
Displays a list of the Inhibited zones on the system. See page
3
ISOLATE
Allows the engineer to isolate zones on the system. See page [➙ 147]
4
EVENT LOG
Displays a list of the most recent events on the system. See page [➙ 147]
5
ACCESS LOG
Displays a list of the most recent access to the system. See page
6
ALARM LOG
Displays a list of recent alarms.
7
CHANGE ENG PIN
Allows the engineer to change the Engineer PIN. See page [➙ 148]
8
USERS
Allows the engineer to add, edit or delete users. See page [➙ 148]
9
SMS
Allows the user to add, edit or delete SMS details for users.. See SMS [➙ 153]
See also
 TEST [➙ 143]
 DOOR CONTROL [➙ 155]
 Engineer programming via the keypad [➙ 108]
 INSTALLER TEXT [➙ 155]
 SET DATE/TIME [➙ 155]
 SMS [➙ 153]
107
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
System Status
16 Engineer programming via the keypad
This section provides [Full] Engineer programming options using the LCD keypad
For each menu option, the keypad must be in Full Engineer programming:
1. Enter a valid Engineer PIN (Default Engineer PIN is 1111. For more details,
see Engineering PINs [➙ 100]).
2. Press SELECT for FULL ENGINEER programming.
3. Using the up/down arrow keys, scroll to the desired programming option.
4. A quick select function is implemented. Press # to select a parameter (e.g. a
zone attribute). The selected parameter is displayed with a * (e.g. *Inhibit).
 Upon completion of the programming options, the keypad displays UPDATED
momentarily.
16.1
System Status
The System Status feature displays all faults on the system.
To view these faults:
1. Scroll to SYSTEM STATUS.
2. Press SELECT.
 The status of the following items is displayed.
 Click on each item to display further details.
OPEN ZONES
Displays all open zones.
ALERTS
Displays current alerts on the system.
SOAK
Displays all zones on soak test.
ISOLATIONS
Displays zones that are isolated.
FAIL TO SET
Displays all areas that have failed to set. Select each area to
display details of why the area failed to set.
BATTERY
Displays remaining battery time, voltage and current of
battery. You must enter the Battery capacity and Max current
values in OPTIONS to view the remaining battery time on the
keypad in the event of mains failure. This is indicated under
the STATUS - BATTERY - BATT TIME menu. This menu also
indicates if there is a battery fault.
AUX
Displays voltage and current of auxiliary power.
NOTICE
Users cannot exit from FULL ENGINEER programming if any fault conditions
exist. The first fault will display on the keypad when you attempt to leave engineer
mode. You can view and isolate all faults within the System Status menu under
Alerts and Open Zones.
108
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Options
16.2
16
Options
1. Scroll to OPTIONS and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the desired programming option:
 The programming options displayed in the OPTIONS menu vary depending on
the security grade of the system (see right column)
WARNING
To change the region on your panel, it is strongly recommended that you default
your panel and select a new region as part of the start up wizard.
Variable
Description
Default
SECURITY GRADE
Determines the Security Grade of the SPC Installation.
Grade: 2








Irish and European Regions:
–
EN50131 Grade 2
–
EN50131 Grade 3
–
Unrestricted
Country: n/a
UK Region:
–
PD6662 (EN50131 Grade 2 based)
–
PD6662 (EN50131 Grade 3 based)
–
Unrestricted
Swedish Region:
–
SSF1014:3 Larmclass 1
–
SSF1014:3 Larmclass 2
–
Unrestricted
Belgium Region:
–
TO-14 (EN50131 Grade 2 based)
–
TO-14 (EN50131 Grade 3 based)
–
Unrestricted
Switzerland Region:
–
SWISSI Cat 1
–
SWISSI Cat 2
–
Unrestricted
Spanish Region
–
EN50131 Grade 2
–
EN50131 Grade 3
German Region
–
VdS Class A
–
VdS Class C
–
Unrestricted
France
–
NFtyp2
–
NFtyp3
–
Unrestricted
REGION
Determines the specific regional requirements that the installation complies with. Options
are UK, IRELAND, EUROPE, SWEDEN, SWITZERLAND, BELGIUM, GERMANY and
FRANCE
APPLICATION
Determines whether SPC is being installed for use in a commercial business or a private
residence. Choose between COMMERCIAL (see page [➙ 319]), DOMESTIC (see page
[➙ 318]) or FINANCIAL.
Domestic
109
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Options
Refer to the section System Options [➙ 220] for more details of the following
OPTIONS.
PARTSET A
RENAME
TIMED
ACCESS to E/EXIT
E/EXIT to ALARM
LOCAL
PARTSET B
RENAME
TIMED
ACCESS to E/EXIT
E/EXIT to ALARM
LOCAL
CALL ARC MESSAGE
DISPLAY MESSAGE (ENABLED/DISABLED)
CONFIRMATION
VDS
DD243:
GARDA
EN50131-9
CONFIRM ZONES
Select NO. OF ZONES.
AUTO RESTORE
ENABLED/DISABLED
KEYFOB RESTORE
ENABLED/DISABLED
USER DURESS
DISABLED
PIN +1
PIN +2
RETRIGGER BELL
ENABLED/DISABLED
BELL ON 1ST
ENABLED/DISABLED
BELL ON FTS
ENABLED/DISABLED
STROBE ON FTS
ENABLED/DISABLED
ALARM ON EXIT
ENABLED/DISABLED
Only available in ENGINEER CONFIG mode as setting
is not in accordance with EN50131.
LANGUAGE
SYSTEM LANGUAGE
IDLE STATE :LANGUAGE
PIN DIGITS
4 DIGITS
5 DIGITS
6 DIGITS
7 DIGITS
8 DIGITS
CODED RESTORE
ENABLED/DISABLED
WEB ACCESS
ENABLED/DISABLED
Allows/restricts access to the web browser.
OPEN ZONES
ENABLED/DISABLED
ALLOW ENGINEER
ENABLED/DISABLED
ALLOW MANUFACT. *
ENABLED/DISABLED
SHOW STATE
ENABLED/DISABLED
EOL RESISTANCE
NONE
110
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Options
16
SINGLE 1K
SINGLE 1K5
SINGLE 2K2
SINGLE 4K7
SINGLE 10K
SINGLE 12K
DUAL 1K / 470R
DUAL 1K / 1K
DUAL 2K2 / 1K0
DUAL 2K2 / 1K5
DUAL 2K2 / 2K2
DUAL 2K2 / 4K7
DUAL 2K7 / 8K2
DUAL 2K2/ 10K
DUAL 3K0 / 3K0
DUAL 3K3 / 3K3
DUAL 3K9 / 8K2
DUAL 4K7 / 2K2
DUAL 4K7 / 4K7
DUAL 5K6 / 5K6
DUAL 6K8 / 4K7
DUAL 10K / 10K
MASK_1K_1K_6K8
MASK_1K_1K_2K2
MASK_4K7_4K7_2K2
SMS AUTH MODE
PIN ONLY
CALLER ID ONLY
PIN + CALLER ID
SMS PIN ONLY
SMS PIN + CALLER ID
PACE AND PIN
ENABLED/DISABLED
RESTORE ON UNSET
ENABLED/DISABLED
Note: To comply with PD6662, you must disable this
option.
ENGINEER RESTORE
ENABLED/DISABLED
OFFLINE TAMPER
ENABLED/DISABLED
ENGINEER LOCK
ENABLED/DISABLED
If enabled, system cannot be reset using yellow button
on controller unless an Engineer PIN is input on the
keypad.
SECURE PIN
ENABLED/DISABLED
CLOCK SETTINGS
AUTOMATIC DST
MAINS TIME SYNC
SUSPICION AUDIBLE
ENABLED/DISABLED
SHOW CAMERAS
ENABLED/DISABLED
SEIS TEST ON SET
ENABLED/DISABLED
ALERT FORBID SET
ENABLED/DISABLED
ANTIMASK SET
DISABLED
TAMPER
FAULT
ALARM
ANTIMASK UNSET
DISABLED
TAMPER
FAULT
ALARM
111
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Timers
RETRIGGER DURESS
ENABLED/DISABLED
RETRIGGER PANIC
ENABLED/DISABLED
SILENCE AUD VER.
ENABLED/DISABLED
ENGINEER EXIT
ENABLED/DISABLED
* Not available for SPC42xx, SPC43xx.
16.3
Timers
1. Scroll to TIMERS and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the desired programming option:
Timers
Designation of the functions in the following order:
 1st row: Web/SPC Pro
 2nd row: Keypad
Timer
Description
Default
Internal Bells
INT BELL TIME
Duration that internal sounders will sound when alarm is
activated. (1 – 15 minutes: 0 = never))
15 min.
External Bells
Duration that external sounders will sound when alarm is
activated. (1 – 15 minutes; 0 = never)
15 min.
This will cause a delayed activation of the external bell. (0 –
600 seconds)
0 sec.
Number of seconds that a chime output will activate, when a
zone with chime attribute opens. (1 – 10 seconds)
2 sec.
Audible
EXT BELL TIME
External Bell Delay
EXT BELL DELAY
Chime
CHIME TIME
Confirmation
Confirm
CONFIRM TIME

Note: Only available when Security Grade is
‘Unrestricted’ and ‘DD243’ is selected for ‘Confirmation’
variable. (See System Options [➙ 220])
30 min.
This timer applies to the alarm confirmation feature and is
defined as the maximum time between alarms from two
different non overlapping zones that will cause a confirmed
alarm. (30 – 60 minutes)
Confirmed holdup
This timer applies to the confirmed holdup feature and is
defined as the maximum time between alarms from two
different non-overlapping zones that will cause a confirmed
alarm. (480 - 1200 minutes)
480 min.
Dialer Delay
DIALER DELAY
30 sec.
When programmed, the dialler delay initiates a predefined
delay period (0 -30 seconds) before the system dials out to an
Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC). This is specifically designed
to reduce unwarranted responses from Alarm Receiving
Centres and the constabulary. In the event of a subsequent
zone being tripped the dialler delay period is ignored and the
dialler dials out immediately. (0 – 30 seconds)
Alarm abort
ALARM ABORT
Time after a reported alarm in which an alarm abort message
can be reported. (0 – 999 seconds))
30 sec.
Period for which Setting Authorisation is valid. Enter a value
between 10 and 250 seconds.
20 secs
The Final Exit time is the number of seconds that arming is
delayed after a zone programmed with the final exit attribute
7 sec.
Setting
Setting Authorisation
SETTING AUTH
Final Exit
112
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Timers
Timer
Description
FINAL EXIT
is closed. (1 – 45 seconds)
Bell on Fullset
Activates the external bell momentarily to indicate a full set
condition. (0 – 10 seconds)
0 sec.
Activates the strobe on the external bell momentarily to
indicate a full set condition. (0 – 10 seconds)
0 sec.
FULLSET BELL
Strobe on Fullset
FULLSET STROBE
Fail To Set
16
Default
Number of seconds to display fail to set message on keypads 10 sec.
(0 until valid PIN is entered). (0 – 999 seconds)
FAIL TO SET
Alarm
Double Knock
DKNOCK DELAY
The maximum delay between activation’s of zones with the
double attribute, which will cause an alarm. (1 – 99 seconds)
10 sec.
Soak
The number of days a zone remains under soak test before it
automatically returns to normal operation. (1 – 99 days)
14 days
SOAK DAYS
Seismic Test Interval
SEISMIC AUTOTEST
168 hours.
The average period between seismic sensor automatic tests
(12 – 240 hours)
Note: To enable automatic testing, the Automatic Sensor Test
attribute must be enabled for a seismic zone.
Seismic Test Duration
SEISMIC TEST DUR
Maximum time (in seconds) that a seismic sensor takes to
trigger an alarm in response to the 'Seismic Test' output.
(3 - 120 seconds)
30 sec.
Lockout Post Alarm
Duration after alarm that access will be denied.
0 mins
LOCKOUT POST
ALARM
External Bell Strobe
STROBE TIME
Duration that the strobe output will be active when an alarm is 15 min.
activated. (1 – 15 minutes; 0 = indefinitely)
Alerts
Mains Delay
MAINS SIG DELAY
The time after a mains fault has been detected before an alert 0 min.
is activated by the system. (0 – 60 minutes)
Engineer
Engineer Access
ENGINEER ACCESS
The timer for the Engineer access starts as soon as the user
enables the Engineer Access. (0 – 999 minutes. ‘0’ indicates
no time limitation for system access)
0 min.
Engineer auto log out
Duration of inactivity after which the engineer will be
automatically locked out
0 mins.
30 sec.
KEYPAD TIMEOUT
The number of seconds that an RKD will wait for key entry
before it leaves the current menu. (10 – 300 seconds)
Keypad Language
KEYPAD LANGUAGE
The duration a keypad will wait in idle before switching
language to default ( 0 - 9999 seconds; 0 = never).
10 secs
Number of seconds to wait before reporting fire alarm for
zones with ‘Fire pre-alarm’ attribute set. (1 – 999 seconds)
See Editing a Zone [➙ 235].
30 sec.
Extra time to wait before reporting file alarm for zones with
‘Fire pre-alarm’ and ‘Fire Recognition’ attributes set. (1 – 999
seconds). See Editing a Zone [➙ 235].
120 sec.
Period for which pin is valid in days ( 1 - 330 )
30 days
Number of changes within a valid period ( 1 - 50 )
5
Time before PIN expiry after which a warning will be
displayed
( 1 - 14 )
5 days
ENG AUTO LOG OUT
Keypad
Keypad Timeout
Fire
Fire Pre-alarm
FIRE PRE-ALARM
Fire recognition
FIRE RECOGNITION
PIN
PIN Valid
PIN VALID
PIN Changes Limit
PIN CHANGES LIMIT
PIN Warning
PIN WARN
113
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Areas
Timer
Description
Default
The time that the RF output will remain active on the system.
(0 – 999 seconds)
0 sec.
Time Sync Limit
TIME SYNC LIMIT
Time limit within which no event will be reported.
(0 – 999 secs) Time synchronization only takes place if
system time and update time are outside this limit.
0 sec.
Link Timeout
Timeout for Ethernet link fault (0 = Disabled) ( 0 - 250 )
0 secs
Time for camera to go offline ( 10 - 9999 )
10 secs
Number of seconds to delay triggering of tech. zones with
tech. delay attribute. (0 – 9999 seconds)
0 sec.
General Settings
RF Output Time
RF OUTPUT
LINK TIMEOUT
Camera Offline
CAMERA OFFLINE
Tech. delay
TECH. DELAY
Frequent
FREQUENT
This attribute only applies to Remote Maintenance. The
336 hours (2
number of hours a zone must open within if the zone is
weeks)
programmed with the Frequent use attribute. (1 – 9999 hours)
!
Duress silent
Time when duress will remain silent and not restorable from
keypad (0 - 999).
0 Minutes
Holdup/panic silent
Number of minutes that a holdup/panic will remain silent and
cannot be restored from the keypad (0 - 999).
0 Minutes
Default times are dependent upon the Engineer configuration. The default times
denoted may or may not be allowable and is dependent on the configuration by
the engineer
16.4
Areas
1. Scroll to AREAS and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the desired programming option:
ADD
For Domestic and Commercial Mode, the area type defaults to Standard.
In Financial Mode, select area type STANDARD, ATM, VAULT or
ADVANCED.
Enter the name of the area and the preferred entry/exit time.
EDIT
Edit the following settings:



DESCRIPTION
ENTRY EXIT
–
ENTRY TIMER
–
EXIT TIMER
–
NO EXIT TIMER
–
FOB ENTRY ACTIVE
PARTSET A/B
–
ENABLED/DISABLED
–
TIMED
–
ACCESS TO E/EXIT
–
E/EXIT TO ALARM
–
LOCAL
–
NO BELLS
114
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Area Groups





DELETE
16
LINKED AREAS
–
AREA
–
FULLSET
–
FULLSET ALL
–
PREVENT FULLSET
–
PREVENT FULLSET ALL
–
UNSET
–
UNSET ALL
–
PREVENT UNSET
–
PREVENT UNSET ALL
SCHEDULE
–
CALENDAR
–
AUTOMATIC SET/UNSET
–
TIME LOCKED
–
VAULT ACCESS
REPORTING
–
EARLY TO SET
–
LATE TO SET
–
EARLY TO UNSET
–
LATE TO UNSET
SET/UNSET
–
AUTO SET WARNING
–
AUTO SET CANCEL
–
AUTO SET DELAY
–
KEYSWITCH
–
DELAY INTERVAL
–
DELAY COUNTER
–
DELAYED UNSET
–
UNSET DURATION
–
INTERLOCK
–
DUAL PIN
RF OUTPUT
Select the area to be deleted.
See Adding / Editing an area [➙ 236] for further details on these options.
16.5
Area Groups
1. Scroll to AREA GROUPS and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the desired programming option:
ADD
Enter the name of the area group.
EDIT
GROUP NAME - Rename the group as required.
AREAS - Scroll to an area and select it. Choose
ENABLED or DISABLED as required to add it or
remove it from the group. An asterisk (*) indicates
if an area is part of the group.
DELETE
Select the area to be deleted.
115
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
X-BUS
16.6
X-BUS
1. Scroll to XBUS and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the desired programming options as shown below.
16.6.1
X-BUS Addressing
Expanders, keypads and subsequent zones may be configured, located and
monitored, with the steps provided in this section. X-BUS settings such as type,
communication times and retries are also accessed within this menu.
The figure below shows each rotary switch with an arrow symbol pointing to a
number for identification (i.e. 3, 8). The right switch is the first unit digit and the left
switch is the 10s digit. The expander in the figure below is identified as 38.
1
9 12 9 12
3 8
3
8
7 6 54 7 6 54
0
0
Rotary switches
1
Rotary switches identifying expander as 38
For a system with automatic addressing, expanders and keypads belong to the
same numbering sequence. E.g. expanders and keypads are automatically
numbered 01, 02, 03, etc., by the controller in the order in which they are detected,
e.g. its relevant location to controller. In this configuration, zones are allocated to
each input expander.
Automatically addressed expanders are not supported by SPC41xx.
16.6.2
XBUS Refresh
The X-Bus Refresh utility performs a discovery of the current status of the X-Bus
and displays the current X-Bus configuration.
116
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
X-BUS
16
To refresh the X-Bus status:
1. Scroll to XBUS REFRESH.
2. Press SELECT.
 The number of online keypads is displayed.
3. Press the right soft key on the keypad after each display to view expanders,
zones and offline items.
4. Press this key again to exit.
Refresh makes no changes to the system, but is useful for detecting system
faults, such as loose connections, or inactive expanders, before performing a
Reconfigure.
16.6.3
Reconfigure
NOTICE
A reconfigure only applies to wired zones on an expander. Wireless zones on an
expander and controller zones will not be brought online after a reconfigure. To
bring controller zones online, you must apply a zone type other than ‘Unused’
using the zones menu on the keypad or web browser.
If the system has a mixture of expander types (with and without rotary switches)
then the system can only be automatically reconfigured. If the system has all
expanders with rotary switches, the system can still be automatically reconfigured
and the system will ignore the rotary switches and auto addresses all the
expanders on the system.
It is recommended that you perform a Refresh before a Reconfigure.
To reconfigure keypads/expanders:
1. Scroll to RECONFIGURE.
2. Press SELECT.
 The number of online keypads is displayed.
3. Press NEXT.
 The number of online expanders is displayed.
4. Press NEXT
 The number of online zones is displayed.
5. Press BACK to exit.
117
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
X-BUS
16.6.4
Keypads/Expanders/Door Controllers
NOTICE
You must upgrade to version 1.1 of firmware before adding door controllers. With
earlier firmware versions, the door controllers are seen by the panel as normal I/O
expanders and doors must be added manually.
16.6.4.1
Locate
To locate a keypad/expander/door controller:
1. Scroll to KEYPADS, EXPANDER or DOOR CONTROLLER and press
SELECT.
2. Scroll to LOCATE and press SELECT.
3. Scroll to the expander/keypad/door controller to be located and press SELECT.
 The selected device beeps and the LED flashes allowing Engineer to locate
it.
4. Press BACK to exit.
 Locate keypads using the same menus and following the keypad choice
instead of expander.
16.6.4.2
Monitor
To obtain an overview of the keypads/expanders/door controller connected to the
system:
1. Scroll to KEYPADS, EXPANDER or DOOR CONTROLLER and press
SELECT.
2. Scroll to MONITOR and press SELECT.
3. Scroll to desired Monitor programming option.
4. Press SELECT.
 A list of detected keypads/expanders is displayed.
5. Scroll through the list and press SELECT on preferred expander/keypad/door
controller.
 Parameters and details, if applicable, are displayed for editing as shown in
the table below.
6. Press BACK to exit.
STATUS
Online or offline
S/N
Serial number (used to track and identify)
VER
Firmware version
POWER
Power parameters: real-time voltage and current readings
ADDRESS INFO The addressing mode and the address of the keypad\expander\door controller.
AUX FUSE
The status of the auxiliary fuse on the expander\door controller
118
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
X-BUS
16.6.4.3
16
PSU
The type and status of the PSU. (PSU expanders only) Scroll to display the voltage
and current load on the outputs, the battery status. The Mode Link option is also
available, which shows the jumper setting on the panel for the Ah setting. 7Ah and
17Ah are the available options. (This jumper is not present on the 5350 or 6350
models)
If you are using the SPC 5360 or 6350, this menu displays the battery status, and
the status of the fuses on the outputs.
BATTERY
Battery voltage: battery voltage level (PSU expanders only)
INPUT STATE
State of each zone input associated with an expander as follows:
C: Closed, O: Open, D; Disconnected, S: Short (Expanders with inputs only)
Edit Keypads
To edit keypads:
1. Scroll to KEYPADS > EDIT.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Scroll to the device to be edited and press SELECT.
 The configuration settings for a standard keypad and comfort keypad are
described in the sections below.
4. Press BACK to exit the menu.
LCD Keypad Settings
Configure the following settings for the keypad.
Description
Enter a unique description to identify the keypad.
Function Keys (in idle state)
Panic
Select Enable, Disable or Enabled Silent. If enabled, panic alarm is activated by
pressing the 2 soft keys together.
Verification
If you assign a verification zone to the keypad, when a panic alarm is triggered
by pressing 2 soft keys together or by entering a duress code, audio and video
events are activated.
Visual Indications
Backlight
Select when keypad backlight is on. Options are: - On after key is pressed;
Always on; Always off..
Indicators
Enable or disable the LED’s on the keypad.
Setting state
Select if setting state should be indicated in idle mode.
Audible Indications
Buzzer
Enable or disable the buzzer on the keypad.
Partset Buzzer
Enable or disable buzzer during exit time on Partset.
Keypress
Select if the speaker volume for the key presses should be activated.
Deactivation
Calendar
Select if the keypad should be limited by calendar. See Calendar [➙ 249].
Mapping gate
Select if keypad should be limited by a mapping gate.
Keyswitch
Select if keypad should be limited by a keyswitch.
PACE Entry
Tick this box to disable the keys on the keypad during the entry time when a
PACE is configured on the keypad.
Areas
Location
Select the secured area where the keypad is located.
Areas
Select which areas can be controlled through keypad.
Options
119
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
X-BUS
Delay Fullset
Select to configure a delayed set across all keypads. The location of the keypad
is ignored and all areas will perform a full exit time count down.
NOTICE
An area should be assigned to a keypad only if the keypad is inside the assigned
area, and if an entry/exit route is defined. If an area is assigned, when the
particular area is set or unset then entry and exit timers are used (if configured).
Other features related to entry/exit routes also become available. If no area is
assigned, the area is set or unset immediately and other entry/exit features are
not available
Comfort Keypad Settings
Configure the following settings for the comfort keypad.
Description
Enter a unique description to identify the keypad.
Function Keys (in idle state)
Panic
Select Enable, Disable or Enabled Silent. If enabled, panic alarm is
activated by pressing F1 and F2 soft keys together.
Fire
Enable to allow fire alarm to be activated by pressing F2 and F3 soft
keys together.
Medical
Enable to allow medical alarm to be activated by pressing F3 and
F4 soft keys together.
Fullset
Enable to allow Fullset to be activated by pressing F2 key twice.
Partset A
Enable to allow Partset A to be activated by pressing F3 key twice.
Partset B
Enable to allow Partset B to be activated by pressing F4 key twice.
Verification
If you assign a verification zone to the comfort keypad, when a
Medical, Panic or Fire event is triggered, or if a user enters a duress
code, then audio and video events are activated.
Visual indications
Backlight
Select when keypad backlight is on. Options are: - On after key is
pressed; Always on; Always off.
Backlight Level
Select the intensity of illumination of the backlight. Range 1 - 8
(High).
Indicators
Enable or disable the LED’s on the keypad.
Setting state
Enable if setting state should be indicated in idle mode. (LED)
Logo
Enable if logo should be visible in idle mode.
Analog Clock
Select position of clock if visible in idle mode. Options are Left
Aligned, Center Aligned, Right Aligned or Disabled.
Emergency
Enable if Panic, Fire and Medical function keys should be indicated
in the LCD display.
Direct Set
Enable if Fullset/Partset function keys should be indicated in the
LCD display.
Audible indications
Alarms
Select speaker volume for alarm indications or disable sound.
Entry/Exit
Range is 0 – 7 (Max volume)
Chime
Select speaker volume for entry & exit indications or disable sound.
120
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
X-BUS
Keypress
Range is 0 – 7 (Max volume)
Voice Annunciation
Select speaker volume for chime or disable sound.
Partset Buzzer
Range is 0 – 7 (Max volume)
16
Deactivation
Calendar
Select if the keypad should be limited by calendar. See Calendar.
Mapping gate
Select if keypad should be limited by a mapping gate.
Keyswitch
Select if keypad should be limited by a keyswitch.
PACE Entry
Tick this box to disable the keys on the keypad during the entry time
when a PACE is configured on the keypad.
Areas
Location
Select the secured area where the keypad is located.
Areas
Select which areas can be controlled through keypad.
Options
Delay Fullset
Select to configure a delayed set across all keypads. The location of
the keypad is ignored and all areas will perform a full exit time count
down.
NOTICE
An area should be assigned to a keypad only if the keypad is inside the assigned
area, and if an entry/exit route is defined. If an area is assigned, when the
particular area is set or unset then entry and exit timers are used (if configured).
Other features related to entry/exit routes also become available. If no area is
assigned, the area is set or unset immediately and other entry/exit features are
not available.
16.6.4.4
Edit Expanders
To edit expanders:
1. Scroll to EXPANDERS > EDIT.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Scroll to the device to be edited and press SELECT.
 Parameters and details, if applicable, are displayed for editing.
4. Press BACK to exit the menu.
For naming and identifying, expanders are allocated zones (in groupings of 8)
with subsequent identities of 1 to 512. (The greatest number in zone identification
is 512.) Therefore, any expander named or identified by a number greater than 63
has no allocated zones.
121
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
X-BUS
16.6.4.4.1
Editing IO Expanders
The following table lists the available options for IO expanders:
16.6.4.4.2
Function
Description
Description
Edit the description of the expander.
Editing Audio Expanders
The following table lists the options available in the Edit menu for Audio
Expanders:
16.6.4.4.3
Name
Description
DESCRIPTION
Enter or edit a description for the audio expander.
INPUT
Select the zone’s input.
VOLUME LIMIT
Select the volume limit.
Editing Wireless Expanders
The following table lists the available options for Wireless expanders:
16.6.4.4.4
Function
Description
Description
Edit the description of the expander.
Editing Analysed IO Expanders
The following table lists the available options for IOA expanders:
16.6.4.4.5
Name
Description
Description
Edit the description of the expander.
Editing Indicator Expander Modules
The following table lists the available options for Indicator Expander modules:
Name
Description
DESCRIPTION
Enter or edit a description for the expander.
LOCATION
Select a location for the expander from the list of available
areas.
FUNCTION KEYS
Enables you to assign behaviour to specific keys for specific
areas.
Select an area and assign one of the following options to that
area:
 None
122
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
X-BUS
Name
16
Description









Unset
Partset A
Partset B
Fullset
Toggle Unset/Fullset
Toggle Unset/Partset A
Toggle Unset/Partset B
All Okay
Setting Authorisation
VISUAL INDICATIONS
(Flexible Mode only)
Enables you to assign specific behaviour to each LED on the
indicator module. Each of the LEDs has the following options:
 FUNCTION — the following options are available:
– KEYSWITCH — select a keyswitch and the position
of the key.
– DISABLED — select to disable the LED.
– SYSTEM — select the alarm type which triggers the
LED.
– AREA — select the area which triggers the LED.
– ZONE — select the zone which triggers the LED
– DOOR — select the door and the door option which
triggers the LED.
 ON – COLOR — specify the activation colour
 ON – FLASH — specify the behaviour of the LED in
active state. Available options are:
– Permanent — always on.
– Flash Fast\Medium\Slow — varying speed of the
flashing.
 OFF – COLOR — specify the deactivation colour.
 OFF – FLASH — specify the behaviour of the LED in the
inactive state. Available options are:
– Permanent — always on.
– Flash Fast\Medium\Slow — varying speed of the
flashing.
LED ALWAYS
Enable if LED indicators remain active when keys are
deactivated.
AUDIBLE IND.
(Flexible Mode only)
Select the audible indicators for alarms, entry/exit, and
keypresses,
DEACTIVATION
(Flexible Mode only)
Choose one, or more, of the following deactivation options:
 Calendar – select a calendar from the available options.
 Keyswitch – select a keyswitch from the available
options.
 Keypad - select a keypad from the available options.
 Card Reader – enable or disable deactivation using a
keypad.
MODE
Select Linked or Flexible. Linked mode reduces the number
of options available in the Expander Edit menu.
INPUT
Select the zone
123
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
X-BUS
16.6.4.4.6
Editing Keyswitch Expanders
The following table lists the available options for keyswitch expanders:
Name
Description
DESCRIPTION
Enter or edit a description for the expander.
LOCATION
Select a location for the expander from the list of defined areas.
LATCH
Enable or disable the latch on the key position.
VISUAL INDICATIONS
(Flexible mode only)
Enables you to assign specific behaviour to each LED on the
keyswitch expander. Each of the LEDs has the following
options:
 FUNCTION — the following options are available:
– KEYSWITCH — select a keyswitch and the position of
the key.
– DISABLED — select to disable the LED.
– SYSTEM — select the alarm type which triggers the
LED.
– AREA — select the area which triggers the LED.
– ZONE — select the zone which triggers the LED
– DOOR — select the door and the door option which
triggers the LED.
 ON – COLOR — specify the activation colour
 ON – FLASH — specify the behaviour of the LED in active
state. Available options are:
– Permanent — always on.
– Flash Fast\Medium\Slow — varying speed of the
flashing.
 OFF – COLOR — specify the deactivation colour.
 OFF – FLASH — specify the behaviour of the LED in the
inactive state. Available options are:
– Permanent — always on.
 Flash Fast\Medium\Slow — varying speed of the flashing.
DEACTIVATION
(Flexible mode only)
Select a deactivation method from the available options:
 Calendar — select a calendar.
KEY POSITIONS
Enables you to assign behaviour to specific key positions for
specific areas.
Select an area for the key position, and assign one of the
following options to that area:
 None
 Unset
 Partset A
 Partset B
 Fullset
 Toggle Unset/Fullset
 Toggle Unset/Partset A
 Toggle Unset/Partset B
 All Okay
 Setting Authorisation
124
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
X-BUS
16.6.4.5
16
Edit Door Controllers
For further information about Door controller see page [➙ 69].
1. Scroll to DOOR CONTROLLERS > EDIT.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Scroll to the device to be edited and press SELECT.
 Parameters and details, if applicable, are displayed for editing as shown in the
table below.
DESCRIPTION
Name of the door controller
DOORS
Configuration of Door I/O 1 & Door I/O 2.
READERS
Configuration of Reader Profiles
To edit a DOOR I/O:
1. Scroll to DOORS.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Scroll to the DOOR I/O to be edited and press SELECT.
 Parameters and details, if applicable, are displayed for editing as shown in the
table below.
ZONES
No access functionality is realized. The inputs and outputs can be used
normally.
DOOR 1 – DOOR 64
The selected door number is assigned to the DOOR I/O.
If the option “ZONES” is selected for a DOOR I/O the two inputs of this door I/O
must be configured:
To edit the two zones of a DOOR I/O:
1. Scroll to the DOOR I/O to be edited and press SELECT
 The option “Zones” is selected.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Select which Zone should be edited (DPS or DRS zone).
4. Press SELECT.
 Parameters and details, if applicable, are displayed for editing as shown in the
table below.
UNASSIGNED
This zone is not assigned and can not be used.
ZONE 1 – ZONE 512
The zone which is edited is assigned to this zone number. If the zone is
assigned to a specific zone number, it can be configured like a normal zone.
The zones can be assigned to each free zone number. But the assignment is not
fixed. If the zone was assigned to zone number 9 and an input expander with the
address 1 is connected to the X-Bus (which is using the zone numbers 9-16) the
assigned zone from the two door controller will be moved to the next free zone
number. The configuration will be adapted accordingly.
To edit a READER PROFILE:
125
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
X-BUS
1. Scroll to READERS.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Scroll to the READER to be edited and press SELECT.
 Select any of the following profiles for the reader:
1
For readers with a green and a red LED.
2
For VANDERBILT readers with a yellow LED (AR618X).
3
Profile 3 is used with HID readers that send a PIN to the panel as a card reading
with a predefined site code (0 )
4
Profile 4 is used with HID readers that send a PIN to the panel as a card reading
with a predefined site code (255 ).
5
Select to enable Sesam readers. For VdS compliance, ensure you select the
Override Reader Profile option on the browser to provide feedback on the setting
process.
See also
 Door Expander [➙ 69]
16.6.5
Addressing Mode
X-BUS addressing can be configured in one of the 2 following ways:
Automatic addressing
rotary switch expanders. With automatic addressing, the controller over-rides rotary
switches and automatically assigns expanders and keypads in the system unique
IDs in sequential order
Manual addressing
Manual addressing allows manual determination of each expander/keypad ID in a
system. All devices should be installed where required and each ID set manually
using the rotary switches. The zones to ID can be calculated using the following
formula: ((ID value X 8)+1)= first zone number and then the next 7 sequential
zones. For example ((ID2 x 8)+1)=17. Zone 17 is allocated to input 1 on ID2. Each
input has the next sequential zone allocated to it, in this case up to zone 24. Note:.
ID limit for zone allocation SPC 4000: Expander ID 1 – 3. SPC 5000: Expander ID
1 – 15. SPC 6000: Expander ID 1 – 63.
ID
Zone
ID
Zone
ID
Zones
ID
Zones
ID
Zones
1
9-16
14
113-120
27
217-224
40
321-328
53
425-432
2
17-24
15
121-128
28
225-232
41
329-336
54
433-440
3
25-32
16
129-136
29
233-240
42
337-344
55
441-448
4
33-40
17
137-144
30
241-248
43
345-352
56
449-456
5
41-48
18
145-152
31
249-256
44
353-360
57
457-464
6
49-56
19
153-160
32
257-264
45
361-368
58
465-472
7
57-64
20
161-168
33
265-272
46
369-376
59
473-480
8
65-72
21
169-176
34
273-280
47
377-384
60
481-488
9
73-80
22
177-184
35
281-288
48
385-392
61
489-496
10
81-88
23
185-192
36
289-296
49
393-400
62
497-504
11
89-96
24
193-200
37
297-304
50
401-408
63
505-512
126
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Wireless
12
97-104
25
201-208
38
305-312
51
409-416
13
105-112
26
209-216
39
313-320
52
417-424
16
If 2 devices of a kind (e.g. expanders) are set to same ID, upon configuration,
both expanders beep and the flashing LED indicates conflict. Reset the switches
and the system rescans.
On a device, if both rotary switches are set to zero (0, 0), the full configuration
becomes an automatic addressing configuration.
To select the ADDRESS MODE:
1. Scroll to ADDRESS MODE.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Toggle for appropriate address mode: AUTOMATIC or MANUAL
4. Press SELECT to update the setting.
16.6.6
XBUS Type
To program the X-BUS type from the keypad:
1. Scroll to XBUS TYPE.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Scroll to select desired configuration:
- LOOP
- SPUR
4. Press SELECT to update the setting.
16.6.7
Bus Retries
To program the number of times the system attempts to retransmit data on the XBUS interface before a communications fault is generated:
1. Scroll to BUS RETRIES.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Enter the preferred number of times the system retransmits data.
4. Press SELECT to update the setting.
16.6.8
Comms Timer
To designate the length of time before a communication fault is recorded:
1. Scroll to COMMS TIMER.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Enter the preferred time setting.
4. Press ENTER to update the setting.
127
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Wireless
16.7
Wireless
1. Scroll to WIRELESS and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the desired programming option:
16.7.1
SENSORS
It may be necessary to change the type of sensor enrolled on the
system if the sensor type was incorrectly identified in the enrolment
process.
If no wireless detectors are enrolled, the keypad displays NO
ACTIVE SENSORS.
The following options are available for sensors:
 ADD
See ADD SENSORS [➙ 128]
 EDIT (Change zone assignment)
See EDIT SENSORS (ZONE ASSIGNMENT) [➙ 129]
 REMOVE
Select the device or sensor to be deleted.
WPA
Add, edit or remove a WPA (Wireless Personal Alarm).
 ADD
See ADD WPA [➙ 129]
 EDIT
See EDIT WPA [➙ 130]
 REMOVE
Select the WPA to be deleted.
EXTERNAL
ANTENNA
Enable or disable the external antenna.
SUPERVISION
Enable or disable tamper supervision.
FILTER LOW
SIGNAL
Enable or disable the filter low signal (RF strengths 0 and 1).
DETECT RF JAM
Enable or disable the RF JAM.
RFFOB PANIC
Enable or disable the RFFob Panic or enable silent mode for the
RFFob Panic.
WPA TEST
SCHEDULE
Enter a maximum period (in days) between WPA tests. Max is 365
days.
PREVENT SET
TIME
Enter a time in minutes after which, if the sensor or WPA fails to
report, a setting is prevented for an area where the wireless zone is.
Max is 720 minutes.
DEVICE LOST
TIME
Enter the number of minutes after which the wireless device is
reported as lost if it fails to report within this timeframe. (Min is 20
and max is 720 minutes)
Add Sensors
To add a wireless sensor device:
1. Scroll to ADD and press SELECT.
 The prompt ACTIVATE ENROL is displayed.
2. Press SELECT.
 The top line of the display flashes the text ACTIVATE DEVICE.
3. Activate the wireless device between 3 and 5 times in succession to allow the
keypad receiver to detect the wireless transmission of the device.
128
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Wireless
16
 The display indicates that the device has been detected by flashing the text
FOUND SENSOR. The device TYPE and ID information is displayed
alternately.
4. Press ENROL.
 A prompt to select the zone type is displayed.
1. Press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the required zone type and press SELECT.
To add a device by TAMPER ENROL, scroll to this option in step 2. The
enrolment process is identical except a prompt to define an area type is displayed
before the zone type prompt.
16.7.2
Edit Sensors (Zone Assignment)
It may be necessary to change the zone assignment of sensor enrolled on the
system.
To change the zone assignment of a wireless detector:
1. Scroll to EDIT and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the sensor to be changed and press SELECT.
3. Scroll to ZONE.
4. Scroll to the appropriate zone number (only unoccupied zone numbers are
displayed).
5. Press SELECT.
16.7.3
Add WPA
NOTICE
You can only configure a WPA or check its status on the keypad if there is a
wireless module fitted on the panel or any of its expanders and the panel is
licensed for the type of module(s) fitted.
A WPA is not assigned to a user. Usually, a WPA is shared by several people, for
example, security guards working in shifts or, alternatively, WPAs may be
permanently attached to a surface such as under a desk or behind a till.
A maximum of 128 WPAs is allowed per panel.
To configure a WPA with the keypad:
1. Select WIRELESS and then WPA.
2. Select ADD to add a WPA.
3. Select MANUALLY to manually enter a WPA ID.
The ID can also be entered automatically by the panel by selecting the LEARN
WPA option. One of the WPAs buttons must be pressed when the ACTIVATE
WPA message is displayed, in order for the panel to identify the WPA. The
panel will not accept a WPA if it’s ID is a duplicate of a currently configured
WPA.
129
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Zones
4. Exit the ADD menu and select the EDIT menu to configure the WPA.
16.7.4
Edit WPA
To configure a WPA with the keypad:
1. Select WIRELESS and then WPA.
2. Select EDIT to configure a WPA.
DESCRIPTION
Enter a description to uniquely identify the WPA.
TRANSMITTER ID
Enter the WPA Id. The panel will not accept a WPA if it’s ID is a
duplicate of a currently configured WPA.
FUNC TO BUTTONS
Use this section to assign functions to button combinations. Available
functions are Panic, Panic Silent, Holdup, Suspicion, RF User Output,
Medical. More than one button combination can be selected for the
same function. For example:



Yellow - Suspicion●
Red + Green – Holdup
For Commercial or Domestic installations, the default is:
Red + Green – Panic
Note: If no function is assigned to a button combination, it is still
possible use that combination by using a trigger. See Triggers
[➙ 253]
SUPERVISE
The WPA may be configured to send periodic supervision signals. If
supervision is enabled on the WPA (with the jumper), the WPA sends
out a supervision message about every 7.5 minutes. The time
between messages is randomized to decrease the chances of
collision with other WPAs.
The supervision function also needs to be enabled on the panel for
the particular WPA for correct supervision operation. If the panel
does not get a supervision signal, it raises an alarm that is shown in
the keypad and logged.
If supervision is not enabled, the WPA sends out a supervision
message about every 24 hours to transmit the WPA battery status to
the panel. This message is also randomized to decrease the chances
of collision with other WPAs.
Select ENABLE if supervision has been enabled for that particular
WPA.
TEST
Enables testing of the WPA signal.
See also
Triggers [➙ 253]
Configuring WPA Timers [➙ 128]
Testing a WPA from the Keypad [➙ 146]
16.8
Zones
1. Scroll to ZONES and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the desired zone (ZONE 1-x).
3. Scroll to the desired programming option:
DESCRIPTION
Used to help identify the zone: enter a specific and descriptive name.
ZONE TYPE
Determines the zone type. See page [➙ 345].
ATTRIBUTES
Determines the attributes of the zone. See page [➙ 348].
TO AREA
Determines which zone is mapped to which area. This menu option is only
displayed if multiple areas are defined on the system. Selecting this feature allows
130
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Doors
16
users to build a set of zones that are identified with a particular area in the building.
The number and type of attributes displayed in the keypad menus for a particular
zone vary depending on the type of zone that is selected. See page.
16.9
Doors
16.9.1
Doors
1. Scroll to DOORS and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the door to be programmed and press SELECT.
3. Parameters and details, if applicable, are displayed for editing as follows:
-
Description
-
Door Inputs
-
Door Group
-
Door Attributes
-
Door Timers
-
Reader Information (Display only - format of last card used with configured
reader)
Door inputs
Each door has 2 inputs with predefined functionality. These two inputs, the door
position sensor and the door release switch can be configured.
Name
Description
Zone
The door position sensor input can be used for the
intrusion part as well. If the door position sensor input is
used also for the intrusion part, the zone number it is
assigned to has to be selected. If the door position
sensor is used only for the access part, the option
“UNASSIGNED” has to be selected.
If the door position sensor is assigned to an intrusion
zone, it can be configured like a normal zone but only
with limited functionality (e.g. not all zone types are
selectable).
If an area or the system is set with the card reader, the
door position sensor input has to be assigned to a zone
number and to the area or the system which have to be
set.
Description
(Web and SPC Pro only)
Description of the zone the door position sensor is
assigned to.
Zone Type
(Web and SPC Pro only)
Zone type of the zone the door position sensor is
assigned to (not all zones types are available).
Zone attributes
(Web and SPC Pro only)
The attributes for the zone the door position sensor is
assigned to can be modified.
Area
(Web and SPC Pro only)
The area the zone and the card reader are assigned to.
(If the card reader is used for setting & unsetting, this
area will be set / unset).
Door Position (Web)
The resistor used with the door position sensor. Choose
131
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Doors
Name
Description
DPS End Of Line (keypads)
Door Position EOL (SPC Pro)
the used resistor value / combination.
DPS Normal Open
Select if the door release switch is to be a normally open
or normally closed input.
Door Release (Web)
DRS END OF LINE (Keypads)
Door Position EOL (SPC Pro)
The resistor used with the door release switch. Choose
the used resistor value / combination.
DRS Normal Open
Select if the door release switch is a normally open input
or not.
No DRS
(Web and SPC Pro only)
Select to ignore DRS.
If a DC2 is used on the door, this option MUST be
selected. If not selected, the door will open.
Reader Location (Entry/Exit)
(Web and SPC Pro only)
Select the location of the entry and exit readers.
Reader formats (Web)
READER INFO (Keypads)
Displays format of last card used with each configured
reader. (not available in SPC Pro)
Each free zone number can be assigned to the zones but the assignment is not
fixed. If the number ‘9’ is assigned to a zone, the zone and an input expander with
the address ‘1’ is connected to the X-Bus (which is using the zone numbers 9-16).
The assigned zone from the two door controller will be moved to the next free
zone number. Configuration will be adapted accordingly.
Door Groups
The different doors can be assigned to door groups. This is needed if one of the
following functionalities is activated:
 Custodian
 Soft Passback
 Prevent Passback
 Interlock
Door attributes
If no attribute is activated, a valid card can be used.
Attribute
Description
Void
The card is temporarily blocked.
Door Group
Used when multiple doors are assigned to the same
area and/or anti passback, custodian, or interlock
functionality is required.
Card and PIN
Card and PIN are required to gain entry.
PIN Only
PIN is required. No card will be accepted.
PIN Code or Card
PIN or card are required to gain entry
PIN to Exit
PIN is required on exit reader. Door with entry and
exit reader is required.
132
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Doors
16
Attribute
Description
PIN to Set/Unset
PIN is required to set and unset the linked area. The
card has to be presented before the PIN is entered.
Unset outside (Browser)
Unset on Entry Reader (SPCPro)
Panel/area will unset, when card is presented at entry
reader.
Unset inside (Browser)
Unset on Exit Reader (SPCPro)
Panel/area will unset, when card is presented at exit
reader.
Bypass alarm
Access is granted if an area is set and the door is an
alarm or an entry zone type.
Fullset outside (Browser)
Fullset on Entry Reader (SPCPro)
Panel/area will fullest, when card is presented twice
at entry reader.
Fullset inside
Full set on Exit Reader (SPCPro)
Panel/area will fullest, when card is presented twice
at exit reader.
Force Fullset
If the user has rights, they can force set from entry
reader.
Emergency
Door lock opens if a fire alarm is detected within the
assigned area.
Emergency any
Fire in any area will unlock the door.
Escort
The escort feature enforces privileged card holders to
escort other card holders through specific doors. If
this feature is assigned to a door, a card with the
“escort right” has to be presented first, to allow other
cardholders without this right to open the door. The
time period in which cardholders are able to present
their cards after a card with escort right was
presented, can be configured per door.
Prevent Passback*
Anti-passback should be enforced on the door. All
doors must have entry and exit readers and must be
assigned to a door group.
In this mode, cardholders must use their access card
to gain entry into and exit from a defined door group.
If a valid cardholder has presented his access card to
enter a door group and not presented the card to exit
it, the cardholder is in breach of the Anti-Passback
rules. Next time the cardholder attempts to enter the
same door group, a hard Anti-Passback alarm will be
raised and the cardholder will not be permitted entry
to the door group.
Soft Passback*
Anti-passback violations are only logged. All doors
must have entry and exit readers and must be
assigned to a door group.
In this mode, cardholders must use their access card
to gain entry to and exit from a defined door group. If
a valid cardholder has presented his access card to
enter a door group and not presented the card to exit
it, the cardholder is in breach of the Anti-Passback
rules. Next time the cardholder attempts to enter the
same door group, a Soft Anti-Passback alarm will be
raised. However, the cardholder will still be permitted
entry to the door group.
Custodian*
The custodian feature allows a card holder with
custodian right (the custodian) to give other
cardholders (non-custodians) access to the room.
The custodian must be the first to enter the room. The
non-custodians are only allowed to enter if the
custodian is in the room. The custodian will not be
allowed to exit until all non-custodians have left the
room.
133
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Outputs
Attribute
Description
Door Sounder
Door controller PCB mounted sounder sounds on
door alarms.
Ignore Forced
Door forced open is not processed.
Interlock* (Browser)
Limit Interlocked Door Access
(SPCPro)
Only one door in an area will be allowed open at a
time. Requires Door Group.
Setting Prefix
Authorisation with prefix (A,B,* or #) key to set system
* Require door group
Door timers
16.10
Timer
Min.
Max.
Description
Access granted
1s
255 s
The time the lock will remain open
after granting access.
Access deny
1s
255 s
The duration after which the
controller will be ready to read the
next event after a invalid event.
Door open
1s
255 s
Duration within which the door
must be closed to prevent a “door
open too long” alarm.
Door left open
1 min
180 min
Duration within which the door
must be closed to prevent a “door
left open” alarm.
Extended
1s
255 s
Additional time after granting
access to a card with extended
time attribute.
Escort
1s
30 s
Time period after presenting a card
with escort attribute within a user
without escort right can access the
door.
Outputs
Each zone type on the SPC system has an associated output type (an internal flag
or indicator). When a zone type is activated, i.e. a door or window opens, smoke is
detected, an alarm is detected, etc., the corresponding output is activated.
1. Scroll to OUTPUTS and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to CONTROLLER or EXPANDER and press SELECT.
3. Scroll to the expander/output to be programmed and press SELECT.
 If the output activations are recorded in the system event log (i.e. enabled,
items recorded / disabled, items) the programming options are available as
shown in the table below.
NAMES
Used to help identify the output; enter a specific and descriptive name.
OUTPUT
TYPE
Determines the output type; see the table in page [➙ 135], for a description of output
types.
OUTPUT
MODE
Determines the style of the output: continuous, momentary or pulsed.
POLARITY
Determines whether the output is activated on a positive or negative polarity.
LOG
Determines if system log is enabled or disabled.
134
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Outputs
16
For the output test procedure, see page [➙ 144].
16.10.1
Outputs types and output ports
Each output type can be assigned to one of the 6 physical output ports on the SPC
controller or to an output on one of the connected expanders. Output types that are
not assigned to physical outputs act as indicators of events on the system and may
be logged and/or reported to remote central stations if required.
The output ports on the expanders are all single pole relay type outputs (NO, COM,
NC); therefore, output devices may need external power sources to activate if they
are wired to expander outputs.
The activation of a particular output type depends on the zone type (see page
[➙ 345]) or alert condition that triggered the activation. If multiple areas are defined
on the system then the outputs on the SPC are grouped into system outputs and
area outputs; the system outputs are activated to indicate a system wide event
(e.g. mains fault) whereas the area outputs indicate events detected in one or more
of the defined areas on the system. Each area has its own set of area outputs; if
the area is a common area for other areas, then its outputs will indicate the state of
all the areas it is common for, including its own state. For example, if Area 1 is
common for Area 2 and 3, and Area 2 Ext. Bell is active, then the Area 1 Ext Bell
output is also active.
Some output types can only indicate system wide events (no specific area
events). Please refer to the table below for further information.
Output Type
Description
External Bell
This output type is used to activate the system external bell and is active when any
Area External Bell is active. By default, this output is assigned to the first output on the
controller board (EXT+, EXT-).
Note: An external bell output is automatically activated whenever a zone programmed
as an Alarm zone triggers an alarm in Fullset or Partset modes.
External Bell Strobe
This output type is used to activate the strobe on the system external bell and is active
when any area strobe is active. By default, this output is assigned to the strobe relay
output (Output 3) on the Controller board (NO, COM, NC).
Note: An external bell strobe output is automatically activated whenever a zone
programmed as an alarm zone triggers an alarm in Fullset or Partset modes. The
external bell strobe activates on a ’Fail to Set’ condition if the strobe on the ’Fail to Set’
option is checked in system options.
Internal Bell
This output type is used to activate the internal bell and is active when any area
Internal Bell is active. By default, this output is assigned to the second output on the
controller board (INT+, INT-).
Note: An internal bell output is automatically activated whenever a zone programmed
as an Alarm zone type triggers an alarm in Fullset or Partset modes. The internal Bell
activates on a ’Fail to Set’ condition if the Bell on the ’Fail to Set’ option is checked in
system options.
Alarm
This output turns on following alarm zone activation on the system or from any area
defined on the system.
Alarm Confirmed
This output turns on when an alarm has been confirmed. An alarm is confirmed when 2
independent zones on the system (or within the same Area) activate within a set time
period).
Panic*
This output turns on following activation of panic alarm zone types from any area. A
panic alarm output is also generated if a user duress event is generated or if the panic
option for the keypad is enabled.
135
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Outputs
Hold-up
This output turns on whenever a zone programmed as a Hold-up type zone triggers an
alarm from any area
Fire
This output turns on following a fire zone activation on the system (or from any area)
Tamper
This output turns on when a tamper condition is detected from any part of the system.
For a grade 3 system, if communication is lost to an XBUS device for greater than
100s, a tamper is generated and SIA and CIR reported events will send a tamper.
Medical
This output turns on when a medic zone is activated
Fault
This output turns on when a technical fault is detected
Technical
This output follows tech zone activity
Mains Fault*
This output activates when Mains power is removed
Battery Fault*
This output activates when there is a problem with the backup battery. If the battery
voltage drops below 11 V this output activates. The ’Restore’ option for this fault is only
presented when the voltage level rises to above 11.8 V.
Partset A
This output is activated if the system or any area defined on the system is in Partset A
mode
Partset B
This output is activated if the system or any area defined on the system is in Partset B
mode
Fullset
This output is activated if the system is in Fullset mode
Fail to set
This output activates if the system or any area defined on the system failed to set; it
clears when the alert is restored
Entry/Exit
This output activates if an Entry/Exit type zone has been activated; i.e. a system or
area Entry or Exit timer is running
Latch
This output turns on as defined in the system latch output configuration (see
Configuring system latch and auto set outputs [➙ 200]).
This output can be used to reset latching sensors as smoke or inertia sensors.
Fire Exit
This output turns ON if any Fire-X zones on the system are activated
Chime
This output turns on momentarily when any zone on the system with chime attribute
opens
Smoke
This output turns on momentarily( 3 seconds) when a user unsets the system; it can be
used to reset smoke detectors
The output will also activate when the zone is restored
When using the zone to reset latched smoke detectors the first code entry will not
activate the smoke output but will silence bells, on the next code entry if the fire zone is
in the open state the smoke output will activate momentarily. This process is repeatable
until the fire zone is closed.
Walk Test*
This output turns on momentarily when a walk test is operational and a zone becomes
active. This output can be used, for example, to activate functional tests of connected
detectors (if available).
Auto Set
This output turns on if the Auto Set feature has been activated on the system.
User Duress
This output turns on if a user duress state has been activated (PIN code + 1 has been
entered on the keypad)
PIR Masked
This output turns on if there are any masked PIR zones on the system. It generates a
fault output on the keypad led.
This output is latched so it will remain active until restored by a level 2 user.
PIR Masking is logged by default. The number of log entries do not exceed 8 between
arming periods.
Zone Omitted
This output turns on if there are any inhibited, isolated, or walk test zones on the
system
Fail to Communicate
This output turns on if there is a failure to communicate to the central station
Man Down Test
This output turns on a ‘Man Down’ wireless device which is activated during a ‘Man
Down’ test.
136
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Outputs
16
Unset
This output is activated if the system is in Unset mode.
Alarm Abort
This output activates if an alarm abort event occurs i.e. when a valid user code is
entered via the keypad after a confirmed or unconfirmed alarm. It is used, for example,
with external dialers (SIA, CID, FF)
Seismic Test
This output is used to activate a manual or automatic test on a seismic zone. Seismic
sensors have a small vibrator that will be attached to the same wall as the sensor and
is wired to an output on the panel or one of its expanders. During the test, the panel
waits up to 30 seconds for the seismic zone to open. If it does not open, the test fails. If
it opens within 30 seconds the panel then waits for the zone to close within 10 seconds.
If that doesn’t happen, the test fails. The panel then waits a further 2 seconds before
reporting the test result. The result of the test, either manual or automatic, is stored in
the system event log
Local Alarm
This output activates on a local intrusion alarm.
RF Output
This output activates when a Fob or WPA button is pressed.
Modem 1 Line Fault
This output activates when there is a line fault on the primary modem..
Modem 1 Failure
This output activates when the primary modem fails.
Modem 2 Line Fault
This output activates when there is a line fault on the secondary modem.
Modem 2 Failure
This output activates when the secondary modem fails.
Battery Low
This output activates when the battery is low,
Entry Status
This output activates if an ‘All Okay’ entry procedure is implemented and there is no
alarm generated i.e. the ‘All Okay’ button is pressed within the configured time after the
user code is entered.
Warning Status
This output activates if an ‘All Okay’ entry procedure is implemented and a silent alarm
generated i.e. the ‘All Okay’ button is not pressed within the configured time after the
user code is entered.
Ready to Set
This output activates when an area is ready to set.
Setting ACK
(SPC Pro — Setting Complete)
This output signals the setting status. The output toggles for 3 seconds to signal that
the setting has failed. The output remains on for 3 seconds if setting is successful.
Fullset Done
(SPC Pro — Setting Success)
This output activates for 3 seconds to signal that the system has been fullest.
Blockschloss 1
Used for normal Blockschloss devices.
When all zones in an area are closed, and there are no pending faults, the
‘Blockschloss 1‘ output is activated. If the lock on the Blockschloss is closed, a
‘Keyarm‘ input is activated, the relevant area is set and the ‘Setting Ack‘ output is
activated for 3 seconds to signal that the setting was successful. ‘Blockschloss 1‘ is not
deactivated.
If the Blockschloss is unlocked, the Blockschloss device deactivates the Keyarm input
to the unset state (closed) and the area is unset. ‘Blockschloss 1‘ is then deactivated.
Blockschloss 2
Used for Blockschloss device type - Bosch Blockschloss, Sigmalock Plus, E4.03.
When all zones in an area are closed, and there are no pending faults, the
‘Blockschloss 2‘ output is activated. If the lock on the Blockschloss is closed, a
‘Keyarm‘ input is activated, the relevant area is set and the ‘Setting Ack‘ output is
activated for 3 seconds to signal that the setting was successful. ‘Blockschloss 2‘ is
then deactivated.
If the Blockschloss is unlocked, the Keyarm zone is switched to unset (closed) and the
area is unset. ‘Blockschloss 2‘ is activated (if area is ready to set).
Lock Element
Activates if the Lock Element is in the ‘locked‘ position.
Unlock Element
Activates if the Lock Element is in the ‘unlocked‘ position.
Code Tamper
Activates if there is a code tamper in the area. Clears when state is reset.
Trouble
Activates if any zone is in trouble state.
Ethernet Link
Activates if there is a fault on the Ethernet link.
Network Fault
Activates if there is an EDP communications fault.
137
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Communication
Glass Reset
Used to switch on the power for the glassbreak interface module and to remove power
in order to reset the device. The output is reset if a user enters their code, the zone is
not in the closed state, and the bells deactivated.
Confirmed holdup
Activates in the following scenarios for PD6662 compliance:
 two hold-up zone activations more than two minutes apart
 a hold-up zone and a panic zone activation more than two minutes apart
 If a hold-up zone and a tamper zone or a panic zone and a tamper zone activation
occurs within the two minute period
Full Engineer
Activates if an engineer is on site and the system is in full engineer mode.
*This output type can only indicate system wide events (no area specific events).
See also
 Configuring system latch and auto set outputs [➙ 200]
16.11
Communication
1. Scroll to COMMUNICATION and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the desired programming option.
16.11.1
Serial Ports
The serial ports allow older style PCs to be connected to the system or other
peripheral equipment like printers.
1. Scroll to SERIAL PORTS.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Scroll to the serial port to be programmed.
4. Select the desired programming option shown in the table below.
5. Press BACK to exit.
16.11.2
TYPE
Determines if type is TERMINAL (system information) or PRINTER (SPC event log)
BAUD RATE
Determines the speed of the communication between the panel and the peripheral
equipment. Please note that the baud rate must be set the same as both items of
equipment.
DATA BITS
Determines the length of data packet to be transferred between the panel and the
peripheral equipment. Please note that the data bits must be set the same for both
items of equipment.
STOP BITS
Determines the number of stop bits at the end of the data packet. Please note that the
stop bits must be set the same for both items of equipment.
PARITY
Determines the parity (odd/even) of the data packet. Please note that the parity must
be set the same for both items of equipment.
FLOW
CONTROL
Determines if the data is under hardware (RTS, CTS) or software control (None).
Please note that the flow control must be set the same for both items of equipment.
Ethernet Ports
To program the Ethernet port:
1. Scroll to ETHERNET PORT.
138
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Communication
16
2. Press SELECT.
 The IP ADDRESS option displays, XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX For single digits,
leading zero(s) are required. Ie., 001
3. Press SELECT and enter the preferred IP address.
 When the ENTER key is operated, the system beeps twice and states
UPDATED if the IP address is valid. If the IP address is allocated manually,
then this must be unique on the LAN or VLAN, connected to panel. A value
is not entered if the DCHP option is used.
4. Scroll to IP NETMASK.
5. Press SELECT and enter the IP NETMASK format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. (For
single digits, leading zero(s) are required. Ie., 001) When the ENTER key is
operated, the system beeps twice and states UPDATED if the IP NETMASK is
valid.
6. Scroll to GATEWAY. Note the gateway needs to be programmed for access
outside the network (for use with the Portal).
7. Press SELECT and enter the GATEWAY format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. (For
single digits, leading zero(s) are required. Ie., 001) When the ENTER key is
operated, the system beeps twice and states UPDATED if the GATEWAY is
valid.
8. Scroll to DHCP. The DHCP is enabled if the LAN has a DHCP server to
allocate the IP address. The IP address is to be enabled manually. Note the
gateway needs to be programmed if the panel needs access outside the
network (for Portal service).
9. Press SELECT and enter the GATEWAY format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. (For
single digits, leading zero(s) are required. Ie., 001)
 When the ENTER key is operated, the system beeps twice and states
UPDATED if the GATEWAY is valid.
 The DHCP option is displayed.
10. Toggle between DHCP ENABLED and DISABLED for preferred option.
11. Press SELECT.
16.11.3
Modems
The SPC system supports SPC intelli-modems for communications with analogue
lines and mobile network interfacing for enhanced communications and
connectivity. The SPC system must be configured accordingly.
16.11.3.1
Monitoring the transmission network interface
The SPC Alarm System sends a poll to SPC Com XT, which responds with a poll
acknowledge (ACK). On receipt of a valid poll ACK the SPC Alarm System updates
its status to OK and resets its polling interval timer (depending on the ATP
category).
If the SPC Alarm System does not receive a polling ACK within the timeout
(depends on ATP category), the SPC Alarm System updates its status to DOWN.
SPC supports the following transmission interfaces:
 Ethernet
 GSM with GPRS enabled
 PSTN modem.
139
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Communication
NOTICE
Before changing PIN or new SIM card, ensure all power sources are
disconnected (AC mains and battery) or card will not be activated.
NOTICE
After a factory default, during the process of initial setup of the system with the
keypad, the panel detects if it has a primary or backup modem fitted, and if so, it
displays its type and automatically enables it (or them) with the default
configuration. No other modem configuration is allowed at this stage.
16.11.3.2
Configuring Modems
To configure a GSM or PSTN modem:
1. Scroll to MODEMS and press SELECT.
2. Toggle between PRIMARY and BACKUP for correct modem slot and press
SELECT.
 The ENABLE MODEM option is displayed.
3. ENABLE or DISABLE the modem as required.
4. Scroll to MODEM STATUS, TYPE, FIRMWARE VERSION and SIGNAL
LEVEL and press SELECT to view details of the modem.
5. Configure the following modem settings from the menu as follows and press
ENTER after each selection:
Menu Option
Description
COUNTRY CODE
Select a country from the list.
GSM PIN
(GSM modem only) Enter a GSM PIN for the SIM card.
ANSWER MODE
Select to select the mode in which the modem answers
incoming calls: NEVER ANSWERS or ALWAYS
ANSWERS
ANSWER ENG. ACC.
Select ENABLE to only answer when engineer access is
granted.
SETUP SMS
Select ENABLE SMS to enable SMS for this modem.
(Only for PSTN.) Select SMS SERVER to enter an
appropriate phone number of the SMS service provider that
is accessible in your location, if required. This number
automatically displays the default number for SMS for the
country selected.
To manually test SMS, select TEST SMS and enter the
SMS NUMBER.
To automatically test SMS at specific time intervals, select
AUTOMATIC TEST , select a TEST INTERVAL and enter
the SMS NUMBER.
PREFIX DIALLING
(PSTN modem only) Enter a prefix number to include
before the SMS number, if required.
LINE MONITORING
For PSTN: Enable this feature to monitor the voltage of the
line connected to the modem.
140
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Communication
Menu Option
16
Description
GSM Modem: Enable this feature to monitor the signal level
from the GSM mast connected to the modem.
Select a monitoring MODE (ALWAYS ON, FULLSET,
DISABLED). The FULLSET option only enables this feature
while the system is Fullset.
Enter the number of seconds for the monitoring TIMER (0 –
9999 sec)
Note : EN 50131-9 Confirmation configuration
In order for EN50131-9 Confirmation to operate correctly,
line monitoring must be enabled. (refer to System Options)
GSM Modem only. If SMS enabled, and if an incorrect PIN is sent to the SIM card
three times, the SIM is blocked. If this happens, it is recommended that the SIM
card be removed and unblocked using a mobile phone. If the SIM card is being
changed on the GSM module or if a SIM card is being used with a PIN, it is
recommended that the PIN code be programmed before it is placed in the SIM
holder, to ensure that incorrect PINs are not sent to it. All power should be
removed (AC mains and battery) when loading the SIM card into the SIM holder.
16.11.4
16.11.4.1
Central Station
Add
To program the central station settings:
1. Scroll to CENTRAL STATION > ADD.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Select the desired programming option shown in the table below.
4. After programming is complete, the option to make a test call to the station is
displayed on the keypad.
ACCOUNT ID
This information should be available from the receiving station and is used to
identify users each time a call is made to the ARC
ACCOUNT NAME
Description of the Remote Alarm Receiving Centre
PROTOCOL
The communication protocol to be used (SIA, Contact ID, Fast Format)
1ST PHONE NUMBER
The first number to be dialled to contact the ARC
2ND PHONE NUMBER The second number to be dialled to contact the ARC; the system only
attempts to contact the ARC on this number if the first contact number did
not successfully connect
PRIORITY
16.11.4.2
The modem (primary or back-up) to be used to communicate with the ARC
Edit
To edit the central station settings:
1. Scroll to CENTRAL STATION >EDIT.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Select the desired programming option shown in the table below.
141
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Communication
4. After programming is complete, the option to make a test call to the station is
displayed on the keypad.
ACCOUNT ID
This information should be available from the receiving station and is used to
identify users each time a call is made to the ARC
ACCOUNT NAME
Description of the Remote Alarm Receiving Centre
PROTOCOL
The communication protocol to be used (SIA, Contact ID, Fast Format)
1ST PHONE NUMBER
The first number to be dialled to contact the ARC
2ND PHONE NUMBER The second number to be dialled to contact the ARC; the system only
attempts to contact the ARC on this number if the first contact number did
not successfully connect
16.11.4.3
DIAL ATTEMPTS
Enter the number of times that the system will attempt to make a call to the
receiver.
DIAL INTERVAL
Enter the number of seconds to delay between failed dial attempts. (0 - 999)
ASSIGN AREA
Assign the areas for which events are reported to the ARC.
REPORTED EVENTS
Define the types of events reported to the ARC.
PRIORITY
The modem (primary or back-up) to be used to communicate with the ARC
AUTOMATIC TEST
Defines a schedule for testing the connection to the ARC. Possible values
range from every hour to once every 30 days.
Delete
Enables you to delete a configured ARC.
16.11.4.4
Make Test Call
Enables you to test the connection with the ARC.
To make a test call, do the following:
1. Select MAKE TEST CALL.
2. Select the ARC name.
3. Click SELECT.
4. Select the modem to use for the text call.
 The test call is performed.
16.11.5
Remote Maintenance
1. Scroll to REMOTE MAINT.>ENABLE REMOTE MAINT
2. Press Select.
3. Toggle between ENABLED and DISABLED.
4. Select the desired programming option shown in the table below.
ID
Remote Maintenance ID. Must match that at SPC Pro (1 - 999999 ).
PASSWORD
Password for Remote Maintenance. Must match that at SPC Pro.
IN CONN. SETTS.
Incoming Connection Settings. You can enable IN IP ENABLE to
allow incoming IP connections from the Remote Maintenance
server. If not enabled, only modem connections are possible. Enter
the IN TCP/IP PORT on which the panel listens to incoming IP
connections from the Remote Maintenance server.
142
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Test
OUT CONN. SETTS
16.12
16
Outgoing Connection Settings. Choose how to make outgoing
connections to the Remote Maintenance server from the options
DISABLED, OVER MODEM or OVER IP.
Test
1. Scroll to TEST and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the desired programming option.
16.12.1
Bell Test
To perform a bell test:
1. Scroll to TEST > BELL TEST.
2. Press SELECT.
 When BELL TEST is selected, the following options available: EXTERNAL
BELLS, STROBE, INTERNAL BELLS and BUZZER. When each of these
options is selected, the device sounds to verify it is operating correctly.
16.12.2
Walk Test
A walk test ensures that the sensors are operating correctly on the SPC system.
To perform a walk test:
1. Scroll to TEST > WALK TEST.
2. Press SELECT.
3. The display indicates the number of zones to be tested on the system with the
text TO TEST XX (where XX is the number of valid walk test zones). Locate the
sensor on the first zone and activate it (open the door or window).
 The keypad buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 2 seconds to
indicate that the zone activation has been detected and the number of
zones left to test (displayed on the keypad) decreases.
4. Continue with the remaining zones on the system until all zones have been
tested. If a zone activation does not get acknowledged by the system, check
the wiring of the sensor and/or replace with another sensor if necessary.
NOTICE
All zones can be included in an Engineer walk test.
16.12.3
Zone Monitor
The Zone Monitor option displays status information on each of the zones on the
system.
To view zone status information:
1. Scroll to TEST > ZONE MONITOR.
143
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Test
2. Press SELECT.
3. Scroll to a preferred zone and press SELECT.
 The status of the zone and its associated resistance value is displayed.
4. Press NEXT to locate the zone (e.g. CONTROLLER 1 = first zone on
Controller).
 Refer to the table below for correlating status information (valid for Dual EOL
resistors).
Zone status
Abbreviation
UNKNOWN
UK
CLOSED
CL
OPEN
OP
SHORT
SH
DISCONNECTED
DI
PULSE
PU
GROSS
GR
MASKED
AM
FAULT
FA
DC SUB
DC
OUT OF BOUNDS
OB
UNSTABLE
US
All zones on a system can be monitored for correct operation by performing a
monitoring test.
To perform a zone monitoring test:
1. Scroll to ZONE MONITOR.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Scroll to a preferred zone and press SELECT, or enter the zone number
directly.
 If the zone is located close to the keypad, the status of the keypad can be
viewed as it changes. The Zone status and resistance value displays on
the top right.
4. Change the state of the sensor; e.g. for a door contact sensor, open the door.
 The keypad buzzer beeps and the status of the sensor changes from CL
(Closed) to OP (Open). The corresponding resistance value changes to a value
that depends on the EOL resistance scheme.
It is advisable to check the operation of all zones on the system after installation
is complete. To locate the zone select NEXT (bottom right) on the keypad. A zone
status value of SH or DI indicates that the zone is shorted or disconnected.
16.12.4
Output Test
To perform an output test:
1. Scroll to OUTPUT TEST.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Toggle between CONTROLLER and EXPANDER for preferred option.
144
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Test
16
4. If testing the controller outputs, scroll to the preferred output and press
SELECT. If testing the expander outputs, select the expander and then the
output.
 The keypad display indicates the current state of the output on the top line.
5. Toggle the output state ON/OFF.
6. Check that the device connected to the selected output changes state
accordingly.
16.12.5
Soak Test
A Soak Test provides a method of putting selected zones on test. Zones on soak
test do not cause any alarms but are recorded in the event log. Zones on soak test
will remain on soak test until the soak test timer expires as in the timers default (14
days).
To perform a soak test:
1. Scroll to SOAK TEST and press SELECT.
2. Toggle between ENABLE SOAK and CANCEL SOAK for preferred option.
3. Scroll to preferred zone and press SELECT.
 A message confirming that the zone is in soak is displayed.
NOTICE
All zone types can be included in a Soak test.
16.12.6
Audible Options
The audible options are applied as indicators within a walk test.
To set the audible options:
1. Scroll to AUDIBLE OPTIONS.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Scroll to one of the following options: ALL, INT BELL, EXT BELL, KEYPAD
4. Press SAVE.
5. Press BACK to exit.
16.12.7
Visual Indicators
This test is used to test all the pixels on the LCD Keypad and all the pixels and
LED indicators on the Comfort Keypad, Indicator module and Keyswitch.
To test a keypad:
1. Scroll to VISUAL IND.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Press ENABLE.
On the LCD keypad, two rows of continuously changing characters are displayed.
On the Comfort keypad, all the LED indicators are lit and all screen pixels are
displayed.
1. Press BACK to disable the test.
145
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Utilities
2. Press BACK to exit.
16.12.8
WPA Test
NOTICE
This test can be only be performed by an engineer or user that has a ‘WPA Test’
right assigned to them. See User rights
To test the WPA from the keypad:
1. Scroll to WPA TEST and press SELECT.
2. When prompted with ACTIVATE WPA, press the three buttons simultaneously
on the WPA.
 If the test succeeded, a WPA n OK message will be shown where n is the
number of WPA being tested.
1. Repeat the test if required.
2. Press BACK or X to end the test.
16.12.9
Seismic Test
To perform a seismic test:
1. Scroll to TEST > SEISMIC TEST.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Select TEST ALL AREAS, or select an individual area to test.
4. If you select an individual area to test, you can select either TEST ALL ZONES
or select a specific seismic zone to test.
 The message ‘SEISMIC TEST’ is display on the keypad while the test is
being performed,
 If the test fails, the message ‘SEISMIC FAIL’ is displayed. If the “i” or VIEW
key is pressed, a list of the failed zones is displayed which can be scrolled
through.
 If the test succeeds, ‘SEISMIC OK’ is displayed.
See also Seismic Sensor Testing [➙ 323].
16.13
Utilities
1. Scroll to UTILITIES and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the desired programming option:
SYSTEM SOFTWARE To view the current software version.
DEFAULTS
To reset users or return the system to factory setting.
BACKUP CONFIG
To back-up a configuration.
RESTORE CONFIG
To restore a configuration.
FAST PROGRAMMER 
DATA FROM PANEL: Transfer data from the controller to the
Fast Programmer. You are prompted to confirm if the new
146
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Isolate





16.14
16
configuration file name is the same as a file name already
existing in the fast programmer to prevent configuration files
from being overwritten.
DATA TO PANEL: Transfer data to the controller from the
Fast Programmer.
DELETE FILES:
FIRMWARE UPGRADE.
Note: If you downgrade the firmware (i.e. install an older
version of firmware) the system will default all current
configuration settings. Also, when downgrading firmware, it is
important to downgrade the corresponding peripheral
firmware otherwise zones may appear disconnected, opened
or closed.
PERIPHERAL UPGRADE:
LANGUAGE UPGRADE:
SPC PRO/SPC SAFE
To program the following SPC Pro options:
 ENABLE ACCESS: Determine if SPC Pro is enabled or
disabled.
 ENGINEER ACCESS: Determine if engineer access is
enabled or disabled.
 PASSWORD: Edit the existing system password.
 IP ENABLE: Enable to connect to the system via IP.
 IP PORT: Select which IP Port SPC Pro/SDK will connect
through.
SYSTEM RESTART
To restart the system.
LICENSE
Enter a license number to change the SPC license key. The
system does not log or report a license change.
Isolate
Zones, system alerts or alerts from X-BUS devices can be manually isolated from
the keypad. Isolating a zone removes that zone from the system until the user deisolates it.
To isolate zones, system alerts or alerts from X-BUS devices:
1. Scroll to ISOLATE and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the desired option in the table below and press SELECT.
ZONE
Select the required zone and toggle the setting from NOT ISOLATED to
ISOLATED.
SYSTEM
Isolate the desired system alert.
XBUS
Isolate the desired alert from EXPANDERS or KEYPADS:



VIEW ISOLATIONS
16.15
XBUS COMMS LOST
XBUS FUSE FAULT (Expanders only)
X-BUS TAMPER
To view a list of the isolated zones, system alerts and X-BUS devices alerts.
Event Log
Recent events on the system are displayed in the EVENT LOG option. Events flash
in one second intervals.
1. Scroll to EVENT LOG and press SELECT.
2. To view an event from a particular date, enter the date with the numeric keys.
147
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Access Log
 The most recent events are displayed on the bottom line of the display. All
previous events are displayed for one second in turn.
16.16
Access Log
Zone access on the system is displayed in the ACCESS LOG option.
1. Scroll to ACCESS LOG and press SELECT.
2. Select a door on the system for which you want to display access events.
 The most recent access events are displayed with a date and time.
3. Scroll down through the access events or enter a date and press ENTER to
find a particular access event.
16.17
Alarm Log
The ALARM LOG displays a list of alarm events.
 Select Log > System Log > Alarm Log.
The following types are displayed in this log:
 Zones
– Alarm
– Panic
 System Events
– Confirmed Alarm
– User Duress
– XBus Panic
– User Panic
– RPA Panic
16.18
Change Engineer Pin
To change the Engineer PIN:
1. Scroll to CHANGE ENG PIN and press SELECT.
 A randomly generated PIN appears.
2. Enter a new PIN if required by overwriting the displayed PIN and press
ENTER.
 The minimum number of digits required for this code depends on the
security setting of the system or on the selected length of the PIN Digits in
the browser (Panel Settings > System Settings > Options) The system will
not accept a PIN with fewer numbers than it is set to receive
3. Confirm the new PIN, press SAVE.
4. Press BACK to return to the previous screen to amend the PIN.
 If the display times out during the process, the old PIN remains valid.
16.19
Users
Only users with the appropriate user right enabled in their profile have the ability to
add, edit, or delete users:
148
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Users
16.19.1
16
Add
To add users to the system:
1. Scroll to USERS > ADD.
 Select a user ID from the available IDs on the system and press SELECT.
2. Press ENTER to accept the default user name or enter a customized user
name and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to the preferred user profile type and press ENTER to select.
 The system generates a default PIN for each new user.
4. Press ENTER to accept the default user PIN or enter a new user PIN and
press ENTER.
The keypad confirms that the new user has been created.
16.19.2
Edit
To edit users on the system:
1. Scroll to USERS > EDIT.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Edit the desired user setting shown in the table below.
CHANGE NAME
Edit the current user name
USER PROFILE
Select the appropriate profile for this user.
USER DURESS
Enable or disable duress for this user.
DATE LIMIT
Enable this if the user can only access the system for a specified period of time.
Enter a FROM and TO date and press ENTER.
PACE
Enable or disable PACE capability
RF FOB
Enable or disable RF Fob access (wireless keypad, remote control)
MAN-DOWN
(MDT)
Enables the man-down test.
ACCESS
CONTROL
If no card assigned to the user:


ADD CARD
LEARN CARD
If a card assigned to the user:



LANGUAGE
16.19.2.1
EDIT CARD
–
CARD NUMBER
–
CARD ATTRIBUTES (see Access Control)
RESET CARD
DELETE CARD
Select a language for this user that will be displayed on the system.
Access Control
One access card can be assigned to each of the users on the control panel.
To configure the access control for a user:
1. Scroll to USERS > EDIT.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Select the user which should be configured and press SELECT.
149
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
Users
4. Scroll to ACCESS CONTROL and press SELECT.
The following sections provide programming steps found within the access control
option of the selected user.
16.19.2.1.1
Add Card manually
If the card format of the card number is known, the card can be created manually.
The site code of the card is configured for the user profile that is assigned for this
user.
1. Scroll to ADD CARD
2. Press SELECT.
 An empty card has been added and can now be edited.
16.19.2.1.2
Learn Card
NOTICE
Only cards with supported card formats can be learned.
If the card number or the card format is not known, the card can be read and its
information learned.
1. Scroll to LEARN CARD.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Select the door that the card will be presented.
4. Press SELECT.
NOTICE
The new card can be presented at the entry or the exit reader of the selected
door.
5. Present the card at a card reader at the selected door.
 The information for the new card is learned.
16.19.2.1.3
Edit Card
If an access card is already assigned to a user it can be changed via the keypad:
1. Scroll to EDIT CARD.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Edit the desired user setting shown in the table below.
4. Press BACK to exit.
Access Control
Attribute
Description
Card Number
Enter card number. Enter 0 to unassign this card.
150
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Users
16.19.2.1.4
16
Attribute
Description
Void Card
Check to temporarily disable this card.
Extended Time
Extend door timers when this card is present.
PIN bypass
Access a door without PIN on a door with PIN reader.
Priority
Priority cards are stored locally in the door controllers and
will grant access in case of a technical fault where the door
controller cannot communicate with the control panel.
The maximum number of priority users is:
 SPC4xxx – all users
 SPC5xxx – 512
 SPC6xxx - 512
Escort
The escort feature enforces privileged card holders to
escort other card holders through specific doors. If this
feature is enabled on a door, a card with the “escort” right
has to be presented first, to allow other cardholders without
this right to open the door. The time period in which
cardholders are able to present their cards after a card with
escort right was presented, can be configured per door.
Custodian
The custodian feature enforces a card holder with custodian
privilege to always be inside a room (door group) when
other card holders are inside.
The custodian must be the first to enter the room. Only if a
custodian is in the room other cardholders are allowed to
enter. The cardholder with the custodian right will not be
allowed to exit until all non-custodian cards left the room.
Identifies this card holder as a custodian. The user with the
custodian attribute has to be the first who enters a door
group which requires a custodian card holder and has to be
the last that is leaving this door group.
Delete Card
If an access card is no longer needed it can be deleted via the keypad.
1. Scroll to DELETE CARD.
2. Press SELECT.
16.19.2.1.5
Reset Card
If the ‘Prevent Passback’ feature is activated in a room and a user leaves this room
without using the exit reader, he is not allowed to enter this room again. The user’s
card can be reset to allow him to present his card once without a passback check.
To reset the card via the keypad:
1. Scroll to RESET CARD.
2. Press SELECT.
16.19.3
Delete
To delete users on the system:
1. Scroll to USERS > DELETE.
2. Press SELECT.
 A prompt displays, confirming command to delete.
3. Press YES to delete the user.
151
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
User Profiles
16.20
User Profiles
See also
 Adding / Editing User Profiles [➙ 185]
16.20.1
Add
To add user profiles to the system:
The creator must be a user profile type MANAGER.
1. Scroll to USERS PROFILES > ADD.
 The option NEW NAME is displayed. Press SELECT.
2. Enter a customized user profile name and press ENTER.
 The keypad confirms that the new user profile has been created.
16.20.2
Edit
To edit user profiles on the system:
1. Scroll to USER PROFILES > EDIT.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Edit the desired user profile setting shown in the table below.
16.20.3
CHANGE NAME
Edit the name of the profile if required.
CHANGE AREAS
Select the areas relevant to this profile.
CALENDAR
Select a configured calendar or NONE.
RIGHT
Enable or disable system features for this profile. See User
Rights [➙ 185].
DOOR
Select the type of access available to this profile for the
configured doors. Options are NONE, NO LIMIT or
CALENDAR.
SITE CODE
Enter a site code for all cards using this profile.
Delete
To delete user profiles on the system:
1. Scroll to USER PROFILES > DELETE.
2. Scroll through the user profiles to the required profile.
3. Press SELECT
 You are prompted to confirm deletion.
152
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
SMS
16
4. Press SELECT to delete the user profile.
16.21
SMS
The SPC system support SMS alerts to be communicated from the panel to the
engineer and selected users’ mobile phones (SMS events) in addition to allowing
users to control the SPC system remotely via SMS (SMS control). These two
features work hand in hand as it allows the user to respond to a SMS notification
without the need to be physically at the premises.
A maximum of 32 (SPC4xxx), 50 (SPC5xxx) or 100 (SPC6xxx) SMS IDs can be
configured for each panel. An SMS-enabled modem and an appropriate system
and user configuration are required to enable SMS communications.
Depending on the SMS AUTHENTICATION mode selected (see OPTIONS
[➙ 109] menu), SMS user authentication can be configured to use various
combinations of the user’s PIN and Caller ID or SMS PIN and Caller PIN.
The SMS notification can operate with a PSTN modem if the PSTN operator
supports SMS over PSTN whereas SMS control will need a GSM modem at the
panel. A GSM modem will support both SMS notification and control.
SMS control
The SMS control can be set up so that a remote user can send an SMS message
to perform the following actions at the panel:
 Setting / unsetting
 Enable / disable engineer
 Enable / disable manufacturer access.
 Mapping gate on/off.
SMS events
The SMS notification can be set up to send a range of events that occur on the
system such as:
 Alarm activation
 Confirmed alarms
 Fault & tamper
 Setting & unsetting
 Inhibit & isolate
 All other types of events
16.21.1
Add
 A modem is installed and identified by the system.
 The function SMS Authentication is activated in OPTIONS [➙ 109].
1. Scroll to SMS -> ADD and press SELECT.
2. Select a user to add for SMS operation.
3. Enter an SMS NUMBER for this user and press ENTER.
4. Enter an SMS PIN for this user and press ENTER.
 Keypad indicates that SMS details are updated.
153
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
X-10
16.21.2
Edit

A modem is installed and identified by the system.
 The function SMS Authentication is activated in OPTIONS [➙ 109].
1. Scroll to SMS -> EDIT and press SELECT.
2. Select an engineer or user SMS ID to edit.
SMS ID
System generated ID.
SMS Number
Enter the number to which the SMS will be sent (requires three-digit country
code prefix).
Note: Engineer SMS number can deleted by resetting it 0. User SMS
numbers cannot be deleted.
User
Select a new user for this SMS ID if required.
SMS Events
Select the panel events which the user or engineer will receive via SMS.
SMS Control
Select the operations that the user or engineer can perform remotely on the
panel through SMS. See SMS Commands [➙ 189]
NOTICE
HOLDUP alarm events are not transmitted via SMS.
If the phone line is connected to the PSTN network via a PBX, the appropriate
line access digit should be inserted before the called party number. Ensure that
Calling Line Identity (CLI) is enabled on the line selected to make the call to the
SMS network. Consult the PBX administrator for details.
16.21.3
Delete
1. Scroll to SMS -> DELETE.
2. Scroll to the required SMS ID.
3. Press SELECT.
 The keypad indicates that the SMS information is updated.
16.22
X-10
As of version 3.4, X-10 is in maintenance. The functionality remains in the product
for backward compatibility.
X10 is a technology that allows peripheral devices, such as lights or appliances, to
be controlled by the system and system events can be used to trigger outputs on
the X10 devices. The SPC controller provides a dedicated serial port (serial port 1)
for interfacing directly with standard X10 equipment.
1. Scroll to X-10 and press SELECT.
154
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the keypad
Set Date/Time
16
2. Scroll to the desired programming option:
ENABLE X-10
To enable or disable the X-10 functionality on the system.
DEVICES
To add, edit, delete or test X-10 devices.
LOGGING
To enable or disable the X-10 logging.
16.23
Set Date/Time
The date and time can be manually entered on the system. The time and date
information is displayed on the keypad and browser and is used on time-related
programming features.
1. Scroll to SET DATE/TIME and press SELECT.
 The date displays on the top line of the display.
2. To enter a new date, press the required numeric keys. To move the cursor to
the left and right, press the left and right arrow keys.
3. Press ENTER to save the new date.
 If an attempt is made to save an invalid date value, the text INVALID
VALUE is displayed for 1 second and the user is prompted to enter a valid
date.
4. To enter a new time, press the required numeric keys. To move the cursor to
the left and right, press the left and right arrow keys.
5. Press ENTER to save the new time.
 If an attempt is made to save an invalid time value, the text INVALID
VALUE is displayed for 1 second and the user is prompted to enter a valid
time.
16.24
Installer Text
This setting allows the engineer to enter system information and engineer contact
information.
1. Scroll to INSTALLER TEXT and press SELECT.
2. Scroll to the desired programming option:
SYSTEM NAME
Used to help identify the system; use a clear and descriptive name for
the installation.
SYSTEM ID
Used to help identify the installation when connected to a central
station (max. 10 digits).
INSTALLER NAME
Used for contact purposes.
INSTALLER PHONE
Used for contact purposes.
DISP. INSTALLER
Setting to display installer details can during the idle state.
The installer contact details programmed in these menu options should also be
entered on the keypad pull-down label on completion of the installation.
16.25
Door Control
This option allows you to control all the doors of the system.
155
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
16
Engineer programming via the keypad
SPC Connect
1. Scroll to DOOR CONTROL and press SELECT.
2. Select the door which should be controlled and press SELECT.
3. Select one of the door states listed below as new door state and press
SELECT.
16.26
NORMAL
The door is in normal operation mode. A card with the corresponding
access rights is needed to open the door.
MOMENTARY
The door is opened only for a timed interval to allow access.
LOCKED
The door is locked. The door remains closed even if a card with the
corresponding access rights is presented.
UNLOCKED
The door is unlocked.
SPC Connect
Add an SPC Connect ATS to set up a connection between a panel and the SPC
Connect website https://www.spcconnect.com. This enables a panel user to
register and access their panel remotely using the SPC Connect website. If SPC
Connect is not enabled during the start up wizard sequence, you can use this
menu to add an SPC Connect ATS. If SPC Connect was enabled during start up,
this menu shows the Registration ID for a panel.
ADD
If SPC CONNECT was disabled during the
start up wizard, the ADD menu displays.
Select ADD to create an SPC Connect ATS.
This allows a panel user to register their
panel and access their panel remotely using
the SPC Connect website,
https://www.spcconnect.com
REGISTRATION ID
If SPC CONNECT was enabled during the
start up wizard, the panel registration ID
displays. Provide this information to an end
user to allow them to register their panel
with the SPC Connect website,
https://www.spcconnect.com, for remote
access to their panel.
COMPANY ID
For future use.
DELETE
To remove an SPC Connect ATS from a
panel, select DELETE.
156
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
System Information
17
17 Engineer programming via the browser
Engineer programming options on the SPC panel can be accessed via any
standard web browser on a PC and is PIN protected.
You can access Engineer Programming via the browser by entering the default
Engineer PIN (1111). For more details, see Engineering PINs [➙ 100].
This web server provides access to the complete set of programming features used
to install and configure the SPC system.
This programming option should only be provided to authorized installers of the
SPC system.
Engineer Programming features on the SPC are divided into the following
categories:
Soft Engineer Features
These features can be programmed without requiring the alarm system to be
deactivated; they are accessible directly upon entering Engineer mode.
Full Engineer Features
These features require the alarm system to be deactivated before programming
can commence; these features are accessible under the Full Engineer menu.
NOTICE
If ‘Engineer Exit’ option is enabled in System Options, the engineer is allowed
leave Full Engineer mode with alerts active but must acknowledge all alerts listed
on the keypad or in the browser before switching from Full Engineer mode to Soft
Engineer mode.
The web server on SPC controller can be accessed using either the Ethernet or
USB interface.
If programming with a browser interface, click Save when making changes.
Click Refresh to view the current programming values on a web page.
17.1
System Information
Click the ? icon to view the Help menu which provides up-to-date information about
the panel and the functionality that is currently licensed on the system.
17.2
Ethernet interface
IP
157
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Ethernet interface
Connect
1
JP9
SPC4xxx
2
Ethernet port
3
To Ethernet port on PC
If the SPC Ethernet interface is connected to an existing Local Area Network
(LAN), please consult the network administrator for that LAN before connecting to
the panel. Default IP Address: 192.168.1.100
Connect the cable

Connect an Ethernet cable from the Ethernet interface on the PC to the
Ethernet port on the controller board
– OR –
If connecting directly from a PC then a cross over-cable must be used. See
page [➙ 330].
 The LEDs to the right of the Ethernet interface indicate a successful data
connection (Right LED on) and Ethernet data traffic (Left LED flashing).
Determine the IP address of the SPC controller
1. Entering the Engineer mode (See Engineering PINs [➙ 100]).
2. Using the up/down arrow keys, scroll down COMMUNICATION option and
press SELECT.
3. Scroll to ETHERNET PORT and press SELECT.
4. Scroll to IP ADDRESS and press SELECT.
158
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Connecting to the panel via USB
17.3
17
Connecting to the panel via USB
If the panel is reset while the USB cable is connected, the cable must be
unplugged and plugged in again.
The USB port on the controller connects to a PC via a standard USB type A or type
B cable. Drivers must be installed to make a USB connection from the controller to
the PC.
 SPC Pro must be installed on your PC.
 USB cable connecting your PC to the panel.
1. Connect the USB cable from the controller to a USB interface on the PC.
 The Found New Hardware wizard is displayed.
2. Press Next .
 Windows XP detects a Generic USB hub.
3. Click Finish.
 Windows XP detects the SPC – Advanced Security System on COM port
N, where N is the number of the COM port assigned to the device.
4. Make a note of the COM port assigned to the device, it is required later in the
process.
 The Found New Hardware wizard is displayed again.
5. Select Install the software automatically.
6. If the Windows XP driver installation wizard asks you to select the best match
from a list, choose the following option:
 Vanderbilt Intrunet SPC USB Local Connection
7. Click Next.
 A dialog box regarding Windows certification appears. Vanderbilt deems
this acceptable to continue. For further queries, please contact network
administrator or a Vanderbilt technician.
8. Click Continue Anyway.
 The installation finishes.
9. Click Finish.
 The driver is installed.
Configuring the connection on Windows XP
To set up the new connection on the PC:
1. Click on the Start command.
2. Select Connect To > Show All Connections > Create A New Connection.
3. In the New Connection Wizard, select Setup an advanced connection.
4. Select the Advanced Connection Option, Connect directly to another computer.
5. Select Guest as the role for this PC.
6. Enter a name for the connection.
7. Select an available serial port for use with the connection. This port should be
the COM port that the USB device is using.
159
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Connecting to the panel via USB
8. Select if this connection is available to all users or just yourself.
9. On the last dialog of the wizard, click Finish.
10. The PC prompts for username and password for the USB connection. Enter the
following details:
-
Username: SPC
-
Password: password (default)
11. Click Connect.
 The PC initiates a data link with the controller. When the link has been
established, a connection icon appears on the task bar at the bottom of the
PC screen.
12. Right-click the link and select Status.
 A server IP address is displayed in the details window.
13. Enter this address into the address bar of an internet browser using the hyper
text transfer protocol secure (e.g. https://192.168.5.1).
14. Login into the SPC browser application using your user PIN.
Your default PIN should be changed immediately and noted. Forgotten PINs are
remedied only by a factory default of the system, resulting in a reset of the system
configuration. The configuration can be restored if a backup is available.
Windows 7
 Perform all actions described in USB Connection on Windows 7 for SPCPro
 You must have Local Administrator rights to perform the actions in this task.
1. Open the Windows 7 Control Panel.
2. Select Phone and Modem.
 The Phone and Modem window is displayed,
3. Select the Modems tab and click Add.
 The Add Hardware Wizard – Install New Modem window is displayed.
4. Click Next twice.
 The Add New Hardware wizard displays a list of modems.
5. Select Communications cable between two computers.
6. Click Next.
7. Select the COM port assigned in USB Connection on Windows 7 for SPCPro.
8. Click Next, then Finish.
9. Return to the Modems tab of the Phone and Modem window.
10. Select the new modem and click Properties.
 The Communications cable between two computers Properties window is
displayed.
11. In the General tab, click Change Settings to allow editing of the properties.
12. Select the Modem tab.
13. Change the value in the Maximum Port Speed to 115200 and click OK.
160
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Logging into the browser
17
14. From the Control Panel, open the Network and Sharing Center.
15. Click Change Adapter Settings. If a new modem is present in the list of
available connections, proceed to step 23. If the modem is not present, perform
the following steps.
16. In the Network and Sharing Center, click Set up a new connection or network.
17. Select Set up a dial-up connection and click Next.
18. Enter any values in the phone number, User name and Password fields and
enter a name in the Connection Name field.
19. Click Connect.
 Windows 7 creates the connection.
20. Skip the Testing Internet Connection process.
21. Click Close.
22. In the Network and Sharing Center, click Change adapter settings.
23. Double-click on the new modem.
 The Connect ConnectionName window opens, where ConnectionName is
the name you defined for the modem.
24. Click Properties.
25. Ensure the Connect using: field contains the correct information,
Communications cable between two computers (COM3), for example.
26. Open your browser and enter the IP address of the Controller using https as
the connection protocol.
27. Click Continue Anyway if the browser displays a certificate error page.
28. Log on to the panel.
17.4
Logging into the browser
To log into the browser:
1. When an Ethernet or USB link is established and the IP address of the
controller determined, open the PC browser.
2. Enter the IP address in the address bar of the browser using the hyper text
transfer protocol secure. (e.g. https:// 192.168.1.100) See table below.
 A window with a security message is displayed.
3. Click Continue to this website.
 The login screen is displayed.
161
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
SPC Home
4. Enter the following:
-
User ID: user or engineer name
-
Password: User or Engineer PIN.
5. Select a language in which to display the browser screens. The default
language setting ‘Auto’ will automatically load the language assigned to this
user ID.
6. Click Login.
Default settings for WEB server address
17.5
Connection
IP address Web server
Ethernet
192.168.1.100 (default)
RS232
192.168.2.1 (fixed)
Backup Modem / RS232
192.168.3.1 (fixed)
Primary Modem
192.168.4.1 (fixed)
USB
192.168.5.1 (fixed)
SPC Home
The SPC Home page has a System Summary tab, Alarms tab and Video tab.
17.5.1
System Summary
The System Summary tab is divided into the following three sections:
 System: shows the status of all areas, active system alerts and warnings and
information for the system.
 Areas: shows the status of each area defined on the system with up to 20
alarm events. You can set or unset an area and the area status displays here.
 Inhibits and Isolates: Lists all the isolated zones and allows you to deisolate or
bypass before setting.
162
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
SPC Home
17
NOTICE
If there are alarms on the system, the information message See alarm tab
displays.
17.5.2
Alarms Overview
The Alarms tab shows the following system information:
 Alarm Set Sate - shows whether the system was partial or fullset at the time the
alarm was triggered.
 Alarm Status - shows the type of alarm (alarm, confirmed alarm etc.)
 Bells active - shows if the alarm activated the bells. Click the Silence Bells
button to cancel.
For each area, the Alarm Set State, Alarm Status, Alarm Activations and Alarm log
displays. The Alarm Activations show a list of zones in alarm state ordered by
activation. Click the Restore button to clear. The Alarm log shows up to 20 events.
17.5.3
Viewing Video
The Video tab displays images from up to 4 IP cameras.

In Full Engineer, Soft Engineer and User mode, select SPC Home > Video.
163
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
SPC Home
 All the configured and operational cameras (up to the maximum of four) are
displayed in the Video Cameras page. Only two cameras are available in
the following example.
The images are automatically refreshed as per the interval settings for the camera.
(See Configuring Video [➙ 255])
Click on the Pause Refresh button to retain the current image on the screen and
pause refreshing. Click on the Resume Refresh button to enable the panel to
resume refreshing the images.
Note: Ensure that a resolution of 320 x 240 is selected for the cameras that will be
displayed in the browser otherwise images may not be displayed correctly. The
higher resolution of 640 x 480 can be used for operation with SPC Pro and SPC
Com.
Video Fault Reporting
A video fault report is displayed above the camera image. The following table lists
the possible messages:
Message
Description
OK
The camera is behaving normally
Timeout
Camera connection timed out.
Socket Invalid
Internal socket handling error
Image too small
Received image too small
Buffer too small
Received image is too large. Lower the resolution in the Camera
configuration.
Format incorrect
Invalid format received.
Abort
TCP connection disconnected
Internal
Alarm panel has insufficient memory to complete the request.
Bad request
A badly formed request was sent to the camera. Check your
camera configuration settings.
Client error
The camera returned a client error. Check your camera
configuration.
Authorization error
User name and/or password are incorrect
Unknown
An unknown error was returned. The camera may be an
unsupported model.
164
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
17.6
17.6.1
17
Panel status
Status
This page displays the status and summary of the main SPC components,
including system, power, X-BUS and communications.
1. Select Status > Hardware > Controller Status.
2. See tables below for further information.
Performable actions
The following actions are only possible if a connection has been established.
Restore All Alerts
Pro
17.6.2
Restores all active alerts on the panel. These alerts messages are displayed in
red text opposite the relevant item.
Refresh
Updates any changes in panel status. You must refresh the status window to
display the actual panel status at any particular moment.
Full Engineer /
Soft Engineer
To toggle between Soft- and Full Engineer modes. Full Engineer mode disables
alarms and prevents reporting of events to a central station.
X-Bus Status
1. Select Status > Hardware > X-Bus Status.
 The following window with the status of the different X-Bus devices is
displayed. All detected expanders are listed as default.
2. Select one of the following tabs.
-
Expanders (for programming expanders see page [➙ 202]).
165
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
-
Keypads (for programming keypads see page [➙ 207]).
-
Door controllers (for programming door controllers see page [➙ 212]).
3. Click any of the keypad/expander/door controller identifying parameters (ID,
description, type, serial number) to displayed further status details.
17.6.2.1
Expander Status
1. Select Status > Hardware > X-Bus Status.
2. Select the Expanders tab.
 A list of detected expanders and any associated PSUs is displayed.
Expander ID
This ID number is a unique identifier for the expander.
Description
Text description of the expander. This text will also appear on the browser and
keypad.
Type
The type of expander detected (I/O, PSU, keypad etc.).
S/N
The serial number of the expander.
Version
The firmware version of the expander.
Comms
The status of the expander (online or offline).
Status
The status of the expander (OK, Fault, OP Tamper).
PSU
The type of PSU that is fitted to the expander, if applicable. Click on the PSU to
view the PSU status.
Performable actions
Refresh
Click the button to update the status of the X-BUS.
To view more status information:

Click on any of the expander’s identifying parameters (ID, description, type,
serial number) to display further status details.
166
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
17
Name
Description
Communication
The physical status (OK, Fault) and the programmed status (OK,
Isolated, Inhibited) of the X-BUS cable connection to the
expander.
Cabinet Tamper
The physical and programmed status of the expander cabinet
tamper.
Fuse Fault
The physical and programmed status of the expander fuse.
Controller Mains Fault
The physical and programmed status of the mains supply to the
controller.
Battery Fault
The physical and programmed status of the battery.
PSU Fault
The physical and programmed status of the PSU.
OP Tamper
The physical and programmed status of the tamper outputs on the
PSU.
Low Voltage
Indication of battery low voltage status.
Performable actions
Name
Description
Restore Alerts
Click the button to restore all alerts on the panel.
Inhibit
Click this button to inhibit a fault condition. The inhibit operation
will disable that fault or zone for one arming period only.
Inhibit operation is not available in Security Grade EN 50131
Grade 3.
!
Isolate
Click this button to isolate that zone. Isolating a zone will deactivate that zone until such time as the zone is explicitly deisolated again. It is recommended that you exercise caution when
isolating zones as those zones will not be active every time the
system is SET.
167
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
See also
 PSU status [➙ 168]
17.6.2.2
PSU status
The PSU Status window displays details of the current status of the PSU and its
outputs in addition to the status of any connected batteries.
The following PSU types are supported:
 SPCP332/333 Smart PSU
 SPCP355 Smart PSU
SPCP332/333 Smart PSU Status
The following image shows the Smart PSU status:
Name
Description
Type
The type of power supply unit (PSU).
Version
The version of the PSU.
Mains Status
Displays the condition of the mains connection. Possible values are
Fault or OK.
Battery Link
Displays the type of battery connected.
Battery Status
Displays the condition of the battery connection. Possible values are
Fault or OK.
Battery Voltage
Displays the voltage reading of the battery.
Battery Current
Displays the current taken from the battery.
168
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
17
Name
Description
Outputs
Displays the voltage on the outputs, the current drawn by the output
and the condition of the fuse on the output.
SPCP355 Smart PSU Status
The following image shows the SPCP355 Smart PSU status.
Name
Description
Type
The type of power supply unit (PSU).
Version
The version of the PSU.
Mains Status
Displays the condition of the mains
connection. Possible values are Fault or OK.
Temperature
Displays the temperature of the PSU.
Load voltage
The voltage on the PSU
Load Current
The current drawn by the PSU.
Charge Status
Displays the condition of the battery charge.
Primary Circuit
Displays the condition of the primary circuit
which supplies power when the mains is
connected.
Charge Circuit
Displays the condition of the charge circuit
which charges the batteries when the mains
169
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
Name
Description
is connected.
17.6.2.3
Battery
Displays the charge status, voltage and
current available from the batteries.
Outputs
Displays the voltage, fuse condition and
tamper condition of the PSU outputs.
Keypad Status
1. Select Status > Hardware > X-Bus Status.
2. Select the Keypads tab.
 A list of detected keypads is displayed.
Name
Description
Expander ID
This ID number is a unique identifier for the keypad.
Description
Text description of the keypad (max. 16 characters).
Type
The type of expander detected (=keypad).
S/N
The serial number of the keypad.
Version
The firmware version of the keypad.
Comms
The status of the keypad (online or offline).
Status
The status of the keypad (OK, Fault).
Performable actions
Refresh
Click on the refresh button to update the list of detected keypads and their
status.
To view more status information:

Click on a keypad’s identifying parameters (ID, description, type, serial number)
to display further status details.
170
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
17
Communication
The physical status (OK, Fault) and the programmed status (OK, Isolated,
Inhibited) of the keypad cable connection to the expander.
Cabinet Tamper
The physical and programmed status of the expander cabinet tamper.
PACE
Applies only to Keypads with a PACE receiver installed.
Panic
Keypad panic alarm status.
Fire
Keypad Fire alarm status.
Medical
Keypad medical alarm status.
Code Tamper
Keypad PIN tamper alarm status
Performable actions
Restore Alerts
Click the button to restore all alerts on the panel.
Inhibit
Click this button to inhibit a fault condition. The inhibit operation will disable
that fault or zone for one arming period only.
Inhibit operation is not available in Security Grade EN 50131 Grade 3.
!
Isolate
17.6.2.4
Click this button to isolate that zone. Isolating a zone will de-activate that zone
until such time as the zone is explicitly de-isolated again. It is recommended
that you exercise caution when isolating zones as those zones will not be
active every time the system is SET.
Door Controller Status
1. Select Status > Hardware > X-Bus Status.
2. Select the Door Controllers tab.
 A list of detected door controllers is displayed.
Expander ID
This ID number is a unique identifier for the door controller.
171
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
Description
Text description of the door controller (max. 16 characters).
Type
The type of expander detected (=door controller).
S/N
The serial number of the door controller.
Version
The firmware version of the door controller.
Comms
The status of the door controller (online or offline).
Status
The status of the door controller (OK, Fault).
PSU
Specifies if the door controller has a PSU.
Performable actions
Refresh
Click on the refresh button to update the status of the system alerts.
To view more status information:
Click on a door controller’s identifying parameters (ID, description, type, serial
number) to display further status details.

Communication
The physical status (OK, Fault) and the programmed status (OK, Isolated,
Inhibited) of the keypad cable connection to the expander.
Cabinet Tamper
The physical and programmed status of the expander cabinet tamper.
Fuse Fault
The physical and programmed status of the door controller fuse.
Code Tamper
Status of the user’s PIN. Multiple failed attempts result in an alert.
Performable actions
Restore Alerts
Click the button to restore all alerts on the panel.
Inhibit
Click this button to inhibit a fault condition. The inhibit operation will disable
that fault or zone for one arming period only.
Inhibit operation is not available in Security Grade EN 50131 Grade 3.
!
Isolate
Click this button to isolate that zone. Isolating a zone will de-activate that zone
until such time as the zone is explicitly de-isolated again. It is recommended
that you exercise caution when isolating zones as those zones will not be
active every time the system is SET.
172
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
17.6.3
17
Wireless
Wireless sensor detection (868 MHz) on the SPC panel is provided by wireless
receiver modules which may be factory fitted on the keypad or on the controller, or
by installing a wireless expander.
1. Select Configuration > Hardware > Wireless > Wireless.
2. See table below for further information.
Sensor
The number of the sensor enrolled on the system
(1 = first, 2 = second, etc.)
ID
A unique identity number for that sensor.
Type
The type of wireless sensor detected
(magnetic contact, inertia/shock, etc.)
Zone
The zone to which the sensor has been enrolled.
Battery
The status of the battery in the sensor (if fitted).
Supervise
The status of the supervisory operation (OK = supervisory signal received,
Not Supervised = no supervisory operation).
Signal
The signal strength received from the sensor (01=low, 09=high).
Note: Although it is not possible to enroll a device with a signal strength less
than 3, devices whose signal drops below 3 after enrollment are not
dropped.
Performable actions
Log
Click to view the wireless sensor Log. See page [➙ 174].
Enrol
Click to open the list of unenrolled wireless devices.
1. Select Status > Hardware > Wireless > WPA.
2. The identity of each enrolled WPA and its status displays.
173
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
17.6.3.1
Log - Wireless sensor X
To view a quick log of events for a wireless sensor:
1. Click the Log button.
2. See table below for further information.
3. Create a text file of the log by clicking Text File.
17.6.4
Date/Time
The date and time of the logged event.
Receiver
The wireless receiver location, i.e. wireless module mounted on the keypad,
controller or wireless expander.
Signal
The signal strength received from the sensor (01=low, 09=high).
Status
The physical status of the sensor.
Battery
The status of the battery connected to the sensor (OK, Fault).
Zones
For configuration see page [➙ 235].
1. To view all zones, select Status > Inputs > All Zones. To view X-Bus only
zones, select the X-Bus Zones tab or to view wireless zones only, select the
Wireless Zones tab.
2. See tables below for further information.
174
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
Auto Status Refresh
Pro
17
Tick this button to activate an automatically refreshing of the zone summary.
This can only be done for all zones, and not for filter zones.
Zone Description
Text description of the zone (max. 16 characters).
Area
Areas to which this zone is assigned.
Zone Type
The type of zone (Alarm, Entry/Exit, etc.).
EOL Quality
Displays the EOL quality for the zone state resistance range. Possible
values are:





Good — Nominal value +/-25% of the defined range.
OK — Nominal value +/- 50% of the defined range.
Poor — Nominal value +/- 75% of the defined range.
Unsatisfactory — any other value.
Noisy — indicates a problem detecting the signal. The cabling may be
in close proximity to a mains cable or other source of interference.
This column is only visible in Engineer mode.
For more information on nominal resistance values and their defined ranges,
see Wiring the zone inputs [➙ 81].
Input
The detected input state of that zone (Unknown, Open, Closed, Disconnect,
Short, Pulse, Gross, Masked, Fault, Out of bounds, Unstable, DC Sub,
Noisy).
DC Sub is an input tamper alert. DC substitution performs a periodic check
to ensure that no external voltages are being app
lied to that circuit.
Unstable: An unstable state occurs when the zone input resistance value is
not stable over a defined sampling period.
Noisy: A Noisy state occurs when an external interference is induced onto
the input circuit over a defined sampling period.
Out Of Bounds: An Out of Bounds state will occur when the resistance value
on the zone input does not come within accepted tolerances of the present
EOL values.
Status
The programmed status of that zone. A status value of Normal means that
the zone is programmed to operate normally. The following is a complete list
of possible values:
Isolate, Soak, Inhibit, Tamper, Alarm, Fire Exit, Warning Fault, Holdup Fault,
Detector Fault, Line Fault, Panic, Hold Up, Tech, Medic, Lock, Fire, Trouble,
PIR Masked, Normal, Actuated, Tamper , Post Alarm. A zone is in the post
alarm status if an alarm occurred and the confirmed alarm timed out. This
reinstates the zone, however it also flags that an alarm did occur.
175
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
Performable actions
Refresh
Updates the status information displayed for the panel.
Log
Click on the Log button to view a log of the input status of that zone.
Inhibit
Click this button to inhibit a fault or open zone. The inhibit operation will
disable that fault or zone for one arming period only.
Inhibit operation is not available in Security Grade EN 50131 Grade 3.
!
Restore
Click this button to restore the alarm condition of the panel.
Isolate
Zone . Isolating a zone will deactivate that zone until such time as the zone
is explicitly deisolated again.
It is recommended that you exercise caution when isolating zones as those
zones will not be active every time the system is SET.
Soak
Highlight a zone and click this button to perform a Soak test on that zone.
Seismic Test
Click this button to initiate a test of the selected seismic sensor. For more
information on seismic sensors, see Seismic Sensors [➙ 322].
Pro
Hide Closed
Click this button to hide all closed inputs.
Filter Zones
Select a zone type from the dropdown menu. Only the summary of this zone
type will be displayed.
Pro
17.6.5
Doors
1. Select Status > Doors.
2. See tables below for further information.
Door
This ID number is a unique identifier for the door.
Zone
The zone number the door position sensor is attached to (only if the door position
sensor input is also used as intrusion zone).
Area
The area the door position sensor input and the card reader are assigned to.
DPS
Status of the door position sensor.
DRS
Status of the door release switch.
Status
The status of the door (OK, fault).
Door Mode
Specifies the door operate mode.
Pro
Performable actions
Refresh
Updates the door summary.
Log
Displays a log of events for the selected door.
Lock
Locks the selected door.
Unlock
Unlocks the selected door.
Normal
Returns the door to normal system control.
Momentary
Unlocks the door for one timed interval.
176
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
17.6.6
17
FlexC Status
This screen displays the status of each ATS configured on your system.
1. To view the status of an ATS, go to Status - FlexC.
2. The table below describes the status criteria available for each ATS.
ATS Registration ID
The unique registration ID of the ATS allows
the panel to be uniquely identified at the
RCT.
ATS Status
The status of the ATS, for example,
initializing.
Time since last poll
The time since the last poll on any ATP in
the ATS.
Event Queue Count
Number of events in the event queue waiting
to be transmitted.
Event Queue Count
No. of events in the event queue waiting to
be transmitted.
Event Queue
List of the events currently in the Event
Queue. The tables shows the following:
 Event Seq No.
 Event Timestamp
 Event Description
 Additional Event Info
 Start Timestamp
 Report Duration
Event Log
Event log history for all the events that have
occurred on the ATS. The table shows the
same fields as Event Queue above and the
following additional field:
 Event Seq No.
 Event Timestamp
 Event Description
 Additional Event Info
 Result
 Reported ATP
 Start Timestamp
 ACK/Fail Timestamp
 Report Duration
Network Log
Network log for the ATS showing the
configured polling interval.
177
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Panel status
Status of ATPs within ATS
17.6.7
This table shows each ATP in the ATS. For
each ATP, the table shows the ATP
sequence number, the ATP name, the
communications interface, ATP Status, Last
successful transmission, Network Log, ATP
Log and Test Call button.
Network Log: Click this button to show the
network log.
ATP Log: Shows a list of poll transmissions.
Click the Refresh button to update the log.
Click the Most Recent Last button to change
the viewing order. By default the most recent
event displays first.
Manual Test button: Click this button to force
a test call. The Event is added to the event
queue.
System alerts
1. Select Status > System Alerts.
2. See tables below for further information.
Alert
Description of the system alert.
Input
The actual state of the alert that was detected on the panel (OK, Fault).
Status
The programmed status of the system alert, i.e. whether the alert has been isolated or
inhibited. A status value of OK is displayed if the alert condition has not been disabled in
any way (see page).
Performable actions
Refresh
Click this button to update the status of the system alerts.
Restore
Click this button to restore an alert on the panel
Inhibit
Click this button to inhibit a fault condition. The inhibit operation will disable that
fault or zone for one arming period only.
Inhibit operation is not available in Security EN 50131 Grade 3.
!
Isolate
Click this button to isolate the zone. Isolating a zone will de-activate that zone until
such time as the zone is explicitly de-isolated again. It is recommended that you
exercise caution when isolating zones as those zones will not be active every time
the system is SET.
178
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Logs
17.7
17.7.1
17
Logs
System Log
This log displays all the system events of the SPC system.
1. Select Log > System Log > System Log.
2. Create a text file of the log by clicking Text File.
3. The logging of individual zone state changes is enabled by setting the log
attribute for that zone in the Zone Attributes configuration page.
In order to avoid multiple events from the same source filling the log, the SPC
system, in accordance with standards, permits the logging of only 3 activations of
the same zone in one set period.
17.7.2
Access Log
The log provides all the access events of the SPC system.

Select Log > Access log.
 The following window will be displayed:
179
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Logs

17.7.3
Create a text file of the log by clicking on the Text File button.
WPA Log
This log displays all the WPA events on the system.

Select Log > System Log > WPA log.
 The following window will be displayed:
17.7.4
ALARM LOG
The ALARM LOG displays a list of alarm events.
 Select Log > System Log > Alarm Log.
The following types are displayed in this log:
 Zones
– Alarm
– Panic
 System Events
– Confirmed Alarm
– User Duress
– XBus Panic
– User Panic
– RPA Panic
180
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Users
17.8
17
Users
The following table shows the maximum number of users, user profiles and user
devices for the panel:
Maximum No.
SPC4xxx
SPC5xxx
SPC6xxx
Users
100
500
2500
User Profiles
100
100
100
User Profiles per User
5
5
5
PACE Devices
32
250
250
SMS IDs
32
50
100
Web Passwords
32
50
100
RF Fobs
32
50
100
MDT Devices
32
32
32
WARNING
If upgrading from a firmware version prior to version 3.3, please note the
following:
- The Engineer web password, if configured, is deleted and must be reentered
after upgrade.
- All existing users will be assigned to new user profiles corresponding to their
previous user access levels. If max. number of user profiles is exceeded, no
profile is assigned (see User Profiles [➙ 184]). Please review all user
configuration after a firmware upgrade.
- The default Engineer ID is changed from 513 to 9999.
17.8.1
Adding / Editing a User
1. Select Users > Users > Add User.
 A list of configured users is displayed.
2. Click on the Add button or click on the Edit button of the required user.
 The following screen is displayed.
181
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Users
3. Enter a User ID that is not currently being used. If you enter an ID that is
already used, an ‘ID Unavailable’ message is displayed.
4. Provide a User Name (maximum 16 characters and case sensitive).
5. To automatically generate a User PIN for a new user, click the Generate PIN
button. Change the PIN if required. Enter 0 if PIN is not required.
 Note: To comply with INCERT approvals, the user’s PIN code must contain
more than 4 digits.
6. You can also limit access to the system for this user by ticking the Date Limit
box and entering a To and From date in the date fields.
 User Alerts displays the status of the user’s PIN. For example, It displays
the number of days remaining before the PIN expires, if Periodic changes
are enabled in the system PIN Policy.
7. Select the appropriate User Profile [➙ 184] for this user.
8. Select Duress Enable for this user if required. The number of PINs allocated for
duress (PIN +1 or PIN+2) is set in System Options [➙ 220].
Duress option only available on this screen if ‘User Duress’ is enabled for the
system in System Options. If Duress is enabled for this user, then consecutive
user PINs for other users (i.e. 2906, 2907) are not permitted, as entering this PIN
from the keypad would activate a user duress event.
Access Control
Attribute
Description
Card Number
Enter card number. Enter 0 to unassign this card.
Void Card
Check to temporarily disable this card.
Extended Time
Extend door timers when this card is present.
PIN bypass
Access a door without PIN on a door with PIN reader.
Priority
Priority cards are stored locally in the door controllers and
will grant access in case of a technical fault where the door
controller cannot communicate with the control panel.
The maximum number of priority users is:
182
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Users
Attribute
Description



17.8.1.1
17
SPC4xxx – all users
SPC5xxx – 512
SPC6xxx - 512
Escort
The escort feature enforces privileged card holders to
escort other card holders through specific doors. If this
feature is enabled on a door, a card with the “escort” right
has to be presented first, to allow other cardholders without
this right to open the door. The time period in which
cardholders are able to present their cards after a card with
escort right was presented, can be configured per door.
Custodian
The custodian feature enforces a card holder with custodian
privilege to always be inside a room (door group) when
other card holders are inside.
The custodian must be the first to enter the room. Only if a
custodian is in the room other cardholders are allowed to
enter. The cardholder with the custodian right will not be
allowed to exit until all non-custodian cards left the room.
Identifies this card holder as a custodian. The user with the
custodian attribute has to be the first who enters a door
group which requires a custodian card holder and has to be
the last that is leaving this door group.
Unknown Devices
If an unknown device, such as a fob, PACE, or card, has been scanned but not
assigned to a user, a button is displayed in the relevant section of the users page.
 RF- FOB — Unknown Fob button or, if the device is assigned to the user,
Delete FOB button
 Pace — Unknown Pace button or, if the device is assigned to the user, Delete
Pace button
 Access Control — Unknown card button
To assign a fob, PACE or card to the user:
1. Click the Unknown button for the device. The User page displays the list of
unknown devices.
2. Click Add to assign the device to the user.
Note: To assign a card to the user, the associated user profile must have the
correct site code defined.
To unassign a fob or Pace from a user:
1. Click the Delete button.
The device is unassigned from the user and also deleted from the system.
2. To add the device again, you must rescan it.
To unassign a card from a user:
1. Change the card number to zero (0).
2. Click Save.
The card is unassigned from the user and deleted from the system.
3. To add the card again, you must rescan it.
183
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Users
17.8.2
Adding / Editing User Profiles
NOTICE
Global user profiles cannot be edited in the browser or SPC Pro and must be
edited in SPC Manager
1. Select Users -> User Profiles
 A list of configured profiles is displayed with the number of users assigned
to each profile.
2. Select Add User Profile or click on the Edit button of the required profile.
The following screen is displayed with the configuration options categorized as
follows:
-
General Settings
-
User/Panel Rights
-
Access Control
General Settings
1. Enter a User Profile ID that is not currently being used. If you enter an ID that is
already used, an ‘ID Unavailable’ message is displayed.
2. Provide a User Profile Name (maximum 16 characters and case sensitive).
3. Select all Areas that will be controlled by this user profile.
4. Select a Calendar to set the time limitations of this profile on the system.
184
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Users
17
User/Panel Rights

Select the required user rights that are to be assigned to this user profile.
User rights
Right
User Profile
Type Default
Description
User Rights - Intruder
Fullset
Limited
Standard
Manager
The FULLSET operation fully sets the alarm system
and provides full protection to a building (opening of
any alarm zones activates the alarm).
On selecting FULLSET, the buzzer sounds and the
keypad display counts down the exit time period. Exit
the building before this time period has expired.
When the exit time period has expired, the system is
set and opening of entry/exit zones starts the entry
timer. If the system is not Unset before the entry timer
expires, the alarm is activated.
Partset A
Standard
Manager
The PARTSET A option provides perimeter protection
to a building while allowing free movement through the
access areas.
Zones that have been classified as EXCLUDE A
remain unprotected in this mode. By default, there is no
exit time; the system sets instantly on selection of this
mode. An exit timer can be applied to this mode by
enabling the Partset A timed variable.
Partset B
Standard
Manager
The PARTSET B option applies protection to all zones
except those that have been classified as EXCLUDE B.
By default there is no exit time; the system sets
instantly on selection of this mode. An exit timer can be
applied to this mode by enabling the Partset B timed
variable.
Forceset
Standard
Manager
The FORCESET option is presented on the keypad
display when an attempt is made to set the system
while an alarm zone is faulty or still open (the top line of
the display shows the open zone).
Selecting this option sets the alarm and inhibits the
zone for that set period.
Unset
Limited
Standard
Manager
The UNSET operation unsets the alarm. This menu
option is only presented on the keypad after an
Entry/Exit zone has been activated and a valid user
code has been entered.
Delay Auto Set Standard*
Manager
User can delay or cancel autosetting..
Bypass Delay
Standard
Manager
User can automatically override the Unset Delay. Only
available for Financial installations. See
Setting/Unsetting [➙ 241]
Restore
Standard
Manager
The RESTORE operation restores an alert condition on
the system and clears the alert message associated
with that alert condition.
An alert condition can only be cleared after the zone(s)
or fault(s) that triggered the alert condition have been
restored to their normal operating state and the CLEAR
ALERT option in user programming is selected for that
zone.
Inhibit
Standard
Manager
Inhibiting a zone deactivates that zone for one alarm
set period.
This is the preferred method of deactivating a faulty or
open zone as the fault or open condition is displayed
185
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Users
Right
User Profile
Type Default
Description
on the keypad each time the system is being set to
remind the user to attend to that zone.
Isolate
Standard*
Manager
Isolating a zone deactivates that zone until such time
as the zone is de-isolated. All zone types on the
controller can be isolated.
Use of this feature to deactivate faulty or open zones
should be considered carefully; once a zone is isolated,
it is ignored by the system and could be overlooked
when setting the system in the future, compromising
the security of the premises.
User Rights - System
Web Access
Standard*
Manager
User can access panel through web browser.
View Log
Standard
Manager
This menu option displays the most recent event on the
keypad display. The event log [➙ 147] details the time
and date of each logged event.
Users
Manager
User can create and edit other users on the panel but
with only the same or less rights than this user.
SMS
Standard*
Manager
This feature allows users to set up the SMS messaging
service if a modem is installed on the system.
Set Date
Standard
Manager
Use this menu option to program the time and date on
the system [➙ 155].
Ensure the time and date information is accurate; these
fields are presented in the event log when reporting
system events.
Change PIN
Standard
Manager
This menu option allows users to change their user
PINS [➙ 148].
Note: To comply with INCERT approvals, the user’s
PIN code must contain more than 4 digits.
View
Standard
Video/Video in Manager
Browser
User can view video images via the web browser.
Note: The Web Access right must also be enabled for
this function.
Chime
Standard
Manager
All zones that have the CHIME attribute set generate a
short burst of audible tone on the keypad buzzer when
they are opened (while the system is unset).
This menu option allows for enabling or disabling of the
chime feature on all zones.
Engineer
Manager
This option allows users to grant access to engineer
programming.
For Swiss CAT 1 and CAT 2 regional requirements,
when Engineer Access is granted, all areas must be
unset otherwise the engineer will be denied access.
Upgrade
Manager
User can grant manufacturer access to panel to
perform firmware upgrade.
User Rights - Control
Outputs
Standard
Manager
User can activate/deactivate configured outputs
(mapping gates). See Editing an Ouput [➙ 195].
X-10
Standard
Manager
Access Control
User can activate/deactivate configured X-10 devices.
Note: X-10 is in maintenance. The functionality remains
in the system for backward compatibility.
Door Control
Standard*
Manager
Access Control
User can lock/unlock doors.
186
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Users
Right
User Profile
Type Default
Description
RF Control
Standard
Manager
Access Control
User can control RF output
17
User Rights - Test
Bell Test:
Standard
Manager
User can perform a bell test to test the external bells,
strobe, internal bells and buzzer to ensure their correct
operation.
Walk Test
Standard
Manager
User can perform a walk test to allow for testing of the
operation of all alarm sensors on a system.
WPA Test
Standard
Manager
User can test a WPA.
Seismic Test
Standard
Manager
User can test the seismic detector.
User Rights – Service Engineer
Set Users
(Master)
User can create and edit other users on the system
with no restriction on user rights.
Set User
Profiles
User can create and edit user profiles on the system.
Set Calendars
User can configure calendars.
Set Doors
User can edit doors.
* Functions not enabled by default for this user but can be selected.
Access Control
1. Enter a Site Code, if required, for all cards assigned to this user profile. Refer
to the appendix section on Card Readers and Formats [➙ 352].
2. Select the Access rights of this user profile for the doors configured on the
system. Options are:
-
No access
-
No time limit (i.e. 24 hour access)
-
Calendar (if configured)
Users
A list of users assigned to this profile is displayed. Click on a user to view or edit
the user’s details.
You can create a new user profile based on an existing profile by clicking
Replicate. A new User Profile page is displayed.
187
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Users
See also
 Adding / Editing User Profiles [➙ 185]
 Adding / Editing an area [➙ 236]
17.8.3
Configuring SMS
The SPC system allows remote (SMS) messaging on systems with installed
modems.
 A modem is installed and identified by the system.
 The function SMS Authentication is activated. See page [➙ 220].
1. Select Users > Users SMS.
 The Engineer SMS ID and a list of user SMS IDs with corresponding SMS
details are displayed.
2. Click on the Test button to test an SMS number.
3. Click Add to add a new SMS ID or click Edit beside the required SMS ID.
4. Configure the SMS details as follows:
SMS ID
System generated ID.
SMS Number
Enter the number to which the SMS will be sent (requires three-digit country
code prefix).
Note: Engineer SMS number can deleted by resetting it 0. User SMS
numbers cannot be deleted.
User
Select a new user for this SMS ID if required.
188
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Users
17
SMS Events
Select the panel events which the user or engineer will receive via SMS.
SMS Control
Select the operations that the user or engineer can perform remotely on the
panel through SMS. See SMS Commands [➙ 189]
NOTICE
HOLDUP alarm events are not transmitted via SMS.
If the phone line is connected to the PSTN network via a PBX, the appropriate
line access digit should be inserted before the called party number. Ensure that
Calling Line Identity (CLI) is enabled on the line selected to make the call to the
SMS network. Consult the PBX administrator for details.
17.8.4
SMS Commands
When the SMS setup and configuration is complete, SMS features may be
activated. Commands, depending on SMS configuration, are sent using a PIN or
caller ID. The type of PIN depends on what is set for SMS Authentication.
The table below provides all available SMS commands. Subsequent action and
response are also provided.
SMS Commands are sent as texts to the phone number of the SIM card on the
controller.
For commands using a PIN, the format of the text is:
****.command or **** command
where **** is the PIN and “command” is the command i.e. the PIN followed by
either a space or a full stop. For example, the command “FSET” is entered as: ****
FSET or ****.FSET. The full version of the command, where listed, can also be
used. For example, ****.FULLSET.
If the user does not have sufficient rights to perform a command, the system
returns ACCESS DENIED.
If Caller ID is enabled, and the sender’s SMS number is configured, the PIN prefix
is not required.
COMMANDS (**** = code)
Using Code
Using Caller
ID
Action
Response
**** HELP
HELP
All available commands
displayed
All available commands
**** FSET
****.FSET
****. FULLSET
FSET
FULLSET
Sets all areas the user has
access to.
Time/date of system set. If
applicable, responds with open
zones/force set zones
**** USET
****.USET
****. UNSET
USET
UNSET
Unsets all areas the user
has access to.
System Unset
**** SSTA
SSTA
****.SSTA
****. STATUS
STATUS
Retrieves the status of
areas.
Status of system and applicable
areas
****.HELP

For a single area system,
system and mode are
returned, where mode is
the set status of the system
189
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Users

For a multi-area system,
the status of each area is
returned.
**** XA1.ON (X10)
****.XA1.ON
Where X10 device is
identified as “A1”, it is
triggered on.
Status of “A1”
**** XA1.OFF
Where X10 device is
identified as “A1”, it is
triggered off.
Status of “A1”
****.XA1.OFF
**** LOG
****.LOG
Up to 10 recent events
displayed
Recent events
.
**** ENGA.ON
(ALLOW ENGINEER)
****.ENGA.ON
ENGA.ON
Enable Engineer access
Allow Engineer
**** ENGA.OFF
****.ENGA.OFF
ENGA.OFF
Disable Engineer access
Revoke Engineer
**** MANA.ON
****.MANA.ON
Enable Manufacturer
access
Manufacturer status
**** MANA.OFF
Disable Manufacturer
access
Manufacturer status
Where mapping gate is
identified as “O5”, it is
triggered on.
Status of “O5”
****.MANA.OFF
**** O5.ON
****.O5.ON
****. OUTPUT
For example:


Output O5 on.
Output heating on (where
heating is the name of the
output.)
**** O5.OFF
****.O5.OFF
Where mapping gate is
identified as “O5”, it is
triggered off
Status of “O5”
For example: Output O5 off
****.ASET
(PARTSET A)
System set.
Allows Partset A of alarm
by SMS
It is also possible to specify
the custom name defined in
the PARTSET rename field
of the Options window. See
Options [➙ 220]
****.BSET
PARTSET B)
System set.
Allows Partset B of alarm
by SMS
It is also possible to specify
the custom name defined in
the PARTSET rename field
of the Options window. See
Options [➙ 220]
For example:
****.ASET NIGHT
****.CLR
Allows clear alerts by SMS
****. RESTORE
For SMS recognition, mapping gate identification uses the format ONNN, where
O stands for mapping gate, and NNN are the numeric placeholders, of which not
all are necessary.
(Example: O5 for mapping gate 5)
For SMS recognition, X-10 device uses the format: XYNN, where X stands for X10; Y stands for the alphabetic identity and NN are the available numeric
placeholders. (Example: XA1)
190
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Users
17
The SMS operates using a standard protocol that is used in SMS telephones.
Please note that some PSTN operators do not provide the service of SMS over
PSTN. For SMS to operate over PSTN, the following criteria are required:
 Caller ID needs to be enabled on the telephone line.
 Direct telephone line – not through PABX or other communications equipment.
 Please also note that most Service Providers only allow SMS to a telephone
registered in the same country. (This is due to billing issues)
17.8.5
Deleting Web Passwords
This screen lists the engineer and any user and Engineer password that has been
created for accessing the Web browser.
1. Select Users -> Web Passwords
2. Click on the Delete button beside the Engineer or user to delete the password.
17.8.6
Configuring Engineer Settings
1. Select Users -> Engineer.
2. Change the ’Engineer’ User Name if required.
3. Click on the Change PIN [➙ 192] button to change the Engineer PIN.
 Note: To comply with INCERT approvals, the user’s PIN code must contain
more than 4 digits.
4. Select the Language that will be used by the engineer. (Only displayed if
multiple languages available – see Upgrading Languages [➙ 306])
191
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Users
Access Control
17.8.6.1
Attribute
Description
Card Number
Enter card number. Enter 0 to unassign this card.
Void Card
Check to temporarily disable this card.
Extended Time
Extend door timers when this card is present.
PIN bypass
Access a door without PIN on a door with PIN reader.
Priority
Priority cards are stored locally in the door controllers and
will grant access in case of a technical fault where the door
controller cannot communicate with the control panel.
The maximum number of priority users is:
 SPC4xxx – all users
 SPC5xxx – 512
 SPC6xxx - 512
Escort
The escort feature enforces privileged card holders to
escort other card holders through specific doors. If this
feature is enabled on a door, a card with the “escort” right
has to be presented first, to allow other cardholders without
this right to open the door. The time period in which
cardholders are able to present their cards after a card with
escort right was presented, can be configured per door.
Custodian
The custodian feature enforces a card holder with custodian
privilege to always be inside a room (door group) when
other card holders are inside.
The custodian must be the first to enter the room. Only if a
custodian is in the room other cardholders are allowed to
enter. The cardholder with the custodian right will not be
allowed to exit until all non-custodian cards left the room.
Identifies this card holder as a custodian. The user with the
custodian attribute has to be the first who enters a door
group which requires a custodian card holder and has to be
the last that is leaving this door group.
Changing Engineer PIN and web password
This screen enables you to change the PIN for accessing the keypad and also the
password for accessing the Web browser for Engineer level only.
192
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Users

17
Change the PIN as follows:
Old PIN
Enter the existing Engineer PIN code. (Numeric digits only)
New PIN
Enter the new Engineer PIN code. (Numeric digits only)
Confirm New PIN
Re-enter the New Engineer PIN code.
1. Click on the Change PIN button to activate the new PIN.
The minimum number of digits required for this code depends on the security
setting of the system or on the selected length of the PIN Digits in the menu Panel
Settings > System Settings > Options.
2. Change the Web password to a more secure password for accessing the Web
browser.
New Password
Enter the new web access password (alphabetic characters A-Z, numeric digits
0-9).
Confirm New
Password
Re-enter the new web access password.

Click on the Change Password button to activate the new password.
This password is case sensitive – ensure that you enter the correct upper or lower
case alphabetic characters in your new password.
193
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17.9
17.9.1
17.9.1.1
Configuration
Configuring controller inputs & outputs
Editing an input
1. Select Configuration > Hardware > Controller.
 The following window will be displayed.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
Input
The number is presented for reference and can not be programmed.
End of Line
Select the End of Line (EOL) for the zone input (default: 4K7).
Analyzed
Displays if the sensor is an inertia/shock type sensor
Pro
Pulse count
Pro
Gross Attack
Pro
Pulse count programmed on the panel that will trigger an alarm from an inertia /
shock sensor.
The Gross attack programmed on the panel that will trigger an alarm from an
inertia/shock sensor
Zone
Number of the zone on the panel
Description
Enter a text describing the input (max. 16 characters). This text will also appear
on the browser and keypad.
Type
The type of zone (see page [➙ 345]).
Area
Only if (multiple) Areas is activated in menu Panel Settings > System Settings >
Options. Select the areas to which this zone has been assigned.
Attributes
An icon in this field indicates that attributes have been programmed for this zone
(see page [➙ 195]).
194
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17.9.1.1.1
17
Input zones: attributes
Each zone on the SPC can be assigned an attribute that determines the properties
of that zone.
To assign an attribute to a zone:
1. Select Configuration > Hardware > Controller > Attributes.
 The following window will be displayed:
2. Check the box beside the preferred attribute.
The attributes presented on this page will depend on the type of zone selected.
For a list of assignable attributes see page [➙ 350].
17.9.1.2
Editing an output
1. Select Configuration > Hardware > Controller.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
195
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Output Type

System Output: Select the type from the dropdown menu. (See Output Types
and Output Ports [➙ 196])

Area Output: Only if (multiple) Areas is activated in menu Panel Settings >
System Settings > Options. Select an area and the type of system output for this
area. (See Output Types and Output Ports [➙ 196])



Zone Mapping: Select which zone should be mapped.

Keyswitch: Select the node ID for the required keyswitch and the required key
position to map to this output.
Mapping Gate: Select which mapping gate should be mapped.
Door Output: Select the door number and the type of system output for the door.
(See Output Types and Output Ports [➙ 196])
Description
Enter a text describing the output (max. 16 characters). This text will also appear on
the browser and keypad.
Output
Configuration

Mode: Select the operational mode. Continuous follows output type; Pulsed
toggles on and off when output type is active; Momentary generates a pulse
when output type activates.






Retrigger: Tick the box to retrigger momentary outputs.
On Time: Enter the On time that applies to momentary and pulsed outputs.
Off Time: Enter the Off time that applies to pulsed outputs.
Invert: Tick this box to invert the physical output.
Log: Tick this box to log the output state changes to the event log.
Calendar: Select if necessary the desired calendar. See page [➙ 249].
See also
 Calendars [➙ 249]
17.9.1.2.1
Outputs types and output ports
Each output type can be assigned to one of the 6 physical output ports on the SPC
controller or to an output on one of the connected expanders. Output types that are
not assigned to physical outputs act as indicators of events on the system and may
be logged and/or reported to remote central stations if required.
196
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
The output ports on the expanders are all single pole relay type outputs (NO, COM,
NC); therefore, output devices may need external power sources to activate if they
are wired to expander outputs.
The activation of a particular output type depends on the zone type (see page
[➙ 345]) or alert condition that triggered the activation. If multiple areas are defined
on the system then the outputs on the SPC are grouped into system outputs and
area outputs; the system outputs are activated to indicate a system wide event
(e.g. mains fault) whereas the area outputs indicate events detected in one or more
of the defined areas on the system. Each area has its own set of area outputs; if
the area is a common area for other areas, then its outputs will indicate the state of
all the areas it is common for, including its own state. For example, if Area 1 is
common for Area 2 and 3, and Area 2 Ext. Bell is active, then the Area 1 Ext Bell
output is also active.
Some output types can only indicate system wide events (no specific area
events). Please refer to the table below for further information.
Output Type
Description
External Bell
This output type is used to activate the system external bell and is active when any
Area External Bell is active. By default, this output is assigned to the first output on the
controller board (EXT+, EXT-).
Note: An external bell output is automatically activated whenever a zone programmed
as an Alarm zone triggers an alarm in Fullset or Partset modes.
External Bell Strobe
This output type is used to activate the strobe on the system external bell and is active
when any area strobe is active. By default, this output is assigned to the strobe relay
output (Output 3) on the Controller board (NO, COM, NC).
Note: An external bell strobe output is automatically activated whenever a zone
programmed as an alarm zone triggers an alarm in Fullset or Partset modes. The
external bell strobe activates on a ’Fail to Set’ condition if the strobe on the ’Fail to Set’
option is checked in system options.
Internal Bell
This output type is used to activate the internal bell and is active when any area
Internal Bell is active. By default, this output is assigned to the second output on the
controller board (INT+, INT-).
Note: An internal bell output is automatically activated whenever a zone programmed
as an Alarm zone type triggers an alarm in Fullset or Partset modes. The internal Bell
activates on a ’Fail to Set’ condition if the Bell on the ’Fail to Set’ option is checked in
system options.
Alarm
This output turns on following alarm zone activation on the system or from any area
defined on the system.
Alarm Confirmed
This output turns on when an alarm has been confirmed. An alarm is confirmed when 2
independent zones on the system (or within the same Area) activate within a set time
period).
Panic*
This output turns on following activation of panic alarm zone types from any area. A
panic alarm output is also generated if a user duress event is generated or if the panic
option for the keypad is enabled.
Hold-up
This output turns on whenever a zone programmed as a Hold-up type zone triggers an
alarm from any area
Fire
This output turns on following a fire zone activation on the system (or from any area)
Tamper
This output turns on when a tamper condition is detected from any part of the system.
For a grade 3 system, if communication is lost to an XBUS device for greater than
100s, a tamper is generated and SIA and CIR reported events will send a tamper.
Medical
This output turns on when a medic zone is activated
Fault
This output turns on when a technical fault is detected
Technical
This output follows tech zone activity
Mains Fault*
This output activates when Mains power is removed
197
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Battery Fault*
This output activates when there is a problem with the backup battery. If the battery
voltage drops below 11 V this output activates. The ’Restore’ option for this fault is only
presented when the voltage level rises to above 11.8 V.
Partset A
This output is activated if the system or any area defined on the system is in Partset A
mode
Partset B
This output is activated if the system or any area defined on the system is in Partset B
mode
Fullset
This output is activated if the system is in Fullset mode
Fail to set
This output activates if the system or any area defined on the system failed to set; it
clears when the alert is restored
Entry/Exit
This output activates if an Entry/Exit type zone has been activated; i.e. a system or
area Entry or Exit timer is running
Latch
This output turns on as defined in the system latch output configuration (see
Configuring system latch and auto set outputs [➙ 200]).
This output can be used to reset latching sensors as smoke or inertia sensors.
Fire Exit
This output turns ON if any Fire-X zones on the system are activated
Chime
This output turns on momentarily when any zone on the system with chime attribute
opens
Smoke
This output turns on momentarily( 3 seconds) when a user unsets the system; it can be
used to reset smoke detectors
The output will also activate when the zone is restored
When using the zone to reset latched smoke detectors the first code entry will not
activate the smoke output but will silence bells, on the next code entry if the fire zone is
in the open state the smoke output will activate momentarily. This process is repeatable
until the fire zone is closed.
Walk Test*
This output turns on momentarily when a walk test is operational and a zone becomes
active. This output can be used, for example, to activate functional tests of connected
detectors (if available).
Auto Set
This output turns on if the Auto Set feature has been activated on the system.
User Duress
This output turns on if a user duress state has been activated (PIN code + 1 has been
entered on the keypad)
PIR Masked
This output turns on if there are any masked PIR zones on the system. It generates a
fault output on the keypad led.
This output is latched so it will remain active until restored by a level 2 user.
PIR Masking is logged by default. The number of log entries do not exceed 8 between
arming periods.
Zone Omitted
This output turns on if there are any inhibited, isolated, or walk test zones on the
system
Fail to Communicate
This output turns on if there is a failure to communicate to the central station
Man Down Test
This output turns on a ‘Man Down’ wireless device which is activated during a ‘Man
Down’ test.
Unset
This output is activated if the system is in Unset mode.
Alarm Abort
This output activates if an alarm abort event occurs i.e. when a valid user code is
entered via the keypad after a confirmed or unconfirmed alarm. It is used, for example,
with external dialers (SIA, CID, FF)
Seismic Test
This output is used to activate a manual or automatic test on a seismic zone. Seismic
sensors have a small vibrator that will be attached to the same wall as the sensor and
is wired to an output on the panel or one of its expanders. During the test, the panel
waits up to 30 seconds for the seismic zone to open. If it does not open, the test fails. If
it opens within 30 seconds the panel then waits for the zone to close within 10 seconds.
If that doesn’t happen, the test fails. The panel then waits a further 2 seconds before
reporting the test result. The result of the test, either manual or automatic, is stored in
the system event log
Local Alarm
This output activates on a local intrusion alarm.
198
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
RF Output
This output activates when a Fob or WPA button is pressed.
Modem 1 Line Fault
This output activates when there is a line fault on the primary modem..
Modem 1 Failure
This output activates when the primary modem fails.
Modem 2 Line Fault
This output activates when there is a line fault on the secondary modem.
Modem 2 Failure
This output activates when the secondary modem fails.
Battery Low
This output activates when the battery is low,
Entry Status
This output activates if an ‘All Okay’ entry procedure is implemented and there is no
alarm generated i.e. the ‘All Okay’ button is pressed within the configured time after the
user code is entered.
Warning Status
This output activates if an ‘All Okay’ entry procedure is implemented and a silent alarm
generated i.e. the ‘All Okay’ button is not pressed within the configured time after the
user code is entered.
Ready to Set
This output activates when an area is ready to set.
Setting ACK
(SPC Pro — Setting Complete)
This output signals the setting status. The output toggles for 3 seconds to signal that
the setting has failed. The output remains on for 3 seconds if setting is successful.
Fullset Done
(SPC Pro — Setting Success)
This output activates for 3 seconds to signal that the system has been fullest.
Blockschloss 1
Used for normal Blockschloss devices.
When all zones in an area are closed, and there are no pending faults, the
‘Blockschloss 1‘ output is activated. If the lock on the Blockschloss is closed, a
‘Keyarm‘ input is activated, the relevant area is set and the ‘Setting Ack‘ output is
activated for 3 seconds to signal that the setting was successful. ‘Blockschloss 1‘ is not
deactivated.
If the Blockschloss is unlocked, the Blockschloss device deactivates the Keyarm input
to the unset state (closed) and the area is unset. ‘Blockschloss 1‘ is then deactivated.
Blockschloss 2
Used for Blockschloss device type - Bosch Blockschloss, Sigmalock Plus, E4.03.
When all zones in an area are closed, and there are no pending faults, the
‘Blockschloss 2‘ output is activated. If the lock on the Blockschloss is closed, a
‘Keyarm‘ input is activated, the relevant area is set and the ‘Setting Ack‘ output is
activated for 3 seconds to signal that the setting was successful. ‘Blockschloss 2‘ is
then deactivated.
If the Blockschloss is unlocked, the Keyarm zone is switched to unset (closed) and the
area is unset. ‘Blockschloss 2‘ is activated (if area is ready to set).
Lock Element
Activates if the Lock Element is in the ‘locked‘ position.
Unlock Element
Activates if the Lock Element is in the ‘unlocked‘ position.
Code Tamper
Activates if there is a code tamper in the area. Clears when state is reset.
Trouble
Activates if any zone is in trouble state.
Ethernet Link
Activates if there is a fault on the Ethernet link.
Network Fault
Activates if there is an EDP communications fault.
Glass Reset
Used to switch on the power for the glassbreak interface module and to remove power
in order to reset the device. The output is reset if a user enters their code, the zone is
not in the closed state, and the bells deactivated.
Confirmed holdup
Activates in the following scenarios for PD6662 compliance:
 two hold-up zone activations more than two minutes apart
 a hold-up zone and a panic zone activation more than two minutes apart
 If a hold-up zone and a tamper zone or a panic zone and a tamper zone activation
occurs within the two minute period
Full Engineer
Activates if an engineer is on site and the system is in full engineer mode.
*This output type can only indicate system wide events (no area specific events).
199
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
See also
 Configuring system latch and auto set outputs [➙ 200]
17.9.1.3
Configuring system latch and auto set outputs

Under Policy, click on the Edit button for the Output Configuration option in
System Options.
 The following screen is displayed:

Select the condition under which the latch output is activated:
Entry Time
Output turns on at the end of Exit time and off at the beginning
of Entry time.
Fire Exit
Output turns on if any fire exit zones are active.
Unset
Output turns on if any user unsets system momentary
Alarm Reset
Output turns on if an alarm is reset momentary.
Resetting Alarm
Output turns on during a setting procedure if glass break/smoke
open and not in alarm.
Engineer Exit
Output turns on when an engineer exits from Engineer mode
momentary.
Keypad Valid PIN
Output turns on when valid user PIN entered on keypad and fire
zone is active

Select the behavior of the output.
On
Output will remain on if auto set is active.
Keypad
Output will follow keypad operation.
200
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17.9.1.4
17
Progressive
Output will give progressive warning of auto set.
Pulse Time
Select the duration that the auto set output will remain active
when pulsed.
X10 Config - Settings
The X10 settings window allows you to configure the operation of X10 on the
panel.
1. Select Configuration > Outputs > X-10.
 The following window will be displayed:
2. Activate the checkbox Enable to enable X10 operation on the panel.
3. Activate the checkbox Log to enable logging of all X10 events on the panel.
4. Click Save.
5. Click an alphabetic tab (A-P) to program X10 device triggers.
 A list of programmable device triggers (1-16) will be presented for that
alphabetic character:
Unit number
This is the number (1-16) that is assigned to the device.
Active
This field indicates if the device is active or not.
Description
This field displays a description that is used to help identify the device – e.g.
downstairs light (16 characters max).
201
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Quick key
This field indicates if the X10 device activation can be toggled by entering a code from
the keypad.
To edit a X-10 device
1. Click Edit.
 The following window will be displayed:
2. For further programming refer to page [➙ 253].
17.9.2
17.9.2.1
X-BUS
Expanders
1. Select Configuration > Hardware > X-Bus > Expanders.
 The following window will be displayed:
For naming and identifying:
In loop configuration, each expander is numbered consecutively from the first
(expander connected to the 1A 1B on the controller) to the last (expander
connected to the 2A 2B on the controller).
Example for SPC63xx: Expanders, when numbered 1 through 63, are allocated
zones (in groupings of 8) in subsequent identities of 1 to 512 (the greatest
number in zone identification is 512). Therefore, any expander named or
identified by a number greater than 63 has no allocated zones.
2. Click on one of the expander identifying parameters to display the Expander
Configuration screen.
202
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration

17
Configure the following fields:
Description
For appearance on device LEDs.
Volume Limit
Audio Expander Only: Speaker volume for the Audio Expander and satellites
(WAC 11). They are all wired in parallel. Note that the speaker on WAC 11 has a
potentiometer for fine-tuning the volume. Range is 0 min - 7 max or disabled.
Auxillary Channnel Audio Expander Only: This option should be enabled if satellites (WAC11) are
connected to this expander.
Note: This option, if enabled, powers the satellite microphones. The satellite
speakers are always enabled regardless of this setting.
End Of Line
Select the correct End of Line (default: DEOL 4K7). This setting should match the
actual wiring of the input on the controller or expander. See page [➙ 70].
(Zone) Description
Provide a description for allocated zone.
(Zone) Type
Select the zone type. See page [➙ 348].
Area
Select the area.
Attributes
Assign attributes as desired. See page [➙ 345].
Outputs / PSU outputs (Displayed for the SPCP355 Smart PSU ONLY)
Output
The numbered output. The value in parentheses corresponds to the physical
output on the PSU board.
Description
Provide description for output.
Change type
Change the type of output as necessary.
Attributes
Assign attributes to the output.
Test
Test the output.
Output monitor
Select which outputs are to be monitored.
Note: The parallel resistor, diode and required load must be applied before
enabling this option. The SPCP355 must perform a calibration before monitoring
starts. See Supervised Outputs [➙ 56] for more information.
Primary battery
only
Tick this box if there is no secondary battery connected to the PSU
When expanders are added or removed:

Click Reconfigure to implement changes.
See also
 Wiring the system [➙ 70]
203
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration


17.9.2.1.1
Zone attributes [➙ 348]
Zone types [➙ 345]
Configuring an Indicator Expander
There are 2 possible configuration modes for the indication expander:
 Linked Mode
 Flexible Mode
1. Select Configuration > Hardware > X-Bus > Expanders.
2. Click one of the indicator identifying parameters.
 The following screen is displayed for Linked Mode configuration.
Linked Mode
1. Enter a description.
2. Select if indicator module should be limited to a valid code entered on a
keypad.
3. Select the areas that are to be controlled by the 4 functions keys.
4. Configure the input.
Flexible Mode
1. Click the Flexible Mode button.
2. Configure the fields described in the tables below.
3. Configure the input.
204
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
WARNING
Your system will not comply with EN standards if you enable a function key to set
the system without a valid PIN being required.
Function Keys
Area
Select the area is to be controlled by the function key.
Function
Select the function to be performed by this key in this area..
Area
Select an area if the indicator module is located in a secure area.
Visual Indication
Indicator
There are 8 indicators / LEDs on the right and 8 indicators / LEDs on the left side.
Function
The function that is indicated by this LED.
Function On
Select the colour and the state for every indicator if the selected function is ON.
Function Off
Select the colour and the state for every indicator if the selected function is OFF.
Change function
Press this button to change the function for this indicator. The function can be
enabled or used for a system, area, zone or keyswitch.
Audible Indications
Alarms
Select if the alarms should be audible.
Entry / Exit
Select if entry / exit should be audible.
Key press
Select if keypress should be audible.
Deactivation
17.9.2.1.2
Calendar
Select if indicator expander should be limited by calendar.
Mapping gate
Select if indicator module should be limited by a mapping gate.
Keyswitch
Select if indication module should be limited by a keyswitch.
Keypad
Select if indicator module should be limited to a valid PIN entered on a keypad.
(see warning above)
Card reader
Select if indicator module should not be activated until a valid card/fob is
presented to the built-in card reader.
Configuring a Keyswitch Expander
1. Select Settings > X-Bus > Expanders.
2. Click one of the keyswitch identifying parameters.
 The following dialog is displayed.
205
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration

Configure the fields described in the tables below.
Description
Enter a description for the keyswitch expander.
Key Options
Latch
Select if key position should be latched.
Latch timer
Enter duration of latch in seconds (0 - 9999, 0 means latch lasts until key is
turned the other way).
Areas
Location
Select the area where the keyswitch is located.
Visual Indications
Indicator/LED
There is 1 indicator / LED on the right and 1 indicator / LED on the left side.
Function
The function for this indicator / LED.
Function On
Select the colour and the state for every indicator if the selected function is ON.
Function Off
Select the colour and the state for every indicator if the selected function is OFF.
Change function
Press this button to change the function for this indicator. The function can be
enabled or used for a system, area, zone or keyswitch.
Deactivation
Calendar
Select if the keyswitch module should be limited by calendar.
Mapping gate
Select if the keyswitch module should be limited by a mapping gate.
Output
Output x
Configure and text the outputs for the keyswitch. See Outputs [➙ 196] for more
details
Keyswitch Functions
206
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Centre, Right and
Left Positions
17
Select the Function that that this keyswitch position will perform and the relevant
Area.
WARNING
Your system will not comply with EN standards if you enable a keyswitch function
to set the system without a valid PIN being required.
17.9.2.2
17.9.2.2.1
Keypads
Editing a Standard Keypad
1. Select Configuration > Hardware > X-Bus > Keypads.
2. Click one of the standard keypad identifying parameters.
3. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
207
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Description
Enter a unique description to identify the keypad.
Function Keys (in idle state)
Panic
Select Enable, Disable or Enabled Silent. If enabled, panic alarm is activated by
pressing the 2 soft keys together.
Verification
If you assign a verification zone to the keypad, when a panic alarm is triggered
by pressing 2 soft keys together or by entering a duress code, audio and video
events are activated.
Visual Indications
Backlight
Select when keypad backlight is on. Options are: - On after key is pressed;
Always on; Always off..
Indicators
Enable or disable the LED’s on the keypad.
Setting state
Select if setting state should be indicated in idle mode.
Audible Indications
Buzzer
Enable or disable the buzzer on the keypad.
Partset Buzzer
Enable or disable buzzer during exit time on Partset.
Keypress
Select if the speaker volume for the key presses should be activated.
Deactivation
208
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
Calendar
Select if the keypad should be limited by calendar. See Calendar [➙ 249].
Mapping gate
Select if keypad should be limited by a mapping gate.
Keyswitch
Select if keypad should be limited by a keyswitch.
PACE Entry
Tick this box to disable the keys on the keypad during the entry time when a
PACE is configured on the keypad.
Areas
Location
Select the secured area where the keypad is located.
Areas
Select which areas can be controlled through keypad.
Options
Delay Fullset
Select to configure a delayed set across all keypads. The location of the keypad
is ignored and all areas will perform a full exit time count down.
NOTICE
An area should be assigned to a keypad only if the keypad is inside the assigned
area, and if an entry/exit route is defined. If an area is assigned, when the
particular area is set or unset then entry and exit timers are used (if configured).
Other features related to entry/exit routes also become available. If no area is
assigned, the area is set or unset immediately and other entry/exit features are
not available
See also
 Calendars [➙ 249]
17.9.2.2.2
Editing a Comfort Keypad
1. Select Configuration > Hardware > X-Bus > Keypads.
2. Click one of the comfort keypad identifying parameters.
3. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
209
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
210
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Description
17
Enter a unique description to identify the keypad.
Function Keys (in idle state)
Panic
Select Enable, Disable or Enabled Silent. If enabled, panic alarm is
activated by pressing F1 and F2 soft keys together.
Fire
Enable to allow fire alarm to be activated by pressing F2 and F3 soft
keys together.
Medical
Enable to allow medical alarm to be activated by pressing F3 and
F4 soft keys together.
Fullset
Enable to allow Fullset to be activated by pressing F2 key twice.
Partset A
Enable to allow Partset A to be activated by pressing F3 key twice.
Partset B
Enable to allow Partset B to be activated by pressing F4 key twice.
Verification
If you assign a verification zone to the comfort keypad, when a
Medical, Panic or Fire event is triggered, or if a user enters a duress
code, then audio and video events are activated.
Visual indications
Backlight
Select when keypad backlight is on. Options are: - On after key is
pressed; Always on; Always off.
Backlight Level
Select the intensity of illumination of the backlight. Range 1 - 8
(High).
Indicators
Enable or disable the LED’s on the keypad.
Setting state
Enable if setting state should be indicated in idle mode. (LED)
Logo
Enable if logo should be visible in idle mode.
Analog Clock
Select position of clock if visible in idle mode. Options are Left
Aligned, Center Aligned, Right Aligned or Disabled.
Emergency
Enable if Panic, Fire and Medical function keys should be indicated
in the LCD display.
Direct Set
Enable if Fullset/Partset function keys should be indicated in the
LCD display.
Audible indications
Alarms
Select speaker volume for alarm indications or disable sound.
Entry/Exit
Range is 0 – 7 (Max volume)
Chime
Select speaker volume for entry & exit indications or disable sound.
Keypress
Range is 0 – 7 (Max volume)
Voice Annunciation
Select speaker volume for chime or disable sound.
Partset Buzzer
Range is 0 – 7 (Max volume)
Deactivation
Calendar
Select if the keypad should be limited by calendar. See Calendar.
Mapping gate
Select if keypad should be limited by a mapping gate.
Keyswitch
Select if keypad should be limited by a keyswitch.
PACE Entry
Tick this box to disable the keys on the keypad during the entry time
when a PACE is configured on the keypad.
Areas
Location
Select the secured area where the keypad is located.
Areas
Select which areas can be controlled through keypad.
211
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Options
Delay Fullset
Select to configure a delayed set across all keypads. The location of
the keypad is ignored and all areas will perform a full exit time count
down.
NOTICE
An area should be assigned to a keypad only if the keypad is inside the assigned
area, and if an entry/exit route is defined. If an area is assigned, when the
particular area is set or unset then entry and exit timers are used (if configured).
Other features related to entry/exit routes also become available. If no area is
assigned, the area is set or unset immediately and other entry/exit features are
not available.
17.9.2.3
17.9.2.3.1
Door Controllers
Editing a door controller
1. Select Configuration > Hardware > X-Bus > Door Controllers.
2. Click on one of the blue marked data (e.g. serial number).
3. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
For naming and identifying:
In loop configuration, each expander is numbered consecutively from the first
(expander connected to the 1A 1B on the controller) to the last (expander
connected to the 2A 2B on the controller).
Example for SPC63xx: Expanders, when numbered 1 through 63, are allocated
zones (in groupings of 8) in subsequent identities of 1 to 512 (the greatest
number in zone identification is 512). Therefore, any expander named or
identified by a number greater than 63 has no allocated zones.
212
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
Expander ID
ID of the door controller set with the rotary switches.
Type
Type of the door controller.
S/N
Serial number of the door controller.
Description
Description of the door controller..
Door I/O 1

If a door is assigned to the door I/O, select the corresponding door number.
If the two inputs and outputs are configurable, select Zones / Outputs.

If a door number is selected for the door I/O, the door settings can be
changed by clicking on the edit button. This is equal to Settings > Doors.

If Zones / Options is selected, the two zones and the one output can be
configured by clicking the edit button.
Door I/O 2
Profile 1
For readers with a green and a red LED.
Profile 2
For VANDERBILT readers with a yellow LED (AR618X).
Profile 3
Profile 3 is used with HID readers that send a PIN to the panel as a card reading
with a predefined site code (0 )
Profile 4
Profile 4 is used with HID readers that send a PIN to the panel as a card reading
with a predefined site code (255 ).
Profile 5
Select to enable Sesam readers. It is also recommended that you select the
Override Reader Profile option to provide feedback on the setting process.
Editing Zones/Outputs for a Door I/O
1. Select a Zone/Output for the door I/O.
2. Click the Edit button.
3. The 2 inputs and the output belonging to this door I/O can be configured as
normal door inputs and outputs. See page [➙ 244].
4. In order to use the inputs, they have to be assigned to a zone number.
17.9.2.4
Cable Map
For a list of the expanders/keypads in the ordered they are configured on the SPC
system:

Select Configuration > Hardware > X-BUS > Cable Map.
 The following window will be displayed:
213
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
For more detail on X-BUS interfacing, see page [➙ 70].
17.9.2.5
Settings
To configure X-BUS connections:
1. Select Configuration > Hardware >X-BUS > X-Bus Settings.
 The following window will be displayed.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
Addressing Mode
Select if expanders/keypads are either manually or automatically addressed on
the X-BUS .
X-BUS Type
Select Loop or Spur configuration.
Retries
The number of times the system attempts to re-transmit data on the X-BUS
interface before a communications fault is generated. (1 – 99: default is 25)
Comms Timer
The length of time before a communication fault is recorded.
214
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17.9.3
17
Wireless
Wireless sensor detection (868 MHz) on the SPC panel is provided by wireless
receiver modules which may be factory fitted on the keypad or on the controller, or
by installing a wireless expander.
1. Select Configuration > Hardware > Wireless > Wireless.
2. See table below for further information.
Sensor
The number of the sensor enrolled on the system
(1 = first, 2 = second, etc.)
ID
A unique identity number for that sensor.
Type
The type of wireless sensor detected
(magnetic contact, inertia/shock, etc.)
Zone
The zone to which the sensor has been enrolled.
Battery
The status of the battery in the sensor (if fitted).
Supervise
The status of the supervisory operation (OK = supervisory signal received,
Not Supervised = no supervisory operation).
Signal
The signal strength received from the sensor (01=low, 09=high).
Note: Although it is not possible to enroll a device with a signal strength less
than 3, devices whose signal drops below 3 after enrollment are not
dropped.
Performable actions
Log
Click to view the wireless sensor Log. See page [➙ 216].
Enrol
Click to open the list of unenrolled wireless devices.
1. Select Status > Hardware > Wireless > WPA.
2. The identity of each enrolled WPA and its status displays.
215
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17.9.3.1
Log - Wireless sensor X
To view a quick log of events for a wireless sensor:
1. Click the Log button.
2. See table below for further information.
3. Create a text file of the log by clicking Text File.
17.9.3.2
Date/Time
The date and time of the logged event.
Receiver
The wireless receiver location, i.e. wireless module mounted on the keypad,
controller or wireless expander.
Signal
The signal strength received from the sensor (01=low, 09=high).
Status
The physical status of the sensor.
Battery
The status of the battery connected to the sensor (OK, Fault).
Configuring a WPA
NOTICE
The WPA configuration and status page is displayed only if there is a wireless
module fitted on the panel or any of its expanders, and the panel is licensed for
the type of module(s) fitted.
A WPA is not assigned to a user. Usually, a WPA is shared by several people, for
example, security guards working in shifts or, alternatively, WPAs may be
permanently attached to a surface such as under a desk or behind a till.
A maximum of 128 WPAs is allowed per panel.
216
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
To configure a WPA from the browser:

Select Full Engineer mode and select the following options Configuration >
Hardware > Wireless > WPA.
The following items can be checked or configured from this page:
 Battery Status
The panel receives the battery status from the WPA in every frame. The battery
status can be either OK or Low.
Battery monitoring requires a WPA fitted with the PCB revision E-PC138612 or
later.
 Supervise Status
The Supervise status can be any of the following:
– Fault
The panel has not received a supervision message from the WPA in the
period configured in the Wireless Settings page.
– Disabled
Supervision is not configured.
– OK
Supervision is transmitting normally.
 Test Status
The Test Status can be any of the following:
– Overdue
The WPA has not been tested in the period configured in the Wireless
Settings page.
– Disabled
Supervision is not configured.
– OK
The WPA test is ok.
1. Click on the Edit button to edit the WPA configuration.
2. Click on the Delete button to delete a WPA from the system.
17.9.3.2.1
Adding a WPA
To add a WPA to the system:

Click the Add button in the main WPA Configuration and Status page.
 The Configure WPA page is displayed for the new WPA.
217
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration

Configure the WPA using the following details:
Description/Name
Enter a Description or Name to uniquely identity a WPA.
Transmitter ID
The transmitter ID is printed on the WPA casing and can be entered
manually here.
You can also identify the ID remotely by pressing any button on the WPA
and then clicking the Learn button. The panel automatically enters this ID in
this field providing no other WPA is currently defined with it
Supervise
The WPA may be configured to send periodic supervision signals.
Supervision is enabled on the WPA with a jumper.
The supervision function also needs to be enabled on the panel for the
particular WPA for correct supervision operation. If the panel does not get a
supervision signal, it raises an alarm that is shown in the keypad and logged.
If supervision is not enabled, the WPA sends out a supervision message
about every 24 hours to transmit the WPA battery status to the panel. This
message is also randomized to decrease the chances of collision with other
WPAs.
Tick the Supervise box if supervision has been enabled for that particular
WPA.
Test
Tick the Test box if a periodic WPA test is required. The timeframe for
periodic testing is configured on the Changing wireless settings [➙ 219]
page.
Button Assignment
Use this section to assign functions to button combinations. Available
functions are Panic, Panic silent, Holdup, Suspicion, RF User Output and
Medical. More than one combination can be selected for the same function.
The screen above shows the defaults for the panel for a Financial
installation:

Yellow - Suspicion
218
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration

17
Red + Green - Holdup
For Commercial or Domestic installations, the default is:

Red + Green - Panic
Note: If no function is assigned to a button combination, it is still possible to
use that combination by using a trigger. See Triggers [➙ 253]

Click on the Save button to save the settings.
See also
 Changing wireless settings [➙ 219]
 Changing wireless settings [➙ 219]
 Triggers [➙ 253]
17.9.3.2.2
Editing a WPA
To edit a WPA, click the Edit button in the main WPA Configuration and Status
page.
The Edit page is similar to the Add page except that it does not contain the Learn
button for automatically entering the WPA ID.
17.9.3.3
Changing wireless settings
1. Select Configuration > Hardware > Wireless > Wireless Settings.
2. See table below for further information.
Antenna
Select the type of antenna connected to the wireless module (internal or
external) from the drop down menu. The type of antenna required for the
wireless module depends on the type of wireless module fitted.
Supervision
Select whether a wireless sensor that is reported as missing registers a
tamper condition on the signet panel. A wireless sensor is reported as
missing when no supervision signal has been received from the sensor for a
period greater than the programmed Wireless Lost timer.
See page [➙ 228].
Filter
Tick to filter low strength RF signals.
Detect RF Jam
Tick to activate an alert if RF interference is detected.
RF FOB SOS
Select how the SOS buttons on the RF Fob should operate.:
219
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration






Enabled Silent
User Medic
User Holdup
RF Output
Enter a maximum period (in days) between WPA tests.
Prevent Setting Time
Enter a time in minutes after which, if the sensor fails to report, a setting is
prevented for an area where the wireless zone is.
This setting applies to the following intrusion zones only:
Device Lost Time
17.9.4.1
Enable
WPA Test Schedule











17.9.4
Disable
Alarm
Entry/Exit
Exit Term
Panic
Hold up
Tamper
Lock Supervision
Seismic
All OK
Setting Authorisation
Lock Element
Enter a number of minutes after which the wireless device (sensor or WPA)
device is reported as lost.
Changing system settings
Options
1. Select Configuration > System > System Options.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
System Options
The options displayed vary depending on the Security Grade of the system.
Restriction
System Option
Description
General Settings
Areas
Select to enable multiple areas on the system.
Note: This option is displayed for the Domestic and
Commercial installation types, only.
Code Restore
Grade 3 only: A user, who does not have the right to
restore an alarm, is able to restore the alarm with this
feature. On resetting an alarm, a 6 digit code is required.
The user must call the installer to generate a restore
code, with which the user is able to restore the alarm.
Offline Tamper
Enable this for offline expander zones to generate a zone
tamper.
Keyfob Restore
If enabled, key fob is enabled to restore alerts by
pressing the Unset key.
220
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
Restriction
System Option
Description
Web and
SPC Pro
Only
Audio Expander
LED
If enabled, audio expander will not turn on LED when
microphone active.
Report in Eng
mode
If enabled, the panel will always report alarm activations
and panic alarms.
Outputs in Eng
Mode
If selected, the following are not deactivated in Full
Engineer mode:
 Controller outputs
 Expander outputs
 Indicator LEDs
 Keyswitch LEDs
Alarm on
Reporting Fail
If a ‘Fail to Communicate‘ alert is raised, external bells
will activate.
Retrigger Duress
If enabled, duress alarm will retrigger.
Retrigger Panic
If enabled, panic alarm will retrigger.
Override Reader
Profile
If enabled, the LED behavior of readers will be controlled
by the panel.
Silence Audio
Verification
If enabled, then the internal and external bells (system
and area), the keypad buzzers and annunciation
messages on the Comfort Keypad will be silenced during
audio verification.
Watchdog Output Enables output 6 on the SPC controller board to be used
Mode
for monitoring purposes. The following modes of
operation of the watchdog output can be selected:
 Disable — Output 6 is available as a general purpose
output.
 Enabled — Output 6 is normally OFF but is turned
ON when a watchdog fault occurs.
 Pulsed — Output 6 is PULSED at 100ms intervals.
 Enabled Inverted — Output 6 is normally ON but is
turned OFF when a watchdog fault occurs.
The following options combine the Enabled option with
hardware-fault reporting in the event of a main
microprocessor failure. If such a failure occurs, a SIA
event is sent to ARC1.
Note: The ARC must be configured to use SIA and SIA
Extended 1 or 2. CID and FF are not supported by this
reporting method.
 Enabled + Reporting (10s) — The failure event is
sent to ARC1 10 seconds after the fault is detected.
This option must be used to comply with VdS 2252.
 Enabled +Reporting (60s) — The failure event is sent
to ARC1 60 seconds after the fault is detected.
The SIA event reported is HF and Extended SIA reports
Hardware Fault.
Note: Hardware faults are not reported if the Engineer is
logged in to the system.
For more information on ARCs, see Alarm Reporting
Centres (ARCs) [➙ 290].
SPCP355
Enable VDS power supply.
For VdS installations, this option is automatically
selected.
Bell on Fail to Set Enable to activate the internal bell if the system fails to
(FTS)
set.
Strobe on Fail to
Enable to activate the strobe if the system fails to set.
221
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Restriction
System Option
Description
Set (FTS)
!
Hide bypass
If enabled, the bypass messages will no longer be
displayed on keypad.
Battery capacity
Total batteries capacity in AH, for panel only (3 - 100 Ah).
You must enter this value and Max current value to view
the remaining battery time on the keypad in the event of
mains failure. This is indicated under the STATUS BATTERY - BATT TIME menu.
Max current
The total current draw from batteries when mains fail
occurs (30 - 20000 mA). You must enter this value and
the Battery capacity value to view the remaining battery
time on the keypad in the event of mains failure. This is
indicated under the STATUS - BATTERY - BATT TIME
menu.
Partset A
Rename
Enter a new name for your PARTSET A mode (e.g. Night
Mode).
Partset B
Rename
Enter a new name for your PARTSET B mode (e.g. Floor
1 only).
Bell on First
Enable to activate relevant bells/sirens on an
unconfirmed alarm. When this option is disabled, the
relevant bells/sirens will only activate on a confirmed
alarm or if the detector that caused the unconfirmed
alarm is reactivated.
Bell Retrigger
Enable to resound bells/sirens if a second zone activation
is detected (after the bell time has elapsed). If not
checked then the external bells will only trigger once.
Alert Forbid Set
If enabled, a user cannot set an area if there is an area or
system alert present on the system.
Note: This option is only available when the Standards ->
Region selected is Switzerland or Security Grade
selected is ‘Unrestricted’.
Partset
Alarm
!
Web Only
Restore on Unset Enable for alerts to auto clear after 30 seconds in Unset
mode.
Note: To comply with PD6662, you must disable this
option.
!
Antimask Set
Select the type of event reported resulting from antimask
detection when panel is Set. Options are Disabled,
Tamper, Trouble or Alarm.
The option can only be configured when the panel is in
‘Unrestricted’ mode. In Grade 2 or 3 mode, the type of
event reported is in accordance with the standards for the
selected region:
 Ireland - Alarm
 All other regions - Alarm
!
Antimask Unset
Select the type of event reported resulting from antimask
detection when panel is Unset. Options are Disabled,
Tamper, Trouble or Alarm.
The option can only be configured when the panel is in
‘Unrestricted’ mode. In Grade 2 or 3 mode, the type of
event reported is in accordance with the standards for the
selected region:
 Ireland - Disabled
 All other regions - Tamper
222
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Restriction
17
System Option
Description
!
Out of bounds
EOL unset
Select the type of event reported resulting from Out of
Bounds EOL detection when the panel is unset. Options
are: Disabled, Tamper and Trouble.
The option can only be configured when the panel is in
‘Unrestricted’ mode. In Grade 2 or 3 mode, the type of
event reported is in accordance with the standards for the
selected region:
 Germany VDS – Tamper
 All other regions - Trouble
!
Out of bounds
EOL set
Select the type of event reported resulting from Out of
Bounds EOL detection when the panel is set. Options
are: Disabled, Tamper and Trouble.
The option can only be configured when the panel is in
‘Unrestricted’ mode. In Grade 2 or 3 mode, the type of
event reported is in accordance with the standards for the
selected region:
 Germany VDS – Tamper
 All other regions – Trouble
!
Zone Unstable
unset
Select the type of event reported resulting from Zone
Unstable detection when the panel is unset. Options are:
Disabled, Tamper and Trouble.
A zone is unstable if a valid sample cannot be obtained
within 10 seconds.
The option can only be configured when the panel is in
‘Unrestricted’ mode. In Grade 2 or 3 mode, the type of
event reported is in accordance with the standards for the
selected region:
 Germany VDS – Tamper
 All other regions – Trouble
!
Zone Unstable
set
Select the type of event reported resulting from Zone
Unstable detection when the panel is set. Options are:
Disabled, Tamper and Trouble.
A zone is unstable if a valid sample cannot be obtained
within 10 seconds.
The option can only be configured when the panel is in
‘Unrestricted’ mode. In Grade 2 or 3 mode, the type of
event reported is in accordance with the standards for the
selected region:
 Germany VDS – Tamper
 All other regions – Trouble
!
EOL Wide
If enabled, EOL wide bands are used.
Suspicion
Audible
If enabled then WPA Suspicion alerts have audible and
visible indicators on the keypad. (Financial mode only).
End Of Line
(EOL
RESISTANCE)
Select the End Of Line termination resistors that will apply
to either all zones on the system or new zones added to
the system. Select a value to enable the appropriate
feature.
To apply a new EOL setting to all existing zones, select
the Update all zones checkbox. If you change the End of
Line value but do not select this checkbox, the new
setting applies only to zones added after changing the
value.
Seismic Test on
Set
If enabled, all seismic sensors in any area that is being
set will be tested before area or system set. (Financial
mode only).
Auto Restore
Enable this feature to automatically restore alerts on the
system i.e. when the open zone that triggered an alarm is
Pro
!
223
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Restriction
System Option
Description
closed, a manual restore operation on the
keypad/browser is not required. If disabled it prevents the
user from restoring alerts by resetting the input that
triggered the alert.
!
Alarm on Exit
Enabled: If a non-entry/exit zone is activated during the
exit timer countdown, a local alarm is raised by sounding
the bells.
Disabled: If a non-entry/exit zone is activated during the
exit timer countdown, an alarm is not raised.
Note: This option only displays when the Unrestricted
grade is selected as enabling it is not in accordance with
EN50131. When you choose the Swiss or Belgium
Region under Standard Compliance Settings, this option
is automatically enabled but it is not visible under
Options.
!
Alarm on Entry
Enabled: If a non-entry/exit zone is activated during the
entry timer countdown, a local alarm is raised by
sounding the bells.
Disabled: If a non-entry/exit zone is activated during the
entry timer countdown, an alarm is not raised.
Note: This option only displays when the Unrestricted
grade is selected as enabling it is not in accordance with
EN50131. When you choose the Swiss Region under
Standard Compliance Settings, this option is
automatically enabled but it is not visible under Options.
Confirmation
The Confirmation variable determines when an alarm is
deemed to be a confirmed alarm.
 BS8243:
This will enforce compliance with the UK Police
requirements, and is a specific requirement for UK
Commercial installations. The requirement stipulates
that an alarm will only be deemed to be a confirmed
alarm if it meets the following condition:
After an initial zone alarm has been activated and
before the alarm confirmation time has expired, a
second zone alarm is activated. The alarm
confirmation time must be between 30 and 60
minutes. (See Timers [➙ 228])
Confirmation
!


If a second zone alarm is not activated within the
Alarm confirmation time, then the first zone alarm will
be inhibited. The BS8243 confirmation option is
automatically set whenever the Standards -> Region
option is set to UK.
Garda:
This will enforce the policies for confirmed alarms
required by the Irish Garda. The requirement
stipulates that an alarm will be deemed to be a
confirmed alarm as soon as a second zone alarm is
activated on the system within the one alarm set
period. The Garda confirmation option is
automatically set whenever the Standards -> Region
option is set to Ireland.
EN-50131-9
This will enforce compliance with the EN-50131-9
standard and the Spanish “INT/316/2011 Order of 1
February on the operation of alarm systems in the
field of private security”. This requirement stipulates
that an alarm will only be deemed to be a confirmed
alarm if it meets the following conditions:
- 3 zone activations in 30 minutes (default), whereby
224
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Restriction
System Option
17
Description
two activations may come from the same device if
the activations differ in type, i.e. alarm / tamper.
- 1 Alarm activation followed by an ATS[1] Fault
within 30 minutes (default).
- ATS fault followed by a tamper or alarm condition
within 30 minutes (default).
If the 30 minutes expires and the zone is restored to
its normal physical state, then the zone’s alerts will
be restored if a level 2 user can restore this alert. In
this case, the zone will accept a new alert condition
which will cause a new activation.
Alternatively, if the zone has not been restored to its
normal physical state then that zone will be inhibited
if that zone is allowed to be inhibited.
If an alert (ATS) reoccurs after the 30 minute window
(default), then the 30 minute timer will restart.

The EN50131-9 confirmation option is automatically
set whenever the Standards -> Region option is set
to Spain.
VDS
This will enforce compliance with the VDS standard.
Keypad
!
Always Show
State
(SHOW STATE)
If enabled, the setting status of the system (Fullset /
Partset / Unset) is permanently displayed in the bottom
line of the keypad display. If unchecked the setting status
will disappear from the keypad display after 7 seconds.
Show Open
Zones
If enabled, open zones will display on keypad in Unset
mode.
Call ARC
Message
If enabled, the ARC message will be displayed for 30
seconds after Unset, if confirmed alarm has been
reported..
Call ARC Line 1
ARC message in line 1 of display (16 chars).
Call ARC Line 2
ARC message in line 2 of display (16 chars).
Show Cameras
If enabled, offline cameras will be displayed on the
keypad in Unset mode.
Idle State
Language
Select the language displayed in idle state.
 System Language: Language in which menus and
texts on the keypads, the web interface and the event
log will be displayed.
 Last Used: Last used language is displayed in idle
state.
PIN Digits
Enter the number of digits for user PINs (max. 8 digits).
Increasing the number of digits will add the relevant
number of zeros to the front of an existing PIN, e.g. an
existing user PIN of 2134 (4 digits) will change to
00002134 if the PIN digits is set to 8. If you decrease the
number of PIN digits, existing PINs will have their leading
digits removed, e.g. an existing user PIN of 00002134 (8
digits) will change to 02134 if the PIN digits is set to 5.
Note: This option cannot be changed if an SPC Manager
PIN digit mode is set. Refer to page [➙ 301]
Note: To comply with INCERT approvals, the user’s PIN
code must contain more than 4 digits.
PIN
225
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Restriction
System Option
Description
PACE and PIN
If enabled, both PACE and PIN are required.
User Duress
Select one of the following Duress options to activate this
function on the system.
 PIN +1(system reserves the PIN before and after the
user PIN for duress.
 PIN + 2 (system reserves two PINs before and after
the user PIN for duress.
Duress must be enabled for individual users. See section
on Adding/Editing a User.
PIN Policy
Click on the Edit button to select options for PIN usage.
 Periodic changes required – enforces scheduled
changes to the user’s PIN. The period is defined in
the PIN Valid field of Timers. See Timers [➙ 228].
 Warn if changes required – generates a user alert if
the user’s PIN is about to expire, or has expired. The
warning period is defined in the PIN Warning field of
Timers. See Timers [➙ 228].
 User selects the last digit – enables the user to select
the last digit of their pin. The preceding digits are
automatically generated by the system.
 User selects the 2 digits - enables the user to select
the last two digits of their PIN. The preceding digits
are automatically generated by the system.
 Limit Changes – limits the number of changes
possible within a valid PIN period. This value is
defined in the PIN Changes Limit field of Timers. See
Timers [➙ 228]
 Secure PIN - If enabled the PIN will be automatically
generated by the panel.
Reset Cards
If enabled, access cards passback state will be reset
every day at midnight.
Ignore site code
If enabled, the access system will ignore site codes. By
ignoring the site code, you only add the card number and
increase the card users on the system from 100 to 2,500.
Card Formats
Click on the Edit button to select the card formats that will
be allowed on this panel.
Refer to the Appendix in the SPC Installation &
Configuration Guide for details of currently supported
card readers and card formats.
Note: Selecting Wiegand enables all Wiegand card
formats.
Web and
SPC Pro
Only
Door Mode Set
Select the required user identification to unlock door
when area is set. Options are Default, Card and PIN,
Card Or PIN.
Web and
SPC Pro
Only
Door Mode Unset Select the required user identification to unlock door
when area is unset. Options are Default, Card and PIN,
Card Or PIN.
Door
Engineer
!
Engineer Restore (Impact only if Region "UK" is chosen): If this option is
enabled, then the engineer has to restore the confirmed
alarms. This option works together with the function
"Confirmation".
Engineer Exit
If enabled, the engineer is allowed to leave Full Engineer
mode with alerts active.
226
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Restriction
17
System Option
Description
!
Allow Engineer
Enable this feature to ensure that the engineer can only
access the system if the user allows it.
If disabled, ENABLE ENGINEER menu option on keypad
is not available.
Note: Only available if Security Grade is ‘Unrestricted’.
For Grade 2 / 3, user control of engineer access to
system is always available.
!
Allow
Manufacturer
Enable this feature to ensure that the engineer can only
access the system if the user allows it.
If disabled, ENABLE MANUFACTURER menu option on
keypad is not available.
Note: Only available if Security Grade is ‘Unrestricted’.
For Grade 2 / 3, user control of engineer access to
system is always available if user type is ‘Manager’.
SMS
Authentication
Select one of the following options:
 PIN Code Only: This is a valid user code. See page.
 Caller ID Only: This is the phone number (including
three-digit country prefix code) as configured for user
SMS control. SMS control will only be available for
configuration by the user when this option is
selected.
 PIN and Caller ID
 SMS PIN Code Only This is a valid PIN code
configured for the user which is different from the
user’s login code. SMS controls will only be available
for configuration by the user when this option is
selected.
 SMS PIN Code & Caller ID.
Web Only
System Policy
Configure engineer login and tamper reporting behavior
for system.
Web Only
Timing Policy
Display system timing policy.
Web and
SPC Pro
Only
Output
Configuration
Click on the Edit button to configure latch and autoset
output settings [➙ 200].
Web Only
System Alert
Policy
This programming option allows you to restrict the user
and engineer’s ability to restore, Isolate and inhibit alerts.
The manner in which the system reacts to alerts can also
be programmed.
Zone Alarm
Policy
Select whether particular zone alarms can be restored,
inhibited or isolated by the user and engineer.
Zone Tamper
Policy
Select whether particular zone tampers can be restored,
inhibited or isolated by the user and engineer.
Keypad Display
Policy
Select events to be displayed on keypads in both Set and
Unset modes.
Keypad LED
Policy
Select which LEDs will be displayed on keypads in both
Set and Unset modes.
System General
Policy
Select options to manage remote control of the system
and alarm and bell settings from the following:
- No confirmed alarms if internally set
SMS
Policy
!
Web Only
!
Web Only
!
Web Only
!
Web Only
!
Web Only
!
227
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Restriction
System Option
Description
- Block remote restore
- Block remote isolates
- Block remote inhibits
- No external bell if internal set
- Delay reporting if entry active
- Confirmed alarm cancels delay
Web Only
Confirmed
Alarms System
Alerts
Select which system alerts cause a confirmed alarms
when at least one alarm is active, and which system
alerts cause the panel to enter the tentative state.
Web Only
Hold-up keyword
1
Enter the first hold-up keyword to send to the CMS in a
Holdup Information (HD) event.
Web Only
Hold-up keyword
2
Enter the second hold-up keyword to send to the CMS in
a Holdup Information (HD) event.
Web Only
Phone number 1
Enter the first site phone number to send to the CMS in a
Holdup Information (HD) event.
Web Only
Phone number 2
Enter the second site phone number to send to the CMS
in a Holdup Information (HD) event.
!
Hold-up Data
See also
 Adding / Editing an area [➙ 236]
17.9.4.2
Timers
This window gives an overview about identified timer defaults and their description.
These settings, which vary depending on the defined Security Grade of the
system, should only be programmed by an authorised installation engineer.
Changing settings could render the SPC system noncompliant with security
standards. Setting the Security Grade back to EN 50131 Grade 2 or EN 50131
Grade 3 overwrites any changes made on this page.
1. Select Configuration > System > SystemTimers.
 The following window will be displayed.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
Timers
Designation of the functions in the following order:
 1st row: Web/SPC Pro
 2nd row: Keypad
Timer
Description
Default
Duration that internal sounders will sound when alarm is
activated. (1 – 15 minutes: 0 = never))
15 min.
INT BELL TIME
External Bells
EXT BELL TIME
Duration that external sounders will sound when alarm is
activated. (1 – 15 minutes; 0 = never)
15 min.
Audible
Internal Bells
228
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Timer
Description
Default
External Bell Delay
This will cause a delayed activation of the external bell. (0 –
600 seconds)
0 sec.
Number of seconds that a chime output will activate, when a
zone with chime attribute opens. (1 – 10 seconds)
2 sec.
EXT BELL DELAY
Chime
CHIME TIME
17
Confirmation
Confirm
CONFIRM TIME

Note: Only available when Security Grade is
‘Unrestricted’ and ‘DD243’ is selected for ‘Confirmation’
variable. (See System Options [➙ 220])
30 min.
This timer applies to the alarm confirmation feature and is
defined as the maximum time between alarms from two
different non overlapping zones that will cause a confirmed
alarm. (30 – 60 minutes)
Confirmed holdup
This timer applies to the confirmed holdup feature and is
defined as the maximum time between alarms from two
different non-overlapping zones that will cause a confirmed
alarm. (480 - 1200 minutes)
Dialer Delay
DIALER DELAY
30 sec.
When programmed, the dialler delay initiates a predefined
delay period (0 -30 seconds) before the system dials out to an
Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC). This is specifically designed
to reduce unwarranted responses from Alarm Receiving
Centres and the constabulary. In the event of a subsequent
zone being tripped the dialler delay period is ignored and the
dialler dials out immediately. (0 – 30 seconds)
Alarm abort
Time after a reported alarm in which an alarm abort message
can be reported. (0 – 999 seconds))
30 sec.
Period for which Setting Authorisation is valid. Enter a value
between 10 and 250 seconds.
20 secs
The Final Exit time is the number of seconds that arming is
delayed after a zone programmed with the final exit attribute
is closed. (1 – 45 seconds)
7 sec.
Activates the external bell momentarily to indicate a full set
condition. (0 – 10 seconds)
0 sec.
Activates the strobe on the external bell momentarily to
indicate a full set condition. (0 – 10 seconds)
0 sec.
ALARM ABORT
480 min.
Setting
Setting Authorisation
SETTING AUTH
Final Exit
FINAL EXIT
Bell on Fullset
FULLSET BELL
Strobe on Fullset
FULLSET STROBE
Fail To Set
Number of seconds to display fail to set message on keypads 10 sec.
(0 until valid PIN is entered). (0 – 999 seconds)
FAIL TO SET
Alarm
Double Knock
DKNOCK DELAY
The maximum delay between activation’s of zones with the
double attribute, which will cause an alarm. (1 – 99 seconds)
10 sec.
Soak
SOAK DAYS
The number of days a zone remains under soak test before it
automatically returns to normal operation. (1 – 99 days)
14 days
Seismic Test Interval
168 hours.
The average period between seismic sensor automatic tests
(12 – 240 hours)
Note: To enable automatic testing, the Automatic Sensor Test
attribute must be enabled for a seismic zone.
SEISMIC AUTOTEST
Seismic Test Duration
Maximum time (in seconds) that a seismic sensor takes to
trigger an alarm in response to the 'Seismic Test' output.
(3 - 120 seconds)
30 sec.
SEISMIC TEST DUR
Lockout Post Alarm
Duration after alarm that access will be denied.
0 mins
LOCKOUT POST
ALARM
External Bell Strobe
STROBE TIME
Duration that the strobe output will be active when an alarm is 15 min.
activated. (1 – 15 minutes; 0 = indefinitely)
Alerts
229
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Timer
Description
Mains Delay
The time after a mains fault has been detected before an alert 0 min.
is activated by the system. (0 – 60 minutes)
MAINS SIG DELAY
Default
Engineer
Engineer Access
ENGINEER ACCESS
The timer for the Engineer access starts as soon as the user
enables the Engineer Access. (0 – 999 minutes. ‘0’ indicates
no time limitation for system access)
0 min.
Engineer auto log out
Duration of inactivity after which the engineer will be
automatically locked out
0 mins.
The number of seconds that an RKD will wait for key entry
before it leaves the current menu. (10 – 300 seconds)
30 sec.
KEYPAD TIMEOUT
Keypad Language
KEYPAD LANGUAGE
The duration a keypad will wait in idle before switching
language to default ( 0 - 9999 seconds; 0 = never).
10 secs
Number of seconds to wait before reporting fire alarm for
zones with ‘Fire pre-alarm’ attribute set. (1 – 999 seconds)
See Editing a Zone [➙ 235].
30 sec.
Extra time to wait before reporting file alarm for zones with
‘Fire pre-alarm’ and ‘Fire Recognition’ attributes set. (1 – 999
seconds). See Editing a Zone [➙ 235].
120 sec.
Period for which pin is valid in days ( 1 - 330 )
30 days
Number of changes within a valid period ( 1 - 50 )
5
Time before PIN expiry after which a warning will be
displayed
( 1 - 14 )
5 days
The time that the RF output will remain active on the system.
(0 – 999 seconds)
0 sec.
Time Sync Limit
TIME SYNC LIMIT
Time limit within which no event will be reported.
(0 – 999 secs) Time synchronization only takes place if
system time and update time are outside this limit.
0 sec.
Link Timeout
Timeout for Ethernet link fault (0 = Disabled) ( 0 - 250 )
0 secs
Time for camera to go offline ( 10 - 9999 )
10 secs
Number of seconds to delay triggering of tech. zones with
tech. delay attribute. (0 – 9999 seconds)
0 sec.
ENG AUTO LOG OUT
Keypad
Keypad Timeout
Fire
Fire Pre-alarm
FIRE PRE-ALARM
Fire recognition
FIRE RECOGNITION
PIN
PIN Valid
PIN VALID
PIN Changes Limit
PIN CHANGES LIMIT
PIN Warning
PIN WARN
General Settings
RF Output Time
RF OUTPUT
LINK TIMEOUT
Camera Offline
CAMERA OFFLINE
Tech. delay
TECH. DELAY
Frequent
FREQUENT
This attribute only applies to Remote Maintenance. The
336 hours (2
number of hours a zone must open within if the zone is
weeks)
programmed with the Frequent use attribute. (1 – 9999 hours)
!
Duress silent
Time when duress will remain silent and not restorable from
keypad (0 - 999).
0 Minutes
Holdup/panic silent
Number of minutes that a holdup/panic will remain silent and
cannot be restored from the keypad (0 - 999).
0 Minutes
230
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
Default times are dependent upon the Engineer configuration. The default times
denoted may or may not be allowable and is dependent on the configuration by
the engineer
17.9.4.3
Identification
1. Select Configuration > System > Identification.
 The following window will be displayed.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
Installation ID
Enter a unique number for each installation This number identifies the
installation (1 – 999999).
Installation Name
Enter the name of the installation. An installation name must be entered
before the installation is saved on the system. The installation can be
viewed from the keypad.
Installation Date
Select the date from the dropdown menu that the installation was
completed.
Installer Name
Enter the name of the person who installed the system (for support
purposes).
Installer Phone
Enter the contact phone number of the person who installed the system
(for support purposes).
Display Installer
Tick this box to display the installation details on the keypad connected to
the panel when in the idle condition.
Engineer Lock
Tick this box to require use of the engineer lock PIN to factory default the
panel.
Engineer Lock PIN
Enter value for lock PIN (4 digits).
231
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17.9.4.4
Standards
All alarm systems must comply with defined security standards. Each standard
has specific security requirements that apply to the market/country in which the
alarm system is installed.
1. Select Configuration > System > Standards.
 The following window will be displayed.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
Installation Type
Select the type of installation. Options are Domestic, Commercial or Financial.
Region
To change the region on your panel, it is strongly recommended that you default
your panel and select a new region as part of the start up wizard. Select the
region in which the installation is installed and the regional requirements it
complies with. Options are UK, Ireland, Sweden, Europe, Switzerland, Belgium
(INCERT), Spain, and Germany (VDS).
Grade
Select the Security Grade that applies to the installation.


Irish and European Regions:
–
EN50131 Grade 2
–
EN50131 Grade 3
–
Unrestricted
UK Region:
–
PD6662 (EN50131 Grade 2 based)
–
PD6662 (EN50131 Grade 3 based)
232
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
–






17
Unrestricted
Swedish Region:
–
SSF1014:3 Larmclass 1
–
SSF1014:3 Larmclass 2
–
Unrestricted
Belgium Region:
–
TO-14 (EN50131 Grade 2 based)
–
TO-14 (EN50131 Grade 3 based)
–
Unrestricted
Switzerland Region:
–
SES EN-CH-Grad 2
–
SES EN-CH-Grad 3
–
Unrestricted
Spanish Region
–
EN50131 Grade 2
–
EN50131 Grade 3
German Region
–
VdS Class A
–
VdS Class C
–
Unrestricted
France
–
NF&A2P - Grade 2
–
NF&A2P - Grade 3
–
Unrestricted
Unrestricted Grade
A Security Grade setting of Unrestricted does not apply to any regionally approved
security restrictions of the installation. Instead, the Unrestricted setting enables an
engineer to customize the installation by changing security policy options and
configuring additional options which do not comply with the selected regional
security compliance.
Unrestricted configuration options are denoted in this document by the following
symbol:
!
See System Options for details of configuring system policies.
17.9.4.5
Clock
This window allows you to program the date and time on the panel. The controller
contains a Real-Time Clock (RTC) that is battery backed to preserve the time and
date information in the event of power failure.
1. Select Configuration > System > Clock.
 The following window will be displayed.
233
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
2. Select the Time and Date from the drop down menus.
3. Configure the following fields:
Automatic Daylight Saving Time
If selected, the system will automatically switch to summer time
Synchronize time with Mains
If selected, the RTC synchronizes itself with the sine wave in the
power line
The selected time and date will be displayed on the keypad, the web interface
and the event log.
17.9.4.6
Language

Select Configuration > System > Language.
 The following window is displayed:

For the Language option, select a language from the dropdown menu.
 This option determines the system language in which the texts and menus on
the keypads, the web interface and the event log will be displayed.

For the Idle Language option, select either ‘Use System Language’ or ‘Last
Used’.
234
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
 Idle Language determines the language which is displayed on the keypads
when the panel is in its idle state. If ‘Last Used’ is selected, the language
displayed is the language that is associated with the last user login.
The language used in the keypads and browser depends on the language
selection made for each user. For example, if the system language is set to
French, but the individual user’s language is set to English, English is the
language used in both keypads and browser for that user, regardless of the
specified system language.
See also
 Language [➙ 234]
 OPTIONS [➙ 109]
17.9.5
17.9.5.1
Configuring zones, doors and areas
Editing a zone
Engineer and User actions include Log, Isolate/Deisolate and Soak/Desoak for
each zone as allowable by the Security Grade EN 50131 Grade 2 and EN 50131
Grade 3.
1. Select Configuration > Inputs > All Zones.
 The following window will be displayed.
You can select Configuration > Inputs > X-Bus Zones to configure wired zones
only or Configuration > Inputs > Wireless Zones to configure wireless zones only.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
Zone
The number is presented for reference and can not be programmed.
Description
Enter a text (max. 16 characters) that serves to uniquely identify the zone.
235
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Input
The physical input is displayed for reference and is not programmable.
Type
Select a type of zone from the drop down menu (see page [➙ 345]).
Area
Only if (multiple) Areas is activated. Select an area to which the zone is assigned
from the drop down menu.
Calendar
Select if necessary the desired calendar (see page [➙ 249]).
Pro
!
Attributes
17.9.5.2
For Security Grade 2 / 3 a calendar can be assigned only to zones of type Exit
Terminator, Technical, Key Arm, Shunt and X-Shunt. For Security Grade
Unrestricted a zone of any type can be associated with a calendar.
Tick the relevant checkbox for the zone. Only attributes that apply that type of
zone will be presented (see Zone Attributes [➙ 348])
Adding / Editing an area
 Only if (multiple) Areas is activated.
1. Select Configuration > Areas > Areas.
 The following window will be displayed:
2. Press Edit to edit an existing area.
3. Press Add to add a new area. If the Installation Type is Domestic or
Commercial, an area is automatically added and the Edit Area Settings window
is displayed.
Note that the area type for the new area is automatically set to Standard.
If the Installation Type is Financial, the following window is displayed and the
area must be added manually.
236
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
4. Enter a description for the new area and select an area type from one of the
following:
-
Standard - Suitable for most areas.
-
ATM - Provides settings and defaults relevant to ATMs.
-
Vault - Provides settings and defaults relevant to vaults.
-
Advanced – Provides all area settings (Standard, ATM and Vault).
5. Click on the Add button to add the area.

17.9.5.2.1
Configure the settings for each installation type as per the following sections:
Entry/Exit
Configure the following Entry/Exit settings:
Entry time
The time period (in seconds) allowed for the user to UNSET the alarm
after opening an entry/exit zone of an armed system. The entry time
applies to all entry/exit zones in that area (default: 45 seconds).
Exit time
The time (in seconds) allowed for a user to leave a protected area
before setting is complete. The exit time will be counted down at the
keypad as the buzzer beeps to indicate to the user that the system will
arm when the exit timer reaches zero. The exit time applies to all
entry/exit zones in that area (default: 45 seconds).
Disable Exit Time
Select if no exit timer is required and setting is activated by ‘Exit term’
zone or ‘Entry exit’ zone with ‘Final exit’ attribute. See Timers [➙ 228].
Fob Unset Entry
FOB will only unset when entry timer is running. Default is enabled.
Access Denied on Alarm
Access is temporarily denied to the area for the amount of time
specified in the Lockout Post Alarm timer.
Prevent Setting
If enabled, setting prevented from keypad
Prevent Unsetting
If enabled, unsetting prevented from the keypad.
Setting Authorisation
Used for configuring Blocking Lock operation. Options are:




Disabled
Set
Unset
Set and Unset
If the Disabled option is selected (default) then the system will set and
unset normally with no change of operation.
If the Set option is selected, a “Setting Authorisation” signal is required
to set this area which can be received from keypads or a zone input
(see Authorised Setting of the Blocking Lock) The user cannot set the
system from the keypad. Any area that requires setting authorisation
will appear as locked on the comfort keypad and will not appear on the
standard keypad when setting.
If the Unset option is selected, the user cannot unset the area from
keypads but can use the keypad to generate the setting authorization
signal.
For the set and unset options, the user will be unable to change the
state of the area at any stage from the keypad.
A timer for setting authorisation can be configured. See Timers [➙ 228].
17.9.5.2.2
Partset Options
237
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Configure the operation of particular zones for both Partset A and Partset B modes
as detailed below:
17.9.5.2.3
Partset Enable
Enable PartSet for A and B operation as required.
Partset Timed:
Tick the relevant checkbox (Partset A or B) to apply the exit
timer to the Partset A or B mode.
Partset Access:
Tick the relevant checkbox to change access zones into
entry/exit type zones for either Partset A or B operation. This
feature is useful for a domestic installation where a Passive
Infrared (PIR) sensor is located in the hallway. If the user
partsets the system at night and returns downstairs during the
night, he/she may unintentionally activate the PIR sensor in
the hallway and trigger the alarm. By setting the partset
access option, the buzzer will sound for the entry time period
when the PIR sensor is activated thereby warning the user
that the alarm will activate if no action is taken.
Partset Exit/Entry:
Tick the relevant checkbox to change the behaviour of
entry/exit zones to alarm zones when in Partset A or B mode.
This feature is useful for a domestic installation when the
system has been set in partset mode. If the user partsets the
system at night he/she may wish the alarm to activate
immediately if the front or back door is opened during the
night.
Partset Local:
Tick the relevant checkbox to restrict the reporting of alarms
in Partset Mode to local reporting only (No remote reporting).
No Bells
If ticked, no bells will be activated for partset A or B.
Linked Areas
This section enables you to link areas for setting and unsetting purposes:
17.9.5.2.4
Fullset
Fullset this area when all linked areas are Fullset.
Fullset All
Fullset all areas when this area is Fullset.
Prevent Fullset
Prevent this area from Fullset if all linked areas are Fullset.
Prevent Fullset All
Prevent linked areas from Fullset if this area is not Fullset.
Unset
Unset this area when all linked areas are Unset.
Unset All
Unset all areas when this area is Unset.
Prevent Unset
Prevent this area from Unset if any linked areas are Fullset.
Prevent Unset All
Prevent linked areas from Unset if this area is Fullset.
Authorise Setting
Enable authorised setting for linked areas. Refer
Authorised Setting of the Blocking Lock.
Linked Areas
Click on the areas that you wish to link to this area.
Schedule
Configure scheduling with the following settings:
Calendar
Select a calendar to control scheduling.
Unset
Select if area should automatically Unset as
per the time specified in the selected
calendar.
Fullset
Select this option to Fullset the area as per
238
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
the time specified in the selected Calendar.
The area will also set when the Unset
Duration or Delay Interval has elapsed (See
Setting and Unsetting [➙ 241] section). If
the Unset Duration overlaps the scheduled
time, the area will use the calendar settings.
17.9.5.2.5
Time Locked
Select this option to time lock the area as
per the selected Calendar. (Vault type area
in Financial mode only)
Vault Access
Enter the number of minutes (0 – 120) to
activate this timer at the end of a Time
Locked Unset period. If the area is not unset
after this timer expires, the area cannot be
unset until the start of the next Time Locked
Unset period. (Vault type area in Financial
mode only)
Reporting
The Reporting configuration settings are applicable for Standard Areas in
Commercial and Financial installations only and are only relevant if a calendar
has been selected. (See Schedule [➙ 238] section)
These settings enable a report to be sent to the Control Centre or nominated
personnel if the panel is Set or Unset outside scheduled calendar times.
Early to Set
Enables a report to be sent if the panel is manually Fullset before a
scheduled Set and before the number of minutes entered in the
Timer field.
Late to Set
Enables a report to be sent if the panel is manually Fullset after a
scheduled Set and after the number of minutes entered in the Timer
field.
Early to Unset
Enables a report to be sent if the panel is manually Unset before a
scheduled Unset and before the number of minutes entered in the
Timer field.
Late to Unset
Enables a report to be sent if the panel is manually Unset before a
scheduled Unset and before the number of minutes entered in the
Timer field.
Reporting is done via SMS or to the ARC via SIA and Contact ID. An event is also
stored in the system log.
Only events configured for late or early reporting for the area will be reported.
Event reporting must also be enabled for an ARC or SMS, as described in the
following sections.
Enabling Reporting of Unusual Setting/Unsetting for an ARC
To configure event reporting for an ARC configured to communicate over SIA or
CID, select Communications>Reporting>Analog ARC> Edit>Filter to display the
Event Filter page for an ARC.
239
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
The Early/Late parameter is enabled to report any setting or unsetting which differs
from the schedule.
Enable Reporting of Unusual Setting/Unsetting for SMS
SMS Events can be configured using both Engineer and User configuration pages.
For Engineer configuration, select Users > Users SMS > Engineer SMS > Edit:
240
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
Enable Early/Late to report any setting and unsetting which is not according to
schedule.
17.9.5.2.6
Setting/Unsetting
The following parameters (with the exception of the Interlock parameter) are only
relevant in the following cases:
 A Calendar is selected (see Schedule [➙ 238]), or
 Unset Duration is enabled (has a value greater than zero), or
 Both of the above conditions are met.
Auto Set Warning
Enter the number of minutes to display a
warning before Auto Setting. ( 0 - 30 )
Note that the panel sets either at the
scheduled time or at the time defined by the
Delay Unset parameter. The first warning is
displayed at the configured time before the
scheduled time. There are further warnings
starting at one minute before setting time.
Auto Set Cancel
Enables the user to cancel Auto Setting by
entering a code in the keypad.
Auto Set Delay
Enables a user to delay Auto Setting by
entering a code in the keypad.
Keyswitch
Enables Auto Setting to be delayed using
Keyswitch Expander.
Delay Interval
Enter the number of minutes by which to
delay Auto Set. (1 - 300 )
Delay Counter
Enter the number of times that Auto Setting
can be delayed. (0 – 99: 0 = unlimited)
Delay Unset
Enter the number of minutes by which to
delay an Unset. (0 = no delay)
Interlock Group
Select an Interlock Group to assign to this
area. Interlocking only allows one area
within the group to be Unset at any time.
Typically used in ATM areas.
Unset Duration
If area is Unset for longer than this it will Set
241
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
automatically. (Range 0 – 120 mins: 0 = not
active).
Dual PIN
If this option is enabled, two PINs are
required to Set or Unset the area with the
keypad. Both PINs must belong to users
who have the required user right for the
operation (Setting or Unsetting).
If the second PIN is not entered within 30
seconds, or it is wrong, then the area cannot
be Set or Unset.
Late Working Support
An example of using the setting and unsetting parameters is for late working
situations where a calendar has been configured for automatic setting of a
premises at a particular time but staff may need to work late on occasion and the
automatic setting needs to be delayed.
Each delay is determined by the amount configured in the Delay Interval
parameter, and the Delay Counter parameter determines the number of times that
setting can be delayed. A user needs the correct value in the Auto Set Delay in
order to use this feature.
There are three ways to delay setting:
1. Entering the PIN on the keypad.
DELAY is a menu option on the standard keypad. The buttons at the top of the
comfort keypad are used to operate the delay feature
2. Using the keyswitch.
Turning the key to the right delays setting the system by the configured delay if
the maximum number of times that setting can be delayed (Delay Counter) has
not been exceeded. Turning the key to the left sets the delay to three minutes
(non-configurable). This can be done regardless of how many times setting
was delayed.
3. Using a FOB, WPA or button which activates a Delay Autoset trigger action.
(See page 172)
Temporary Unset
To allow a system to be temporarily unset in a time period specified by a calendar,
the following three parameters need to be configured:
1. Calendar
A calendar needs to be configured and selected for this area.
2. Time Locked
This box needs to be ticked so that the area can be unset only when allowed
as per the configured calendar.
3. Unset Duration
This parameter needs to be set to a value greater than zero to set an upper
limit on the time the area will be unset.
The following screen shows these parameters configured with appropriate settings:
17.9.5.2.7
All Okay
All Okay Required
If selected, user must confirm ‘All okay’ input or silent alarm is
generated. See Editing a Zone [➙ 235] for details on configuring an ‘All
Okay’ zone input.
242
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17.9.5.2.8
17
All Okay Time
Time (in seconds) in which ‘All okay’ must be confirmed before alarm is
raised. (Range 1 – 999 seconds)
All Okay Event
Select the event type to be sent when the ‘All okay’ timer expires.
Options are Panic (Silent), Panic and Duress.
RF Output
RF Output Time
Enter the number of seconds that the RF Output will remain on
for.
0 seconds will toggle the output on and off.
The other Miscellaneous options are described in Entry/Exit [➙ 237] for SPC Pro
17.9.5.2.9
Fire Exit Route
Fire exit route
17.9.5.2.10
Select the doors which will open when fire
occurs in this area. This option does not
display in domestic mode.
Area Triggers
The Triggers section is only displayed if triggers have been defined previously.
(See section on Triggers)
Click on the Edit button to add, edit or delete trigger conditions for the area. The
following page is displayed:
Configure the trigger for the area using the following parameters:
Trigger
Select a trigger from the drop down list.
Edge
The trigger can activate from either the positive or negative
243
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
edge of the activation signal.
Action
This is the action that is performed when the trigger is
activated. Options are:
 Unset
 Partset A
 Partset B
 Fullset
 Delay autoset
This action will delay alarm setting when the autoset
timer is running. The trigger will only add time if the Delay
Limit has not been exceeded and each trigger activation
will delay setting by the time defined in Delay Interval
(see section Setting/Unsetting [➙ 241].
 Restore alarms
This action will clear all alarms in the configured zone.
Note: Triggers cannot be configured from a keypad.
See also
 Triggers [➙ 253]
17.9.5.3
Editing a door
1. Select Configuration > Doors.
 A list of configured doors is displayed.
2. Click the Edit button.
3. Configure the fields as described in the tables below.
Door inputs
Each door has 2 inputs with predefined functionality. These two inputs, the door
position sensor and the door release switch can be configured.
Name
Description
Zone
The door position sensor input can be used for the
intrusion part as well. If the door position sensor input is
used also for the intrusion part, the zone number it is
assigned to has to be selected. If the door position
sensor is used only for the access part, the option
“UNASSIGNED” has to be selected.
If the door position sensor is assigned to an intrusion
zone, it can be configured like a normal zone but only
with limited functionality (e.g. not all zone types are
selectable).
If an area or the system is set with the card reader, the
door position sensor input has to be assigned to a zone
number and to the area or the system which have to be
set.
Description
(Web and SPC Pro only)
Description of the zone the door position sensor is
assigned to.
Zone Type
(Web and SPC Pro only)
Zone type of the zone the door position sensor is
assigned to (not all zones types are available).
Zone attributes
(Web and SPC Pro only)
The attributes for the zone the door position sensor is
assigned to can be modified.
244
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
Name
Description
Area
(Web and SPC Pro only)
The area the zone and the card reader are assigned to.
(If the card reader is used for setting & unsetting, this
area will be set / unset).
Door Position (Web)
DPS End Of Line (keypads)
Door Position EOL (SPC Pro)
The resistor used with the door position sensor. Choose
the used resistor value / combination.
DPS Normal Open
Select if the door release switch is to be a normally open
or normally closed input.
Door Release (Web)
DRS END OF LINE (Keypads)
Door Position EOL (SPC Pro)
The resistor used with the door release switch. Choose
the used resistor value / combination.
DRS Normal Open
Select if the door release switch is a normally open input
or not.
No DRS
(Web and SPC Pro only)
Select to ignore DRS.
If a DC2 is used on the door, this option MUST be
selected. If not selected, the door will open.
Reader Location (Entry/Exit)
(Web and SPC Pro only)
Select the location of the entry and exit readers.
Reader formats (Web)
READER INFO (Keypads)
Displays format of last card used with each configured
reader. (not available in SPC Pro)
Each free zone number can be assigned to the zones but the assignment is not
fixed. If the number ‘9’ is assigned to a zone, the zone and an input expander with
the address ‘1’ is connected to the X-Bus (which is using the zone numbers 9-16).
The assigned zone from the two door controller will be moved to the next free
zone number. Configuration will be adapted accordingly.
Door attributes
If no attribute is activated, a valid card can be used.
Attribute
Description
Void
The card is temporarily blocked.
Door Group
Used when multiple doors are assigned to the same
area and/or anti passback, custodian, or interlock
functionality is required.
Card and PIN
Card and PIN are required to gain entry.
PIN Only
PIN is required. No card will be accepted.
PIN Code or Card
PIN or card are required to gain entry
PIN to Exit
PIN is required on exit reader. Door with entry and
exit reader is required.
PIN to Set/Unset
PIN is required to set and unset the linked area. The
card has to be presented before the PIN is entered.
Unset outside (Browser)
Unset on Entry Reader (SPCPro)
Panel/area will unset, when card is presented at entry
reader.
245
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Attribute
Description
Unset inside (Browser)
Unset on Exit Reader (SPCPro)
Panel/area will unset, when card is presented at exit
reader.
Bypass alarm
Access is granted if an area is set and the door is an
alarm or an entry zone type.
Fullset outside (Browser)
Fullset on Entry Reader (SPCPro)
Panel/area will fullest, when card is presented twice
at entry reader.
Fullset inside
Full set on Exit Reader (SPCPro)
Panel/area will fullest, when card is presented twice
at exit reader.
Force Fullset
If the user has rights, they can force set from entry
reader.
Emergency
Door lock opens if a fire alarm is detected within the
assigned area.
Emergency any
Fire in any area will unlock the door.
Escort
The escort feature enforces privileged card holders to
escort other card holders through specific doors. If
this feature is assigned to a door, a card with the
“escort right” has to be presented first, to allow other
cardholders without this right to open the door. The
time period in which cardholders are able to present
their cards after a card with escort right was
presented, can be configured per door.
Prevent Passback*
Anti-passback should be enforced on the door. All
doors must have entry and exit readers and must be
assigned to a door group.
In this mode, cardholders must use their access card
to gain entry into and exit from a defined door group.
If a valid cardholder has presented his access card to
enter a door group and not presented the card to exit
it, the cardholder is in breach of the Anti-Passback
rules. Next time the cardholder attempts to enter the
same door group, a hard Anti-Passback alarm will be
raised and the cardholder will not be permitted entry
to the door group.
Soft Passback*
Anti-passback violations are only logged. All doors
must have entry and exit readers and must be
assigned to a door group.
In this mode, cardholders must use their access card
to gain entry to and exit from a defined door group. If
a valid cardholder has presented his access card to
enter a door group and not presented the card to exit
it, the cardholder is in breach of the Anti-Passback
rules. Next time the cardholder attempts to enter the
same door group, a Soft Anti-Passback alarm will be
raised. However, the cardholder will still be permitted
entry to the door group.
Custodian*
The custodian feature allows a card holder with
custodian right (the custodian) to give other
cardholders (non-custodians) access to the room.
The custodian must be the first to enter the room. The
non-custodians are only allowed to enter if the
custodian is in the room. The custodian will not be
allowed to exit until all non-custodians have left the
room.
Door Sounder
Door controller PCB mounted sounder sounds on
door alarms.
Ignore Forced
Door forced open is not processed.
246
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
Attribute
Description
Interlock* (Browser)
Limit Interlocked Door Access
(SPCPro)
Only one door in an area will be allowed open at a
time. Requires Door Group.
Setting Prefix
Authorisation with prefix (A,B,* or #) key to set system
* Require door group
Door timers
Timer
Min.
Max.
Description
Access granted
1s
255 s
The time the lock will remain open
after granting access.
Access deny
1s
255 s
The duration after which the
controller will be ready to read the
next event after a invalid event.
Door open
1s
255 s
Duration within which the door
must be closed to prevent a “door
open too long” alarm.
Door left open
1 min
180 min
Duration within which the door
must be closed to prevent a “door
left open” alarm.
Extended
1s
255 s
Additional time after granting
access to a card with extended
time attribute.
Escort
1s
30 s
Time period after presenting a card
with escort attribute within a user
without escort right can access the
door.
Door calendar
Door locked
Select a calendar which should lock the door during the configured
time. No card / pin will be accepted during this time.
Door locked
Select a calendar which should unlock the door. The door will be
unlocked during the configured time.
Door triggers
Trigger
Description
Triggers that will Momentarily Unlock door
If the assigned trigger is activated, the door will
unlock for a defined period, then lock again.
Trigger that will lock the door
If the assigned trigger is activated, the door will
get locked. No card / PIN will be accepted.
Trigger that will unlock the door
If the assigned trigger is activated, the door will
get unlocked. No card / PIN will be needed to
open the door.
Trigger that will set the door to normal
If the assigned trigger is activated, the door will
get back to normal operation. This is to undo
locking / unlocking of the door. A card / will be is
needed to open the door.
247
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17.9.5.3.1
Door Interlock
Door interlock is feature that prevents the remaining doors in an interlock group
from opening if any one door in the group is open.
The following are example of how this feature is used:
 In two-doors entry systems used in some banks and other buildings. Usually
push buttons or card readers are used to gain entrance, and red and green
LEDs show if the door can be opened or not.
 In ATM technical areas connecting ATM doors. Typically all the ATM doors in
addition to the door that gives access to the area would be interlocked.
To create a door lock:
1. Create a Door Group. See Editing a door [➙ 244].
2. Set the Interlock attribute for the required doors in the group. See Editing a
door [➙ 244].
3. Configure a door output for door interlock operation. This output becomes
active for all the doors of the interlock group whenever a door belonging to the
group is open, including the open door itself.
This output could be connected, for example, to a red LED or light to indicate
that the door could not be opened, and if inverted could be connected to a
green LED or light.
To configure an output for door interlock.
1. In Full Engineer mode, select Configuration > Hardware > X-BUS > Expanders.
2. In the Expander Configuration page, click on the Change Type button for the
required output.
3. Select Door as the output type.
4. Select the required door and Interlocked as the output type.
248
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17.9.5.4
17
Adding an area group
You can use area groups for configuring multiple areas. So the configuration must
not be done for every single area.
 Only if the option (multiple) Areas is activated.

Select Settings > Areas > Area groups.
1. Click on the Add button.
2. Enter a description for the group.
3. Select the areas that are to be assigned to this group.
4. Click Add.
NOTICE
To use the area groups for the Comfort Keypad, activate all Areas in the Areas
field under Configuration > Hardware > X-BUS > Keypads > Type: Comfort
Keypad.
17.9.6
Calendars
Calendars are used for scheduling time-based control for multiple panel operations
as follows:
 Automatic setting and/or unsetting of areas
 Automatic setting and/or unsetting of other panel operations including triggers,
enabling of users, zones, physical outputs, etc.
At any particular time, any schedule within the calendar can be ‘active’ if its time
conditions are satisfied.
Each week of the year is assigned an ordinal number. Depending on the fall of
days within a month, there may be 52 or 53 weeks in one year. The SPC calendar
implementation conforms to the ISO8601international standard.
Configuring calendars

Select Configuration > Calendars.
 A list of configured calendars is displayed:
249
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Performable actions
Add
Add a new calendar.
Exceptions
Configure setting schedules for exceptional
circumstances outside of the normal weekly
schedules
Edit/View
Edit or view the selected calendar.
Delete
Delete the selected calendar.
The calendar cannot be deleted if it is currently
assigned to an SPC configuration item i.e. zone,
area, user profile, output, trigger, door or X-Bus
component. A message is displayed indicating the
assigned item.
Global calendars created using SPC Manager cannot be deleted as shown with
Calendar 3 above.
17.9.6.1
Adding / Editing a calendar

Select Configuration > Calendars > Add.
 The following window will be displayed:

Provide a Description for the calendar (max. 16 characters)
Copying a Calendar
To make a copy of this calendar structure, click on the Replicate button.
250
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
A new calendar is created with the same configuration as the original calendar.
You can provide a new description for the new calendar and edit the calendar
configuration as required.
Week Types
Calendars are configured by assigning an optional Week Type for each calendar
week. Up to three Week Types may be defined for each calendar. Not all weeks
must have a Week Type (i.e. a Week Type may be ‘None’). There is a system
maximum number of 64 calendar configurations.
To configure a week type
1. Click Week Types.
2. Enter the desired times for setting / unsetting or for triggers. Use time
guidelines for Automatic Setting/Unsetting of Areas (see page [➙ 252]), or for
Automatic Setting/Unsetting of other Panel Operations (see page [➙ 252]).
 Up to three week types may be configured.
3. Click Save and then Back.
4. Select the desired week type from the drop down menu for each of the required
scheduled weeks in the calendar.
5. Click Save.
6. Click Back.
See also
 Automatic setting/unsetting of areas [➙ 252]
 Automatic setting/unsetting of other panel operations
[➙ 252]
17.9.6.1.1
Exceptions
Exceptions or exception days are used to configure automatic setting schedules for
exceptional circumstances outside of the normal weekly schedules defined in the
calendars. Exceptions are defined with a start and end date (day/month/year) and
up to four on/off timing periods for different panel operations including automatic
setting/unsetting of areas or the switching on/off of triggers or outputs. A maximum
of 64 exceptions can be configured on the system.
Exceptions are generic entities that can be assigned to one or more calendars.
When an exception is assigned to a calendar, the exception settings override any
calendar configuration for that start and end date period with both dates inclusive.
Configuring Exception Days
1. Select Configuration > Calendars > Exceptions > Add.
 The following window will be displayed.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
251
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
Description
Enter a name for the exception (16 characters max).
Start Date/End Date
Select the start and end date.
On Time/Off Time
Select the desired times for setting / unsetting or for triggers. Use time
guidelines for Automatic Setting/Unsetting of Areas (see page [➙ 252]), or for
Automatic Setting/Unsetting of other Panel Operations (see page [➙ 252]).
Calendars Assigned
to
Select the desired calendar(s) for effect.
NOTICE
Global exception days created remotely using the SPC Manager tool cannot be
deleted or removed.
17.9.6.2
Automatic setting/unsetting of areas
A calendar can be configured for area auto-sets or auto-unsets.
For any day of the week, a configuration can have a maximum of 4 set times and 4
unset times. Configured times use the 24 hour clock (hh:mm). If the hour is 24,
then minutes must be 00, such as midnight is 24:00. It is possible to define a set
time without an unset and vice-versa. Configured times trigger the area to either
set or unset (provided all conditions are satisfied). Times entered are not
considered as a duration of time, rather they are a point in time that said action
(set/unset) will occur. If the controller is powered up or reset, the set/unset status is
kept and subsequent set or unset times occur according to configuration.
17.9.6.3
Automatic setting/unsetting of other panel operations
Panel operations including triggers, enabling of users, zones, physical outputs can
be automatically set or unset using On/Off, True/False or Active/Inactive state
configurations.
On/Off, True/False or Active/Inactive states can be assigned to an output that
effectively turns on or off and can be configured for any day of the week. State
configurations have a maximum of 4 set times and 4 unset times. Configured times
use the 24 hour clock (hh:mm). If the hour is 24, then minutes must be 00, such as
midnight is 24:00. Each configuration consists of a pairing of settings for On/Off,
True/False, Active/Inactive states. Any one setting without a respective
corresponding setting is disregarded.
252
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17.9.7
17
Change own PIN
To change a PIN, see Changing Engineer PIN and web password [➙ 192].
17.9.8
17.9.8.1
Configuring advanced settings
Triggers
A trigger is a system state (e.g. zone closing / time / system event (alarm) etc.) that
can be used as inputs to the Cause & Effects. The triggers can be logically
assigned together using the logical operators and / or to create user outputs. The
system supports up to a maximum of 1024 triggers across all its Cause & Effects
system.
1. Select Configuration > Advanced > Triggers.
 The following window will be displayed.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
Trigger
System generated number for new trigger.
Trigger will only become active if one of the 2 optional steps (calendar/time
limitation) is configured
Description
Enter a text description for the trigger
Calendar
Select a calendar, if required. If selected, the trigger will only be in effect during
this calendar period. See page [➙ 249].
Active Time/Timer
Enter the number of seconds that the trigger conditions must be true before the
trigger will activate
Time limited
Select a time period between 00:00 and 24:00 during which the trigger will only
be in effect. The Start time is inclusive, the end time is exclusive.
Note: This parameter delays a trigger transition from ON to OFF only; from
OFF to ON is immediate.
Trigger conditions
The trigger is ON if the following conditions are satisfied (i.e. a logical AND
operation is performed):
Zone – the trigger is ON if the configured zone is in one of the following states open, closed, short or disconnected.
Door – the trigger is ON if the any of the following door options are configured;
Entry granted, Entry denied, Exit granted, Exit denied, Door open too long,
Door left open, Door forced open, Door normal, Door Locked, Door unlocked
System - the trigger is on if the system output is in the configured state, which
can be on or off. Possible system outputs are “External Bell”, “Alarm”, etc.
Area - the trigger is ON if the area output is in an ON or OFF state. Possible
253
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
area outputs are “External Bell”, “Alarm”, etc.
Wireless FOB – this condition can be configured for a particular user or for any
user. With this configuration, if the configured user (or any user) presses the ‘*’
key on the FOB, it will cause an instantaneous pulse OFF/ON/OFF. This only
applies for FOBs that have been registered with the system.
Wireless FOB Panic - – this condition can be configured for a particular user or
for any user. With this configuration, if the configured user (or any user)
presses the ‘*’ key on the FOB Panic, it will cause an instantaneous pulse
OFF/ON/OFF. This only applies for FOB Panics that have been registered with
the system.
WPA – the trigger is activated if a button or combination of buttons is pressed.
It is possible to assign a trigger condition to all WPAs or just to one specific
WPA. When a trigger with a WPA trigger condition is defined, it can be
assigned to a mapping gate for many purposes including arming a system,
turning on lights or opening a door.
Keypad valid PIN – this condition can be configured for a particular user or for
any user. With this configuration, if the configured user (or any user) enters a
valid PIN, or presents a configured PACE, it will cause an instantaneous pulse
OFF/ON/OFF.
Keyswitch – the trigger can be configured for a specific key position on the
keyswitch.
Time Trigger –the trigger is on at the specific time entered in the box provided,
in the format hh:mm.
WARNING
Your system will not comply with EN standards if you enable a trigger to set the
system without a valid PIN being required.
17.9.8.2
Mapping Gates
Triggers are used with Mapping Gates, which are virtual outputs defined by the
user that can be mapped to a physical output. There can be a maximum of 512
Mapping Gates.
For continuous output, when the trigger is a valid user code, both states must be
the same, either both negative or both positive.
1. Select Configuration > Advanced > Mapping Gates.
 The following window will be displayed.
2. Enter a Description for the gate. This is important as no mapping gate number,
only the description, is displayed on the Outputs user page for turning on and
off gates.
254
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
3. Tick the Protected check box if you do not want to allow users to turn on and
off this gate, even if they have the right to do so. A protected gate does not
appear in the Outputs setting page for users.
4. Select desired Quick Key.
A quick key is a ‘#’ followed by a single digit pressed at the keypad. If a
shortcut is configured and is pressed at the keypad, the user is prompted to
turn the output on or off.
There may be many outputs activated by one shortcut, both X-10 and Mapping
Gates.
5. Add a Timer for the gate. Time quantity used is 1/10 of a second.
6. Click on the Triggers button to configure triggers for turning the output on and
turning it off. In both cases, a positive or negative edge of the trigger needs to
be defined. See Triggers [➙ 253] for details of configuring triggers.
7. Click Add to add a new gate or Save to save the new settings for an existing
gate.
See also
 Triggers [➙ 253]
17.9.8.3
Audio/Video Verification
To set up Audio/Video Verification on an SPC system:
1. Install and configure Audio Expander (s)
2. Install and configure Video Camera(s).
3. Install and configure Audio Equipment.
4. Configure Verification Zone(s).
5. Test audio playback from verification zones.
6. Assign Verification Zone(s) to physical zone(s).
7. Configure Verification Settings.
8. View images from verification zones in web browser or SPC Pro.
NOTICE
Keypads and access control may be disabled for several minutes while sending
an audio file to the panel, depending on the size of the file.
17.9.8.3.1
Configuring Video
Overview
Cameras are used for video verification. The SPC panel supports a maximum of
four cameras. Only IP cameras are supported and the panel must have an
Ethernet port.
255
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
NOTICE
Cameras must not be shared with other CCTV applications.
Cameras can only be configured with the web browser or SPC Pro. Configuration
with the keypad is not supported. SPC Pro provides an easier method of
configuration and is recommended.
The panel supports two camera resolutions:
 320X240
This setting is recommended if you want to view images on the browser)
 640X480 (with some restrictions).
The following cameras are supported in addition to other generic cameras:
 Vanderbilt CCIC1410 (1/4” VGA IP Colour Camera)
 Vanderbilt CFMC1315 (1/3” 1.3 MP Indoor Dome Colour Camera)
A command string is available as a default to access configuration details for the
above cameras directly. Other generic IP cameras require a command string to be
entered manually.
Adding Camera
1. Select Configuration > Advanced > Verification > Video.
 A list of any previously configured cameras is displayed and their online or
offline status. A camera is online if an image was obtained from the camera
in the previous 10 seconds.
2. Click on the Add button to add a new camera or the Edit button to edit an
existing camera.
 The following screen is displayed.
256
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
17
3. Configure the camera with the following parameters:
Camera ID
System generated Camera ID.
Description
Enter a description to identify this camera.
Type
Select from one of the following camera types:
 Generic
 Vanderbilt CCIC1410
 Vanderbilt CFMC1315
Camera IP
Enter the IP address of the camera.
Camera Port
Enter the TCP port the camera listens on. Default is 80.
Note: The CCIC1410 camera can only be used over port 80 only.
Username
Vanderbilt CCIC1410 and CFMC1315 cameras only.
Enter a login username for the camera which will be added to the
command string below when the Update Cmd. String button is
pressed.
Password
Vanderbilt CCIC1410 and CFMC1315 cameras only.
Enter a login password for the camera which will be added to the
command string below when the Update Cmd. String button is
pressed.
Command String
Enter the command string to be sent to the HTTP server on the
camera in order to obtain images. This string should include the user
name and password for the camera. Consult the camera
documentation for the specific string required for the camera type
selected. SPC Pro can configure this automatically if connected to a
Vanderbilt CCIC1410 or CFMC1315 camera over a LAN.
The default command string for a Vanderbilt CCIC1410 or CFMC1315
camera with no password is "/cgi-bin/stilljpeg".
Pre-event images
Enter the number of pre-event images to record (0 - 16). Default is 8.
Pre-event interval
Enter the time interval, in seconds, between pre-event images (1 10). Default is 1 second.
Post-event images Enter the number of post-event images to record (0 – 16). Default is 8.
Post-event interval Enter the time interval, in seconds, between post-event images, in
seconds (1 - 10). Default is 1 second.
17.9.8.3.2
Configuring Verification Zones
To create a verification zone
1. Go to Configuration > Advanced > Verification > Verification zones.
 A list of any existing verification zones is displayed.
2. Click on the Add button.
3. Enter a Description for the zone.
4. Select an Audio expander from the drop down list.
257
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuration
5. Select a Video from the drop down list.
6. Click on the Save button.
7. Assign this verification zone to a physical zone on the SPC system. (See
Editing a Zone [➙ 235])
The audio input and output for the verification zone can be tested by the engineer
only in SPC Pro.
See also
 Editing a zone [➙ 235]
17.9.8.3.3
Configuring Verification Settings
Note: The following settings apply to all verification zones [➙ 257].
1. Select Configuration > Advanced > Verification > Audio.
 The following screen is displayed.
2. Configure the following settings.
17.9.8.3.4
Pre-event recording
Enter a required duration of pre-event audio recording, in seconds
(0 - 120). Default is 10.
Post-event recording
Enter a required duration of post-event audio recording, in
seconds (0 - 120). Default is 30.
Viewing Video Images
Video images from the configured cameras can be viewed in the web browser in
Full or Soft Engineer modes. This functionality is also available to users that have
the View Video right in their profile. (See Setting User Rights [➙ 181]) The Web
Access right must also be enabled for this functionality.
The View Video right can also be set on the keypad and in SPC Pro (‘Video in
Browser’ setting).
To view images, go to SPC Home > Video. See Viewing Video [➙ 163].
See also
 Adding / Editing a User [➙ 181]
 Configuring Video [➙ 255]
258
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17.9.8.4
17
Updating SPC Licenses
The License Options feature provides a mechanism for the user to update or add
functionality to the SPC system, for example, for migrations, where installed
peripherals, which are not licensed for SPC, need to be supported by an SPC
controller.
1. Select Configuration > Advanced > License.
2. Contact technical support with the requested functionality and quote current
license key as displayed.
 If request is approved, a new license key is issued.
3. Enter the new key in the field provided.
17.10
17.10.1
17.10.1.1
Configuring Communications
Communications Settings
Configuring the networking services of the panel
1. Select Communications > Communications > Services.
 The following window will be displayed.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
259
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
HTTP Enabled
Tick this box to enable the embedded web server on the panel.
HTTP Port
Enter the Port number that the web server is 'listening' on. By default this is set
to 443.
TLS Enabled
Tick this box to enable encryption operation on embedded web server. By
default this is enabled. With TLS enabled, web pages can only be accessed by
using ‘https://’ prefix before typing the IP address.
Telnet Enabled
Tick this box to enable the Telnet server. (Default: Enabled)
Note: Using Telnet without a comprehensive knowledge can damage the
controller configuration; this should only be used if the user has sufficient
knowledge or is being instructed by someone with such knowledge.
17.10.1.2
Telnet Port
Enter the number of the Telnet port.
SNMP Enabled
Tick this box to enable Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
(Default: Disabled)
SNMP Community
Enter the Community ID for the SNMP protocol. (Default : Public)
ENMP Enabled
Tick this box to enable Enhanced Network Management Protocol (ENMP).
(Default : Disabled)
ENMP Port
Enter the ENMP port number (default: 1287).
ENMP password
Enter the password for the ENMP protocol.
ENMP change
enabled
Check this box to enable network changes to be made with ENMP protocol.
Ethernet
IP
The Ethernet port on the controller can be configured from both the browser and
keypad interfaces. An Ethernet connection with the SPC controller can be
established using a direct connection or a LAN connection.
260
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
1. Select Communications > Communications > Ethernet.
 The following window will be displayed.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
17.10.1.3
IP address
Enter the IP address of the panel.
IP Network
Enter the subnet mask that defines the type of network address structure
implemented on the Local Area Network (LAN).
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the IP gateway if one exists. This is the address that IP
packets will be routed through when accessing external IP addresses on the
internet.
Enable DHCP
Click this Button to enable dynamic address assignment on the panel.
DNS Server
Enter the IP address of the DNS server.
Modems
The SPC panel provides two on-board modem interface connectors (primary and
backup) that allow you to install PSTN or GSM onto the system.
After a factory default, during the process of initial setup of the system with the
keypad, the panel detects if it has a primary or backup modem fitted, and if so, it
displays the modem type and automatically enables it (or them) with the default
configuration. No other modem configuration is allowed at this stage.
To program the modem(s):
Note: A modem must be installed and identified. (See section Installing plug-in
modules [➙ 85])
1. Select Communications > Communications > Modems.
2. Click Enable and Configure.
261
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
SMS detection and configuration is not available unless modems that are
configured and enabled.
17.10.1.3.1
SMS test
Once the SIM feature is enabled for a modem, a test may be preformed to desired
recipient number with a composed message.
1. Enter the mobile phone number (including 3-digit country prefix) in the number
field and a short text message in the message box.
2. Click Send SMS and verify the message is received on the mobile phone.
The SMS test is provided only for the purpose of ensuring the SMS feature is
operating correctly. A short text message using alphabetic characters (A-Z)
should be used to test this feature.
The SMS operates using a standard protocol that is used in SMS telephones.
Please note that some PSTN operators do not provide the service of SMS over
PSTN. For SMS to operate over PSTN the following criteria is required:
 Caller ID needs to be enabled on the telephone line.
 Direct telephone line – not through PABX or other comms equipment.
 Please also note that most Service Providers only allow SMS to a telephone
registered in the same country (this is due to billing issues).
17.10.1.3.2
SMS feature
The SPC controller allows remote (SMS) messaging on systems with installed
modems. Once a modem is installed, the following configurations are necessary for
SMS:
 SMS-enabled modem. See page.
 SMS Authentication. See page.
 Engineer SMS Control. See page.
 User SMS Control. See page.
Depending on configurations, features include these SMS abilities:
 Event notification. See page.
 Remote Commands (users may be assigned select remote commands. See
page.
262
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17.10.1.3.3
17
SMS system options
Once a modem is installed and the SMS feature enabled, for SMS operations the
SPC system must apply the SMS Authentication.
1. Select Configuration > System > System Options.
2. Select the desired option from the drop-down menu SMS Authentication:





17.10.1.3.4
PIN Only: This is a valid user code. See page [➙ 103].
Caller ID Only: This is the phone number (including 3-digit country prefix code)
as configured for User SMS Control. Only when this option is selected will the
SMS Control be available for configuration by the user.
PIN and Caller ID
SMS PIN Code Only: This is a valid PIN code configured for the user which
different from the user’s login code. See page. Only when this option is
selected will the SMS Controls be available for configuration by the user.
SMS PIN Code & Caller ID
SMS commands
Once the SMS setup and configuration is complete, SMS features may be
activated. Commands, depending on SMS configuration are sent using a code or
caller ID. The type of code depends on what is set for SMS Authentication. For
The table below provides all available SMS commands. Subsequent action and
response are also provided.
SMS Commands are sent as texts to the phone number of the SIM card on the
controller.
For commands using code, the format of the text is the code followed by either a
space or a full stop. Where **** is the code and “command” is the command:
****.command or **** command.
For example, the command “HELP” is this text: **** HELP or ****.HELP.
COMMANDS (**** = code)
Using Code
Using Caller Action
ID
Response
**** HELP
****.HELP
HELP
All available commands
displayed
All available
commands
**** FSET
(FULLSET)
****.FSET
FSET
Fullset Alarm
Time/date of system
set. If applicable,
responds with open
zones/forceset zones
****ASET (PARTSET
A)
****.ASET
Allows Partset A of alarm by
SMS
**** BSET
(PARTSET B)
****.BSET
**** USET
****.USET
USET
Unset Alarm
System Unset
**** SSTA (STATUS) SSTA
****.SSTA
Status displayed
Status of system and
applicable areas
**** XA1.ON
Where X10 device is
identified as “A1”, it is
Status of “A1”
263
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
****.XA1.ON
triggered on.
**** XA1.OFF
****.XA1.OFF
Where X10 device is
identified as “A1”, it is
triggered off.
Status of “A1”
**** LOG
****.LOG
Up to 10 recent events
displayed
Recent events
**** ENG.ON
****.ENG.ON
ENG.ON
Enable Engineer access
Engineer status
**** ENG.OFF
****.ENG.OFF
ENG.OFF
Disable Engineer access
Engineer status
**** MANA.ON
****.MANA.ON
Enable Manufacturer access
Manufacturer status
**** MAN.OFF
****.MAN.OFF
Disable Manufacturer access
Manufacturer status
**** O5.ON
****.05.ON
Where output is identified as
“O5”, it is triggered on
Status of “O5”
**** O5.OFF
****.05.OFF
Where output is identified as
“O5”, it is triggered off
Status of “O5”
For SMS recognition, output identification uses the format ONNN, where O stands
for output, and NNN are the numeric placeholders, of which not all are necessary.
Example: O5 for Output 5.
For SMS recognition, X-10 device uses the format: XYNN, where X stands for X10; Y stands for the alphabetic identity and NN are the available numeric
placeholders. Example: XA1.
17.10.1.3.5
PSTN modem
1. Select Communications > Communications > Modems > Configure.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
264
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
Modem settings
Country
Select the country that the SPC is installed in.
SIM PIN
Only for GSM. Enter the PIN for the SIM card installed in the GSM
module.
Allow Roaming
Select to enable GSM roaming.
Note: Changing this setting resets the modem.
Note: Supported on GSM modems v3.08 or higher.
Incoming Calls
The modem can be programmed to answer calls based on the following
conditions:


Don’t answer calls: Modem never answers calls.

Answers after the calling party calls the modem, hangs up after 1
ring burst only and then immediately re-calls the modem. The SPC
system knows to automatically answer the call in this condition.

Only answer when ‘Engineer Access’ is granted.
Answer after ‘x’ rings: Select the number of rings after which the
modem answers the incoming call.
Prefix
Enter the number required to access a line. (e.g. if connected to a PBX)
Line Monitoring
PSTN Modem: Enable this feature to monitor the voltage of the line
connected to the modem.
GSM Modem: Enable this feature to monitor the signal level from the
GSM mast connected to the modem.
The Fullset option only enables this feature while the system is Fullset.
Note : EN 50131-9 Confirmation configuration
In order for EN50131-9 Confirmation to operate correctly, line
monitoring must be enabled. (refer to System Options [➙ 220])
Monitor Timer
Select the period (in seconds) for which the line voltage must be seen
265
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
as being incorrect before the line is deemed by the SPC to be faulty.
Modem Fault Time
Time delay for a system alert (0 - 9999 seconds). Default 60 seconds.
SMS Enable
Tick this checkbox to enable the SMS feature on the system.
Note: The SMS operates using a standard protocol that is used in SMS
telephones. Please note that some PSTN operators do not provide the
service of SMS over PSTN. For SMS to operate over PSTN the
following criteria is required:
Caller ID needs to be enabled on the telephone line.
Direct telephone line – not through PABX or other comms equipment.
Please also note that most Service Providers only allow SMS to a
telephone registered in the same country (this is due to billing issues).
Note: SMS over PSTN is no longer supported. The functionality remains
in the product for backward compatibility.
SMS Server Number
Only for PSTN. This number automatically displays the default number
for SMS for the country selected. Enter an appropriate phone number of
the SMS service provider that is accessible in your location.
Automated SMS
Select the timing for automated SMS messages.
Automated SMS Number
Enter SMS number to receive automated SMS messages.
Test Call Time
Displays time of last SMS test call.
GSM Chip Version
Displays the GSM WISMO version number.
If no version number is available, “---” is displayed.
GPRS Access Point (APN)
Only for GSM. Access Point Details must be provided by service
provider.
GPRS Access Point
User Name
Only for GSM. Access Point Details must be provided by service
provider.
GPRS Access Point
Password
Only for GSM. Access Point Details must be provided by service
provider.
Click the Test SMS button to send a short text message for the purposes of testing
the system.
Note: The SMS test is provided only for the purpose of ensuring the SMS feature is
operating correctly. A short text message using alphabetic characters (A-Z) should
be used to test this feature.
The SMS test is provided only for the purpose of ensuring the SMS feature is
operating correctly. A short text message using alphabetic characters (A-Z)
should be used to test this feature.
When using the SMS message feature over a PSTN line, it is necessary to
program the phone number of the SMS service provider that services the area in
which the SPC is installed. The SPC system automatically dials this number to
contact the SMS server whenever the SMS feature is activated. Calling line identity
MUST be enabled on the PSTN line for this feature to operate. Each country will
have its own SMS service provider with a unique phone number.
This feature is not released in all countries. Please contact your local supplier for
more information (support of feature, recommended service provider).
266
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
Check with country specific service providers for availability of service and SMS
server number.
Some SMS servers may have additional technical requirements for the correct
operation of the service. Check with the local SMS service provider for details on
these requirements.
17.10.1.3.6
GSM modem
 A GSM modem must be properly installed and functioning correctly.
1. Select Communications > Communications > Modems > Configure.
 The following window will be displayed:
267
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
2. Configure the following fields:
Modem settings
Country
Select the country that the SPC is installed in.
SIM PIN
Only for GSM. Enter the PIN for the SIM card installed in the GSM
module.
Allow Roaming
Select to enable GSM roaming.
Note: Changing this setting resets the modem.
Note: Supported on GSM modems v3.08 or higher.
Incoming Calls
The modem can be programmed to answer calls based on the following
268
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
conditions:


Don’t answer calls: Modem never answers calls.

Answers after the calling party calls the modem, hangs up after 1
ring burst only and then immediately re-calls the modem. The SPC
system knows to automatically answer the call in this condition.

Only answer when ‘Engineer Access’ is granted.
Answer after ‘x’ rings: Select the number of rings after which the
modem answers the incoming call.
Prefix
Enter the number required to access a line. (e.g. if connected to a PBX)
Line Monitoring
PSTN Modem: Enable this feature to monitor the voltage of the line
connected to the modem.
GSM Modem: Enable this feature to monitor the signal level from the
GSM mast connected to the modem.
The Fullset option only enables this feature while the system is Fullset.
Note : EN 50131-9 Confirmation configuration
In order for EN50131-9 Confirmation to operate correctly, line
monitoring must be enabled. (refer to System Options [➙ 220])
Monitor Timer
Select the period (in seconds) for which the line voltage must be seen
as being incorrect before the line is deemed by the SPC to be faulty.
Modem Fault Time
Time delay for a system alert (0 - 9999 seconds). Default 60 seconds.
SMS Enable
Tick this checkbox to enable the SMS feature on the system.
Note: The SMS operates using a standard protocol that is used in SMS
telephones. Please note that some PSTN operators do not provide the
service of SMS over PSTN. For SMS to operate over PSTN the
following criteria is required:
Caller ID needs to be enabled on the telephone line.
Direct telephone line – not through PABX or other comms equipment.
Please also note that most Service Providers only allow SMS to a
telephone registered in the same country (this is due to billing issues).
Note: SMS over PSTN is no longer supported. The functionality remains
in the product for backward compatibility.
SMS Server Number
Only for PSTN. This number automatically displays the default number
for SMS for the country selected. Enter an appropriate phone number of
the SMS service provider that is accessible in your location.
Automated SMS
Select the timing for automated SMS messages.
Automated SMS Number
Enter SMS number to receive automated SMS messages.
Test Call Time
Displays time of last SMS test call.
GSM Chip Version
Displays the GSM WISMO version number.
If no version number is available, “---” is displayed.
GPRS Access Point (APN)
Only for GSM. Access Point Details must be provided by service
provider.
GPRS Access Point
User Name
Only for GSM. Access Point Details must be provided by service
provider.
GPRS Access Point
Password
Only for GSM. Access Point Details must be provided by service
provider.
Click the Test SMS button to send a short text message for the purposes of testing
the system.
Note: The SMS test is provided only for the purpose of ensuring the SMS feature is
operating correctly. A short text message using alphabetic characters (A-Z) should
be used to test this feature.
The SMS test is provided only for the purpose of ensuring the SMS feature is
operating correctly. A short text message using alphabetic characters (A-Z)
should be used to test this feature.
269
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
17
Configuring Communications
17.10.1.4
Serial ports
The SPC controller provides 2 serial ports (RS232) that offer the following
functionality:
 X10: Serial port 1 is a dedicated interface that supports the X10 protocol. This
protocol allows for use of the existing power cables of a building to transport
control information to X10 devices providing the ability to trigger and monitor
these devices via the SPC Controller programming interface.
 Logging of Events: The Serial port 2 interface provides the ability to connect to
a serial port on a PC or a printer. With this connection, a terminal program can
be configured to receive a log of System Events or Access Events from the
SPC controller.
 System Information: Serial port 2 also provides an interface via a terminal
program that allows for the execution of a set of commands to interrogate the
controller for specific system information. This facility is available only as a tool
for debug and information purposes and should only be used by experienced
installers.
+–
3
1
2
4
1 PC with serial port running hyperterminal
2 SPC controller
3
JP9
4000
4 RS232
To configure the serial ports:

Select Communications > Communications > Serial Ports.
 The following window will be displayed:
270
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
The settings displayed will depend on the type of connection that the ports are
used for. The settings are described in the following sections:
17.10.2
FlexC®
The SPC Flexible Secure Communications Protocol (FlexC) enables
communications for an Internet Protocol (IP) based single or multiple path Alarm
Transmission System (ATS). An ATS is a reliable communications link between a
Supervised Premises Transceiver (SPT e.g. Ethernet integrated onto the SPC
panel) and a Receiving Centre Transceiver (RCT e.g. SPC Com XT or the SPC
Connect server, www.spcconnect.com). A FlexC ATS consists of a primary Alarm
Transmission Path (ATP) and up to nine backup Alarm Transmission Paths
(ATPs). It enables:
 Two-way transfer of data between the SPT, for example the SPC panel over
Ethernet, and the RCT, for example, the SPC Com XT server or the SPC
Connect server, www.spcconnect.com.
 Communication monitoring of a complete ATS and individual ATPs.
SPC intrusion panels support FlexC over IP with any of the following interfaces:
 Ethernet
 GSM modem with GPRS enabled
 PSTN modem
271
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
See also
 Quick Start ATP Configuration for EN50136 ATS [➙ 272]
 Configuring Event Profiles [➙ 284]
 Event Exception Definition [➙ 286]
 Configuring Command Profiles [➙ 288]
 FlexC Status [➙ 177]
 Configuring an EN50136-1 ATS or Custom ATS [➙ 274]
17.10.2.1
Operation Mode
The system uses the store-and-forward method when communicating events.
The SPC Alarm System sends events to SPC Com XT and requires an
acknowledgment from SPC Com XT before the SPC Alarm System considers the
event to have been successfully transmitted. SPC Com XT only acknowledges the
event after it has successfully written the event to the SQL database. SPC Com XT
then forwards the event to the SPC Com XT Client and Sur-Gard interfaces.
17.10.2.2
Quick Start ATP Configuration for EN50136 ATS
FlexC provides the following out of the box features that enable you to get FlexC
up and running quickly:
272
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
Quick start configuration screen for an EN50136 Single Path ATS, Dual Path
ATS and Dual Path Dual Server ATS
 Default Event Profile
 Default Command Profile (this does not support audio video verification)
 Default FlexC Command User Name (FlexC) and Command Password (FlexC)
for controlling the panel from the RCT (e.g. SPC Com XT)
 Auto Encryption with no password
1. To quickly configure a FlexC connection between a panel and an RCT (e.g.
SPC Com XT), go to Communications - FlexC - FlexC ATS.
2. Under Add EN50136-1 ATS, choose one of the following to display the ATP
Configuration screen:
 Add Single Path ATS - primary ATP only
 Add Dual Path ATS - primary and backup ATPs
 Add Dual Path Dual Server ATS - primary and backup ATPs, primary and
backup servers

1. Complete the fields on the ATP Configuration - EN50136 ATS screen shown in
the table below. At a minimum, you must complete the field RCT URL or IP
Address to save. If you do not enter an SPT Account Code, you can
commission the panel using the ATS Registration ID which is automatically
generated when you save. The RCT operator must enter this ATS Registration
ID, for example, in SPC Com XT.
2. Click Save. The ATS Configuration screen displays showing the ATS
Registration ID and the configured primary ATP or primary and backup ATPs in
the Event Sequence Table.
3. On the ATS Configuration screen, click Save to accept the default settings, for
example, the Default Event Profile, the Default Command Profile (including the
FlexC Command User Name and FlexC Command Password), and Auto
Encryption with no password. To change the settings, see Configuring an
EN50136-1 ATS or Custom ATS [➙ 274].
4. Click Back. The ATS displays in the Configured ATS table.
Panel Identification
273
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
ATS Name
Enter the name of the ATS. If you do not
enter a value, the ATS name defaults to
ATS 1, ATS 2 etc.
SPT Account Code
The number that uniquely identifies the
panel to the RCT. Enter 0 if you do not have
the SPT Account Code. In this case, you
can commission the panel using the ATS
Registration ID. For an EN50136 ATS, the
ATS Registration ID is automatically
generated when you click Save. The RCT
can send the SPT Account Code to the
panel when it is available.
RCT Identification & Backup RCT Identification (Dual Path Dual Server Only)
RCT ID
Enter the RCT ID that uniquely identifies the
RCT (e.g. SPC Com XT) to the panel. This
must match the value entered in the SPC
Com XT Server Configuration Manager tool
in the Server RCT ID field in the Server
Details tab. See the SPC Com XT
Installation & Configuration Manual.
RCT URL or IP Address
Enter the RCT URL or IP Address for the
RCT server location (e.g. SPC Com XT
server).
RCT TCP Port
Enter the TCP port for the RCT (e.g. SPC
Com XT). This must be the same value
entered for the field Server FlexC Port in the
SPC Com XT Server Configuration Manager
tool.
ATP Interface
17.10.2.3
EN50136 ATS Category
Select the EN50136 ATS Category (SP1SP6, DP1-DP4). For a description of
categories, see ATS Category Timings
[➙ 360].
Primary Interface
Select the Primary Interface to apply to the
primary communications path from the
following:
 Ethernet
 GPRS: Modem 1
 GPRS: Modem 2
 Dial Up Internet: Modem 1
 Dial Up Internet: Modem 2
Backup Interface
For a Dual Path ATS, select the Backup
Interface to use for the backup
communications path from the following:
 Ethernet
 GPRS: Modem 1
 GPRS: Modem 2
 Dial Up Internet: Modem 1
 Dial Up Internet: Modem 2
Configuring an EN50136-1 ATS or Custom ATS
An ATS comprises an alarm panel, network paths and an RCT (e.g. SPC Com XT).
It combines one or multiple paths between an SPC panel and an RCT. You can
add up to 10 ATPs to an ATS.
274
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
NOTICE
For an EN50136-1 ATS, the ATS set up sequence starts with configuring an ATP
for an ATS. This provides you with a quick set up feature. See Quick Start ATP
Configuration for EN50136 ATS [➙ 272].
1. To configure an ATS, go to Communications - FlexC - FlexC ATS.
2. Choose from one of the following options:
 Add Single Path ATS
 Add Dual Path ATS
 Add Dual Path Dual Server ATS
 Add Custom ATS.
1. For an EN50136 ATS, you must configure the settings on the ATP
Configuration - EN50136 screen first. See Quick Start ATP Configuration for
EN50136 ATS [➙ 272].
2. The ATS Configuration screen displays. An EN50136-1 ATS will display a
primary or primary and backup ATP in the Event Sequence Table.
1. Enter an ATS Name to identify the ATS. If you do not enter a value, the ATS
name defaults to ATS 1, ATS 2 etc.
2. To add 1 primary and up to 9 backup ATPs to an ATS, click Add ATP to FlexC
RCT, see Add ATP to FlexC RCT [➙ 276] or click Add ATP to Analog ARC,
see Add ATP to Analog ARC [➙ 280].
3. Select an Event Profile from the dropdown menu. To customise how events are
transmitted on an ATS, see Configuring Event Profiles [➙ 284].
4. Select a Command Profile from the dropdown menu. To customise the
commands enabled for an RCT to control a panel, see Configuring Command
Profiles [➙ 288].
5. Complete the ATS Faults fields as shown in the table below.
6. Click the Edit Installation Details button to complete the settings to identify the
panel to the RCT operator. See Edit Installation Details [➙ 282].
275
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
7. Click Save and Back to return to the ATS Configuration page. The new ATS
displays in the Configured ATS table.
8. For multiple ATPs, you can use the up and down arrows in the Event
Sequence Table to reorder the ATP sequence.
NOTICE
The ATS Registration ID is automatically generated for an ATS. It uniquely
identifies the panel to the RCT. If you do not know the SPT Account Code, you
can commission the panel using this ATS Registration ID. The CMS operator
must also enter this ATS Registration ID at the RCT (e.g. SPC Com XT. See the
SPC Com XT Installation & Configuration Manual).
ATS Polling Timeout
This field is automatically calculated by
adding the values of the Active Polling
Timeout column in the Event Sequence
Table, that is, for all ATPs in an ATS. You
can manually overwrite this field. For
example, CAT 2 [Modem] has an Active
Polling Timeout of 24 hours 10 minutes (
87000 seconds). To allow a shorter reaction
time, enter a lower value.
ATS Event Timeout
The amount of time after an event has been
raised and not successfully transmitted
before the ATS gives up. Default: 300
seconds.
Generate FTC
Select whether the system generates a FTC
on an ATS event timeout.
Re-queue Events
Select this to re-queue events after an ATS
Timeout.
Re-queue Event Delay
Delay after an ATS Event Timeout before
the re-queued event is attempted again.
Default: 300 seconds.
Re-queue Event Duration
Amount of time that the event will be requeued before the event is deleted. Default:
86400 seconds.
See also
 ATS Category Timings [➙ 360]
17.10.2.2.1
Add ATP to FlexC RCT
Add ATP to FlexC RCT allows you to configure an ATP between the SPC panel
and the RCT (e.g. SPC Com XT). You can configure up to 10 ATPs for each ATS.
1. Click the button Add ATP to FlexC RCT.
276
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
1. Complete the ATP fields described in the table below.
2. If required, click Advanced ATP Settings, for example, if you are using auto
encryption you can optionally enter a password in the Encryption Password
field. See Configure Advanced ATP Settings [➙ 278].
3. Click Save.
WARNING
It is not recommended to change Advanced ATP Settings. Changes must only be
made by expert users.
Panel Identification
ATP Sequence No.
This field displays the sequence number of the
ATP in the ATS configuration. Number 1 is
primary, numbers 2 - 10 are backup.
ATP Unique ID
When you save an ATP, the system assigns a
unique ID to an ATP. This is the unique ID of the
ATP so it can be recognised by the RCT.
ATP Name
Enter a name for the ATP.
SPT Account Code
Enter a number to uniquely identify the panel to
the RCT.
RCT Identification
RCT ID
Enter the number that uniquely identifies the RCT
(for example, SPC Com XT) to the panel. This
must match the number entered in the field Server
RCT ID in the SPC Com XT Server Configuration
Manager tool.
RCT URL or IP Address
Enter the URL or IP address of the RCT (for
example, SPC Com XT).
RCT TCP Port
Enter the TCP Port that the RCT (for example,
SPC Com XT) listens on. The default is 52000.
This must match the value in the field Server
FlexC Port in the Server Configuration Manager
tool. See the SPC Com XT Installation &
Configuration Manual.
ATP Interface
Communications Interface
From the dropdown list, select the interface this
ATP uses for communication.



Ethernet
GPRS: Modem 1
GPRS: Modem 2
277
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
17
Configuring Communications


ATP Category
Dial Up Internet: Modem 1
Dial Up Internet: Modem 2
Select the category to apply to this ATP. For
information on ATP Categories, see ATP
Category Timings [➙ 361].
Advanced
Advanced ATP Settings
17.10.2.2.1.1
It is not recommended to change advanced
settings. Changes must only be made by expert
users.
Configure Advanced ATP Settings
WARNING
It is not recommended to change Advanced ATP Settings. Changes must only be
made by expert users.
1. Click the Advanced ATP Settings button.
1. Configure the fields described in the table below.
2. Click Save.
ATP Connections
Active ATP Connection
Select the ATP connection type when the
ATP is operating as the primary
communication path.
 Permanent: Stay Connected
 Temporary: Hangup 1second
 Temporary: Hangup 20 second
 Temporary: Hangup 80 second
 Temporary: Hangup 3 minutes
 Temporary: Hangup 10 minutes
 Temporary: Hangup 30 minutes
278
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
Non-active ATP Connection
17
Select the ATP connection type when the
ATP is operating as a backup
communication path.
 Permanent: Stay Connected
 Temporary: Hangup 1second
 Temporary: Hangup 20 seconds
 Temporary: Hangup 80 seconds
 Temporary: Hangup 3 minutes
 Temporary: Hangup 10 minutes
 Temporary: Hangup 30 minutes
Test Calls
Test Call Mode (Non Active ATP)
Select the mode for sending test calls when
the ATP is the non-active ATP.
 Test calls Disabled
 Test call every 10 minutes
 Test call every 1 hour
 Test call every 4 hours
 Test call every 24 hours
 Test call every 48 hours
 Test call every 7 days
 Test call every 30 days
Test Call Mode (Active ATP)
Select the mode for sending test calls when
the ATP is the active ATP.
 Test calls Disabled
 Test call every 10 minutes
 Test call every 1 hour
 Test call every 4 hours
 Test call every 24 hours
 Test call every 48 hours
 Test call every 7 days
Test call every 30 days
Encryption (256-bit AES with CBC)
Encryption Key Mode
Select how the encryption gets updated.
 Auto Encryption
 Auto Encryption with Updates
 Fixed Encryption
Note: Auto Encryption uses the default key
and updates it once. Auto Encryption with
Updates changes the encryption key every
50,000 messages or once per week,
whichever comes first.
Encryption Password
Optional password used to provide
increased security during initial ATP
commissioning. The password must be
entered at the SPT or RCT independently.
Reset Encryption
Reset the Encryption Key and password to
the default values.
ATP Profiles
Event Profile
Select the Event Profile which defines how
and which events are transmitted on this
ATS.
 Use ATS Setting
 Default Event Profile
 All events
279
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
Command Profile
Select the Command Profile which defines
the commands that are allowed on this ATS.
 Use ATS Setting
 Default Command Profile
 Custom Command Profile
ATP Faults
ATP Monitoring Fault
Select to generate an ATP fault if the ATP
monitoring fails or an event fails to transmit
on the ATP.
Event Timeout
The amount of time that the ATP will keep
trying to transmit the event until the event
fails on the ATP and is passed to the next
ATP.
 30 seconds
 60 seconds
 90 seconds
 2 minutes
 3 minutes
 5 minutes
 10 minutes
Minimum Message Lengths
17.10.2.2.2
Poll Message
Minimum length of a poll message.
 0 Bytes
 64 Bytes
 128 Bytes
 256 Bytes
 512 Bytes
Event Message
Minimum length of an event and test call
message.
 0 Bytes
 64 Bytes
 128 Bytes
 256 Bytes
 512 Bytes
Other Message
Minimum length of connection and
encryption key and update messages.
 0 Bytes
 64 Bytes
 128 Bytes
 256 Bytes
 512 Bytes
Add ATP to Analog ARC
If a connection between the SPC panel and RCT (e.g. SPC Com XT) goes down,
FlexC has the ability to switch to a backup ATP connection between the SPC panel
and an Analog ARC. You can configure up to 10 ATPs for each ATS.
1. To configure an ATP between an SPC panel and an Analog ARC, click the
button Add ATP to Analog ARC.
2. Complete the ATP fields described in the table below.
3. Click Save.
Panel Identification
280
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
ATP Sequence No.
This field displays the sequence number of the
ATP in the ATS configuration. Number 1 is
primary, numbers 2 - 10 are backup
ATP Unique ID
This ID uniquely identifies the ATP to the RCT
ATP Name
Enter a name for the ATP
SPT Account Code
Enter a number to uniquely identify the panel to
the RCT (1 - 999999)
ARC Connection
Number 1
Phone number 1
Number 2
Phone number 2
Modem Select
Select the modem to be used.


Modem 1
Modem 2
Test Calls
Test Call Mode (Non-active ATP)
Select the mode for sending test calls when the
ATP is in non-active mode. Default: 24 hours.







Test Call Mode (Active ATP)
Test call every 10 minutes
Test call every 1 hour
Test call every 24 hours
Test call every 48 hours
Test call every 7 days
Test call every 30 days.
Select the mode for sending test calls when the
ATP is an active ATP. Default: 24 hours.







Time of first test call
Test calls disabled
Test calls disabled
Test call every 10 minutes
Test call every 1 hour
Test call every 24 hours
Test call every 48 hours
Test call every 7 days
Test call every 30 days.
Time of first test call after reset or ATS
initialization.



Send Immediately (default)
or
Select a half hour interval between 00:00 and
23:30
Event Protocol
Protocol
Protocol used in communication.




Event Profile
SIA
SIA Extended 1
SIA Extended 2
Contact ID
Select the Event Profile which defines how and
which events are transmitted on this ATS.





Use ATS Setting
Default Event Profile
Default Portal Event Profile
All events
Custom Event Profile
ATP Faults
ATP Monitoring Fault
Select to generate an ATP fault if the ATP
281
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
monitoring fails or an event fails to transmit on the
ATP.
Event Timeout
The amount of time that the ATP will keep trying
to transmit the event until the event fails on the
ATP and is passed to the next ATP. Default: 2
minutes.







17.10.2.2.3
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
2 minutes
3 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
Edit Installation Details
The installation details are passed to the RCT to help the operator to identify the
panel.
1. Click the Edit Installation Button.
1. Complete the fields in the table below.
2. Click Save.
ATS Installation ID
The ID of the ATS Installation (1 - 999999999).
Company ID
For future use.
Company Name
Name of the company.
ATS Installation Address
The address of the ATS installation.
GPS Coordinates
The GPS coordinates of the installation.
ATS Installer Name
The name of the installer of the ATS.
Installer Phone Number 1
The phone number of the installer of the ATS.
Installer Phone Number 2
The phone number of the installer of the ATS.
282
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
Notes
17.10.2.4
17
Any additional information for the RCT.
Configuring an SPC Connect ATS
The Add SPC Connect ATS functionality opens a communication between the
panel (SPT) and the SPC Connect server (RCT), www.spcconnect.com. Using the
generated SPC Connect ATS Registration ID, a panel user can register a user
account and panel with the SPC Connect website to access their panel remotely.
1. To configure an SPC Connect ATS, go to Communications - FlexC - FlexC
ATS.
2. In the ATS Configuration screen, click Add SPC Connect to open a
communication path with the SPC Connect server.
 An SPC Connect ATS is added to the Event Sequence Table with the following
attributes:







17.10.2.5
SPC Connect ATS Registration ID
Default ATP over Ethernet. For information on ATP fields, see Add ATP to
FlexC RCT [➙ 276]
Default Events Profile for SPC Connect
Default Commands Profile for SPC Connect
Default RCT URL is www.spcconnect.com
The SPT Account Code for the ATP is populated.
Make a note of the SPC Connect ATS Registration ID and provide this to the
customer along with the SPC Connect User Guide.
Exporting and Importing an ATS
ATS files have a .cxml extension. You must create the ATS in the SPC browser
and export it before you can import it to a system.
1. To export an ATS, go to Communications - FlexC - FlexC ATS.
2. In the Configured ATS table, locate the ATS to export and click the Export ATS
button (green arrow).
283
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
3. Save the file with the default filename export_flexc.cxml or rename the file.
4. To view the file, open in Notepad.
5. To import an ATS into the system, go to Communications - FlexC - FlexC ATS.
6. Scroll down to Import ATS.
7. Click the Browse button and select an ATS to import (.cxml file extension).
8. Click Import ATS.
 The ATS displays in the Configured ATS table with the next available ID.
When you export an ATS, the SPT Account Code changes to 0. This prevents an
ATS being exported and then imported and replicating an existing ATS.
17.10.2.6
Configuring Event Profiles
The event profile defines which events are transmitted on an ATS, the reporting
status for an event and event exceptions. Event exceptions allow you to remap
default values for events to customised values. For more information, see Event
Exception Definition [➙ 286].
NOTICE
To see a list of all events, go to Communications - FlexC - Event Profiles. Click
Edit (blue pencil) for an event profile. Scroll to the end of the screen and click
Show Complete Event Table.
284
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
NOTICE
To quickly create a new event profile, go to Communications - FlexC - Event
Profiles. In the Event Profiles table, select an event profile and click the edit
button (blue pencil). Scroll to the bottom of the screen and click Replicate. You
can now make the changes you require.
1. To configure FlexC event profiles step by step, go to Communications - FlexC Event Profiles.
2. Click Add. The Event Profiles window displays.
1. Enter a Name to identify the event profile.
2. Select the event filter groups to report for this profile by ticking the Report
Event checkboxes.
3. To prevent reporting of certain events or addresses within an event, select the
event from the corresponding Add Event Exception dropdown list.
4. Click Add to view the Event Exception Definition screen. See Event Exception
Definition [➙ 286].
5. To apply an event profile to an area, select the area under Area Filter.
6. Click Save and Back. The new profile displays in the Event Profiles table.
285
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
You can view a list of all event exceptions for an event profile under Event
Exceptions on the Event Profiles screen.
NOTICE
You cannot delete the Default Event Profile, the Default Portal Event Profile or an
event profile that is assigned to an ATS. If you try to delete an event profile that is
in use, you will get an error.
17.10.2.5.1
Event Exception Definition
Event exceptions allow you to change the following settings for a range of
addresses within an event:
 Report Event
 SIA Code
 CID Code
 Event Address (e.g. Zone IDs, Area IDs, User IDs)
For example, in the Filter Group Intruder Alarms you could define an event
exception for a range of Zone IDs in the Burglary Alarm (BA) event as follows:
 Do not report BA events for Zone ID 1 - 9
 Remap the SIA Code from BA to YZ
 Remap the CID from 130 / 1 to 230 / 1
 Remap the Zone ID 1 - 9 to Zone ID 101 - 109
1. To configure an Event Exception Definition, complete the fields described in the
table below.
2. Click Save.
286
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
3. Click Back to return to the Event Profiles screen.
 The name of each exception displays in the Event Exceptions table at the
bottom of the screen. The table shows the settings for the fields Report
Event, Filter Exception, Event Code (SIA/CID) and Remap Exception for
the event.
1. Click the Edit icon to make changes or the Delete icon to remove an Event
Exception.
2. To apply the event profile to an area, select the area checkbox.
3. Click Save to save the event profile.
4. Click Back to view the profile in the Event Profiles table.
Identification
Name
Enter the name of the Event Exception.
Event ID
Event ID of the event on the system. This is
display only.
Event Description
Description of the event. This is display only.
Event Filter
Report Event
Check to report the event. This overrides the
reporting value set for the event Filter Group. For
example, if the Filter Group Intruder Alarms is set
to report, you can exclude the BA event or by
disabling this setting.
Filter Exception Enable
Check to exclude a range of addresses, for
example Zone IDs, from the Report Event field
setting.
if (0 ≤ Zone ID ≤ 9999)
then Report Event/Don't Report Event
Enter a range of addresses to exclude from the
Report Event setting. For example, if you choose
to report the event type BA, you may choose not
to report Zone ID 1 - 9 for that event.
Alternatively, if you choose not to report the event
type BA, you may choose to report Zone ID 1- 9
for that event.
Event Format
SIA Event Code
Default SIA event code that is transmitted to
represent the event. This field is display only.
Contact ID Event Code / Qualifier
Default Contact ID Event Code / Qualifier
transmitted to represent the event. This field is
display only.
Remap Exception Enable
Check to remap the default SIA, CID code /
Qualifier and Event Address to customised
values, for example, to remap Zone ID 1 - 9 to
Zone ID 101 - 109. When enabled, the fields
below display.
if (0 ≤ Zone ID ≤ 9999)
Enter the range of addresses to remap for an
event, for example, if you want to remap Zone ID
287
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
1 - 9 to Zone ID 101 - 109, enter 1 and 9. The
quantity of addresses in the range must be equal
to the quantity of addresses defined in the field
Remap Event Address below.
17.10.2.7
then Remap SIA Event Code to BA
Remap the default SIA code to a customised SIA
code.
and Remap Contact ID Event Code / Qualifier to
Remap the default CID Event Code / Qualifier to a
customised CID Event Code / Qualifier.
and Remap Event Address to
Enter the new range of addresses, for example, if
you are remapping Zone ID 1 - 9 to Zone ID 101 109, enter 101 and 109.
Configuring Command Profiles
The command profile defines the commands that are allowed on an ATS. This
profile determines how a CMS can control a panel. The default command profile
does not support video verification.
NOTICE
To quickly create a new command profile, go to Communications - FlexC Command Profiles. In the Command Profiles table, select a command profile and
click the edit button (blue pencil), Scroll to the bottom of the screen and click
Replicate. You can now make the changes you require.

To add a command profile step by step, go to Communications - FlexC Command Profiles.

Click Add.
288
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
1. Enter a Name to identify the command profile.
2. Select an Authentication Mode (Command User or Panel User, Command User
Only, or Any Panel User) from the dropdown menu.
NOTICE
The default Command User Name provides an out of the box user that quickly
and easily enables control of the panel from SPC Com XT. It enables a broad
range of commands. For example, the default command user can set all areas or
control all zones. For tighter control, for example to only allow setting of certain
areas, you can set up a customised command profile with a defined set of rights.
You cannot delete the Default Command Profile, the Default Portal Command
Profile or a command profile that is assigned to an ATS.
3. Enter the name of the command profile user in the Command User Name field.
This must match the Authentication User Name field in SPC Com XT.
4. Enter the password of the command profile user in the Command Password
field. This must match the authentication User PIN or Password field in SPC
Com XT.
5. Select the Live Streaming Mode (Disabled, Only after alarm event, Always
available, System is fullset) to determine the streaming privacy options. Always
Available generates the highest volume of data.
6. Under Command Filter, select the commands to enable. For a full list of
commands, see FlexC Commands [➙ 358].
7. Select the commands to log.
8. Click Save.
9. Click Back to view the command profile in the Command Profiles table.
10. To change a command profile, click the Edit button (pencil icon) next to a
command profile.
289
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17.10.3
17.10.3.1
Reporting
Alarm Reporting Centres (ARCs)
The SPC panel has the facility to communicate information to a remote receiving
station when a specific alarm event on the panel has occurred.
These Alarm Reporting Centres must be configured on the panel to allow this
remote communication to operate.
17.10.3.1.1
Adding / Editing an ARC using SIA or CID
 A PSTN or GSM modem is installed and functioning correctly.
1. Select Communications > Reporting > Analog ARC.
 The following window will be displayed:
2. Click on the Modem1/2 button to make a test call to the ARC from the either
modem 1 or modem 2.
3. Click on the Log button to receive a log file. A window with the logs from all
automatic and manual test calls will be displayed.
4. To add or edit an ARC, click Add. – OR Click Edit.
 The following window will be displayed.
5. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
290
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
Description
Enter a description of the remote Alarm Receiving Centre.
Account
Enter your account number. This information should be available from the receiving
station and is used to identify you each time you make a call to the ARC.
For a Contact ID account, a maximum of 6 characters is allowed.
Protocol
Enter the communication protocol that you intend to use (SIA, SIA Extended,
Contact ID, Fast Format).
Note: SPC supports the extended SIA protocol. Select this protocol to support
additional textual descriptions of the SIA events being sent to the Alarm Receiving
Station.
Priority
Select the priority for the ARC in terms of primary or back-up reporting.
Number 1
Enter the first number to be dialled to contact the ARC. This system will always
attempt to contact the ARC on this number before attempting another number.
Number 2
Enter the second number to be dialled to contact the ARC. The system will only
attempt to contact the ARC on this number if the first contact number did not
successfully establish a call.
Dial Attempts
Enter the number of times that the system will attempt to make a call to the
receiver. (Default is 8)
Dial Delay
Number of seconds to delay between failed dial attempts (0 - 999).
Dial Interval
Enter the number of seconds to delay between failed dial attempts. (0 - 999)
Test Calls
Enable the test call by choosing a time interval. This will send out an automatic test
call from modem 1 to the primary ARC.
Test All
Check this box if you want to initiate also an automatic test call from modem 2 to
the backup ARC.

Click on the Add button to enter those details on the system.
 A list of the configured ARC accounts will be displayed on the browser
screen along with the account information, description, protocol, dial-up
status and time and date of the last call to the ARC.
291
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17.10.3.1.2
Editing an ARC filter using SIA or CID
To configure the events on the SPC that will trigger the call to the ARC:
1. Select Select Communications - Reporting - Analog ARC - Edit - Filter..
 The following window will be displayed:
2. Configure the following fields:
Check any of the following boxes if you want to initiate a remote call to the ARC to
notify it of the particular event.
Alarms
Alarms are activated.
Alarm Restores
System alarms are restored.
Confirmed Alarms
Alarms confirmed by multiple zones
Alarm Abort
Alarm Abort events. Alarms are aborted after a valid user code is entered via the
keypad after a confirmed or unconfirmed alarm,
Faults
Faults and tampers are activated.
Fault Restores
Fault or tamper alarms are restored.
Settings
System is Set and Unset.
Early/Late
Unscheduled setting and unsetting of the system.
Inhibits
Inhibit and isolate operations are performed on the system.
Door Events
Door events are activated. Only works with SIA protocol.
292
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
Other
All other types of events are detected on the system.
Network
Report IP Network Polling Up/Down events.
Areas
Select specific areas to which above events apply.
17
By adding a separate Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC) for each area defined on the
system and programming each area to report it’s own separate ARC receiver, the
system can approximate a multi-tenanted system in that a high degree of
autonomy is assigned to each area.
17.10.3.1.3
Editing an ARC Filter using Fast Format
To configure the events on the SPC that will trigger the call to the ARC when Fast
Format is the selected protocol:

Select Communications - Reporting - Analog ARC - Edit - Filter.
1. A list of the eight channels is displayed along with the alarm conditions that can
be programmed for each channel. Select the alarm conditions for each channel
as required. For a description of each, see Outputs types and output ports
[➙ 196].
2. From the Scope dropdown menu, select System or a specific area to apply
your selected settings.
3. Click the Test button located next to the first channel to test the alarm
activation.
 The light bulb icon is switched on.
4. Wait approximately five seconds and click the Test button again for the same
channel. This sends a channel restore to the ARC and the light bulb icon is
switched off.
5. Continue to test the other channels.
17.10.3.2
EDP Setup
IP
The system has the facility to communicate information to the SPC Com server
remotely using Vanderbilt ’s own protocol, the EDP (Enhanced Datagram Protocol).
By correctly configuring an EDP receiver on the system, it can be programmed to
automatically make data calls to the SPC Com server in a remote location
whenever events such as alarm activations, tampers, or arming/disarming occur.
The engineer can configure the system to make calls to the remote server via the
following routes:
 PSTN (PSTN modem required)
 GSM (GSM modem required)
 Internet (Ethernet interface)
If using the PSTN network, ensure the PSTN modem is properly installed and
functioning correctly and that a functioning PSTN line is connected to the A, B
terminals on the PSTN modem.
If using the GSM network, ensure the GSM module is properly installed and
functioning correctly. An IP connection can be made across the internet to a server
with a fixed public IP address.
293
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
If an IP connection is required, ensure the Ethernet interface is correctly configured
(see page [➙ 157]) and that internet access is enabled at the router.
17.10.3.2.1
Adding an EDP Receiver
1. Select Communications > Reporting > EDP.
 The following window will be displayed:
Max. 8 receivers can be added to the SPC system.
2. Click on the Add button.
 The following window will be displayed.
3. See table below for further information.
Description
Enter a text description of the receiver.
Receiver ID
Enter a unique number which will be used by the EDP to identify the receiver.
See also
 Editing EDP Receiver Settings [➙ 294]
17.10.3.2.2
Editing EDP Receiver Settings
1. Select Communications > Reporting > EDP > Edit.
 The following window will be displayed.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
294
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
Description
Edit the name of the EDP receiver. Maximum 16 characters.
Receiver ID
Edit the EDP receiver ID. Range is 1 to 999997 (999998 and
999999 are reserved for special purposes)
Protocol Version
Select the EDP protocol version to use with this EDP receiver.
Options are Version 1 or Version 2. Version 2 is recommended if
supported by the receiver, as it is a more secure protocol.
VdS 2471
Compatible
(Vds standard only)
If this option is selected then the EDP receiver will enforce the
following settings for that receiver:
 8s polling interval
 TCP protocol enforced
 TCP retries will fail before 10s (9s approx)
 EDP event retries are set to 1 independent of the global “Retry
Count” setting in “EDP Settings”
 FTC will be generated within 20s of network failure.
Security
295
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
Commands Enable
Check this box to allow commands to be accepted from the
receiver.
Change User PINs
Check this box to allow user PINs to be changed from a remote
location. This feature is applicable only if commands are enabled
from the receiver.
Encryption Enable
Check this box to enable encryption on data to and from the
receiver.
Encryption Key
Enter a hexadecimal key (max. 32 digits) that will be used to encrypt
the data.
Note: The same key will need to be used at the receiver.
Virtual Keypad
Enables access to the panel with a virtual keypad i.e. a PC software
module that looks and behaves like an SPC keypad. It is available
with the SPC Com client.
Live
Specifies when live streaming of audio and video is available.
Streaming/Streaming Options are Never, Always or Only after an alarm event. Default is
Mode
‘Only after an alarm event’.
Note: This setting has obvious privacy implications and therefore
should be enabled only where appropriate and subject to local laws
and regulations.
Network (Applies to the Ethernet connection only)
Network Enable
Check this box to allow events to be reported through the network.
Network Protocol
Select the type of network protocol for the receiver. Options are
UDP and TCP. TCP is recommended if supported by the receiver.
Receiver ID Address Enter the IP address of the receiver.
Receiver IP Port
Enter the IP port that the EDP receiver is listening on.
Always Connected
If enabled the panel will keep a permanent connection to the
receiver. If disabled, the panel will only connect to the receiver after
an alarm event.
Panel Master
If enabled the panel is master of polling messages. Only applicable
to UDP connections.
Polling Interval
Enter the number of seconds between polls.
Polling Trigger
Enter the number of missing polls before a network connection fail
is registered. Only applicable to UDP connections.
Generate a Network
Fault
If polling fails, a network fault alert is generated.
Dial-up (Applies to the GPRS modem connection only)
Dial-up Enable
Check this box to report events through a dial-up connection.
Call type
Select type of call to use when dial up is enabled. Select GPRS.
GPRS protocol
Select the transport layer protocol used over the GPRS connection.
Options are UDP or TCP. Only applicable if Call Type is GPRS.
GPRS address
Enter the IP address of EDP receiver for GPRS connections. Only
applicable if Call Type is GPRS.
GPRS port
Enter the port that the EDP receiver is listening on for GPRS
connections Options are UDP or TCP. Only applicable if Call Type
is GPRS. Default is 50000.
GPRS Hangup
Timeout
Enter the time in seconds after which the GPRS call will hang up. (0
= stay connected until IP connection is up)
GPRS Autoconnect
Check this box to automatically trigger a GPRS call to the server if
an IP network fault occurs.
Dial-up on Net Fault
Check this box to report network faults on a dial-up test call.
Dial-up Interval 1*
Enter the number of minutes between dial-up test calls when
network link is up.
296
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
Dial-up Interval 2*
Enter number of minutes between dial-up test calls when network
link is down.
Network Address*
Enter the IP address of the receiver. This is only required if the
connection to the EDP receiver is being made over the Ethernet
interface. If using one of the on-board modems then leave this field
blank.
Phone Number*
Enter the first phone number that the modem(s) will dial to contact
the receiver.
Phone Number 2*
Enter a second phone number that the modem(s) will dial in the
event that the first number dialled did not result in a call being
successfully established.
Events
Primary Receiver
Check this box to indicate that this is the primary receiver. If
unchecked, this is a backup receiver.
Re-queue Events
Check this box if events that failed to report are to be re-queued for
transmission
Verification
Check this box if Audio/Video verification is to be sent to this
receiver.
Event Filter
Click this button to edit the filter events that will trigger an EDP call.
Refer to Editing Events Filter Settings [➙ 297].
* EDP dial-up over PSTN is not supported in this release.
See also
 Configuring SMS [➙ 188]
17.10.3.2.3
Editing Event Filter Settings
1. Select Communications > Reporting > EDP > Edit > Filter
 The following window will be displayed.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
297
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
Check any of the following boxes if you want to initiate a remote call to an EDP
Receiver to notify it of the particular event.
Alarms
Alarms are activated.
Alarm Restores
System alarms are restored.
Confirmed Alarms
Alarms confirmed by multiple zones
Alarm Abort
Alarm Abort events. Alarms are aborted after a valid user code is entered
via the keypad after a confirmed or unconfirmed alarm,
Faults
Faults and tampers are activated.
Fault Restores
Fault or tamper alarms are restored.
Zone state
Report all zone input state changes.
Settings
System is Set and Unset.
Early/Late
Unscheduled setting and unsetting of the system.
Inhibits
Inhibit and isolate operations are performed on the system.
Door Events
Door events are activated. Only works with SIA protocol.
Other
All other types of events are detected on the system.
Other (Non standard)
Non supported SIA codes used with SPC COM XT including Camera
Online/Offline events.
298
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17.10.3.2.4
Network
Report IP Network Polling Up/Down events.
Areas
Select specific areas to which above events apply.
17
Editing EDP settings
1. Select Communications > Reporting > EDP > Settings.
 The following window will be displayed.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
Enable
Tick this checkbox to enable EDP operation on the system.
EDP Panel ID
Enter a numeric identifier that is used by the EDP Receiver to identify the
panel uniquely.
Panel Port
Select the IP port for receiving IP packets. Default is 50000.
Packet Size Limit
Enter the maximum number of bytes in an EDP packet for transmission.
Event timeout
Enter the timeout period (in seconds) between retransmissions of
unacknowledged events.
Retry Count
Enter the maximum number or event retransmissions allowed by the system.
Dial Attempts
Enter the maximum number of failed dial attempts accepted by the system
before the modem is locked out (prevented from making further attempts to
dial). The lockout period is defined in the option Dial Lockout.
299
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
Dial Delay
Enter the time period (in seconds) that the system will wait before redialling
after a dial attempt has failed.
Dial Lockout
Enter the time period (in seconds) that the system will suspend dialling when
the maximum number of failed dial attempts is reached. Enter a value of ‘0’ to
continually attempt dialling.
Event Logging Options
17.10.4
17.10.4.1
Comms Status
Log all communication availability.
EDP Commands
Log all commands executed through EDP.
A/V Events
Log when Audio/Video verification events are sent to Receiver.
A/V Streaming
Log when Audio/Video live streaming begins.
Keypad Use
Log when remote keypad is activated.
PC Tools
SPC Pro / SPC Safe
1. Select Communications > PC Tools > SPC Pro/SPC Safe.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
Enable
Tick this box to enable SPC Pro to connect to
the panel.
Engineer Access
Tick this box if engineer access must be
granted to allow SPC Pro to connect to the
panel.
Password
Enter the password for SPC Pro connection.
The password is checked by the panel every
time SPC Pro attempts to connect to it. If the
password programmed in this field matches the
password programmed on the panel, then the
connection will be allowed (default: ).
Enable IP
Tick this box to enable a connection to the
panel using Internet Protocol (IP).
IP Port
Select the IP port that SPC Pro will use to
connect to the panel.
SPC Safe
For further information about configuration of the SPC Safe please refer to the
SPCS410 Installation & Configuration Manual.
1. Click the Enable SPC Safe button.
2. Configure the fields as described in the table below.
300
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Configuring Communications
17
Enable
Tick this box to enable Pro to connect to the panel.
Engineer Access
Tick this box if engineer access must be granted to allow Pro to
connect to the panel.
Password
Enter the password for the Pro connection. The password is checked
by the panel every time the Pro attempts to connect to it. If the
password programmed in this field matches the password
programmed on the panel, then the connection will be allowed
(default: ).
Installation ID
Enter the numeric identification of this installation (can also be set in
System Identification page).
Enable Reporting
Check to allow the panel to contact the server after its configuration
has been changed.
Reporting Timer
Enter the minutes how long after the last configuration change the
panel should contact the server to report its configuration ( min: 1,
max.: 120 ).
Enable IP
Tick this box to enable a connection to the panel using Internet
Protocol (IP).
TCP/IP Port
Enter the IP port that SPC Safe will use to connect to the panel (the IP
port of the panel).
Server address
Enter the Hostname, URL or IP address of the SPC Safe server (e.g
the IP address of your PC).
Server TCP/IP Port Enter theTCP port of the SPC server (e.g .the IP port of your PC).
17.10.4.2
SPC Manager
The SPC manager mode setting determines the number of digits for user PINs and
therefore the number of available PINs on a global system controlled by SPC
Manager.
Mode41: 4-digit PIN enables 1,000 global users
Mode51: 5-digit PIN enables 10,000 global users
Mode61: 6-digit PIN enables 100,000 global users
301
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
File Operations
Mode71: 7-digit PIN enables 1000,000 global users
Mode81: 8-digit PIN enables 10,000,000 global users
When you set an SPC Manager mode, additional zeros are added to the front of
existing 4 or 5 digits user PINs which modify the PIN for global use. For example, if
Mode71: 7-PIN Digit is selected, 3 zeros are added to existing 4 digit PINs - 2222
will become 0002222.
To set the SPC Manager Mode:
1. Select Communications > PC Tools > SPC Manager.
2. Select the SPC Manager global user mode from the drop down list.
3. Click on the Save button.
 The mode cannot be saved if a conflict exists between a local existing user
PIN and another user PIN on the global system. An ‘Invalid PIN’ error is
displayed.
4. Click on the appropriate button to delete the PIN and save the new mode or
change the PIN to the randomly generated new PIN displayed and then save
the new mode.
NOTICE
SPC Manager modes cannot be changed if global users exist on the system.
17.10.4.3
Remote Maintenance
For further information please refer to the Remote Maintenance Configuration
Manual.
17.10.4.3.1
Remote Maintenance Report
A Remote Maintenance Report can be obtained directly by SPC Pro from the
panel.
 SPC Pro must be online with the panel.
 Remote Maintenance must be enabled.
1. Click on the Advanced menu .
2. Select the Get Service Report from Panel menu option.
For further details on Remote Maintenance, refer to the SPC Remote Maintenance
manual.
17.11
File Operations
To perform operations on the panel files and configuration:
302
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
File Operations

17
Select File.
 The following tabs are displayed:
Upgrade
Options for upgrading the controller and peripheral firmware, and languages on
the panel. See File Upgrade Operations [➙ 303].
File Manager
Options for managing the system configuration file and uploading and
downloading users data to and from the panel. See File Manager Operations
[➙ 308].
Audio
Upload an audio file to the SPC. The file must be created by the SPC Pro Audio
Manager. Click Browse and click Upload to add the audio file to the SPC. After
upload, click the Test button to validate the audio file.
Fast Programmer
Fast Programmer File Operations. See Using the Fast Programmer [➙ 309].
Default
Restores the SPC system to factory defaults.
NOTICE! The IP address is maintained for connecting to the web interface after
a factory default from the web page
17.11.1
Reset
Restarts the panel.
Policy Text
This tab summarises the configuration for your SPC product settings based on
selected Region, Grade and Type.
File Upgrade Operations
To upgrade firmware and languages on the system:

Select File > Upgrade.
 The following page is displayed:
See also
 Options [➙ 220]
 Using the Fast Programmer [➙ 309]
17.11.1.1
Upgrading Firmware
NOTICE
Manufacturer Access is required for firmware upgrade operations and when
enabled, is available for the completion of both controller and peripheral firmware
upgrades. See System Options [➙ 220].
Firmware for SPC is contained in two separate files:
303
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
File Operations
Controller Firmware File
Contains the firmware for the controller’s CPUs only. Filename has the
extension *.fw.
 Peripheral Firmware File
Contains the firmware for the X-BUS nodes, plus PSTN and GSM modems.
.Filename has the extension *.pfw.
The two files are upgraded separately.

NOTICE
It is recommended that all peripheral firmware is upgraded after a new controller
firmware upgrade.
Note: Firmware can also be upgraded using the keypad, SPC Pro and the Fast
Programmer.
Controller Firmware
To upgrade controller firmware on the system:
1. Select the Panel Upgrade Operations option from the File page.
 The following page is displayed:
2. Select the firmware file to upgrade by clicking the Browse button for the
appropriate option, selecting the required firmware file and then clicking on the
appropriate Upgrade button.
 A confirmation screen is displayed.
3. Click on the Confirm button to confirm the upgrade to the new version of the
controller firmware.
 When the controller firmware is upgraded, the system will display a message to
indicate that the system is resetting. You must login to the system again to
continue operation.
WARNING
If you downgrade the controller firmware (i.e. install an older version of firmware),
the system defaults all current configuration settings. Also, when downgrading
firmware, it is important to downgrade the corresponding peripheral firmware
otherwise zones may appear disconnected, opened or closed.
304
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
File Operations
17
WARNING
If upgrading from a firmware version prior to version 3.3, please note the
following:
- The Engineer web password, if configured, is deleted and must be reentered
after upgrade.
- All existing users will be assigned to new user profiles corresponding to their
previous user access levels. If max. number of user profiles is exceeded, no
profile is assigned (see User Profiles [➙ 184]). Please review all user
configuration after a firmware upgrade.
- The default Engineer ID is changed from 513 to 9999.
Peripheral Firmware Upgrade
Upgrade the peripheral firmware using the same procedure as for the controller
firmware.
The peripheral firmware file is only stored temporarily in the file system. When a
new peripheral firmware file is uploaded, the current and new versions of the
firmware for each peripheral and modem is displayed as shown:

Click on the Upgrade button for the peripherals that require upgrading or click
on the Upgrade All button to upgrade all peripherals.
 If the firmware for a peripheral device in the pfw file is older than the existing
firmware of that device, a Downgrade button is available.
During upgrade, the panel checks if the firmware in the peripheral file supports the
particular hardware versions of the installed peripherals and does not allow an
upgrade for those peripherals which are not supported.
If the pfw file version differs from the controller version, a warning message is
displayed
If the major version number of the firmware available for a device differs from the
existing major number of a device, a warning message is also displayed.
The peripheral firmware can also be upgraded with SPC Pro or using the Fast
Programmer [➙ 309].
Upgrading the SPCP355 Smart PSU Firmware
To upgrade the SPCP355 Smart PSU you must ensure the following:
305
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
File Operations
The SPCP355 Smart PSU firmware can only be updated through the browser. It
cannot be upgraded using SPCPro.

The mains power must be connected.
The upgrade procedure can take up to 2 minutes to complete. Do not perform any
actions within the browser, restart or shut down the system until the upgrade
completes. A message will be displayed when the process is complete.
See also
 Adding / Editing User Profiles [➙ 184]
17.11.1.2
Upgrading Languages
A custom language file (*.clng) can be uploaded to the panel. This file applies to
the panel firmware only and is not available for SPC Pro or SPC Safe.
NOTICE
The panel must be licensed for use of custom languages and other languages.
To upgrade languages on the system:
1. Select File -> Upgrade.
 The Panel Upgrade Operations page is displayed:
2. Select the language file to upgrade by clicking the Browse button for the
Language File Upgrade option, selecting the required language file and then
clicking on the appropriate Upgrade button.
 A list of available languages in this file is displayed.
306
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
File Operations
17
3. Tick the box beside the language to be installed.
A maximum of 4 languages can be installed.
4. Click on the Upgrade Selected button.
 The Confirm Language Upgrade screen is displayed showing any
languages that are being installed.
5. Click on the Confirm button.
A message is displayed to indicate if the language upgrade was successful or if it
failed.
Deleting Languages
To delete languages from the language file:
1. Select the language file to upgrade by clicking the Browse button for the
Language File Upgrade option, selecting the required language file and then
clicking on the appropriate Upgrade button.
 A list of available languages in this file is displayed.
2. Uncheck the boxes for each of the languages that you want to delete.
3. Click on the Upgrade Selected button.
 The Confirm Language Upgrade screen is displayed. When deleting a
language, the panel deletes all languages and reinstalls only the languages
required. In the example below, Flemish is being deleted.
307
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
File Operations
4. Click on the Confirm button to confirm the languages being deleted.
Language files can also be imported using the Fast Programmer [➙ 309].
See Language [➙ 234] for details of selecting the panel ‘System’ and ‘Idle State’
languages in the browser.
See OPTIONS [➙ 109] for details of selecting the panel ‘System’ and ‘Idle State’
languages on the keypad.
See also
 Language [➙ 234]
17.11.2
File Manager Operations

Select File -> File Manager.
 A screen displays showing details of the system configuration, language
and trace files.
308
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Using the Fast Programmer
17
System Configuration File
The following options are available to manage the system configuration file:
Download
Downloads a configuration file from the controller.
Note: If an error message appears after clicking the download button, proceed as
follows:
1.
Select Internet Options in the Tools menu.
2.
Select the Advanced tab.
3.
Mark the checkbox Do not save encrypted pages to disk.
4.
Click Apply.
5.
Click OK.
6.
Click Download again.
When downloading a configuration file, the configuration settings are stored in a .cfg
file. This file can then be uploaded to other controllers to avoid lengthy programming
procedures.
Upload
Uploads a configuration file to the controller.
Backup
Stores a backup copy of the current configuration to flash.
Restore
Restores a backup copy of the current configuration from flash.
Users Data
The following options are available to manage users data:
17.12
Download
Click the button to Download the users data from the panel. A dialog box
asks you where you would like the save the users.csv file.
Upload
Click the Browse button to Upload users data to the panel. This must be a
.csv file format.
Using the Fast Programmer
The SPC Fast Programmer is a portable storage device that provides the engineer
with the ability to upload and download configuration files in a quick and convenient
manner. The Fast Programmer has two interfaces located on opposite ends of the
device:
SPC controller interface
This 10-pin serial interface is located at the top of the Fast Programmer and
connects directly to the Fast Programmer interface on the controller board. Once
connected, the engineer can upload and download files directly from the Fast
Programmer via the browser and keypad programming tools.
PC USB interface
This USB interface is located at the bottom of the Fast Programmer and connects
directly to the USB interface on a PC. Configuration and other files can be only be
copied between the PC and the Fast Programmer using the SPC Pro programming
tool.
309
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Using the Fast Programmer
17.12.1
Connecting the Fast Programmer to the Controller
+–
1
Fast Programmer interface
1
Fast Programmer interface
To connect the SPC Fast Programmer to the controller:
1. Open the SPC controller enclosure and locate the Fast Programmer interface.
NOTICE! Do not power down the controller.
2. Align the Fast Programmer over the Fast Programmer interface on the SPC
controller board with the 10-pin serial interface facing down.
3. Ensure the pins match up correctly with the holes in the socket and firmly but
gently press into place.
 The LED on the Fast Programmer flashes momentarily as the data is
accessed.
CAUTION! Do not remove the Fast Programmer while the LED is flashing.
 The Fast Programmer is now connected to the controller.
To remove the Fast Programmer - gently pull the device out of the Fast
Programmer interface.
17.12.2
Installing the Fast Programmer on a PC
For Windows XP
 SPCPro must be installed on the Windows XP PC.
1. Connect the Fast Programmer to a USB interface on the PC.
 The Found New Hardware wizard is displayed.
310
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Engineer programming via the browser
Using the Fast Programmer
17
2. Press Next.
3. Click Continue Anyway.
 At the end of the installation process, a window indicates that the
installation process is complete.
4. Click Finish.
For Windows 7
 You have administration privileges.
 SPCPro must be installed on the Windows 7 PC.

Connect the Fast Programmer to a USB interface on the PC.
 The drivers are installed automatically
View SPC Fast Programmer

Open the Windows menu Start > Control panel > System > Device Manager.
 The Fast Programmer driver will be listed under the Ports (COM & LPT)
directory as SPC USB Fast Programmer (COM X) (X = com port number).
17.12.3
Fast Programmer File Operations
Controller and peripheral firmware upgrades and custom language imports may be
done using the Fast Programmer and SPC Pro.
17.12.3.1
Accessing the Fast Programmer using the Keypad
1. Enter Full Engineer and scroll to UTILITIES > FAST PROGRAMMER.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Scroll and select the desired option:
17.12.3.2
DATA FROM PANEL
Select desired file from list.
DATA TO PANEL
Select desired file from list.
DELETE FILES
Select desired file from list.
FIRMWARE UPGRADE
The panel searches for a valid controller firmware file. Once it finds
the firmware file, it will allow the user to select it and upgrade the
panel.
PERIPHERAL UPGRADE
The panel searches for a valid peripheral firmware file. Once it finds
the firmware file, it will allow the user to select it and upgrade the
panel
LANGUAGE UPGRADE
A list of the language files available on the Fast Programmer is
displayed. Select the language required and press SELECT to
import the file.
Accessing the Fast Programmer using the Browser
1. Enter Full Engineer in browser programming and select the File programming
page.
2. Click Fast Programmer.
 The options to upload and download files are displayed.
311
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
17
Engineer programming via the browser
Using the Fast Programmer
Downloading Configuration Files to the Panel
A list of the configuration files stored on the fast programmer is displayed along
with the options to download or delete them.
Uploading Configuration Files to the Fast Programmer
When uploading files from the SPC to the Fast programmer, you will be prompted
to delete the existing file on the programmer before the new file can be saved.
To upload a configuration file from the Fast Programmer to the SPC, enter the file
name in the file name box and click Upload.
For complete details on using the Fast Programmer with SPC Pro, consult the SPC
Pro Configuration Manual.
Upgrading Firmware
NOTICE
Manufacturer Access is required for firmware operations.
A list of the firmware files stored on the Fast Programmer is displayed.
To upgrade firmware, click on the Upgrade button beside the required firmware file.
312
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Accessing web server remotely
PSTN connection
18
18 Accessing web server remotely
18.1
PSTN connection
PSTN Connection
1 Remote PC with browser
2 PSTN modem
3 PSTN network
4 Telephone line
5 PSTN modem
6 SPC controller
7
JP9
SPC4xxx
The web server on the controller can be accessed via a remote connection over a
PSTN telephone line. A PSTN module and a PSTN line must be connected to the
controller as shown above to provide remote access to the controller.
On the remote side of the connection the user must have a PSTN modem installed
on a PC with access to a PSTN line.
To connect remotely to the controller:
1. Install a PSTN modem on the controller (please refer to corresponding
installation instruction).
2. Connect the phone line to the A/B screw terminals on the connector at the top
of the modem.
3. Enter Engineer programming from the keypad and configure the modem
(primary or backup) to answer an incoming call.
4. On the keypad, scroll to Full Engineer Mode > Comms > Modems
5. Select the following settings:
-
Enable Modem: Set to enabled
-
Type: Displays the type of modem (PSTN)
313
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
18
Accessing web server remotely
PSTN connection
-
Country Code: Select the relevant country code (Ireland, UK, Europe)
-
Answer mode: Select numbered rings; this tells the modem to wait for a
number of rings before answering the incoming call
-
Modem Rings: Select the number of rings to allow before answering the
call (8 rings max)
6. Create a dial-up connection on the remote PC using the phone number of the
telephone line connected to the PSTN module on the controller. The
instructions to do this on windows XP operating system are listed below:
On Windows XP:
1. Open the New Connection Wizard by browsing to Control Panel > Network
Connections > Create New Connection (in the Network Tasks window).
2. In the Network Connection Type window, select Connect to the Internet.
3. In the Getting Ready window, choose Setup my connection manually.
4. In the Internet Connection window, choose Connect using Dialup modem.
5. In the Connection Name window enter the connection name e.g. SPC remote
connection.
6. In the Phone Number to Dial window, enter the phone number of the PSTN line
connected to the PSTN modem.
7. In the Connection Availability window, choose whether this connection is
available to all users.
8. In the Internet Account Information window, enter the following details:
-
Username : SPC
-
Password: password (default)
- Confirm Password: password
 The Completing the New Connection Wizard window is displayed.
9. Click Finish to save the Dial-up connection to the PC.
Default code should be changed and noted accordingly as Vanderbilt
is unable to retrieve this new code. Forgotten codes are be remedied only by a
factory default of the system, rendering loss of programming. Programming can
be restored if a backup is available.
To activate this dial-up connection:

Click on the icon located in the Control Panel > Network Connections window.
 The PC makes a data call to the PSTN line connected to the SPC PSTN
module.
 The SPC PSTN module answers the incoming data call after the
designated number of rings and establishes an IP link with the remote
computer.
 The SPC system automatically assigns an IP address to the remote PC.
314
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Accessing web server remotely
GSM connection
18
For some Windows operating systems, a dialog box regarding Windows
certification appears. Vanderbilt
deems this acceptable to continue. For further queries, please contact network
administrator or a Vanderbilt
technician.
To obtain this IP address:
1. Right click the dial-up icon.
2. Click on the Details tab.
 The IP address is displayed as the Server IP address.
1. Enter this IP address in the address bar of the browser and click.
2. When the Dial-up connection icon is displayed on the task bar of the PC, open
the browser and enter the IP address of the SPC.
 The browser logon screen is displayed.
To set up a dial-up connection on another operating system, consult the help
menu of that operating system.
18.2
GSM connection
GSM Connection
1 Remote PC with browser
2 GSM modem
3 PSTN modem
4 GSM network
5 PSTN network
6 External antenna
7 GSM modem
8 SPC controller
315
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
18
Accessing web server remotely
GSM connection
The web server on the controller can be accessed via a remote connection over
the GSM network. A GSM module (with SIM card) must be installed on the
controller as shown above to provide remote access to the SPC. The data option of
the SIM card must be activated and the data number must be used.
On the remote side of the connection the user must have a PSTN or GSM modem
installed on a PC with browser. If a PSTN modem is installed then it must be
connected to a working PSTN line.
To connect remotely to the controller:
1. Install a GSM modem on the controller (please refer to corresponding
installation instruction).
2. Enter Full Engineer programming from the keypad and configure the modem
(primary or backup) to answer an incoming call.
3. On the keypad, scroll to the following menu: FULL ENGINEER >
COMMUNICATION > MODEMS, and select the settings listed:
Enable Modem
Set to Modem Enabled.
Type
Displays the type of modem (GSM).
Country Code
Select the relevant country code.
Answer Mode
Select numbered rings; this tells the modem to wait for a number of rings before
answering the incoming call.
Modem Rings
Select the number of rings to allow before answering the call (8 rings max).
On Windows XP:
1. Open the New Connection Wizard by browsing to Control Panel > Network
Connections > Create New Connection (in the Network Tasks window).
2. In the Network Connection Type window, select Connect to the Internet.
3. In the Getting Ready window, choose Setup my connection manually.
4. In the Internet Connection window, choose Connect using Dialup modem.
5. In the Connection Name window enter the connection name e.g. SPC remote
connection.
6. In the Phone Number to Dial window, enter the phone number of the PSTN line
connected to the PSTN modem.
7. In the Connection Availability window, choose whether this connection is
available to all users.
8. In the Internet Account Information window, enter the following details:
-
Username : SPC
-
Password: password (default)
- Confirm Password: Vanderbilt
 The Completing the New Connection Wizard window is displayed.
9. Click Finish to save the Dial-up connection to the PC.
Default code should be changed and noted accordingly as Vanderbilt
is unable to retrieve this new code. Forgotten codes are be remedied only by a
factory default of the system, rendering loss of programming. Programming can
be restored if a backup is available.
316
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Accessing web server remotely
GSM connection
18
To activate this dial-up connection:

Click on the icon located in the Control Panel > Network Connections window.
 The PC makes a data call to the PSTN line connected to the SPC PSTN
module.
 The SPC PSTN module answers the incoming data call after the
designated number of rings and establishes an IP link with the remote
computer.
 The SPC system automatically assigns an IP address to the remote PC.
For some Windows operating systems, a dialog box regarding Windows
certification appears. Vanderbilt
deems this acceptable to continue. For further queries, please contact network
administrator or a Vanderbilt
technician.
To obtain this IP address:
1. Right click the dial-up icon.
2. Click on the Details tab.
 The IP address is displayed as the Server IP address.
1. Enter this IP address in the address bar of the browser and click.
2. When the Dial-up connection icon is displayed on the task bar of the PC, open
the browser and enter the IP address of the SPC.
 The browser logon screen is displayed.
To set up a dial-up connection on another operating system, consult the help
menu of that operating system.
317
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
19
Intruder alarm functionality
Financial mode operation
19 Intruder alarm functionality
The SPC system can accommodate 3 distinct modes of intruder alarm operation,
Financial, Commercial or Domestic mode, all of which support multiple areas.
Each area in turn can support 4 different alarm modes. Commercial and Financial
mode present more programmable alarm types than Domestic mode. The default
zone name and type settings for each mode is listed in page [➙ 334].
19.1
Financial mode operation
Financial mode is suitable banking and financial businesses that have special
secure areas such as vaults and ATMs.
Each area defined on the system supports the alarm modes listed below.
19.2
Alarm Mode
Description
UNSET
Area is disarmed, only alarm zones classified as 24Hour will activate the alarm.
PARTSET A
This mode provides perimeter protection to a building while allowing free
movement through the exit and access areas.
Zones that have been classified as EXCLUDE A remain unprotected in this mode.
By default there is no exit time (the system instantly sets on selection of this
mode). An exit timer can be applied to this mode by enabling the Partset A Timed
variable.
PARTSET B
This setting mode applies protection to all zones except those that have been
classified as EXCLUDE B.
By default there is no exit time (the system instantly sets on selection of this
mode). An exit timer can be applied to this mode by enabling the Partset B Timed
variable.
FULL SET
Area is fully armed; opening of entry/exit zones starts the entry timer. If the alarm
is not unset before entry timer expires, the alarm is activated.
Commercial mode operation
Commercial mode is suitable for business installations with multiple areas and a
large number of alarm zones. Each area defined on the system supports the alarm
modes listed below.
Alarm Mode
Description
UNSET
Area is disarmed, only alarm zones classified as 24Hour will activate the alarm.
PARTSET A
This mode provides perimeter protection to a building while allowing free
movement through the exit and access areas.
Zones that have been classified as EXCLUDE A remain unprotected in this mode.
By default there is no exit time (the system instantly sets on selection of this
mode). An exit timer can be applied to this mode by enabling the Partset A Timed
variable.
PARTSET B
This setting mode applies protection to all zones except those that have been
classified as EXCLUDE B.
By default there is no exit time (the system instantly sets on selection of this
mode). An exit timer can be applied to this mode by enabling the Partset B Timed
variable.
FULL SET
Area is fully armed; opening of entry/exit zones starts the entry timer. If the alarm
is not unset before entry timer expires, the alarm is activated.
318
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Intruder alarm functionality
Domestic mode operation
19.3
19
Domestic mode operation
Domestic mode is suitable for residential installations with one or more areas and a
small-to-moderate number of alarm zones. Each area defined on the system
supports the alarm modes listed below.
19.4
Alarm Mode
Description
UNSET
Area is disarmed, only alarm zones classified as 24Hour will activate the alarm.
PARTSET A
This mode provides perimeter protection to a building while allowing free
movement through the exit and access areas (for example front door and hall)
Zones which have been classified as EXCLUDE A remain unprotected in this
mode. There are no Exit times associated with this mode and protection is applied
instantly on selection of this mode.
PARTSET B
This setting mode applies protection to all zones except those that have been
classified as EXCLUDE B.
By default there is no exit time (the system setting instantly on selection of this
mode). An exit timer can be applied to this mode by enabling the Partset B Timed
variable.
FULL SET
Area is fully armed, opening of Entry/Exit zone start the Entry timer. If the alarm is
not unset before the Entry timer expires then the alarm is activated.
Full and local alarms
The type of alarms generated by the SPC system can vary depending on the type
of zone that triggered the alarm activation. The vast majority of alarms require a
visual (strobe) and audible (bell) indication of an intrusion to the premises or
building.
By default, the first 3 physical outputs on the SPC controller are assigned to the
external bell, internal bell, and external bell strobe. When activated, these 3
outputs together provide sufficient warning of an alarm condition to persons located
inside or within the immediate environment of the building or premises where the
intrusion has taken place.
Full and local alarms on the SPC activate the following physical outputs:
 Controller Output 1: External Bell
 Controller Output 2: Internal Bell
 Controller Output 3: Strobe
For details on how to wire the bells and strobe see page [➙ 70].
A Full Alarm activation reports the alarm to the Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC) if
one has been configured on the system.
A Local Alarm activation does not attempt to call the ARC even if one has already
been configured.
A Silent Alarm activation does not activate outputs 1 – 3 (no visual or audible
indications of the alarm). The alarm event is reported to the ARC. Silent alarms are
only generated when alarm zones with the Silent attribute have been opened when
the system is set.
319
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
20
System examples and scenarios
When to use a common area
20 System examples and scenarios
20.1
When to use a common area
Common areas provide a convenient way of setting multiple areas within a single
installation. A user assigned to a common area has the ability to SET ALL areas
within that common area (even those areas that have not been assigned to that
user). However, the users can only UNSET areas assigned to them.
Common areas should only be used when a single keypad is installed at the
primary access location and is shared by all users within the building (defining a
common area on a system with multiple keypads in different areas is not
recommended).
Scenario: 2 departments of a business (Accounts and Sales) share a common
access point (front door)
In this case, create 3 areas on the system (Common Area, Accounts, and Sales).
The Common Area must include the main access point (front door). Assign the
zones in Accounts to Area 2 and the zones in Sales to Area 3. Install a keypad at
the front door and assign it to all 3 areas. Define 2 users (minimum) on the system,
one for each department, and assign the users to their respective areas and the
common area.
Operation: Setting the system
The Accounts Manager leaves the office at 5 pm. When he enters his code at the
keypad, the FULLSET option presents the following 3 sub-menus:
 ALL AREAS: sets all areas assigned to the common area (Common Area,
Accounts, and Sales) and any additional areas assigned to the account
manager; in this case there are no additional areas. The exit timer for the front
door informs the user to exit the building.
 COMMON: sets all areas assigned to the Common Area (Common Area,
Accounts and Sales) and starts the exit timer for the front door
 ACCOUNTS: sets the Accounts area only; the Sales area remains unset and
access is still permitted through the front door
When the last worker in the Sales department is leaving the building, he/she closes
all doors and windows in AREA 3 and enters his/her code at the keypad. The
FULLSET option presents the following 3 sub-menus:
 ALL AREAS: sets all areas assigned to the Common Area (Common area,
Accounts, and Sales) and any additional areas assigned to the sales worker; in
this case there are no additional areas. The exit timer for the front door informs
the user to exit the building.
 COMMON: sets all areas assigned to the Common Area (Common Area,
Accounts, and Sales) and starts the exit timer for the front door.
 SALES: sets ALL areas assigned to the Common Area (Common area,
Accounts and Sales); this is because there are no other unarmed sub-areas on
the system
Operation: Unsetting the system
When the Accounts Manager returns to open the building and enters his code on
the keypad, the UNSET option presents the following 3 sub-menus:
 ALL AREAS: unsets all areas assigned to the accounts worker (Common Area,
Accounts) and any additional area assigned to the accounts worker. In this
case there are no additional areas. NOTE: The accounts worker cannot
UNSET the Sales area.
 COMMON: unsets ONLY the Common Area (Reception). This provides the
option to unarm the reception area only while leaving the Accounts and Sales
offices set.
320
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
System examples and scenarios
When to use a common area

20
ACCOUNTS: unsets the Accounts area and the Common Area (Reception). In
this case the Sales area remains set while access is still permitted through the
front door.
Use of common areas:
Keyarm zone
If the entry/exit route in the common area is programmed as a keyarm zone, when
it is activated all areas in the Common area are SET. Deactivating the keyarm zone
UNSETs all areas in the Common Areas.
 Multiple keypads
If areas assigned to the common area have their own keypads for entry/exit, it is
important that the exit times associated with those areas provide sufficient time to
allow the user to reach the common area exit. This is in case the area being armed
is the last un-armed area on the system and therefore will trigger arming of the
entire common area.

As a rule it is advisable to use common areas in installations that have only one
keypad located at the common access point, i.e. front door access to the entire
building.
321
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
21
Seismic Sensors
When to use a common area
21 Seismic Sensors
Vibration sensors, also called seismic sensors, are used to detect intrusion
attempts by mechanical means, such as drilling or making holes through walls or
safes.
Support for seismic sensors is available only if the installation type for the panel is
‘Financial’.
There are several ways to test seismic sensors. The simplest way to test seismic
sensors is by hitting a wall or safe and seeing if the zone opens during a walk test.
This means of testing is available with all types of seismic sensors.
If the seismic sensor is installed with a test transmitter, the following test options
are available:
 Manual testing initiated at the keypad or with SPC Pro (not supported by the
browser);
 Automatic testing on a periodic basis or when the panel is set using the
keypad.
The test transmitter is a small high frequency vibrator that is attached a short
distance from the sensor on the same wall. The test transmitter is wired to an
output on the panel or an expander.
Configuring Seismic Sensors in the Panel
1. Configure a seismic zone. Seismic sensors must be assigned to a zone. (See
Editing a Zone [➙ 235])
2. Set the attributes for the zone.
3. Enable automatic testing of the sensor with the Seismic Test attribute.
4. Select a calendar to control the seismic zone, if required.
5. Assign this zone to a verification zone if audio/video verification is required..
6. Configure timers to specify how often to test seismic zones (default is 7 days)
and the duration of the tests. (Automatic Seismic Test zone attribute must be
set). (See Timers [➙ 228])
7. Configure an output for testing a seismic zone. (See Output Types and Output
Ports [➙ 196])
The output can be assigned to either the system or an area, if the panel is
322
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Seismic Sensors
Seismic Sensor Testing
21
configured to use areas as is usually the case in financial environments. The
output should only be assigned to the system if the panel does not use areas.
Using the Keypad
1. Select FULL ENGINEER->ZONES->(select zone)->ZONE TYPE->SEISMIC
2. Select FULL ENGINEER->ZONES->(select zone)->ATTRIBUTES->SEISMIC
AUTOTEST
See also
 Timers [➙ 228]
 Outputs types and output ports [➙ 196]
 Editing a zone [➙ 235]
21.1
Seismic Sensor Testing
Seismic zones must be configured in order for both manual and automatic tests to
be available. The results of either manual or automatic testing are stored in the
system event log.
During a seismic test, one or more seismic zones are tested. When a zone is
tested, all other zones in the same area are temporarily disabled as there is a
single seismic test output per area
21.1.1
Manual and Automatic Test Process
A manual or automatic test operates as follows:
1. The panel activates the Seismic Test Output for the appropriate area(s) in
which the seismic zone(s) are to be tested.
2. The panel then waits for all seismic zones under test to open and then verifies
that all seismic sensors in the area enter the alarm state within the time
configured for the ‘Seismic Test Duration’. Any zone(s) that have not opened
within the maximum period are deemed to have failed the test.
3. When all seismic zones in the area are open or the maximum Seismic Test
Duration has been reached (whichever comes first), the panel will clear the
Seismic Test Output for that area.
4. The panel then waits a fixed time for all seismic detectors in the area to close.
Any zone(s) that have not closed are deemed to have failed the test.
5. The panel then waits another fixed period before reporting the test result. The
result of the test, either manual or automatic, is stored in the system event log.
The seismic output is normally high, and goes low during tests (i.e. when it is
active). If this signal is not suitable for a particular sensor then the physical output
can be configured to be inverted.
323
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
21
Seismic Sensors
Seismic Sensor Testing
21.1.2
Automatically Testing Sensors
Seismic sensors are tested either periodically or after the system is set using the
keypad.
Periodic Automatic Testing
Periodic automatic tests are performed on all seismic zones for which automatic
tests are enabled.
Automatic tests are randomized within the configured test period and are done
independently for each area.
All seismic zones in the same area (for which automatic tests are enabled) are
tested simultaneously.
The Seismic Test Interval configuration option in the Timers [➙ 228] menu
determines the average test period for seismic sensors automatic tests. The default
value is 168 hours (7 days) and the allowed values are in the range 12 – 240
hours.
The test time is random within the specified range +/- 15%. For example, if a test is
scheduled every 24 hours, a test may be performed between 20.4 and 27.6 hours
after the last test.
A seismic test is performed after a reboot if automatic tests are enabled. If the
panel was in Full Engineer mode before reboot, then the test is performed only
after the panel is out of Full Engineer mode after a reboot.
If a seismic test fails, a Trouble event is reported (SIA code “BT”). There is also a
corresponding Restoration event (SIA code “BJ”).
Automatic Test on Setting
The option Seismic Test on Set is configurable in the System Options [➙ 220]
menu. If enabled, all seismic zones in all areas that are to be set are tested before
the usual setting sequence. This applies to keypad operation only.
While the test is being performed, ‘SEISMIC AUTOTEST’ is displayed on the
keypad. If the seismic test succeeds, the setting proceeds as normal.
If all areas or an area group or a single area are selected to be set, and a seismic
test fails, then ‘SEISMIC FAIL’ will be displayed. Pressing Return displays a list of
the failed zones which can be scrolled through using the up and down arrow keys.
Depending on the Inhibit settings for the failed seismic zones and your user profile,
the following can occur:
 If all of the seismic zones that failed the test have the Inhibit attribute set, and
your user profile user is configured with the Inhibit right:
1.
Press Return on any of the failed zones.
 The message “FORCE SET ALL?” is displayed.
2. Press Return again to inhibit all seismic zones that failed the test.
(Alternatively, go back to the previous menu.)

 Setting proceeds as normal.
If some of the seismic zones that failed the test do not have the Inhibit attribute
set or your user profile user does not have the Inhibit right:

Press Return.
 The message ‘FAIL TO SET’ will be displayed and no areas will be set.
There is no automatic seismic test for areas that are auto-set for any reason (for
example, areas activated by a calendar or trigger). Likewise there is no automatic
seismic test when the system is set with SPC Com, with SPC Pro or the browser.
However, there is an automatic seismic test when a virtual keypad is used with
SPC Com or SPC Pro.
No event is reported if seismic testing on set fails.
324
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Seismic Sensors
Seismic Sensor Testing
21
The periodic automatic system test timer restarts after a test is performed after
setting.
21.1.3
Manually Testing Sensors
To manually test sensors, select the TEST>SEISMIC TEST option from the TEST
menu on the keypad.
A seismic manual test with the keypad can be done by the engineer in Full
Engineer mode, and also by a user of type Manager or type Standard:
 An engineer is able to test all sensors in all areas configured in the system
using any keypad.
 A user is able to test only the sensors in areas that are both assigned to him
and to the particular keypad he is using.
To perform a seismic test in Engineer mode, select FULL ENGINEER ⇒ TEST ⇒
SEISMIC TEST
To perform a seismic test in User mode, select MENUS ⇒ TEST ⇒ SEISMIC TEST
Note: The following instructions apply to both engineer and user modes but please
note that only a subset of options may be available to a user.
The following options are available in the SEISMIC TEST menu:
 TEST ALL AREAS
Tests seismic zones in all available areas if there is more than one area that
contains seismic zones.
 ‘AREA NAME’
The names of the areas containing seismic zones are listed individually. When
a specific area is selected, the following options are available:
– TEST ALL ZONES
Test all seismic zones in this area if there is more than one seismic zone.
– ‘ZONE NAME’
The names of all seismic zones are listed and can be selected for testing
individually.
The message ‘SEISMIC TEST’ is display on the keypad while the test is being
performed,
If the test fails, the message ‘SEISMIC FAIL’ is displayed. If the “i” or VIEW key is
pressed, a list of the failed zones is displayed which can be scrolled through.
If the test succeeds, ‘SEISMIC OK’ is displayed.
Entries are recorded in the event log with the following details:
 user who initiated the test
 result (OK or FAIL)
 area and zone number and name.
No events are reported for manual tests.
325
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Blocking Lock Operation
22
Blocking Lock
22 Blocking Lock Operation
Blocking Lock operation and the Authorized Setting operation of a Blocking Lock is
supported by the SPC intrusion panel.
22.1
Blocking Lock
A Blocking Lock is a mechanical lock which is mounted into a door in addition to
the normal lock and is used to set and unset the intrusion system. SPC support
normal Blocking Lock devices (Blockschloss 1) and also the Bosch Blockschloss,
Sigmalock Plus, E4.03 device (Blockschloss 2).
Depending on the kind of Blocking Lock, a signal is needed to enable locking and
unlocking the lock i.e. the Blocking Lock can only be locked and the system set if
the signal Ready to Set is available from the control panel. This is controlled by a
magnetic switch.
The operation of a Blocking Lock is as follows:
1. If there is no open zone, pending alarm or pending fault in the area, the area is
ready to set and the Ready to Set signal is sent from the panel.
2. If the Blocking Lock device is then locked, the Blockschloss 1/2 output is
activated.
3. Following the corresponding change on the Keyarm input type, the respective
area is set.
4. The Setting Ack output is activated for 3 seconds to signal a successful setting
of the area. Blockschloss 1 output is deactivated when the system is set.
Blockschloss 2 stays activated when the system is set.
5. If the Blocking Lock is unlocked, the Keyarm input is switched to the unset
state (closed).
6. Following the change on the Keyarm input type, the area is unset. Blockschloss
1 is deactivated if the area is ready to set while Blockschloss 2 is activated if
the area is ready to set.
Panel
Blocking Lock
Setting Start
No open zone,
pending alarm or
pending fault
Output
Ready to Set
Output
Blockschloss 1/2
Blocking
Device
Locked
Input
Keyarm
Area Set
Output
Output
3 secs
Setting Ack
Fullset Done
326
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Blocking Lock Operation
Authorized Setting of the Blocking Lock
22
The configuration requirements for a Blocking Lock are as follows:
 Outputs:
– Ready to set
– Setting Ack
– Fullset Done
– Blockschloss 1/2
 Inputs
– Keyarm
22.2
Authorized Setting of the Blocking Lock
The ‘Authorised Setting‘ functionality extends the setting and unsetting procedure
for a Blocking Lock with a second security level. Before the system can be set or
unset, a code must be entered on an external setting device such as a card or pin
reader with a separate controller. This controller can be connected to any kind of
intrusion system using inputs and outputs.
Operation is as follows:
1. The panel signals to the external setting device when it is possible to set using
a Ready To Set output.
2. When the code is entered ,the Setting Authorisation input is activated and
Blockschloss 1/2 is activated.
3. The blocking lock opens a control panel input (Keyarm) which initiates the
setting procedure of the panel.
4. The external setting device waits up to 8 seconds for Fullset Done output signal
to be activated from the control panel.
5. If this signal is not received, the setting fails and the external setting device
unsets the system again.
Panel
Output
Ready to Set
Setting Start
Blocking Lock
External Setting Device
Input
No open zone,
pending alarm or
pending fault
Setting
Authorisation
Code
Entered
20 secs
Output
Blockschloss 1/2
Blocking
Device
Locked
Input
Keyarm
Area Set
Output
Output
3 secs
Setting Ack
Fullset Done
327
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
22
Blocking Lock Operation
Locking Element
The configuration requirements for Authorised Setting are as follows:
 Area Attributes:
– Setting Authorisation
Set
Set and Unset (required for VdS)
Unset
 Outputs:
– Ready to set
– Setting Ack
– Fullset Done
 Inputs
– Keyarm
22.3
Locking Element
For VdS, it is mandatory to prevent entering a set area. This is done by using a
Lock Element which is mounted in the doorframe. The lock element consists of a
small plastic bolt which locks the door in a SET state. The position of the bolt is
signaled by Lock element – Lock or Lock element – Unlock outputs. This signal is
checked during the setting process. If the “locked” information is not received, the
setting fails.
If a lock element is located within an area, the exit timer will be restricted to a
minimum of 4 seconds so that the lock element can be activated. When the exit
timer reaches four seconds, the lock element will be activated for three seconds.
When the exit timer expires, the Lock Element input must be in the closed state
then the system will set.
If a lock element is opened during a set period it will be handled as an alarm zone.
If a lock element is closed during an unset process then it will be considered to be
tampered and raise a tamper on the zone.
If the lock element fails to open after the unlock signal is sent to the device, then a
trouble will be raised on that zone to signal that a mechanical failure has occurred.
If the Lock Element input (if configured) is not in the closed state when the exit
timer expires, then the system will not set and a Fail to Set signal will be raised.
The Lock Element – Unlock output will be activated.
328
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Blocking Lock Operation
Locking Element
Panel
22
Locking Element
Setting Start
No open zone,
pending alarm or
pending fault
Output
Lock Element - Lock
Lock Element
Locked
N
Input
Lock Element (Closed)
Y
Area Set
Output
Output
3 secs
Setting Ack
Fullset Done
Lock Element (Open)
Fail to Set
Lock Element - Unlock
The configuration requirements for the lock element are as follows:
 Outputs:
– Lock Element – Lock
– Lock Element – Unlock
 Inputs
– Lock Element
329
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
Network cable connections
23 Appendix
23.1
Network cable connections
IP
A PC can be connected directly to the Ethernet interface of the SPC controller or
via a LAN connection. The tables below show the 2 possible connection
configurations.
 If the SPC is connected to an existing network via a hub, then connect a
straight through cable from the hub to the SPC and another from the hub to the
PC.
 If the controller is not connected to a network (i.e. a hub or switch is not used),
then a crossover cable should be connected between the SPC controller and
the PC.
Use the straight through cable for connecting the SPC controller to a PC via a hub.
RJ45 PIN
RJ45 PIN
1 (RX +)
1 (TX +)
2 (RX -)
2 (TX -)
3 (TX+)
3 (RX+)
6 (TX-)
6 (RX-)
Use the crossover cable for connecting the SPC controller directly to a PC.
RJ45 PIN
RJ45 PIN
1 (RX +)
3 (TX+)
2 (RX -)
6 (TX-)
3 (TX+)
1 (RX +)
6 (TX-)
2 (RX -)
23.2
Controller status LEDs
LED
Function
LED 1
Wireless Data
FLASHING: wireless data is being received by the wireless module
OFF: no wireless data is being received
LED 2
Battery Status
ON: battery voltage has dropped below the deep discharge level (10.9 V)
OFF: battery status OK
330
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
Powering expanders from the auxiliary power terminals
LED 3
Mains Supply
ON: Mains failure
OFF: Mains OK
LED 4
X-BUS Status
ON: X-BUS configuration is a loop configuration
OFF: X-BUS configuration is an spur configuration
FLASHING: Detects end of line Expanders or break in wiring.
LED 5
System Fault
23
ON: a hardware fault has been detected on the board
OFF: no hardware fault has been detected
LED 6
Writing to Flash
ON: system is writing to flash memory
OFF: system is not writing to flash memory
LED 7
Heartbeat
FLASHING: system is functioning normally
ON
23.3
OFF
FLASHING
Powering expanders from the auxiliary power
terminals
To calculate the number of expanders/keypads that can safely be powered from
the auxiliary 12 VDC power terminals, add the total maximum current draw from all
of the expanders/keypads to be powered and determine if this total is less than the
specified 12VDC auxiliary power.
Please refer to Technical data for the specific auxiliary current and to the
corresponding installation instruction or data sheet of modules, keypads and
expanders for current consumption.
Expander 1 Current (mA) + Expander 2 Current (mA) + ….. <Auxiliary Power
If the electronic or relay outputs are already powering external devices, the power
supplied to these devices must be subtracted from the 12VDC auxiliary power
supply to determine the amount of available power from the auxiliary power
terminals (0 V 12 V).
If the total maximum current draw from the expanders exceeds the auxiliary power,
a PSU expander should be used to provide additional power.
331
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
Calculating the battery power requirements
1
3
+–
JP9
4
5
2
6
Powering expanders from the auxiliary power terminals
1 SPC controller
2 Battery
3 Auxiliary 12 V power terminals
4 Keypad
5 Keypad
6 I/O expander
23.4
Calculating the battery power requirements
It is important that adequate stand-by power is available to supply all devices in the
event of a mains supply failure. To ensure that enough power is available, always
connect the appropriate back-up battery and PSU.
The table below gives an approximation of the maximum load current that can be
drawn from each type of battery over the given stand-by periods.
The approximations below assume that the SPC controller PCB is drawing its
maximum load (all wired inputs have their EOL resistors fitted) and that the usable
output power from the battery is 85 % of its maximum capacity.
0.85 x battery size (Ah)
-
(Icont + Ibell)
=
Imax
Time (hours)
Battery size = Capacity, in Ah, depending upon SPC enclosure chosen
Time = backup time, in hours, depending upon Security grade
332
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
Calculating the battery power requirements
23
Icont = Quiescent current (in A) for the SPC controller
Ibell = Quiescent current (in A) for the attached external and internal bells
Imax = the maximum current that can be drawn from the auxiliary power output
Amount of current from Aux output using a 7 Ah battery
(SPC422x/522x)
COMMS
NONE
PSTN
GSM
PSTN+GSM
12 h
356 mA
331 mA
226 mA
201 mA
30 h
58 mA
33 mA
N/A
N/A
Standby time
Amount of current from Aux output using a 17 Ah battery (SPC523x)
COMMS
NONE
PSTN
GSM
PSTN+GSM
12 h
750 mA
750 mA
750 mA
750 mA
30 h
342 mA
317 mA
212 mA
187 mA
Standby time
Amount of current from Aux output using a 7 Ah battery
(SPC432x/532x)
COMMS
NONE
PSTN
GSM
PSTN+GSM
12 h
326 mA
301 mA
196 mA
171 mA
30 h
28 mA
N/A
N/A
N/A
Standby time
Amount of current from Aux output using a 17 Ah battery
(SPC533x/633x)
COMMS
NONE
PSTN
GSM
PSTN+GSM
Standby time
mA
mA
mA
mA
12 h
750
750
750
750
30 h
312
287
182
157
Amount of current from Aux output using a 24 Ah battery
(SPC535x/635x)
COMMS
Standby time
NONE
mA
PSTN
mA
GSM
mA
PSTN+GSM
mA
12 h
1650
1625
1610
1585
24 h
650
625
610
585
30 h
450
425
410
385
60 h
50
25
10
N/A
333
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
Domestic, Commercial and Financial mode default settings
Amount of current from Aux output using two 24 Ah batteries
(SPC535x/635x)
COMMS
NONE
PSTN
GSM
PSTN+GSM
Standby time
mA
mA
mA
mA
12 h
2205
2180
2165
2140
24 h
1650
1625
1610
1585
30 h
1250
1225
1210
1185
60 h
450
425
410
385
Amount of current from Aux output using a 27 Ah battery
(SPC535x/635x)
COMMS
Standby time
NONE
mA
PSTN
mA
GSM
mA
PSTN+GSM
mA
12 h
1900
1875
1860
1835
24 h
775
750
735
710
30 h
550
525
510
485
60 h
100
75
60
35
Amount of current from Aux output using two 27 Ah batteries
(SPC535x/635x)
COMMS
NONE
PSTN
GSM
PSTN+GSM
Standby time
mA
mA
mA
mA
12 h
2205
2180
2165
2140
24 h
1900
1875
1860
1835
30 h
1450
1425
1410
1385
60 h
550
525
510
485
Values listed as N / A indicate that the selected battery does not have the capacity
to power the minimum load of just the SPC controller for the given standby time.
See page [➙ 332] for maximum load of devices and modules.
Only sealed cell valve regulated battery types to be used.
For EN compliance the supplied current needs to be supported by the battery for
required stand by time.
23.5
Domestic, Commercial and Financial mode default
settings
This table gives the default zone name and types on the controller for each mode
of operation. All zones on connected expanders are be categorized as unused until
explicitly configured by the installation engineer.
Feature
Domestic mode
Commercial mode
Financial mode
Zone Names
334
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
Wiring of the X10 interface
Controller - Zone 1
Front door
Front door
Front door
Controller - Zone 2
Sitting room
Window 1
Window 1
Controller - Zone 3
Kitchen
Window 2
Window 2
Controller - Zone 4
Upstairs front
PIR 1
PIR 1
Controller - Zone 5
Upstairs rear
PIR 2
PIR 2
Controller - Zone 6
PIR hallway
Fire exit
Fire exit
Controller - Zone 7
PIR landing
Fire alarm
Fire alarm
Controller - Zone 8
Panic button
Panic button
Panic button
Controller - Zone 1
ENTRY/EXIT
ENTRY/EXIT
ENTRY/EXIT
Controller - Zone 2
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
Controller - Zone 3
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
Controller - Zone 4
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
Controller - Zone 5
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
Controller - Zone 6
ALARM
FIRE EXIT
ALARM
Controller - Zone 7
ALARM
FIRE
ALARM
Controller - Zone 8
PANIC
PANIC
ALARM
23
Zone Types
23.6
Wiring of the X10 interface
4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ45
RJ11
X10 wiring to the controller
23.7
PIN
RJ45
RJ11
TX
8
4
GND
5
1
RX
1
2
SIA Codes
DESCRIPTION
CODE
AC RESTORAL
AR
AC TROUBLE
AT
BURGLARY ALARM
BA
BURGLARY BYPASS
BB
BURGLARY CANCEL
BC
335
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
SIA Codes
DESCRIPTION
CODE
SWINGER TROUBLE
BD
SWINGER TROUBLE RESTORE
BE
BURGLARY TROUBLE RESTORE
BJ
BURGLARY RESTORAL
BR
BURGLARY TROUBLE
BT
BURGLARY UNBYPASS
BU
BURGLARY VERIFIED
BV
BURGLARY TEST
BX
CLOSING DELINQUENT
CD
FORCED CLOSING
CF
CLOSE AREA
CG
FAIL TO CLOSE
CI
EARLY TO CLOSE
CK
CLOSING REPORT
CL
AUTOMATIC CLOSING
CP
REMOTE CLOSING
CQ
CLOSING KEYSWITCH
CS
LATE TO OPEN
CT
ACCESS CLOSED
DC
ACCESS DENIED
DD
DOOR FORCED
DF
ACCESS GRANTED
DG
ACCESS DENIED PASSBACK
DI
DOOR LEFT OPEN
DN
ACCESS OPEN
DO
DOOR RESTORAL
DR
REQUEST TO EXIT
DX
EXIT ALARM
EA
EXPANSION TAMPER RESTORE
EJ
EXPANSION MISSING
EM
EXPANSION MISSING RESTORE
EN
EXPANSION RESTORAL
ER
EXPANSION DEVICE TAMPER
ES
EXPANSION TROUBLE
ET
FIRE ALARM
FA
FIRE BYPASS
FB
FIRE CANCEL
FC
FIRE TROUBLE RESTORE
FJ
FIRE RESTORAL
FR
FIRE TROUBLE
FT
FIRE UNBYPASS
FU
336
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
SIA Codes
DESCRIPTION
CODE
HOLDUP ALARM
HA
HOLDUP BYPASS
HB
HOLDUP TROUBLE RESTORE
HJ
HOLDUP RESTORAL
HR
HOLDUP TROUBLE
HT
HOLDUP UNBYPASS
HU
CONFIRMED HOLDUP
HV
USER CODE TAMPER ¦WEB or ¦XBUS
JA
TIME CHANGED
JT
LOCAL PROGRAMMING
LB
MODEM RESTORAL ¦1 or 2
LR
MODEM TROUBLE ¦1 or 2
LT
LOCAL PROGRAMMING ENDED
LX
MEDICAL ALARM
MA
MEDICAL BYPASS
MB
MEDICAL TROUBLE RESTORE
MJ
MEDICAL RESTORAL
MR
MEDICAL TROUBLE
MT
MEDICAL UNBYPASS
MU
PERIMETER ARMED
NL
NETWORK LINK IP RESTORE
NR
NETWORK LINK GPRS RESTORE
NR
NETWORK LINK IP FAIL
NT
NETWORK LINK GPRS FAIL
NT
AUTOMATIC OPENING
OA
OPEN AREA
OG
EARLY OPEN
OK
OPENING REPORT
OP
OPENING KEYSWITCH
OS
LATE TO CLOSE
OT
REMOTE OPENING
OQ
DISARM FROM ALARM
OR
PANIC ALARM
PA
PANIC BYPASS
PB
PANIC TROUBLE RESTORE
PJ
PANIC RESTORAL
PR
PANIC TROUBLE
PT
PANIC UNBYPASS
PU
RELAY CLOSE
RC
REMOTE RESET
RN
RELAY OPEN
RO
23
337
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
SIA Codes
DESCRIPTION
CODE
AUTOMATIC TEST
RP
POWERUP
RR
REMOTE PROGRAM SUCCESS
RS
DATA LOST
RT
MANUAL TEST
RX
TAMPER
TA
TAMPER BYPASS
TB
TAMPER RESTORAL
TR
TAMPER UNBYPASS
TU
TEST CALL
TX
UNTYPED ALARM
UA
UNTYPED BYPASS
UB
UNTYPED TROUBLE RESTORE
UJ
UNTYPED RESTORAL
UR
UNTYPED TROUBLE
UT
UNTYPED UNBYPASS
UU
BELL FAULT
YA
RF JAM RESTORAL
XH
RF TAMPER RESTORAL
XJ
READER LOCKED
RL
READER UNLOCKED
RG
KEYPAD UNLOCKED
KG
RF JAM FAULT
XQ
RF TAMPER
XS
COMMUNICATION FAIL
YC
CHECKSUM FAULT
YF
BELL RESTORED
YH
COMMUNICATION RESTORAL
YK
BATTERY MISSING
YM
PSU TROUBLE
YP
PSU RESTORAL
YQ
BATTERY RESTORAL
YR
COMMUNICATION TROUBLE
YS
BATTERY TROUBLE
YT
WATCHDOG RESET
YW
SERVICE REQUIRED
YX
SERVICE COMPLETED
YZ
SPECIAL SIA EVENTS
USER DURESS
HA
USER DURESS RESTORE
HR
ENET PANIC ALARM
PA
338
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
SIA Codes
DESCRIPTION
CODE
ENET PANIC RESTORAL
PR
USER PANIC ALARM
PA
ENET FIRE ALARM
FA
ENET FIRE RESTORAL
FR
ENET MEDICAL ALARM
MA
ENET MEDICAL RESTORAL
MR
MDT PANIC
PA
MDT TILT
MA
MDT BELT CLIP
HA
MDT PANIC RESTORE
PR
MDT TILT RESTORE
MR
MDT BELT CLIP RESTORE
HR
RPA PANIC
PA
RPA PANIC RESTORE
PR
RPA HOLDUP
HA
RPA HOLDUP RESTORE
HR
USER CODE CHANGE
JV
23
CODE DELETED
NON-STANDARD SIA CODES FOR ZONE STATE REPORTING
ZONE OPEN
ZO
ZONE CLOSE
ZC
ZONE SHORT
ZX
ZONE DISCON
ZD
ZONE MASKED
ZM
ZONE WALKED
TP
WALKTEST START
ZK
WALKTEST END
TC
ZONE LOW BATT
XT
ZONE LOW BATTERY RESTORAL
XR
OTHER NON-STANDARD SIA CODES
CAMERA ONLINE
CU
CAMERA OFFLINE
CV
ALERT CLOSE
SD
ALERT REOPEN
SO
XBUS ALERT CLOSE
NB
XBUS ALERT REOPEN
NO
UNKNOWN CARD
AU
USER ACCESSING
JP
USER ACCESSING END
ZG
LOW VOLTAGE
XD
LOW VOLTAGE RESTORAL
XG
339
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
CID Codes
23.8
DESCRIPTION
CODE
DEEP CHARGE
XK
LOCKED OUT
WW
CID Codes
CODE
CID EVENT
DESCRIPTION
100
MEDICAL
Medical and man down alarm and restore.
110
FIRE
120
PANIC
121
DURESS
129
CONFIRMED HOLDUP
130
BURGLARY
134
ENTRYEXIT
137
TAMPER
Cabinet and auxiliary tamper fail and restore.
139
VERIFIED
Confirmed alarm.
144
SENSOR TAMPER
Zone tamper fail and restore.
150
NON BURGLARY
300
SYSTEM TROUBLE
PSU fault and restore.
301
AC LOSS
PSU mains fail and restore.
302
BATTERY LOW
305
RESET
System reset.
311
BATTERY FAIL
PSU battery fail and restore.
312
PSU OVERCURRENT
PSU internal, external and auxiliary fuse fail
and restore.
320
SOUNDER
Bell tamper fail and restore.
330
SYSTEM PERIPHERAL
TROUBLE
PSU fault and restore.
333
EXP FAIL
X-Bus cable and node communications fault
and restore.
338
EXP BATT
X-Bus node battery fault and restore.
341
EXP TAMPER
X-Bus tamper and RF antenna tamper alarm
and restore.
342
EXP AC
X-Bus node mains fault and restore.
344
RF JAM
RF jam fault and restore.
351
TELCO 1
Primary modem fault and restore.
352
TELCO 2
Secondary modem fault and restore.
376
HOLDUP TROUBLE
380
SENSOR TROUBLE
401
OPENCLOSE
Unset, post alarm and fullset.
406
ALARM ABORT
Cancel alarm.
451
EARLY OPENCLOSE
See Configuration requirements for PD
6662:2010 conformance [➙ 26]
340
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
23
Overview of keypad types
23.9
452
LATE OPENCLOSE
453
FAIL TO OPEN
Late to unset.
454
FAIL TO CLOSE
Late to set.
456
EVENT PARTSET
Partset A and B.
461
CODETAMPER
User code tamper.
466
SERVICE
Engineer mode enabled and disabled.
570
BYPASS
Zone inhibited and uninhibited, zone isolated
and un-isolated.
601
MANUAL TEST
Modem manual test.
602
AUTO TEST
Modem automatic test.
607
WALK TEST
613
ZONE WALKED
614
FIRE ZONE WALKED
615
PANIC ZONE WALKED
625
TIME RESET
Time set.
Overview of keypad types
Keypad type
Model no.
Basic
Functionality
Proximity
Detection
Audio
Standard Keypad
SPCK420
Keypad with PACE
SPCK421
✓
-
-
✓
✓
-
Comfort Keypad
SPCK620
✓
Comfort Keypad with Audio/CR
SPCK623
✓
✓
✓
341
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
User PIN combinations
Keypad Label SPCK420/421
1 Label on inside of Keypad
2 Pull-down label for providing installer details. Fill in all relevant details when installation is
complete.
23.10
User PIN combinations
The system supports 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 PIN Digits for each user (User or Engineer
PINs). The maximum number of logical combinations/variations for each number of
PIN digits can be found in the table below.
Number of digits
Number of variations
Last valid user codes
4
10,000
9999
5
100,000
99999
6
1,000,000
999999
7
10,000,000
9999999
8
100,000,000
99999999
The maximum number of logical combinations/variations is calculated by:
10 No of digits = Number of variations (including the User or Engineer PIN)
Note: To comply with INCERT approvals, the user’s PIN code must contain more
than 4 digits.
The default Engineer PIN is 1111. See Engineer PINs [➙ 100] for more details.
342
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
Duress PINs
23.11
23
Duress PINs
A user PIN with duress cannot be configured for the last user PIN in an allocation
of PINs for a specific number of PIN digits. Configuring duress with ‘PIN+1’ or
‘PIN+2’ requires either 1 or 2 additional PINs to be available after a specific PIN.
For example, for an allocation of 4 digit PINs, the total number of PINs available is
10,000 (0 – 9999), in this case, if using ‘PIN +1’ duress configuration, the last user
PIN that can be allocated duress is 9998. If ‘PIN+2’ is used then 9997 is the last
user PIN that can be allocated duress.
Also, if the duress feature is enabled then consecutive user codes (i.e. 2906, 2907)
are not permitted, as entering this code from the keypad would activate a user
duress event.
Once the system is configured for PIN +1 or PIN +2 in System Options [➙ 220] and
specific users enabled for duress (see Users [➙ 181]), it must not be changed
unless all the users are deleted and re-allocated user PINs.
23.12
Automatic inhibits
The system supports automatic inhibits in the following instances.
23.12.1
Zones
When the UK & Commercial are selected (see Standards [➙ 232]), the system will
provide DD243 functionality. In this instance the system will inhibit zones under the
following conditions:
 Entry zone will not cause an alarm signal to the central station and cannot be
part of a confirmed alarm and hence will be effectively inhibited as required by
DD243.
 If a single zone is triggered and another zone is not triggered within the
confirmation time (30 min default) but the first zone is still triggered, then the
first zone will be automatically be inhibited and no further alarms will be
triggered from this zone during the set period.
23.12.2
Access PINs
For Grade 2 systems: After 10 unsuccessful attempts with the incorrect PIN, the
keypad or browser will be disabled for 90 s; after a further 10 attempts with the
incorrect PIN, the keypad or browser will be disabled for a further 90 s. Once a
correct PIN has been entered, it will reset the counter back to zero allowing for a
further 10 attempts before disablement.
For Grade 3 systems: After 10 unsuccessful attempts with the incorrect PIN, the
keypad or browser will be disabled for 90 s; after each further attempt with an
incorrect PIN the keypad or browser will be disabled for a further 90 s. Once a
correct PIN has been entered it will reset the counter back to zero allowing for a
further 10 attempts before disablement.
23.12.3
Engineer Access
An Engineer can only access the system if permitted by a ‘Manager’ user type (see
‘Engineer’ attribute in User Rights) and only for a specified time duration (see
‘Engineer Access’ in Timers [➙ 228]).
23.12.4
Keypad User Logoff
If no keys are pressed on a keypad for a specific duration (see ‘Keypad Timeout’ in
Timers [➙ 228]), the user is automatically logged off.
343
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
Wiring of mains cable to the controller
23.13
Wiring of mains cable to the controller
Requirements:
A readily accessible approved disconnect device must be incorporated in the
building installation wiring. This must disconnect both phases at the same time.
Acceptable devices are switches, circuit breakers, or similar devices
 The disconnect device must have at least 3 mm distance between the contacts
 Minimum size conductor used for connecting mains is 1.5 mm square
 The circuit breakers must have a maximum rating of 16 A
The mains cable is secured to the metal V shaped bend in the base plate via a tie
wrap such that the metal bend is between the cable and the tie wrap. Ensure that
the tie wrap is applied to the supplementary insulation of the mains cable i.e. the
outer PVC cable sleeve. The tie wrap must be pulled extremely tightly such that
when the cable is tugged there is no movement in the cable relative to the tie wrap.
The Protective Earthing conductor should be fitted to the terminal block in such a
way that if the mains cable should slip in its anchorage, placing a strain on the
conductors, the Protective Earthing conductor will be the last item to take the
strain.
The mains cable must be an approved type and marked HO5 VV-F or HO5 VVH2F2.
The plastic tie wrap must be flammability rated V-1.
23.14
Maintenance controller
The system should be serviced in accordance with the service schedule that is in
place. The only replaceable parts on the controller are the mains fuse, standby
battery and the time & date battery (PCB mounted).
It is recommended that during a service the following be checked:
 The Event Log to check if any standby battery tests have failed since last
service – if standby battery tests have failed then the standby battery should be
checked.
 The standby battery should be replaced as per the servicing schedule to
ensure that it has sufficient capacity to hold the system up for the time defined
in the system design. The battery should be physically inspected for any
deformation of the casing or any sign of leakage; if any of these conditions
exist the battery should be immediately replaced.
NOTICE
The new battery should be of the same capacity or greater (up to the maximum
the system can accommodate).




If the main fuse blows then the system should be checked for any reasons. The
fuse should be replaced by a fuse with the same rating. The rating is stated on
the system label in the rear of the cabinet.
The time & date onboard PCB lithium battery is only used when the system is
left un-powered; in this state that battery has a life of approximately 5 years.
The battery should be visually checked once a year and all power removed
from the system to ensure that system retains the time & date. If the system
does not retain the time and date the battery should be replaced with a new
Lithium cell type CR1216.
All electrical connections should be checked to ensure that the insulation is in
place and there is no risk of shorting or becoming disconnected.
It is also recommended that any firmware update release notes be checked for
any additional updates that may improve the security of the system.
344
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
Maintenance Smart PSU

23.15
23
Check all physical mountings are intact. Any broken mountings should be
replaced with the same parts.
Maintenance Smart PSU
The system should be serviced in accordance with the service schedule that is in
place. The only replaceable parts on the Smart PSU are the mains fuse and
standby battery.
It is recommended that during a service the following be checked:
 The controller Event Log to check if any standby battery tests have failed since
last service – if standby battery tests have failed then the standby battery
should be checked.
 The standby battery should be replaced as per the servicing schedule to
ensure that it has sufficient capacity to hold the system up for the time defined
in the system design. The battery should be physically inspected for any
deformation of the casing or any sign of leakage; if any of these conditions
exist the battery should be immediately replaced.
NOTICE
The new battery should be of the same capacity or greater (up to the maximum
the system can accommodate).





23.16
Check the LEDs on the PSU control board are in the expected state. See
Smart PSU document for LED details.
If the main fuse blows then the system should be checked for any reasons. The
fuse should be replaced by a fuse with the same rating. The rating is stated on
the system label in the rear of the cabinet.
All electrical connections should be checked to ensure that the insulation is in
place and there is no risk of shorting or becoming disconnected.
It is also recommended that any firmware update release notes be checked for
any additional updates that may improve the security of the system.
Check all physical mountings are intact. Any broken mountings should be
replaced with the same parts.
Zone types
The zone types on the SPC system are programmable from both the browser and
keypad. The table below gives a brief description of each zone type available on
the SPC system. Each zone type activates its own unique output type (an internal
flag or indicator) that can then be logged or assigned to a physical output for
activation of a specific device if required.
Zone Type
Processing Category
Description
ALARM
Intruder
This zone type is the default zone type setting and is also the most
frequently used zone type for standard installations.
An Open, Disconnected, or Tamper activation in any mode (except
unset) causes an immediate full alarm.
In the Unset mode, Tamper conditions are logged, causing the alert
message ZONE TAMPER and triggering a local alarm. In Partset A,
Partset B and Full Set modes, all activity is logged.
ENTRY/EXIT
Intruder
This zone type should be assigned to all zones on an entry/exit route (i.e.
a front door or other access area to the building or premises). This zone
type provides an entry and exit time delay.
The entry timer controls this delay. When the system is being full set, this
zone type provides an exit delay allowing time to vacate an area. The
345
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
Zone types
exit timer controls this delay. In Part set A mode, this zone type is
inactive.
EXIT TERMINATOR
Intruder
This zone type is used in conjunction with a push button on an exit route
and acts as an exit terminator – that is, it provides an infinite exit delay
period and will not allow the system to set until the button is pressed.
FIRE
Hold-up
Fire zones are 24-hour zones for fire monitoring and their response is
independent of panel operating mode. When any fire zone opens, a full
alarm is generated and the FIRE output type is activated. If the ‘Report
only’ attribute is set then activation will only be reported to the central
station and a Full Alarm will not be generated.
FIRE EXIT
Hold-up
This is a special type of 24-hour zone for use with fire exit doors that
should never be opened. In Unset mode, an activation of this zone will
trip the Fire-X output, causing alert messages.
LINE
Fault
Telemetry line monitoring input. This is usually used in conjunction with a
telephone line health output from an external digital dialer or direct line
communication system. When activated, it produces a local alarm in
Unset mode and a full alarm in all other modes.
PANIC ALARM
Hold-up
This zone type is active on a 24-hour basis and activated via a panic
button. When a Panic zone is activated it will report a Panic event,
independent of panel arming mode. All activation’s are logged and
reported if log attribute is active. If the SILENT attribute is set then the
alarm will be silent (Activation is reported to ARC), otherwise it will
generate a Full alarm.
HOLD-UP ALARM
Hold-up
This zone type is active on a 24-hour basis and activated via a button.
When a Hold-up zone is activated it will report a Hold-up event,
independent of panel arming mode. The SILENT attribute is set by
default therefore the alarm will be silent. If unset, it will generate a full
alarm. All activations are logged and reported if log attribute is active.
TAMPER
Tamper
When open in the Unset mode, a Local Alarm is generated but no
external bell will activate. If the system is Full Set, a Full alarm is
generated. If the Security Grade of the system is set to Grade 3 then an
engineer code is required to restore the alarm.
TECHNICAL
Intruder
The tech zone controls a dedicated tech zone output. When a tech zone
changes state, the tech zone output will follow. That is:
 When the tech zone opens, tech zone o/p triggers on
 When the tech zone closes, tech zone o/p goes off
If more than one tech zone has been assigned, the tech zone output will
remain on until all tech zones are closed.
MEDICAL
Hold-up
This zone type is used in conjunction with radio or hardwired medical
switches.
Activation in any mode will:
 Trigger the medical digital communicator output (unless Local
attribute is set)
 Cause the panel buzzer to sound (unless Silent attribute is set)
 Display the message Medic Alarm
KEYARM
Intruder
This zone type is normally used in conjunction with a key lock
mechanism. A Keyarm zone will SET the System / Area / Common
Areas when it is OPENED and will UNSET the System/Area/Common
Areas when it is CLOSED.
 If the zone with the keyarm zone type is assigned in an non area
system then the keyarm operation will SET/UNSET the system.
 If the zone with the keyarm zone type is assigned to an area then
the keyarm operation will SET/UNSET the area.
 If the zone with the keyarm zone type is assigned to a common area
then the keyarm operation will SET/UNSET all the areas in the
common area.
 If the ‘Open only’ attribute is set then the armed status of the System
/ Area / Common Areas will toggle on each opening of the key lock. (
i.e. Open once to SET the system, Close and Open again to
346
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
Zone types
23
UNSET)
If the ‘Fullset Enable’ attribute is set then zone activation will only
Fullset the system.
 If the ‘Unset Enable’ attribute is set then zone activation will only
unset the system.
Keyarming will force set the system/area and auto-inhibit any open
zones or fault conditions.
Note: Your system will not comply with EN standards if you enable this
zone type to set the system without first entering a valid PIN on an
external device.

SHUNT
Intruder
This zone type is only available in Commercial Mode of operation.
Though the Shunt Alarm Zone type can be set in Domestic Mode of
operation, it has no effect.
This zone type when opened inhibits all zones that have the shunt
attribute set. This operation applies for both SET and UNSET modes. As
soon as the shunt zone is closed, the zones with the shunt attribute set
will become un-inhibited again.
X-SHUNT
Intruder
This zone type is only available in Commercial Mode of operation.
A zone programmed with the x-shunt zone type inhibits the next
consecutive zone on the system whenever it is opened. This operation
applies for both SET and UNSET modes. As soon as the x-shunt zone
type is closed the next zone becomes de-inhibited again.
DETECTOR FAULT
Fault
Detector Fault zones are 24 hour zones that are applicable to a detector
device, for example, a PIR. The fault zone type triggers the Fault output.
When the system is armed, a fault output is triggered. Both the keypad
LED and the buzzer are activated when Unarmed.
LOCK
SUPERVISION
Intruder
Only available in Commercial mode.
Used to monitor a door lock. System can be programmed not to set
unless door is locked.
SEISMIC
Intruder
Only available if the panel is in Financial mode of operation. Vibration
sensors, also called seismic sensors, are used to detect intrusion
attempts by mechanical means, such as drilling or making holes through
walls or safes.
ALL OKAY
Intruder
This zone type enables a special entry procedure to be implemented
using a user code and ‘All Okay’ input. A silent alarm is generated if an
All Okay button is not pressed within a configurable time after a user
code is entered. (See Areas [➙ 236] for details of ‘All Okay’
configuration)
All Okay uses two outputs, Entry Status (Green LED) and Warning
Status (Red LED), to indicate entry status using LEDs on the keypad.
UNUSED
Intruder
Allows a zone to be disabled without the need for each zone to have
EOL resistors fitted. Any activation on the zone will be ignored.
HOLDUP FAULT
Fault
Holdup Fault zones are 24 hour zones that are applicable to a holdup
signaling device, for example, a WPA. The fault zone type triggers the
Fault output.
When the system is armed, a fault output is triggered. Both the keypad
LED and the buzzer are activated when Unarmed.
This zone type will report the SIA messages, HT (Holdup Trouble) and
HJ (Holdup Trouble Restore) and for CID, a sensor trouble event (380) is
produced.
WARNING FAULT
Fault
Warning Fault zones are 24 hour zones that are applicable to a warning
signaling device, for example, an internal or external bell. The fault zone
type triggers the Fault output.
When the system is armed, a fault output is triggered. Both the keypad
LED and the buzzer are activated when Unarmed.
This zone type will report the SIA messages, YA (Bell Fault) and YH (Bell
Restore) and for CID, a sensor trouble event (380) is produced.
Note: On a grade 2 system, a cable fault will cause a fault and not an
alarm.
347
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
Zone attributes
SETTING
AUTHORISATION.
Intruder
Applicable to Blockschloss operation. This zone type is used to send a
setting authorisation signal to the panel that the Blockschloss is ready to
set. The Set option must be selected for the ‘Setting Authorisation‘
attribute for the area
LOCK ELEMENT
Intruder
If using a Lock Element (bolt) with a Blockschloss, this zone type signals
the position of the lock element to the panel (locked or unlocked). This
bolt locks the door in the set state. This signal is checked during setting
process. If the ‘locked‘ information is not received, the setting will fail.
GLASSBREAK
Intruder
Zone is connected to an RI S 10 D-RS-LED glassbreak interface in
combination with GB2001 glassbreak detectors.
 This zone type is available on controllers and expanders.
It is not available as wireless or as a door zone type if the DC2 is
configured as a door.
 The zone type reports in the same way as an alarm zone over SIA
and contact ID.
 The rights to restore/inhibit/isolate glassbreak are the same as the
alarm zone type
 Power up condition — As the power is supplied by the panel any
state changes within the first 10 seconds are ignored in order to
allow the device to settle.
 Reset condition — Signals are ignored from the glassbreak interface
for 3 seconds after the device has been reset.
 Exiting engineer mode — The glassbreak output may be toggled
when exiting engineer mode, in which case the signals from this
sensor will be temporarily ignored for 3 seconds.
23.17
Zone attributes
The zone attributes on the SPC system determine the manner in which the
programmed zone types function.
Zone attribute
Description
Access
When the ‘Access’ attribute on a zone is set, then on opening that zone, an
alarm will not be generated if either the entry or exit timer is running. When
the system is full set the Access attribute is not active and opening the zone
will initiate a full alarm. The ‘Access’ attribute is most often used for PIR
sensors located close to an entry/exit zone. It allows the user free movement
within the access area while the entry or exit timer is counting down.
The ‘Access’ attribute is only valid for Alarm zone types.
All connected devices (Bells - Internal & External, Buzzers, Strobe) are
activated.
NOTE: An alarm zone with Access attribute can automatically be changed to
an entry/exit zone in Partset mode if the Partset Access Option is set.
Exclude A
If the ‘Exclude A’ attribute on a zone is set, then an alarm will not be
generated by that zone opening while the panel is in the Partset A mode. The
‘Exclude A’ attribute is valid for Alarm zone type and Entry/Exit zones only.
A FULL alarm is generated if a zone with the EXCLUDE A attribute is opened
while the system is in FULLSET or PARTSET B Mode (Bells - Internal &
External, Strobe).
Exclude B
When the ‘Exclude B’ attribute is set, the zone opening will not generate an
alarm while the panel is in the Partset B mode. The ‘Exclude B’ attribute is
valid for Alarm zone type and E/Exit zones only.
A FULL alarm is generated if a zone with the EXCLUDE B attribute is opened
while the system is in FULLSET or PARTSET A Mode (Bells - Internal &
External, Strobe).
24 Hour
If a Zone is assigned the ‘24 Hour’ attribute, then it is active at all times and
will cause a full alarm if opened in any mode. This attribute can only be
348
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
Zone attributes
23
assigned to the ALARM zone type. Generates a FULL Alarm in UNSET, SET
and PARTSET modes.
NOTE: The 24 Hour attribute overrides the settings of any of the other
attributes for a particular alarm zone.
Local
When the ‘Local’ attribute is set, an alarm generated by a zone opening will
not result in the external reporting of the event. The ‘Local’ attribute is valid for
Alarm, E/Exit, Fire, Fire Exit and Medic zone types.
Unset Local
When this attribute is set, an alarm generated by the zone opening when the
area is fullset or partset will be reported in the usual way. However, if the area
is unset there will be only a local alarm i.e keypad buzzer, LED flash and zone
display. This attribute is only applicable to Alarm, Fire and Seismic zones.
Double Knock
Use this attribute to deal with troublesome detectors. (i.e. some detectors may
generate activation signals spuriously, thereby inadvertently trigger alarms on
the system).
If the same double knock zone activates twice during the double knock
period, then an alarm is generated. Double knock time is set in seconds (see
page [➙ 228]). Two open actions within that time period will generate an
alarm. All open double knock zones are logged when the system is armed.
Chime
When the ‘Chime’ attribute is set for a zone, any opening of the zone during
the Unset mode will cause the internal buzzers to activate for a short period (2
seconds approx.).
The Chime attribute is valid for Alarm, Entry/Exit, and Tech. zones types.
Inhibit
When the ‘Inhibit’ attribute is set, a user may inhibit this zone. The inhibit
operation will disable that fault or zone for one setting period only.
Normal Open
When the ‘Normal Open’ attribute is set, the system expects that a connected
detector/sensor is a Normally Open device. (i.e. a sensor is deemed to be
activated whenever the contacts are closed on the device ).
Silent
If the ‘Silent’ attribute is set then there will be no audio or visual indications of
the Alarm. The alarm activation will be sent to the Receiver station. If the
system is unset then a warning message is shown on the display.
Log
If this attribute is set then all zone state changes are logged.
Exit Open
If set then zone will be indicated if open during setting.
Frequent
This attribute only applies to Remote Maintenance*. If this attribute is set for a
zone, the zone must open for remote service purposes within the defined
frequent time period.
End of Line
The End Of Line (EOL) attribute provides a number of input zone wiring
configurations on the system.
Analysed
The Analysed Attribute must be set for a zone if that zone is wired with an
inertia sensor. The Pulse count and Gross attack values should be
programmed for each inertia sensor on the system in accordance with the
results of a simple calibration of the device.
Pulse Count
Pulse count trigger level for analysed inertia sensors.
Gross Attack
Gross attack trigger level for analysed inertia sensors
Final Exit
The Final Exit attribute can only be assigned to an Entry/Exit Zone type. Use
this attribute to override the standard process of counting down the exit timer
whenever the system is full set. When all other entry/exit routes in the
premises are closed, fullset the system and close the final exit/entry zone. As
soon as the door is closed the Final Exit time will count down to setting the
system.
Shunt
A zone with the shunt attribute set will be inhibited whenever a shunt type
zone is opened. This provides a mechanism to group the inhibition of zones
with the opening of the shunt zone type.
Report Only
This attribute only applies to the FIRE zone type. If this attribute is set, then
activation of the fire zone will only report the activation to the central station.
No alarms will be generated on site.
Open Only
This attribute only applies to the KEYARM zone type. If set then the setting
349
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
Applicable attributes to zone types
state of the building will toggle on openings only.
Fullset Enable
This attribute only applies to the KEYARM zone type. If this attribute is set
then zone activation will Fullset the system/area. Apply this attribute if it is
intended that the user should only have the ability to FULLSET the system
from a keyarm zone.
Unset Enable
This attribute only applies to the KEYARM zone type. If set then zone
activation will Unset the system/area. Apply this attribute if it is intended that
the user should only have the ability to UNSET the system from a keyarm
zone.
Tech Zone Report
Allows a zone when opened, regardless of the mode to send an alarm to the
ARC in FF, CID, SIA and SIA extended. When areas are selected, the alarm
will only be sent to the ARC to which the area has been assigned to. This
would be a “UA” Unknown Alarm followed by the zone number and text if SIA
extended is selected. It will also send an SMS to the end user and engineer if
select to do so when the unconfirmed alarm filter is selected.
Tech Zone Display
Allows an opening zone to be displayed on the system keypad. The alert led
should also activate. When areas are selected it will only be displayed on the
keypad which is assigned to the area in which the zone has been selected.
The alert may only be displayed on the keypad when the area is in the unset
mode and not in the Part A, Part B and set mode.
Tech Zone Audible
Allows an activated zone to operate the buzzer. This will operate the same as
the Tech Zone Display in the different setting modes and on systems with
areas.
Tech Zone Delay
Allows the zone to have a programmable delay. The delay is variable from 0
to 9999 seconds and will apply to all Tech Zones. The operation is the same
as the Mains Delay timer, if the zone is closed within the delay time, then no
alarm is sent to the ARC, no SMS is sent to the user and the Technical
Output will not trip.
NOTE: The Technical Output will not trip until the delay timer has expired.
Armed report only
Openings are reported only in armed mode.
Fire pre-alarm
If enabled and a fire alarm occurs, a Fire Pre-alarm timer is started and
internal bells and buzzers are activated. (See Timers [➙ 228].) If the alarm is
not cancelled within the timer duration, a fire alarm is confirmed, internal and
external bells are triggered and an event is sent to ARC.
Fire Recognition
If enabled, a Fire Recognition timer is activated which adds extra time to the
Fire Pre-alarm timer duration until a file alarm is reported for the zone. See
Timers [➙ 228].
Seismic Test/Automatic Sensor
Test
A Seismic zone type may be tested manually or automatically. This attribute
allows automatic testing to be enabled. Refer to the section on timers [➙ 228]
for details of how to configure the timer that determines how often the panel
tests any seismic zones that have this attribute set. The default value for the
timer is 7 days.
Timed
The ‘Timed’ attribute is used for Key Arm zones to delay the setting of an
area. The delay follows the exit timer for the area to which the key arm is
associated.
Verification
Select the configured verification zone to assign to this zone to trigger
audio/video verification.
Force Set
If enabled, the keyarm device can set the system, automatically inhibiting all
open zones.
23.18
Applicable attributes to zone types
The following table shows which attributes are applicable to each zone type:
350
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
Applicable attributes to zone types
23
Only available in Commercial Mode.
* Only in conjunction with Remote Maintenance.
** Only available in Financial Mode
351
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
ATS levels and attenuation specifications
23.19
ATS levels and attenuation specifications
ATS (Alarm Transmission System) Levels
The following table lists the ATS levels required for the panel when communicating
over:
 GSM to Alarm Reporting Centre (ARC)
 PSTN to Alarm Reporting Centre (ARC)
 Ethernet to SPC Comm receiver software
 GPRS to SPC Comm receiver software
ATS Level
GSM ARC
PSTN ARC
Ethernet
GPRS
ATS 2
ATS 2
ATS 6
ATS 5
Attenuation of PSTN
For a PSTN dialer, a CW1308 Internal Telecom or equivalent cable should be used
to connect the modem to the phone line. The cable length should be between 0.5 –
100m.
Attenuation of Ethernet
For Ethernet, a Cat 5 cable should be used with its length between 0.5 – 100m.
Attenuation of GSM
The field strength of the GSM signal needs to at least -95dB. Below this level the
modem will flag a low signal fault to the panel. This is handled in the same way as
other faults on the system.
Monitoring and watchdog of PSTN (SPCN110) and GSM (SPCN310)
A failure of the interface between the PSTN modem and the panel will be detected
after 30 seconds, after which an ATS fault will occur.
A failure of the interface between the GSM modem and the panel will be detected
after 30 seconds, after which an ATS fault will occur.
23.20
Supported card readers and card formats
The following card readers and formats are supported on the SPC system:
Reader
Card Format
HD500-EM
PR500-EM
SP500-EM
PM500-EM
IB41-EM
IB42-EM
IB44-EM
IB45-EM
ABR5100-BL
ABR5100-TG
ABR5100-PR
AR6181-RX
AR6182-RX
IB41-EM
IB42-EM
IB44-EM
IB45-EM
ABR5100-BL
ABR5100-TG
352
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
Supported card readers and card formats
Reader
23
Card Format
ABR5100-PR
HD500-Cotag
PR500-Cotag
SP500-Cotag
PM500-Cotag
HF500-Cotag
IB928
IB911
IB968
IB961
IB958M
PP500-Cotag
IB928
IB911
IB968
IB961
IB958M
PP500-EM
IB41-EM
IB42-EM
IB44-EM
IB45-EM
ABR5100-BL
ABR5100-TG
ABR5100-PR
AR6181-MX
AR6182-MX
ABP5100-BL Mifare Classic 1K
ABR5100-PR Mifare Classic 4K
iClass R10
iClass R15
iClass R30
iClass R40
iClassRK40
ABP5100-BL
Default 32 bit MiFare Only
MultiClass RP40
MultiClass RP15
MultiClass RPK40
ABP5100-BL
Default 32 bit MiFare Only
IB41-EM
IB42-EM
IB44-EM
IB45-EM ABR5100-BL ABR5100-TG
ABR5100-PR
HID Prox Pro
26 bit Wiegand
EPX 36 bit Wiegand
Site codes and restrictions
Reader Format
Side Code
Available
Restrictions
EM4102
No
Max card no. 9999999999
COTAG
No
Max card no. 9999999999
Wiegand 26 bit
Yes
Max site code. 255
Max card no. 65535
Wiegand 36 bit
Yes
Max site code.. 32767
Max card no. 524287
HID Corporate 1000
Yes
Max site code.. 4095
Max card no.. 1048575
353
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
SPC Support for E-Bus Devices
23.21
Reader Format
Side Code
Available
Restrictions
HID 37
No
Max card no. 34359738370
HID 37F
Yes
Max site code. 65535
Max card no. 5242875
HID 37BCD
No
Max card no. 99999999
HID ICLASS MIFARE
No
Max card no. 4294967295
HID ICLASS DESFIRE
No
Encrypted card number.
Max card no. 72 x 1016. This number
must be learned on the panel
AR618 WIE BCD 52 BIT
No
Max card no. 4294967295
AR618 OMRON 80 BIT
No
Max card no. 9999999999999
SPC Support for E-Bus Devices
The SPC E-Bus Gateway (SPCG310) is an X-Bus expander that enables
communication between an SPC controller and Sintony E-Bus devices. Sintony EBUS addressing permits duplicate addresses for E-Bus devices across different EBUS sections. X-Bus devices require unique addresses. To support this conflict, EBUS peripheral readdressing may be required. For more information, see
ADDRESSING MODE [➙ 126].
NOTICE
Vanderbilt recommends you read the Sintony System Migration document before
configuring E-Bus devices.
23.21.1
Configuring and Addressing E-Bus Devices
You can configure and address the following Sintony E-Bus devices to
communicate with the SPC controller:
 Sintony keypads
 Sintony input transponders
 Sintony output transponders
 Sintony PSUs: SAP 8, SAP 14, SAP 20, and SAP 25
1. In the browser, go to Settings - X-BUS - Expanders.
 A list of Configured Expanders displays.
2. Select an SPC E-Bus Gateway.
3. In the Expander Configuration screen, enter a Description for the SPC E-Bus
Gateway. For more information on configuring expanders, see Expanders
[➙ 202].
354
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
SPC Support for E-Bus Devices
23
4. To address an E-Bus device, select an ID from the relevant dropdown menu
described in the table below. An asterisk (*) prefixes an ID that is in use. You
cannot select this ID.
5. Click the Select button.
 Address in progress.....Reconfiguration of Xbus will be
required displays at the top of the screen.
 The SPC E-Bus Gateway beeps repeatedly.
6. Depending on the E-Bus device, hold the addressing button as described in the
Addressing column in the table below.
 The SPC E-Bus Gateway beeps continuously to indicate the ID is now
associated with the E-Bus device.
7. Go to Settings - X-BUS - Expanders.
8. Click the Reconfigure button.
 Reconfiguration completed displays at the top of the screen. E-Bus
inputs and outputs display in the list of Configured Expanders. If an input
transponder has an associated PSU, the PSU type displays in the PSU
column. Keypads display in the list of Configured Keypads.
9. To complete the manual addressing steps to add the SAP 8, SAP 14, and SAP
20 PSU devices to the list of Configured Expanders, see Addressing
Transponders for SAP 8, SAP 14, and SAP 20 [➙ 356].
10. If the X-BUS has addressing conflicts, the warning Invalid or Duplicate
ID for Expander IDx displays. Repeat the addressing steps above until
there is no addressing conflict.
E-Bus Device:
Dropdown
Menu
Description
ID Format
Addressing
Keypad
IDs to assign to Sintony
keypads
E-BUS ID (X-BUS ID)
Hold keys 1 and 3
simultaneously until
the SPC E-Bus
Gateway beeps
continuously.
Input
IDs to assign to Sintony
input transponders
E-BUS ID (X-BUS ID)
Hold the addressing
button for 5 seconds
and release to hear a
continuous beep.
Output
IDs to assign to Sintony
output transponders
E-BUS ID (X-BUS ID)
Hold the addressing
button for 5 seconds
355
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
SPC Support for E-Bus Devices
and release to hear
the SPC E-Bus
Gateway beeps
continuously.
PSU
IDs to assign to Sintony
PSU devices SAP 8, SAP
14, SAP 20, and SAP 25
E-BUS ID (X-BUS ID of
associated transponder)
Hold the addressing
button until the SPC
E-Bus Gateway
beeps continuously..
See also
 ADDRESSING MODE [➙ 126]
23.21.1.1
Addressing Transponders for SAP 8, SAP 14, and SAP 20
After assigning a PSU ID to an SAP 8, SAP 14, or SAP 20, see Configuring and
Addressing E-Bus Devices [➙ 354], you must assign an input transponder to the
PSU. This simulates communication to the SPC controller via an expander.
1. In the Configured Expanders list, select the SPC E-Bus Gateway.
 The Expander Configuration screen displays.
2. From the dropdown list, view the newly assigned PSU ID.
 An exclamation mark (!) prefixes the PSU ID you assigned to the device.
This indicates that there is an input transponder available to assign to the
PSU.
3. Take a note of the number in brackets next to the PSU ID. This number is the
ID you must assign to the input transponder. For example, if the PSU ID is ID
14 (27), you must manually select a transponder with ID 27 from the Input
dropdown list.
4. From the Input dropdown list, select the transponder ID indicated in brackets
next to the PSU ID.
5. Click the Select button.
6. Go to Settings - X-BUS - Expanders.
7. Click Reconfigure.
 The PSU device displays in the list of Configured Expanders.
23.21.1.2
Addressing Transponders for PSU SAP 25
The Sintony PSU SAP 25 has two internal transponders. Each transponder
requires an ID. These two IDs are assigned automatically when you complete the
addressing steps described in Configuring and Addressing E-Bus Devices [➙ 354].
The formula 2n - 1 applies where n is the value of the PSU ID. For example, if
you assign ID 10 to an SAP 25, each transponder will be assigned the X-BUS IDs
19 and 20.
NOTICE
In the PSU dropdown list, a hash (#) symbol prefixes an SAP 25 ID to indicate
that the automatic addressing of transponders will conflict with existing input
transponders. To resolve this conflict, you must readdress one of the conflicting
devices.
356
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
FlexC Glossary
23.22
23
FlexC Glossary
Acronym
EN50136-1 Description
FlexC Example
AE
Annunciation Equipment
SPC Com XT Client
Equipment located at an ARC
which secures and displays the
alarm status, or the changed
alarm status of ASs in response
to the receipt of incoming alarms
before sending a confirmation.
The AE is not part of the ATS.
ARC
Alarm Receiving Centre
AS
Alarm System
Electrical installation, which
responds to the manual or
automatic detection of the
presence of a hazard. The AS is
not part of the ATS.
SPC Panel
ATE
Alarm Transmission Equipment
-
SPC Com XT would be installed
Continuously manned centre to in an ARC.
which information concerning the
status of one or more AS is
reported.
Collective term to describe SPT,
MCT (Monitoring Centre
Transceiver) and RCT.
ATP
Alarm Transmission Path
Route an alarm message travels
between an individual AS and its
associated AE.
The ATP starts at the interface
between AS and SPT and ends
at the interface between RCT
and AE. For notification and
surveillance purposes the
reverse direction may also be
used.
A defined path between the SPC
panel and SPC Com XT. e.g. A
system with ethernet as the
primary path and GPRS as a
backup path would be two
separate ATPs of an ATS.
ATS
Alarm Transmission System
RCT
Receiving Centre Transceiver
SPC Com XT Server
ATE at the ARC including the
interface to one or more AE(s)
and the interface to one or more
transmission networks and being
part of one or more ATPs. In
some systems this transceiver
may be able to indicate changes
of the status of an AS and to
store log-files. This may be
needed to increase the ATS
availability in case of AE failure.
SPT
Supervised Premises
Integrated onto SPC Panel using
Transceiver
Ethernet, GPRS, PPP over
ATE at the supervised premises PSTN.
including the interface to the AS
and the interface to one or more
transmission networks and being
A system combining one or
multiple paths between SPC
ATE and networks used to
panel and SPC Com XT.
transfer information concerned
with the state of one or more
ASs at a supervised premises to
one or more AEs of one or more
ARCs. An ATS may consist of
more than one ATP.
357
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
FlexC Commands
part of one or more ATPs.
FlexC also uses the following acronyms.
23.23
Acronym
Description
ASP
Analogue Security Protocols
The analogue security protocols traditionally
used for alarm transmission over the
telephone network e.g. SIA, Contact ID.
FlexC Commands
The following table lists the commands that you can enable for a command profile.
The command profile you assign to an ATS defines how you can control a panel
from SPC Com XT.
Command Filter
Commands
System Commands
Get Panel Summary
Set the System Time and Date
Grant Engineer Access
Grant Manufacturing Access
Intruder Commands
Get the Area Status
Get the Change Mode Status of an Area
Change the mode (Set/Unset) of an Area
Get Status of Panel Alerts
Perform actions on Alerts
Silence Bells
Get Zone Status
Control a Zone
Get the System Log
Get the Log for a Zone
Get the Wireless Log
Output Commands
Get Mapping Gate Status
Control Mapping Gates
User Commands
Verify a User on the Panel
Get a User Configuration
Add a User
Edit a User
Delete a User
Get a User Profile Configuration
Add a User Profile
Edit a User Profile
Delete a User Profile
Change a User's own PIN
Calendar Commands
Read Calendar Configuration
Add a Calendar
Edit a Calendar
Edit a Calendar Week
358
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
FlexC Commands
23
Delete a Calendar
Add a Calendar Exception Day
Edit a Calendar Exception Day
Delete a Calendar Exception Day
Communication Commands
Get the status of the Ethernet
Get the status of a modem
Get the log for a modem
Get the log for a ARC receiver
FlexC Commands
Get the status of a FlexC ATS
Get the Network Log for a FlexC ATS
Get the Event Log for a FlexC ATS
Get the log for a FlexC ATP
Get the Network log for a FlexC ATP
Export a FlexC ATS configuration file
Import a FlexC ATS configuration file
Delete a FlexC ATS
Delete a FlexC ATP
Delete a FlexC Event Profile
Delete a FlexC Command Profile
Request a testcall for a FlexC ATP
Access Control Commands
Get the Configuration for a Door
Read the Status for a Door
Control a Door
Get the Access Log
Verification Commands
Read a Camera Image
Get the Status of a Verification Zone
Get the data for a Verification Zone
Send data to a Verification Zone
Virtual Keypad Commands
Control keypad
File Commands
Upgrade the Panel Firmware
Upgrade Peripheral Firmware
Upload a File
Download a File
Saves the Panel Configuration
Reset the Panel
Legacy Commands
Get Panel Info
Get Panel Status
Get Headers of Configuration Files
Get Language Configuration
Get Intruder Configuration
Get Status of X-BUS Devices
Get the Area Configuration
359
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
ATS Category Timings
23.24
ATS Category Timings
This table describes the EN50136-1 ATS Category Timings laid down in the
standard and how the FlexC implementation meets these standards under the
categories SP1-SP6, DP1-DP4.
EN50136-1 ATS Category Timing
Requirements
ATS
Default Event Primar Backup
Catego Interfac Timeo y
ATP
ry
es
ut
Polling Polling
Timeo Timeout
ut
(Primary
OK)
FlexC Implementation of ATS
Category Timing Requirements
Backup Event
ATP
Timeo
Polling
ut
Timeout
(Primary
Down)
Primar
y
Polling
Timeo
ut
Backup
ATP
Polling
Timeout
(Primary
OK)
Backup
ATP
Polling
Timeout
(Primary
Down)
SP1
Cat 1
[Ethern
et]
8 min
32
days
-
-
2 min
30
days
-
-
SP2
Cat 2
[Ethern
et]
2 min
25 hr
-
-
2 min
24 hr
-
-
SP3
Cat 3
[Ethern
et]
60 s
30 min
-
-
60 s
30 min
-
-
SP4
Cat 4
[Ethern
et]
60 s
3 min
-
-
60 s
3 min
-
-
SP5
Cat 5
[Ethern
et]
30 s
90 s
-
-
30 s
90 s
-
-
SP6
Cat 6
[Ethern
et]
30 s
20 s
-
-
30 s
20 s
-
-
DP1
Cat 2
2 min
[Ethern
et]
Cat 2
[Modem
]
25 hr
50 hr
25 hr
2 min
24 hr
DP2
Cat 3
[Ethern
et]
Cat 3
[Modem
]
60 s
30 min
25 hr
30 min
60 s
30 min 24 hr 30
min
30 min
DP3
Cat 4
[Ethern
et]
Cat 4
[Modem
]
60 s
3 min
25 hr
3 min
60 s
3 min
3 min
DP4
Cat 5
30 s
[Ethern
et]
Cat 5
[Modem
]
90 s
5 hr
90 s
30 s
90 s
24 hr 30 24 hr 10
min
min
24 hr 30
min
4 hr 10
min
90 s
360
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
23
ATP Category Timings
23.25
ATP Category Timings
The following table shows the settings applied for event timeouts, polling intervals
(active and non-active) and polling timeouts (active and non-active) for each ATP
category. For the purpose of ethernet, polling interval and retry interval are
identical. To reduce costs related to GPRS calls, the interval and retry interval for
GPRS paths differ, for example, Cat 3 [Modem] polls once every 25 minutes and
thereafter it polls every 60s for 5 minutes until it times out after 30 minutes. For a
visual overview of the configured polling interval, go to Status - FlexC - Network
Log.
If an ATP is up and active and then goes down, it will remain on active polling
rates for two more polling cycles before converting to the ATP Down polling
intervals.
Ethernet ATP
Categories
Polling when ATP Active
Polling when ATP Nonactive
Polling when
ATP Down
ATP
Event
Polling Retry Polling Polling Retry Polling Pollin Timeo
Category Timeou Interval Interva Timeout Interval Interva Timeout
g
ut
t
l
l
Interv
al
Cat 6
30 s
[Ethernet]
8s
30 s
20s
8s
30 s
20 s
30 s
30 s
Cat 5
30 s
[Ethernet]
10s
30 s
90s
10s
30 s
90 s
30 s
30 s
Cat 4
60 s
[Ethernet]
30 s
30 s
3 min
30 s
30 s
3 min
30 s
30 s
Cat 3
60 s
[Ethernet]
60 s
60 s
30 min
60 s
60 s
30 min
60 s
30 s
Cat 2A
2 min
[Ethernet]
2 min
2 min
4 hr
2 min
2 min
4 hr
2 min
30 s
Cat 2
2 min
[Ethernet]
2 min
2 min
24 hr
2 min
2 min
24 hr
2 min
30 s
Cat 1
2 min
[Ethernet]
2 min
2 min
30 days 2 min
2 min
30 days 2 min
30 s
Modem ATP Categories
Cat 5
[Modem]
30 s
10 s
30 s
90 s
4 hr
2 min
4hr 10
min
10
min
90 s
Cat 4A
[Modem]
60 s
60 s
60 s
3 min
4 hr
2 min
4hr
10min
30
min
90 s
Cat 4
[Modem]
60 s
60 s
60 s
3 min
24 hr
2 min
24 hr 30 1 hr
min
90 s
Cat 3
[Modem]
60 s
25 min
60 s
30 min
24 hr
2 min
24 hr 30 4 hr
min
90 s
Cat 2A
[Modem]
2 min
4 hr
2 min
4hr
10min
24 hr
2 min
24 hr 30 4 hr
min
90 s
Cat 2
[Modem]
2 min
24 hr
2 min
24hr
10min
24 hr
2 min
24 hr 30 24 hr
min
90 s
Cat 1
[Modem]
2 min
24 hr
10 min 25 hr
30
days
10 min 30 days 7
1 hr
days
90 s
361
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
ATP Category Timings
362
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
ATP Category Timings
23
363
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
23
Appendix
ATP Category Timings
364
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Appendix
ATP Category Timings
23
365
Vanderbilt
Installation & Configuration Manual
A6V10276959
01.10.2015
Issued by
Vanderbilt
© Vanderbilt, 2015
Technical specifications and availability subject to change without notice.
Clonshaugh Business and Technology Park
Clonshaugh
Dublin
D17 KV84
www.service.vanderbiltindustries.com
Document ID
A6V10276959
Edition
01.10.2015